APRIL 2025 LAUNCH EDITION

LEED v5 REFERENCE GUIDE

INTERIOR
DESIGN AND
CONSTRUCTION
COPYRIGHT
Copyright © 2025 by the U.S. Green Building Council. All rights reserved.

The U.S. Green Building Council, Inc. (USGBC) devoted significant time and resources to creating this LEED v5
Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition. USGBC authorizes individual use
of the Reference Guide. In exchange for this authorization, the user agrees: to retain all copyright and other
proprietary notices contained in the Reference Guide; not to sell or modify the Reference Guide; and not to
reproduce, display, or distribute the Reference Guide in any way for any public or commercial purpose, including
display on a website or in a networked environment.

Unauthorized use of the Reference Guide violates copyright, trademark, and other laws and is prohibited.

USGBC reproduces the text of the federal and state codes, regulations, voluntary standards, etc., in the Reference
Guide under license or, in some instances, in the public domain. USGBC owns all other text, graphics, layout, and
other elements of content in the Reference Guide and are protected by copyright under both U.S. and foreign laws.

NOTE: Redistributing the Reference Guide on the internet or through other digital means is STRICTLY prohibited,
even if offered free of charge.

THE USER MAY NOT COPY OR DISTRIBUTE DOWNLOADS OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE. THE USER OF THE
REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT ALTER, REDISTRIBUTE, UPLOAD, OR PUBLISH THIS REFERENCE GUIDE IN
WHOLE OR IN PART, AND HAS NO RIGHT TO LEND OR SELL THE DOWNLOAD OR COPIES OF THE
DOWNLOAD TO OTHER PERSONS.

DISCLAIMER
None of the parties involved in the funding or creation of the Reference Guide, including USGBC, its members, its
contractors, or the U.S. government, assume any liability or responsibility to the user or any third parties for the
accuracy, completeness, or use of or reliance on any information contained in the Reference Guide, or for any
injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) arising from such use or reliance.

Although we believe the information in the Reference Guide is reliable and accurate, we provide all materials within it
without warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, warranties of the accuracy or
completeness of information in the training or the suitability of the information for any particular purpose.

As a condition of use, the user covenants not to sue and agrees to waive and release the U.S. Green Building
Council, its members, its contractors, and affiliated organizations from any and all claims, demands, and causes of
action for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) that the user may now or
hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as a result of the use of, or reliance on, the Reference Guide.

U.S. Green Building Council

2101 L Street, NW, Suite 600
Washington, DC 20037

TRADEMARK
LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council.
LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction
April 2025 Edition
ISBN 979-8-99251-10-1-7

i
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The development of LEED v5 has been made possible through the efforts of many dedicated volunteers, staff
members, and others in the USGBC community. Collaborative and consensus-based development is a critical aspect
of LEED, and our members are central to the success of our mission at all scales of involvement ranging from
visioning to development to implementation. We are deeply grateful to these dedicated individuals whose
contributions played a pivotal role in reaching this milestone release.

The LEED v5 rating systems were developed by the USGBC volunteer community and formally ratified by our
broader membership. The reference guide suite is the product of the dedicated efforts of USGBC and Green
Business Certification Inc. (GBCI) staff and consultants, designed to support the industry’s understanding and
implementation of the rating systems.

LEED COMMITTEE MEMBERS

Chairs listed in bold.

LEED Steering Committee LEED Technical Committee

Barry Abramson Barry Abramson Peter Stair
Fernando Arias Michele Adams Nate Steeber
Eden Brukman Jamy Bacchus Lisa Storer
Stewart Comstock Patrick Boyle Sarah Talkington
Lance Davis Sandra Brock Raja Tannous
Sarah Enaharo Yichao Chen Ted Tiffany
Emily English Priscilla Chew Kapil Upadhyaya
Brian Gilligan Penny Cole Stefanie Young
Tony Goodman Greg Collins
Sarah Gudeman Marc Coudert LEED Advisory Committee (LAC)
Josh Jacobs Michael Cudahy Keith Amann
Adam Jennings Amornrut Detudomsap Michael Arny
Emma Jones Isabela Dib Heidimarie Bonilla de Cienfuegos
Michael Karasoulas Emily English Candice Bullard
Ibrahim Kronfol Ken Filarski Sue Clark
Kavita Kumari Andrea Fornasiero Lance Davis
Anica Landreneau Gwen Fuertes Peter Doo
Patty Lloyd Cristine Gibney Crissy Haley
Esteban Martinez Tony Goodman Daniel Huard
Lena Ohta Sarah Gudeman Jonathan Flaherty
Robert Pickering Josh Hatch Miranda Gardiner
Rock Ridolfi Carrie Havey Candice Goldsmith
Jesse Rosenbluth Julie Hendricks Ana Lucia Granda
Benjamin Roush Tia Heneghan Sara Greenwood
Lourdes Salinas Kavita Karmarkar Geoff Hurst
Jennifer Sanguinetti Dirk Kestner Blake Jackson
Chris Schaffner Ibrahim Kronfol Cara Kennedy
Shana Scheiber Patty Lloyd Melanie Larkins
Tim Smith Dirk Mason Anica Landreneau
Allison Smith Doug Mazeffa Theresa Lehman
Adam Stoker Anna McWilliams Pamela Lippe
Lisa Storer Benjamin Meyer Sarah Michelman
Brittany Storm Rachel Nicely Gautami Palanki
Sarah Talkington Lena Ohta Jonathan Rowe
Matt Van Duinen William Paddock Alicia Silva
Kristen Walson Greg Patton Rebecca Stafford
Erica Weeks Louisa Rettew Melissa Targett
Jennifer Wolf Rock Ridolfi Cesar Ulises Trevino
Stefanie Young Neil Rosen
Jesse Rosenbluth
Jennifer Sheffield
Allison Smith
Tim Smith
Marilyn Specht
Raphael Sperry

ii
CONSENSUS COMMITTEES
Chairs listed in bold.

Design and Construction Existing Buildings

Rachel Berkin Barry Abramson
Amy Costello Stephen Ashkin
Jennifer Emrick Michaela Boren
Marsha Gentile Cristine Gibney
Geoff Hurst Emma Jones
Lindsey Landwehr-Fasules Rishabh Kasliwal
Patty Lloyd Cara Kennedy
Grace Manuel Jim Landau
Eliza Mauro Gianluca Padula
Bradley Nies Cecil Scheib
Maria Perez Alicia Silva
Angi Rivera Dean Stanberry
Stacy Simpson Stephen Ward
Rebecca Stafford
Adam Stoker
Melissa Targett
Megan White

TECHNICAL ADVISORY GROUPS

Chairs listed in bold.

Location and Planning Sustainable Sites Water Efficiency

Neil Angus Michele Adams Michele Adams
Jaquelin Camp Heidemarie Bonilla de Patrick Boyle
Eugene Chao Cienfuegos Randi Bromm
Anne Chen Sandra Brock Daryn Cline
Lizao Chen Gabriela Canamar Clark Michael Cudahy
Chaise Cope Jeremy Caron Eric Culter
Christopher Davis Chantal Carius Larry Eichel
Juliette Desfeux Stewart Comstock Ana Lucia Granda
Peter Doo Tara Dougherty Lingyan Gorsuch
Bill Eger Robert Goo Adriana Hansen
Kenneth J. Filarski Elena Goldstein Lake David Holtzclaw
Jason Hercules Kristen Gros Daniel Huard
John Hersey Anshul Gujarathi Hemsa Ibrahim
Emre Ilicali Laura Hansplant Susan Kapetanovic-Marr
Tony Goodman Caroline Havey Prem Kumar Solaisamy
Shea Jameel Julie Hendricks Rajesh Kunnath
Beth Jamieson Liana Kallivoka Ibrahim Kronfol
Susan Kapetanovic-Marr Michael Karasoulas Rachel Nicely
Lindsey Kindrat Maria Matamoros Taylor Nokohoudian
Michael Kloha Rachel Nicely Pedro Paredes
Todd Litman Signe Nielsen Robert Pickering
Jennifer Love Ginevra Perelli Rock Ridolfi
Megan Saunders Regina Philson Erin Rowe
Ryan Schwabenbauer Carl Reimer Hrushikesh Sandhe
Beth Shuck Jesse Rosenbluth Carmen Spagnoli
Tim Smith Lila Saari Nathan Steeber
Marilyn Specht Richard Waite Eleni Stefania Kalapoda
Peter Stair Jennifer Wolf Joel Stout
Lisa Storer Lisa Storer Aizhan Ussenaliyeva
Amruta Sudhalkar Erica Weeks
Megan Susman Amanda Von Almen
Kath Williams

iii
 Amy Costello Existing Buildings
Jennifer Emrick Barry Abramson
Marsha Gentile Stephen Ashkin
Geoff Hurst Michaela Boren
Lindsey Landwehr-Fasules Cristine Gibney
Patty Lloyd Emma Jones
Grace Manuel Rishabh Kasliwal
Eliza Mauro Cara Kennedy
Bradley Nies Jim Landau
Maria Perez Gianluca Padula
Angi Rivera Cecil Scheib
Stacy Simpson Alicia Silva
Rebecca Stafford Dean Stanberry
Adam Stoker Stephen Ward
Melissa Targett
Megan White

TECHNICAL ADVISORY GROUPS

Chairs listed in bold.

Location and Planning Sustainable Sites Water Efficiency

Neil Angus Michele Adams Michele Adams
Jaquelin Camp Heidemarie Bonilla de Randi Bromm
Eugene Chao Cienfuegos Patrick Boyle
Anne Chen Sandra Brock Daryn Cline
Lizao Chen Gabriela Canamar Clark Michael Cudahy
Chaise Cope Chantal Carius Eric Culter
Christopher Davis Jeremy Caron Larry Eichel
Juliette Desfeux Stewart Comstock Lingyan Gorsuch
Peter Doo Tara Dougherty Ana Lucia Granda
Bill Eger Elena Goldstein Lake Adriana Hansen
Kenneth J. Filarski Robert Goo David Holtzclaw
Tony Goodman Kristen Gros Daniel Huard
Jason Hercules Anshul Gujarathi Hemsa Ibrahim
John Hersey Laura Hansplant Eleni Stefania Kalapoda
Emre Ilicali Caroline Havey Susan Kapetanovic-Marr
Shea Jameel Julie Hendricks Ibrahim Kronfol
Beth Jamieson Liana Kallivoka Rajesh Kunnath
Susan Kapetanovic-Marr Michael Karasoulas Rachel Nicely
Lindsey Kindrat Maria Matamoros Taylor Nokohoudian
Michael Kloha Rachel Nicely Pedro Paredes
Todd Litman Signe Nielsen Robert Pickering
Jennifer Love Ginevra Perelli Rock Ridolfi
Megan Saunders Regina Philson Erin Rowe
Ryan Schwabenbauer Carl Reimer Hrushikesh Sandhe
Beth Shuck Jesse Rosenbluth Prem Kumar Solaisamy
Tim Smith Lila Saari Carmen Spagnoli
Marilyn Specht Lisa Storer Nathan Steeber
Peter Stair Richard Waite Joel Stout
Lisa Storer Jennifer Wolf Aizhan Ussenaliyeva
Amruta Sudhalkar Amanda Von Almen
Megan Susman Erica Weeks
Kath Williams
Energy and Atmosphere Materials and Resources Indoor Environmental Quality
Barry Abramson Denise Braun Andrea Anderson
Jamy Bacchus Torey Brooks Steve Ashkin
Aaron Binkley Eden Brukman Penny Cole
Bonnie Brook Carrie Claytor Casey Cullen-Woods
Victor Catrib Eric Doyle Danai Frantzi-Gounari
Greg Collins Annalise Dum Dwayne Fuhlhage
Devanshi Dadia Emily English Brian Gilligan
Vinay Ghatti Efrie Escott Marcelo Gregório
Joshua Hatch Kristen Fritsch Sarah Gudeman
Brad Hill Jeff Frost Elliott Horner
Daniel Huard Brock Hill Valerie Johnston
Adam Jennings Colley Hodges Viken Koukounian
Jeffrey Landreth Hoda Ibrahim Grace Kwok
Christina LaPerle Kavita Karmarkar Jared Landsman
Luis Lara Dirk Kestner Colleen Large
Robert Maddox Alison Kinn Bennett Melanie Larkins
Joel McKellar Colleen Large Scott Laughlin
Steve Olson Susanne LeBlanc Michael Lehman
Amy Pastor Meghan Lewis Wenting Li
Alexander Pennock Patricia Lloyd Jeevan Mohan
Anisur Rahman Kimberly Loscher Amir Nezamdoost
Louisa Rettew Brad McAllister Lena Ohta
Danna Richey Sarah Michelman Angelica Ospina Alvarado
Kyleen Rockwell William Paddock Gregory Patton
Roberto Rodriguez Lona Rerick Neil Rosen
Phoebe Romero Kelly Roberts Shana Scheiber
Benjamin Roush Allison Smith Lourdes Salinas
Christopher Schaffner Lauren Sparandara Alan Scott
Rohini Srivastava Brittany Storm John Sebroski
Su-Fern Tan Anish Tilak Muhammad Shoaib
Amir Tarazy Tolga Tutar Marilyn Specht
Ted Tiffany Ramie Vagal Stephanie Taylor
Michael Tillou Matt Van Duinen Raja Tannous
Paul Totten Ray Wallin Stephanie Taylor
Elena Verani Dennis Wilson
Stevan Vinci
Kristen Walson
Stefanie Young

v
WORKING GROUPS
Chairs listed in bold.

Equity Resilience
Patricia Christianson Mara Baum
Simon Fowell Dan Burgoyne
Jared Gilbert Keaghan Caldwell
Katherine Han Cheney Chen
Jeff Heitert Sarah Colasurdo
Naim Jabbour Ana Cunha Cribellier
Leslie Louie Jessica Diaz Avelar
Laura Medina Emma Hughes
Ganesh Nayak Ann Kosmal
Saahiti Penigalapati Lindsey Machamer
Tyra Redus Gail Napell
Humberto Restrepo Mark Nelson
April Ricketts Gautami Palanki
Nora Rizzo D.J. Rasmussen
Anuya Sant Jennifer Sanguinetti
Jasmine Sears Alan Scott
Charu Singh Monika Serrano
Heidi Valdez Vélez Joy Sinderbrand

vi
IN REMEMBRANCE
The USGBC community lost two volunteers in 2024. We honor their memory and dedication to creating a more
sustainable world through green building.

Ganesh Nayak
USGBC volunteer from 2023–2024

As the chair of our Equity Working Group at the USGBC, Ganesh was a long-standing leader, mentor, and champion
of sustainable and inclusive design. His dedication to LEED certification and sustainable architecture transformed
over four million square feet of space, leaving a lasting legacy of environmental stewardship.

Stewart Comstock
USGBC volunteer from 2020–2024

Stewart donated his time as the vice chair of the Sustainable Sites Technical Advisory Group, bringing decades of
deep expertise in stormwater management to our work. His influence helped shape some of the most critical aspects
of LEED as it evolved over the years. Stewart helped lay the foundation on which many of today’s green
infrastructure principles and best practices are built.

ADDITIONAL THANKS
A special thanks to USGBC and GBCI staff for their invaluable efforts in developing this reference guide: Abby
Campillo, Marc Cohen, Melissa Cox, Christine Davis, Corey Enck, Karema Enos, Sara Fritz, Nagesh Gupta, Sourabh
Gupta, Gail Hampshire, Kristen Hartel, Selina Holmes, Kavita Jain, Larkin Johnson, Lani Kalemba, Laurie Kerr,
Mikaela Kieffer, Ian LaHiff, John Law, Larissa McFall, Ryan O'Neill, Larissa Oaks, Heather Payson, Abraham Philip,
Kerrie Schueffner, Douglas Smith, Lisa Stanley, Kurt Steiner, Wes Sullens, Justin Taylor, Kristen Vachon-Vogel,
Cloelle Vernon, Apoorv Vij, Kat Wagenschutz, Lyndsay Watkins, and Stefanie Young.

A thank you also goes to Melissa Baker and Sarah Zaleski for their vision and support.

A very special thanks to Dana Scott, staff lead on the development of the LEED v5 Reference Guide suite, for her
unwavering commitment to quality and her dedication to the production of the guides.

A special thanks to the consultant teams, which include EXP and Cantave Creative and Consulting.

vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PREFACE ....................................................................................................................... 1
The Case for Green Building ..................................................................................................................... 1
About LEED ............................................................................................................................................... 1
History of LEED ......................................................................................................................................... 1
LEED’s Goals............................................................................................................................................. 2
Benefits of Using LEED ............................................................................................................................. 3
LEED Certification Process ....................................................................................................................... 3

GETTING STARTED....................................................................................................... 4
How to Use This Guide .............................................................................................................................. 4
Rating System Selection ............................................................................................................................ 5
Project Type Requirements........................................................................................................................ 6
Projects with Incomplete Space................................................................................................................. 7
Project Occupancy ..................................................................................................................................... 7
LEED Platinum Requirements ................................................................................................................... 9

MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS (MPR) ......................................................... 11

MPR 1. Must be in a Permanent Location on Existing Land ................................................................... 11
MPR 2. Must use Reasonable LEED Boundaries ................................................................................... 11
MPR 3. Must Comply with Project Size Requirements............................................................................ 12

RATING SYSTEM SCORECARDS............................................................................... 13

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS, PLANNING, AND ASSESSMENTS (IP) ........................... 17

Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 17
IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment ..................................................................................................... 20
IPp2: Human Impact Assessment............................................................................................................ 26
IPp3: Carbon Assessment ....................................................................................................................... 31
IPc1: Integrative Design Process............................................................................................................. 35

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION (LT) .................................................................. 40

Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 40
LTc1: Compact and Connected Development ......................................................................................... 42
LTc2: Transportation Demand Management ............................................................................................ 49
 LTc3: Electric Vehicles ............................................................................................................................. 64

WATER EFFICIENCY (WE) .......................................................................................... 69

Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 69
WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency............................................................................................................ 71
WEc1: Water Metering and Leak Detection ............................................................................................. 77
WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency .......................................................................................................... 84

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE (EA) ............................................................................ 95

Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 95
EAp1: Estimated Energy Use and Operational Carbon Projection ......................................................... 98
EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency......................................................................................................... 102
EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning ..................................................................................................... 116
EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting .................................................................................................. 129
EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management ...................................................................................... 135
EAc1: Electrification ............................................................................................................................... 142
EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency ....................................................................................................... 161
EAc3: Renewable Energy ...................................................................................................................... 185
EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning .......................................................................................................... 201
EAc5: Grid Interactive ............................................................................................................................ 211
EAc6: Enhanced Refrigerant Management ........................................................................................... 224

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR) ...................................................................... 233

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 233
MRp1: Planning for Zero Waste Operations .......................................................................................... 235
MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon .................................................................................... 239
MRc1: Interior Materials Reuse ............................................................................................................. 244
MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon ......................................................................................................... 252
MRc3: Low-Emitting Materials ............................................................................................................... 256
MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement............................................................................. 269
MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion ........................................................................... 278

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (EQ) ............................................................. 287

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 287
EQp1: Construction Management ......................................................................................................... 292
EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality ............................................................................................................. 297
EQp3: No Smoking ................................................................................................................................ 304
EQc1: Enhanced Air Quality .................................................................................................................. 308
 EQc2: Occupant Experience ................................................................................................................. 313
EQc3: Accessibility and Inclusion .......................................................................................................... 333
EQc4: Resilient Spaces ......................................................................................................................... 340
EQc5: Air Quality Testing and Monitoring .............................................................................................. 346

PROJECT PRIORITIES (PR) ...................................................................................... 356

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 356
PRc1: Project Priorities .......................................................................................................................... 357
PRc2: LEED AP ..................................................................................................................................... 361

APPENDIX I: LEED PLATINUM REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 363

PREFACE
THE CASE FOR GREEN BUILDING
Green buildings are an integral part of the solution to the environmental challenges facing the
planet. The impetus behind the development of the Leadership in Energy and Environmental
Design (LEED) rating systems was the recognition that the design, construction, and building
management industry has the expertise, tools, and technology to transform buildings and make
significant advances toward a sustainable planet. LEED projects throughout the world have
demonstrated the benefits of taking a green design and operations approach that reduces the
environmental harm of buildings and restores the balance of natural systems.

Buildings have a major role to play in sustainability through their construction, the lifetime of
their operation, and patterns of development.

What we build today, how we build it, and where we build it are profoundly important.

ABOUT LEED
LEED is a concise framework for identifying and implementing practical and measurable green
building, design, construction, operations, and maintenance strategies and solutions. It is a
voluntary, market-driven, consensus-based tool that serves as a guideline and assessment
mechanism. LEED does not certify, endorse, or promote any products, services, or companies.

Within the appropriate rating system, projects that meet the prerequisites and earn enough
credits to achieve the certification threshold have demonstrated performance that spans the
goals in an integrated way. Certification is awarded at four levels: LEED Certified, LEED Silver,
LEED Gold, and LEED Platinum. These levels incentivize higher achievement and, in turn,
faster progress toward the goals.

NOTE: LEED does not certify, endorse, or promote any products, services, or companies.

HISTORY OF LEED
USGBC developed LEED for New Construction v1.0 in 1998 for the commercial building
industry.

Since its launch, LEED has evolved to address new markets and building types, advances in
practice and technology, and a greater understanding of the environmental and human health

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 1
effects of the built environment. These ongoing improvements are developed by USGBC
member-based volunteer technical advisory groups, committees, subcommittees, and working
groups in conjunction with USGBC staff. Once development is complete, changes are reviewed
by the LEED Steering Committee and the USGBC Board of Directors and are approved by the
Consensus Committees acting as the membership consensus body, before being submitted to
USGBC members for a ratification vote. The process is based on principles of transparency,
openness, and inclusiveness, as detailed in the Foundations of LEED. To learn more, please
visit: usgbc.org/resources/foundations-leed.

In 2007, USGBC launched GBCI as an independent organization to manage the LEED

certification and professional credentialing process to scale the demand for LEED and ensure
ongoing quality and integrity.

For more information on the history of LEED, USGBC, and GBCI, visit:
usgbc.org/about/mission-vision

LEED’S GOALS
LEED seeks to optimize the use of natural resources, promote regenerative and restorative
strategies, maximize the positive and minimize the negative environmental and human health
consequences of the construction industry, and provide high-quality indoor environments for
building occupants. LEED emphasizes integrative design, integration of existing technology, and
state-of-the-art strategies to advance expertise in green building and transform professional
practice. The technical basis for LEED strikes a balance between requiring today’s best
practices and encouraging leadership strategies. LEED sets a challenging yet achievable set of
benchmarks that define green building for interiors, buildings, and cities and communities.

LEED v5 has been developed around three central areas of impact:

• Decarbonization
• Quality of Life
• Ecological Conservation and Restoration

Every credit and prerequisite in LEED v5 are connected to decarbonization, quality of life,
and/or ecological conservation and restoration, and this is annotated throughout the rating
system, enabling project teams to easily shape and communicate their sustainability stories.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 2
BENEFITS OF USING LEED
LEED is designed to address environmental challenges while responding to the needs of a
competitive market. LEED-certified buildings are designed to deliver many benefits, including:

• Lower operating costs and increased asset value

• Reduced waste sent to landfills
• Energy and water conservation
• Conserved and restored habitat for improved ecosystem function and biodiversity
• Increased market transparency and expanded access to industry-leading green products
and materials
• More healthful and productive environments for occupants
• Reductions in greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions
• Qualification for tax rebates, zoning allowances, and other incentives in many cities

By participating in LEED, owners, operators, designers, and builders make a meaningful

contribution to the green building industry. By documenting and tracking buildings’ resource use,
they contribute to a growing body of knowledge that will advance research in this rapidly
evolving field. This will allow future projects to build on the successes of today’s designs and
bring innovations to the market.

GBCI independently verifies sustainability performance for LEED, ensuring the integrity of
outcomes and strengthening market confidence in sustainability investment and innovation.

LEED CERTIFICATION PROCESS

A LEED project begins when the project team determines the scope, selects the appropriate
rating system, confirms alignment with the minimum program requirements (MPRs), and
registers the project on the Arc platform. The team designs the project to meet all prerequisites
and the chosen credits, in coordination with their sustainability goals. The team compiles and
submits the required documentation to GBCI for review. GBCI provides feedback on the
documentation, offering the opportunity for project teams to make any needed design and
construction changes or take additional steps to improve an existing project’s performance,
and/or provide additional clarification needed for GBCI to determine compliance. Additional
rounds of review follow, as needed and allowed, to earn certification of the project. For a more
in-depth understanding of the certification process, see the Guides to Certification.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 3
GETTING STARTED
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide explains the requirements of the LEED v5 Interior Design and Construction (ID+C)
rating system, offering essential background information for contractors, engineers (mechanical,
structural, and civil), architects, designers (interior and landscape), architects, designers,
building operators, and LEED consultants. Early attention to rating system selection, minimum
program requirements, and project boundaries ensure a smoother path to certification.

This guide is the first in a series of detailed resources for project teams pursuing LEED v5. It
builds on the rating system requirements, providing background on each LEED category and a
detailed explanation of the technical requirements for each credit.

WHAT’S INSIDE
This guide builds on the requirements listed in the rating system to provide background on each
LEED category and an in-depth explanation of the technical requirements of each credit.

This guide contains:

• LEED v5 rating system requirements

• Rating system requirements explained
• Documentation requirements
• Referenced standards

As teams review each credit and prerequisite, they should carefully evaluate the options and
pathways available, ensuring they align with the project’s specific goals, constraints, and
characteristics.

When preparing documentation to submit for review, these materials may consist of contract
documents (plans, specifications, elevations, sections, construction details, etc.) calculations,
reports, manufacturer product information, photographs, and/or descriptive narratives.

The USGBC glossary is an additional resource: usgbc.org/glossary/v5

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 4
CREDIT CATEGORIES
The prerequisites and credits within the LEED rating system are organized into eight categories,
each addressing a fundamental aspect of sustainable, high-performance designs and
construction practices:

• Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments (IP)

• Location and Transportation (LT)
• Sustainable Sites (SS)
• Water Efficiency (WE)
• Energy and Atmosphere (EA)
• Materials and Resources (MR)
• Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ)
• Project Priorities (PR)

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION

LEED offers rating systems designed for specific project types. Projects must register under the
most appropriate LEED rating system and use the guide appropriate to the project’s registration.
In cases where the most appropriate rating system is unclear, additional guidance is provided in
the USGBC Help Center: support.usgbc.org/hc/en-us. The project team may also raise a
request to consult with GBCI: support.usgbc.org/hc/en-us/requests/new. The consultation
should occur prior to registration to avoid the risk of GBCI determining, during the Preliminary
Review, that an inappropriate rating system has been selected.

LEED FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION (BD+C)

New Construction and Major Renovations
Applicable to whole buildings, and whole additions to buildings, of various use types that are
either new construction or undergoing major renovations and where at least 60% of the gross
floor area is complete.

Major renovations are buildings with extensive interior alteration work in addition to work on the
exterior shell of the building and/or primary structural components and/or the core and
peripheral MEP (mechanical, electrical, plumbing) and service systems and/or site work.
Typically, the extent and nature of the work prevent the primary function space from being used
for its intended purpose while the work is in progress, and the project team must obtain a new
certificate of occupancy before reoccupying the work area.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 5
Core and Shell Development
Applicable to whole buildings of various use types that are either new construction or
undergoing major renovations and at least 40% of the gross floor area is incomplete.
Incomplete: does not have its basic floor, wall, and/or ceiling finishes installed, or essential
mechanical, electrical, plumbing systems (or fixtures) necessary to occupy the space for its
intended use, within the contracted scope of work.

LEED FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION (ID+C)

Commercial Interiors
Applicable to interior renovation projects of commercial spaces (that have no scope for the
exterior shell of the building and/or site work). The team installs movable furnishings, fixtures,
and equipment (FF&E) to support the intended regular operations of the space.

LEED FOR BUILDING OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O+M)

Existing Buildings
Applicable to existing buildings projects focused on operational improvement. This rating system
focuses on whole buildings that have been fully operational and occupied for at least one year.
Focusing on performance-driven strategies and outcomes allows buildings in use to achieve
greater efficiency.

PROJECT TYPE REQUIREMENTS

The entire gross floor area of a LEED project must be certified under a single rating system
(LEED BD+C: New Construction, LEED BD+C: Core and Shell, LEED ID+C: Commercial
Interiors, or LEED O+M: Existing Buildings) and is subject to all prerequisites and attempted
credits in that rating system, regardless of mixed construction or space usage type.

However, in some prerequisites and credits, there may be requirements identified for specific
project types, such as schools, warehouse and distribution centers, healthcare, or residential.

Project type requirements must be met if 60% or more of the gross floor area of a project
comprises that project type. For example, if a project is 75% residential and 25% retail, that
project must follow the residential requirements in the rating system. In the Core and Shell
rating system or in a new construction/major renovation project with incomplete space, the use
type of the incomplete space must be based on the expected future use.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 6
PROJECTS WITH INCOMPLETE SPACE
Projects with incomplete space (future fit-out) may still pursue certification as long as the
following criteria are met:

• Incomplete space is less than 40% of the gross floor area.

• Occupancy is counted for the incomplete space using projected values or, if unknown,
the LEED default occupancy.
• A letter of commitment from the owner is provided, attesting that the incomplete spaces
will satisfy the requirements of each prerequisite and credit achieved by the project.
• A description of the incomplete space is provided, identifying the scope that remains, the
entity responsible for the remaining scope, and the reason the building is incomplete at
the time of final application.
• Prerequisite calculations must include the completed scope only. Credit calculations
must include the completed and incomplete scopes, with the incomplete scope held
equivalent to the baseline.
• Contact USGBC prior to application submission for any attempted credits in which an
adaptation for the incomplete space is not clear.

PROJECT OCCUPANCY
Occupancy counts for the project that will be used consistently throughout the application are
important to establish early and share with the whole project team. Whenever possible, use
actual or predicted occupancies. LEED requires occupancy to be assessed and reported for two
groups: regular building occupants and visitors.

REGULAR BUILDING OCCUPANTS

Regular building occupants are routine users of a project (full- and part- time), such as:

• Employees, daily volunteers, support staff (e.g., janitors)

• Residents (e.g., dormitory, apartment, condo), overnight hotel guests, medical inpatients
• K–12 students

VISITORS
Visitors are intermittent users of a project, such as:

• Retail customers

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 7
 • Medical outpatients
• Volunteers who only periodically use a building (e.g., once per week)
• Higher-education classroom students

DEFAULT OCCUPANCY COUNTS

If the occupancy is unknown and cannot be reasonably projected, use one of the following
resources to estimate occupancy:

• Default occupant density from ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Table 6-1 1

• Table 1. Default occupancy counts is based on gross floor area, excluding structured
parking

Table 1. Default occupancy counts

Gross square feet per Gross square meters per
occupant occupant
Regular Visitors Regular Visitors
General office 250 0 23 0
Retail, restaurant 435 95 40 9
Retail, grocery store 550 115 51 11
Retail, general 550 130 51 12
Retail, service 600 130 56 12
Medical office 225 330 21 31
R&D or laboratory 400 0 37 0
Warehouse, distribution 2,500 0 232 0
Warehouse, storage 20,000 0 1860 0
Educational, day care 630 105 59 10
Educational, K–12 1,300 140 121 13
Educational, postsecondary 2,100 150 195 14
NOTE: For residential (i.e., apartment or condo), use the number of bedrooms in the dwelling unit plus one, multiplied
by the number of such dwelling units.
NOTE: For a hotel or motel, use 1.5 occupants per guest room multiplied by the total number of guest rooms. Then
multiply the resulting total by 60%.

AVERAGE VS. PEAK OCCUPANCY

In prerequisite/credit calculations, occupancy may be calculated in different ways:

1
“ASHRAE 62.1-2022”, ASHRAE, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standards-62-
1-62-2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 8
 • Daily average. The value representative of all the regular building occupants for a
typical 24-hour day of operation. If numbers vary seasonally, use occupancy numbers
that are a representative daily average over the entire operating season of the building.
• Peak total. The value representative of the highest number of occupants expected in the
project at one time (e.g., shift overlap, events). Sometimes this value may be generated
by the building code for fire safety, but a lower number can be used if justified.

If using default occupancy counts from Table 1, these must be used as the daily average and
peak occupancy values.

Peak outpatients are the highest number of outpatients at a given point in a typical 24-hour
period.

EQUIVALENCIES
The LEED rating system is written based on the most up-to-date and widely available
standards. However, alternative standards or compliance paths may also be available to project
teams. The Project Priority Library includes a list of equivalencies and alternative compliance
paths available by credit, project type, or region.

If there is no guidance available allowing an equivalency or alternative compliance path, project

teams may submit a request for USGBC to determine equivalency.

LEED PLATINUM REQUIREMENTS

LEED v5 has added specific requirements to advance decarbonization goals for achieving
Platinum certification. In addition to earning all prerequisites and enough credits to reach the
overall Platinum point threshold, all Platinum projects must achieve decarbonization
requirements in the following credits:

LEED BD+C
• EAc1 Electrification
• EAc3 Enhanced Energy Efficiency
• EAc4 Renewable Energy
• MRc2 Reduce Embodied Carbon

LEED ID+C
• EAc1 Electrification
• EAc2 Enhanced Energy Efficiency
• EAc3 Renewable Energy

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 9
 • MRc2 Assess and Reduce Embodied Carbon

LEED O+M
• EAc1 GHG Emissions Reductions
• EAc2 Optimized Energy Performance
• EAc5 Decarbonization and Efficiency Plans

See Appendix I for the full list of LEED Platinum requirements.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 10
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS (MPR)
The MPRs are the minimum characteristics or conditions that make a project appropriate to
pursue LEED certification. These requirements are foundational to all LEED projects and define
the types of buildings, spaces, and neighborhoods that the LEED rating system is designed to
evaluate.

MPR 1. MUST BE IN A PERMANENT LOCATION ON

EXISTING LAND

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, neighborhoods,
communities, and cities in the context of their surroundings. A significant portion of LEED
requirements depend on the project’s location; therefore, it is important that LEED projects are
evaluated as permanent structures. Locating projects on existing land is crucial to avoiding
artificial land masses that have the potential to displace and disrupt ecosystems.

REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must be constructed and operated on a permanent location on existing land.
No project that is designed to move at any point in its lifetime may pursue LEED certification.
This requirement applies to all land within the LEED project.

MPR 2. MUST USE REASONABLE LEED BOUNDARIES

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, neighborhoods,
communities, cities, and all environmental impacts associated with those projects. Defining a
reasonable LEED boundary ensures that a project is accurately evaluated.

REQUIREMENTS
The LEED project boundary must include all contiguous land associated with the project and
that supports its typical operations. This includes land altered as a result of construction and
features used primarily by the project’s occupants, such as hardscape (parking and sidewalks),
septic or stormwater treatment equipment, and landscaping. The LEED boundary may not

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 11
unreasonably exclude portions of the building, space, or site to give the project an advantage in
complying with credit requirements. The LEED project must accurately communicate the scope
of the certifying project in all promotional and descriptive materials and distinguish it from any
non-certifying space.

MPR 3. MUST COMPLY WITH PROJECT SIZE

REQUIREMENTS

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, or neighborhoods of a
certain size. The LEED requirements do not accurately assess the performance of projects
outside of these size requirements.

REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must meet the size requirements listed below.

LEED BD+C: New Construction and LEED O+M: Existing Buildings rating systems
The LEED project must include a minimum of 1,000 square feet (93 square meters) of gross
floor area.

LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors rating systems

The LEED project must include a minimum of 250 square feet (22 square meters) of gross floor
area.

Further guidance on the MPRs can be found here:

usgbc.org/credits?MinimumProgramRequirements

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 12
RATING SYSTEM SCORECARDS
CREDIT CATEGORY VIEW
Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments (IP) 1

IPp1 Climate Resilience Assessment Required

IPp2 Human Impact Assessment Required
IPp3 Carbon Assessment Required
IPc1 Integrative Design Process 1

Location and Transportation (LT) 14

LTc1 Compact and Connected Development 8

LTc2 Transportation Demand Management 4
LTc3 Electric Vehicles 2

Water Efficiency (WE) 10

WEp1 Minimum Water Efficiency Required

WEc1 Water Metering and Leak Detection 2
WEc2 Enhanced Water Efficiency 8

Energy and Atmosphere (EA) 31

EAp1 Estimated Energy Use and Operational Carbon Projection Required

EAp2 Minimum Energy Efficiency Required
EAp3 Fundamental Commissioning Required
EAp4 Energy Metering and Reporting Required
EAp5 Fundamental Refrigerant Management Required
EAc1 Electrification 5
EAc2 Enhanced Energy Efficiency 12
EAc3 Renewable Energy 5
EAc4 Enhanced Commissioning 4
EAc5 Grid Interactive 3
EAc6 Enhanced Refrigerant Management 2

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 13
 Materials and Resources (MR) 26

MRp1 Planning for Zero Waste Operations Required

MRp2 Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon Required
MRc1 Interior Materials Reuse 4
MRc2 Reduce Embodied Carbon 4
MRc3 Low-Emitting Materials 4
MRc4 Building Product Selection and Procurement 10
MRc5 Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion 4

Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) 18

EQp1 Construction Management Required

EQp2 Fundamental Air Quality Required
EQp3 No Smoking Required
EQc1 Enhanced Air Quality 2
EQc2 Occupant Experience 7
EQc3 Accessibility and Inclusion 2
EQc4 Resilient Spaces 3
EQc5 Air Quality Testing and Monitoring 4

Project Priorities (PR) 10

PRc1 Project Priorities 9

PRc2 LEED AP 1

Total Possible Points 110

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 14
IMPACT AREA VIEWS
Decarbonization

IP Prerequisite Carbon Assessment Required

IP Credit Integrative Design Process 1

LT Credit Compact and Connected Development 8

LT Credit Transportation Demand Management 4

LT Credit Electric Vehicles 2

WE Prerequisite Minimum Water Efficiency Required

WE Credit Water Metering and Leak Detection 2

WE Credit Enhanced Water Efficiency 8

EA Prerequisite Estimated Energy Use and Operational Carbon Projection Required

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Efficiency Required

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning Required

EA Prerequisite Energy Metering and Reporting Required

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant Management Required

EA Credit Electrification 5

EA Credit Enhanced Energy Efficiency 12

EA Credit Renewable Energy 5

EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning 4

EA Credit Grid Interactive 3

EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management 2

MR Prerequisite Planning for Zero Waste Operations Required

MR Prerequisite Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon Required

MR Credit Interior Materials Reuse 4

MR Credit Reduce Embodied Carbon 4

MR Credit Building Product Selection and Procurement 10

MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion 4

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 15
 Quality of life

IP Prerequisite Climate Resilience Assessment Required

IP Prerequisite Human Impact Assessment Required

IP Credit Integrative Design Process 1

LT Credit Compact and Connected Development 8

LT Credit Transportation Demand Management 4

WE Credit Water Metering and Leak Detection 2

MR Credit Low Emitting Materials 4

MR Credit Building Product Selection and Procurement 10

EQ Prerequisite Construction Management Required

EQ Prerequisite Fundamental Air Quality Required

EQ Prerequisite No Smoking Required

EQ Credit Enhanced Air Quality 2

EQ Credit Occupant Experience 7

EQ Credit Accessibility and Inclusion 2

EQ Credit Resilient Spaces 3

EQ Credit Air Quality Testing and Monitoring 4

Ecological conservation and restoration

IP Credit Integrative Design Process 1

LT Credit Compact and Connected Development 8

WE Prerequisite Minimum Water Efficiency Required

WE Credit Water Metering and Leak Detection 2

WE Credit Enhanced Water Efficiency 8

MR Prerequisite Planning for Zero Waste Operations Required

MR Credit Interior Materials Reuse 4

MR Credit Building Product Selection and Procurement 10

MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion 4

EQ Prerequisite No Smoking Required

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 16
INTEGRATIVE PROCESS, PLANNING, AND
ASSESSMENTS (IP)
OVERVIEW
As an industry, the built environment has evolved to prioritize whole-building performance over
isolated systems. The Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments (IP) category builds on
this approach in LEED v5 by emphasizing the importance of early-stage interdisciplinary
collaboration and holistic, iterative planning to arrive at interrelated systems. By utilizing
systems thinking to identify synergies across building systems before design begins, the IP
category ensures intentional alignment between tenant-level and building-level goals, with a
focus on decisions under tenant control in commercial interiors projects.

This holistic approach promotes proactive consideration of how each project addresses
decarbonization; quality of life, including social equity and resilience; and ecosystem
conservation and restoration from the outset. The strategies within the IP category help shape
projects that are environmentally responsible, resilient, and equitable, benefiting both occupants
and the broader community.

Key aspects of this category include:

• Timing. Initiating analysis in the early stages of the project (predesign)

• Engagement. Ensuring the right people are involved
• Interdisciplinary collaboration. Leveraging synergies across credit categories to
maximize efficiencies and inform decision-making
• Assessment-based understanding. Conducting discovery that provides insights into
natural hazards, carbon emissions, and human impacts, which are referenced
throughout the rating system

Decarbonization
The built environment contributes significantly to global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions,
accounting for 21% of total GHG emissions and 31% of global carbon emissions in 2019. 2 The
IP category’s 10-year carbon assessment addresses energy use, refrigerants, embodied
carbon, and transportation impacts (IPp3: Carbon Assessment). This assessment promotes
carbon literacy and equips project teams with knowledge to apply to future projects, fostering
industry-wide progress.

2
“Chapter 9: Buildings”, IPCC, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar6/wg3/chapter/chapter-9/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 17
This assessment incorporates data from other sections of the rating system to support
consistent and meaningful carbon reduction (e.g., MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied
Carbon, MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon, MRc4: Building Product Selection and
Procurement).

Quality of life
Environmental justice and other similar movements have brought the importance of
understanding a community’s social context to the forefront. Additionally, practitioners are
placing greater emphasis on prioritizing the health, safety, and welfare of building occupants.
The American Institute of Architects Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct outlines their view
of the obligation of designers, stating: “Members should employ their professional knowledge
and skill to design buildings and spaces that will enhance and facilitate human dignity and the
health, safety, and welfare of the individual and the public.” 3 The IP category addresses social
equity by requiring an understanding of the local community, workforce, and supply chain, which
encourages teams to confront inequities and positively impact their communities (IPp2: Human
Impact Assessment).

Resilience across systems is a key topic throughout the LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors
rating system. Munich Re reported that global disaster losses in 2023 totaled $250 billion,
highlighting the significant financial impact of natural disasters worldwide. 4 The required
assessment of observed, projected, and future natural hazards for climate resilience aims to
enhance awareness, increase transparency, reduce vulnerabilities, and ensure long-term safety
and sustainability (IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment).

Ecological conservation and restoration

With a focus on ensuring the applicable expertise is in the room at the earliest stages
(predesign), the IP category specifically calls out identifying and working toward ecosystem-
related goals (IPc1: Integrative Design Process). Projects may achieve this by integrating site
hydrology analysis, native plant restoration, and soil health assessments to inform design
decisions that mitigate habitat disruption and improve ecosystem services.

This approach encourages project teams to assess site conditions holistically, incorporating
strategies that enhance biodiversity, protect natural resources, and support long-term ecological
resilience.

By fostering early collaboration, holistic assessments, and interdisciplinary planning, the IP

category helps project teams develop the foundation for resilient, equitable, and environmentally

3
“Design for Human Dignity and the Health, Safety, and Welfare of the Public”, AIA Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct,
Canon 1, ES1.5, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.aia.org/code-ethics-professional-conduct.
4
“Uncounted Costs - Data Gaps Hide the True Human Impacts of Disasters in 2023.” 2024, UNDRR, January 17, 2024, accessed
March 31, 2025, https://www.undrr.org/explainer/uncounted-costs-of-disasters-2023.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 18
responsible buildings. These strategies ensure that projects not only meet immediate
performance goals, but also contribute to a sustainable, long-term future for both people and the
planet.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 19
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning and Assessments Prerequisite and Restoration

CLIMATE RESILIENCE ASSESSMENT

IPp1
REQUIRED

INTENT
To promote comprehensive assessment of observed, projected, and future natural hazards for
climate resilience, aiming to increase awareness of hazards, increase transparency of risks,
reduce vulnerabilities, and ensure long-term safety and sustainability.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Climate and Natural Hazard Assessment

Complete a climate and natural hazard assessment.

As part of the assessment, identify observed, projected, and future natural hazards that could
potentially affect the project site and building function. Address site-specific natural hazards,
including, but not limited to, drought, extreme heat, extreme cold, flooding, hurricanes and high
winds, hail, landslides, sea level rise and storm surge, tornadoes, tsunamis, wildfires and
smoke, winter storms, and other relevant hazards.

Identify two priority hazards, at minimum, to address through proposed design strategies. For
each priority hazard, the project team must assess and specify the following:

• Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) emissions scenario used,

specifying the shared socioeconomic pathways
• Projected service life of the LEED project (e.g., fiscal year 2050 or 100 years)
• Hazard level
• Hazard risk rating
• Exposure, sensitivity, adaptive capacity, vulnerability, and overall risk levels
• Potential impact on the project site and building function
• Potential impact on the project site during construction

Where possible, use the information from the assessment to inform the planning, design, and
operations and maintenance of the project and describe how project-specific strategies were
considered.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 20
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Incorporating climate resilience into the design and development of interior spaces helps
mitigate the impacts of climate change and enhances the long-term durability of building
interiors against key vulnerabilities. A climate resilience assessment supports project teams in
identifying and evaluating building-specific climate hazards that could threaten the performance,
safety, and longevity of interior spaces and systems. This process provides a framework for
embedding data-driven, forward-looking strategies that align with regional climate adaptation
plans, building codes, and sustainability objectives while addressing the unique considerations
of interior environments.

Addressing climate risks during interior design and construction improves the ability of building
systems, occupant well-being, and operational continuity to withstand extreme weather events
and climate stressors. These strategies also support broader goals of public safety, economic
stability, and community resilience by reducing disruptions to interior spaces. In proactively
integrating these considerations, projects following LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors guidelines
can adapt to changing conditions, ensure long-term functionality, and reduce life cycle costs
while creating more sustainable and resilient interior environments.

This prerequisite entails project teams conducting a comprehensive climate and natural hazard
assessment, including identifying current and projected hazards that may impact the project site
and building operations. The assessment must address site-specific hazards such as drought,
heat, flooding, hurricanes, wildfires, and other relevant risks. Teams must prioritize at least two
hazards and analyze them using the IPCC Shared Socioeconomic Pathways (SSP) emissions
scenarios 5, specifying the project’s service life and assessing hazard levels, risks, vulnerability,
and potential impacts on-site operations and construction. In alignment with the critical need for
designers to design for the safety and welfare of occupants, the findings should be used to
inform the project’s planning, design, operations, and maintenance.

Climate and Natural Hazard Risk Assessment for Interior Spaces

This prerequisite entails project teams conducting a climate and natural hazard assessment to
identify current and projected hazards that may impact the interior environment and its critical
systems. The assessment must address hazards such as drought, heat, flooding, hurricanes,
wildfires, and other relevant risks that could disrupt building operations, occupant safety, and
interior functionality.

Unlike whole-building assessments in LEED BD+C, the resilience of interior systems and
spaces within the larger building context is what projects using LEED ID+C: Commercial

5
“Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, Working Group I, Sixth Assessment Report”, IPCC, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://interactive-atlas.ipcc.ch/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 21
Interiors should focus on. Teams must determine how climate hazards could affect indoor air
quality, heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) efficiency, electrical systems, material
durability, and occupant well-being. The assessment should analyze at least two priority
hazards using IPCC SSP emissions scenarios, defining the project’s expected service life and
assessing hazard levels, risks, vulnerabilities, and potential operational impacts.

Since LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors projects operate within existing structures, the
assessment should also consider how building-wide resilience strategies (or lack thereof)
influence interior spaces. For instance, if a building is in a flood-prone area, interior projects may
need to incorporate moisture-resistant materials, elevated critical systems, and emergency
response protocols for water damage mitigation. If extreme heat is a priority hazard, the
assessment should evaluate HVAC performance, thermal comfort strategies, and interior
materials’ heat resistance.

Identification of Priority Hazards

Project teams must identify at least two priority hazards based on the assessment, considering
historical hazard data, projected future risks, and the impact on interior environments and
systems. The assessment should integrate regional climate models, hazard mitigation plans,
and available climate risk databases to determine the likelihood and severity of each hazard.

For LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors projects, priority hazards should be identified based on
their potential to disrupt building operations, occupant safety, and interior system performance.
Teams should consider factors such as the resilience of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing
systems, as well as indoor temperature stability, air quality, and material durability.

To support this evaluation, project teams can use tools such as the FEMA National Risk Index 6,
NOAA Climate Explorer 7, or municipal hazard mitigation plans to understand site-specific risks.
For example, if a commercial interior project is in an area experiencing increasing extreme heat
events, priority hazards may include excessive indoor temperatures and strain on HVAC
systems. If the project is located in a coastal region vulnerable to storm surge, teams may
prioritize flood-related risks that could impact electrical and IT infrastructure within the interior
space.

Once priority hazards are identified, teams must document findings in the climate resilience
assessment template or submit an equivalent external assessment tool. This ensures that
climate risks are systematically analyzed and addressed within the scope of interior design and
operations.

6
“FEMA National Risk Index”, FEMA, accessed March 31, 2025, https://hazards.fema.gov/nri/.
7
“NOAA Climate Explorer”, NOAA, accessed March 31, 2025, https://crt-climate-explorer.nemac.org/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 22
Assessing Hazards
After project teams identify two priority hazards, they must evaluate the impact by specifying the
IPCC emissions scenario 8 used in the assessment, which outlines possible future atmospheric
GHG concentrations. Teams should define scenarios that are both acceptable and appropriate
for the project’s geographic location, taking into account local climate action plans to guide their
selection. For instance, SSP 1-2.6 (Low-Emissions Scenario) is recommended for projects
aiming to align with ambitious global climate mitigation goals or for those with shorter expected
life spans (20–30 years), where less severe climate impacts are expected. Conversely, SSP 5-
8.5 (High Emissions Scenario) is more suitable for projects in high-risk areas, those with longer
life spans (50+ years), or projects where significant climate impacts are anticipated due to
limited mitigation measures or regional vulnerabilities.

Next, teams must define the projected service life of the project. For LEED projects, the
projected service life refers to the project’s expected life span, which could extend to fiscal year
2050 or up to 100 years, during which the assessment of hazard risks remains applicable.
Project teams must also evaluate the hazard level and assign a hazard risk rating based on the
potential severity and impact. The hazard level reflects the intensity of a specific hazard event,
categorized as low, medium, or high. Project teams should report and identify the level of each
potential hazard using historical data and future projections. Teams can refer to the IPCC
climate projections for historical data or climate projections. The hazard risk rating typically
comes from local or regional hazard mitigation plans, and it assesses the likelihood of a hazard
occurring. Teams must provide a risk rating for each identified hazard.

Project teams must evaluate the project’s susceptibility to each hazard and consider multiple
factors, including exposure, sensitivity, adaptive capacity, vulnerability, and overall risk levels.
Exposure refers to the degree to which the project is vulnerable to hazards, such as its proximity
to water bodies or seismic zones. Sensitivity indicates how significantly these hazards may
affect the project, based on factors like materials, structural design, and infrastructure. Adaptive
capacity refers to the project’s ability to adapt, withstand, or recover from the impacts of hazards
through resilient design, contingency planning, or technology. A project with backup generators
and multiple water supply systems has a higher adaptive capacity compared to one without.

Vulnerability reflects the project’s overall susceptibility, considering both its sensitivity and
adaptive capacity. The overall risk level is a combined assessment of hazard severity,
exposure, sensitivity, adaptive capacity, and vulnerability, categorized as low, medium, or high.

Teams must assess the potential impacts of each hazard on the project. Project hazards can
disrupt essential services, damage structures, cause long-term operational challenges, and

8
“Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, Working Group I, Sixth Assessment Report,” IPCC, https://interactive-atlas.ipcc.ch/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 23
impact project’s operational aspects. During the operations phase, the assessment must
consider the impact of these hazards on facility management, occupant safety, and service
continuity. This includes potential disruptions to building systems, energy and water supply
reliability, indoor environmental quality, emergency preparedness, workforce safety, and the
long-term performance of structural and mechanical components. Hazards may also affect
maintenance schedules, operational costs, and the ability to provide critical services during
extreme weather events.

Hazard Assessment for Interior Environments

Teams must define the anticipated service life of the interior project, which often corresponds to
lease terms, expected tenant occupancy, or the life span of major interior systems and finishes.
While whole-building service life may extend beyond 50 years, interior spaces typically undergo
renovation or reconfiguration every 10–30 years, requiring resilience strategies that support both
short-term adaptability and long-term sustainability.

Project teams must analyze how hazards may affect interior operations, including temperature
fluctuations, humidity control, indoor air quality, occupant safety, and potential damage to
furniture, finishes, and equipment.

Integration into Interior Project Planning and Interior Design

As part of the climate resilience assessment, project teams must use findings from the hazard
assessment to inform interior planning, design, operations, and maintenance strategies. Unlike
whole-building projects, LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors projects must evaluate how climate
hazards affect interior environments, including occupant comfort, material durability, indoor air
quality, and system performance.

During the planning and design phase, teams should focus on resilient interior design strategies
that enhance thermal comfort, air quality, moisture control, and operational efficiency. For
example, if flooding is identified as a priority hazard, strategies may include selecting water-
resistant flooring and wall finishes, elevating electrical and IT infrastructure, and incorporating
dehumidification systems to mitigate post-flood moisture buildup. If extreme heat is a concern,
teams should optimize HVAC zoning and controls, incorporate passive cooling strategies such
as operable windows, and specify materials with high thermal resistance.

Where possible, resilience considerations should be embedded into material and system
selection, lighting strategies, and space planning to ensure interiors remain adaptable to
changing climate conditions and operational demands. Incorporating risk-informed strategies
early in the interior fit-out process allows teams to proactively address vulnerabilities, extend the
life span of finishes and equipment, and ensure long-term occupant safety and well-being.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 24
Identifying site-specific hazards and vulnerabilities enables the development of interior-focused
resilience solutions, minimizing disruptions and increasing asset longevity in the face of extreme
climate events.

LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors projects integrating resilient interior planning, durable
material choices, and climate-adaptive operational strategies, can enhance building
performance, occupant health, and long-term usability. Proactive climate resilience planning
allows for interior spaces to adapt effectively to evolving threats, preserving functionality, safety,
and efficiency throughout their life span.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All The project's climate and natural hazard assessment (using
the USGBC Climate Resilience Assessment Template or
equivalent).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, Working Group I, Sixth Assessment Report
(interactive-atlas.ipcc.ch)
• FEMA National Risk Index (hazards.fema.gov/nri)
• NOAA Climate Explorer (crt-climate-explorer.nemac.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 25
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning and Assessments Prerequisite and Restoration

HUMAN IMPACT ASSESSMENT

IPp2
REQUIRED

INTENT
To ensure that project development is guided by a thorough understanding of the social context
of the local community, workforce, and supply chain, helping to address potential social
inequities.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Human Impact Assessment

Complete a human impact assessment that draws on relevant information from the following
four specified categories, as applicable:

• Demographics: These may include race and ethnicity, gender, age, income,
employment rate, population density, education levels, household types, and
identification of nearby vulnerable populations.
• Local infrastructure and land use: This may include adjacent transportation and
pedestrian infrastructure, adjacent diverse uses, relevant local or regional sustainability
goals/commitments, and applicable accessibility code(s).
• Human use and health impacts: These may include housing affordability and
availability, availability of social services (e.g., healthcare, education, social support
networks), community safety, local community groups, and supply chain and
construction workforce protections.
• Occupant experience: This may include opportunities for daylight, views, and operable
windows; environmental conditions of air and water; and adjacent soundscapes, lighting,
and wind patterns within the context of surrounding buildings (microclimate, solar scape,
and neighboring structures).
• Other: (specify)

Where possible, use the information from the assessment to inform the planning, design, and
operations and maintenance of the project and describe how project-specific strategies were
considered.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 26
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires that the project team comprehensively evaluate and understand the
social, economic, and environmental context of the local community, workforce, and supply
chain before developing the project. Teams will gather and analyze this understanding through
methods such as site analysis, community outreach, census reports, GIS mapping, and
partnerships with local organizations to ensure the project aligns with community needs and
promotes equitable outcomes. Teams must select key characteristics to evaluate within the
categories of demographics, local infrastructure and land use, human use and health impacts,
and occupant experience. These analyses and findings should go on to inform the project's
planning, design, operations, and maintenance strategies.

Ultimately, this assessment balances environmental goals with the needs and aspirations of the
people affected, fostering projects that are both ecologically and socially responsible. It supports
frameworks for how designers ensure the health, safety, and welfare of those they design for.
This will be an educational process for teams, especially for those who have not conducted
similar assessments previously. With intentional planning, teams can integrate project-specific
strategies by identifying potential disparities and work collectively toward creating a more
inclusive and equitable community.

Human Impact Assessment

A Human Impact Assessment is a process in which quantitative and qualitative data for a
proposed project is collected through identifying characteristics unique to the project site and its
surrounding community. It requires projects to understand the sociopolitical context of the site,
such as the cultural makeup of neighboring residents or average income rates. Additionally, it
asks projects to identify relevant infrastructure and policy, such as zoning restrictions or
accessibility codes. The assessment also requires taking stock of what resources may be
accessible to the residents or potential end users, such as transit availability or healthcare. Last,
it evaluates impacts on occupant experience, such as air and water quality. Project teams must
consider how these elements interact with and impact one another to ensure that they guide
project development with a comprehensive understanding of its social context.

Defining community
Project teams must first establish the scope of their assessment by identifying the community.
Communities have both geographic and functional definitions. Geographic communities start
with the project’s neighborhood — the people who live and work in and near the project and
interact with it by proximity. Geographic communities can also extend beyond to include towns,
cities, or counties. Functional communities include all occupants, construction workers, and
visitors who come to the building. These people may or may not live nearby. Teams can also
define community through various affinities or commonalities, such as age, ethnicity, income

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 27
level, housing status, or educational background. The community may extend to include project
team members such as architects, engineers, contractors, and designers who oversee the
planning, design, and construction phases. Community within the context of the supply chain
includes material suppliers, manufacturers, and distributors, along with the workforce involved in
production and transportation, highlighting local engagement and fair labor practices.

Address the core categories of human impact

Teams must complete a thorough assessment that evaluates the potential impact of the project
on people, including living conditions, health, food security, education, and access to other
resources. The assessment must include data collection and analysis of core human impact
categories such as demographic, infrastructure, health, and occupant experience factors, as
well as any other relevant social impacts identified, providing a comprehensive overview of the
human impacts of project development.

Project teams should engage with community members and other relevant groups to gather
insights, understand local needs, and validate data.

• Demographics. The first category evaluates the local demographics of the area
surrounding the project site, which is critical to understanding how the design may
influence the social fabric of the surrounding community. This process involves
analyzing key demographic characteristics, including factors such as race and ethnicity,
gender, age distribution, income levels, employment rates, population density, education
levels, and household types. Additionally, it includes identification of nearby vulnerable
populations to consider how their needs can be addressed in the project’s development.
Teams are suggested to collaborate with nonprofit organizations that work directly with
the people of the community.

• Local infrastructure and land use. The second category examines the project's impact
on local infrastructure and land use, as well as identifying existing infrastructure that
provides an opportunity to connect to the project. Teams must assess the adjacent
public transit systems such as walkways, bike lanes, and road networks to ensure the
project integrates well with existing mobility options and promotes sustainable
transportation. The evaluation requires an analysis of diverse land uses in the vicinity,
such as residential, commercial, industrial, and recreational spaces, to determine how
the project might influence the functional balance of the area.

The assessment encourages reviewing the local community’s sustainability

commitments, such as city-wide goals to reduce GHG emissions or promote energy
efficiency, highlighting that the project can support broader efforts to create a more
sustainable future. Identifying and complying with relevant accessibility codes and
standards is another key aspect of the assessment to strengthen the project’s

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 28
 adherence to legal requirements regarding access for people with disabilities, while
following best practices for creating inclusive, barrier-free environments.

• Human use and health impacts. The third category evaluates the project's effects on
human use and its impact on public health and well-being. This involves a thorough
assessment of the community’s current access to essential resources, as well as the
overall quality of life for residents. It is important to assess whether the project will
address or alleviate these challenges, particularly regarding the availability of affordable
housing. The assessment must also analyze the community’s access to social services,
such as healthcare, education, and social support networks.

Community safety is another important factor to public health and well-being. Projects
that incorporate features such as public spaces, adequate lighting, and pedestrian-
friendly designs can foster a sense of safety and belonging. Projects must also consider
the protections and working conditions for the local supply chain and construction
workforce to ensure ethical practices and fair treatment. Within the scope of reason, this
includes prioritizing local procurement and employment to support the local economy,
providing fair wages and benefits to workers, establishing safe jobsite conditions, and
implementing transparent labor practices to prevent exploitation and unjust treatment.

• Occupant experience. The fourth category considers the project’s influence on the
overall occupant experience. The goal is to thoroughly examine how the design and
construction of the project can influence the health, comfort, and well-being of its
occupants. This includes an analysis of key environmental factors such as the
availability of natural daylight, the quality and orientation of views, and the opportunity to
provide operable windows for fresh air circulation, as well as air and water quality.
Additionally, it considers how external elements — such as the surrounding
soundscapes, the quality of artificial and natural lighting, and the impact of wind patterns
on the building and adjacent structures — affect the indoor environment and the overall
experience of those inhabiting the space. This assessment encourages the project to
create a positive and health-conscious environment for its occupants.

• Other. Project teams may include any additional relevant social factors that are
evaluated as part of the Human Impact Assessment.

Integration into Project Planning and Design

Project teams should use the findings from the Human Impact Assessment to inform the
project’s planning, design, operations, and maintenance phases. Things to consider include how
the identified social factors inform project-specific decisions, such as changes to design
features, operational practices, or community engagement strategies. Project teams can

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 29
implement strategies that promote inclusivity, fair labor practices, and equitable access to
opportunities. This supports the community's economic and social well-being and helps create a
more resilient and sustainable project outcome. This integration is a tool to drive meaningful
change within the design as well as at the community level.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All The project's human impact assessment (using the USGBC
Human Impact Assessment Template or equivalent).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 30
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning and Assessments Prerequisite —
and Restoration

CARBON ASSESSMENT
IPp3
REQUIRED

INTENT
To understand and reduce long-term direct and indirect carbon emissions, including on-site
combustion, grid-supplied electricity, refrigerants, and embodied carbon.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Carbon Assessment

USGBC will provide the project team with a 10-year projected carbon assessment for the
project. The assessment will use data from the following:

• EAp1: Estimated Energy Use and Operational Carbon Projection

• EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management
• MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon
• LTc2: Transportation Demand Management (optional)

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires a 10-year carbon assessment of all emissions within the project
boundary but does not require any additional data to be entered beyond what is already
required by the three related prerequisites and the optional credit, if pursued.

Until recently, most projects only considered GHG emissions from operational energy use, if
emissions were considered at all. However, as it has become increasingly clear that emissions
from construction (“embodied carbon”) and refrigerants can also be quite considerable, LEED
v5 has introduced prerequisites to assess carbon emissions from all three sources. This unifying
prerequisite enables project teams to compare their sources of emissions and see which are
more or less significant. The integrative process prerequisite gathers data from the three related
prerequisites (EAp1: Estimated Energy Use and Operational Carbon Projection, EAp5:
Fundamental Refrigerant Management, MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon), and
optionally from LTc2: Transportation Demand Management, if that credit has been pursued, and
provides project teams with a report and visualization so that they can see how their different

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 31
sources of emissions will compare over a 10-year time horizon, to enable better decision-
making about carbon.

Carbon Assessment Supplied by USGBC

From the data in the three prerequisites and the optional credit, USGBC will develop a 10-year
carbon assessment of the estimated emissions from energy use, refrigerants, embodied carbon,
and, for some projects, transportation. It includes:

• Annual carbon emissions from each source for 10 years

• Cumulative emissions from each source each year for 10 years
• Cumulative emissions over 10 years in total and from each source and the percentage of
the total from each source

Additional considerations
The information in this carbon assessment provides an overview of the various
sources of carbon emissions and helps tenants make informed decisions to
reduce the project’s emissions. Although not required for compliance, sharing the
10-year carbon projection with additional parties, including the landlord, can
benefit. Landlords may find value in this information and develop a way of
measuring and reporting emissions from the whole building or other projects
within their portfolio.

This prerequisite does not require comprehensive carbon accounting, whole-

building life cycle analyses (WBLCA), or “whole-interiors” LCA, nor is it meant to
substitute for more in-depth analysis. Instead, LEED v5 requires this basic cross-
categorical carbon assessment to enable a broad understanding of how project
emissions across sources will add up over time, using data that all LEED v5
projects must submit under other prerequisites and applying reasonable
assumptions.

Assumptions Behind the Assessment

While project teams do not need to compile any calculations to complete this credit, the
following section outlines the assumptions behind the USGBC-supplied carbon assessment for
full transparency. Project teams should conduct their own analysis in addition to this Carbon
Assessment if more customized results are desired.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 32
Analysis Period
Tenant spaces are assumed to be renovated every 10 years on average; thus, the LEED ID+C:
Commercial Interiors carbon assessment uses a 10-year period for the analysis.

Operational Carbon Emissions

EAp1: Estimated Energy Use and Operational Carbon Projection calculates the business-as-
usual (BAU) carbon projection from operational emissions from energy over 10 years. The BAU
assumes that emissions from fuel use will remain constant, and that emissions from electricity
will decline linearly at 3.8% per year (the equivalent of declining by 95% over 25 years). See
EAp1: Estimated Energy Use and Operational Carbon Projection for more information.

Refrigerant Emissions
EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management calculates the annual refrigerant emissions. It
uses a default annual leakage rate of 2%, or an annual leakage rate of 1% for projects pursuing
Option 2. Limit Refrigerant Leakage of EAc6: Enhanced Refrigerant Management.

Embodied Carbon Emissions

MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon calculates the embodied carbon in global
warming potential (GWP) (kgCO2e) of the project interiors. Assumptions required to calculate
the embodied carbon are found in MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon.

A1-A3 embodied carbon emissions result from multiplying the MRp2: Quantify and Assess
Embodied Carbon embodied carbon values by 1.5 for interiors and MEP products, A4, and A5
emissions. Recurring embodied carbon assumes the project undergoes renovations every 10
years. Multiply the MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon embodied carbon values by
0.25 to account for the recurring embodied carbon.

Transportation Emissions
Teams may only calculate the emissions projection from transportation when the project
pursues LTc2: Transportation Demand Management. The projections assume no change in
vehicle miles traveled (VMT) over the 10-year period and a linear 95% grid decarbonization.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 33
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Completed documentation of EAp1: Estimated Energy Use
and Operational Carbon Projection, EAp5: Fundamental
Refrigerant Management, MRp2: Quantify and Assess
Embodied Carbon, and if attempted LTc2: Transportation
Demand Management.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 34
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning and Assessments Credit and Restoration

INTEGRATIVE DESIGN PROCESS

IPc1
1 point

INTENT
To support high-performance, cost-effective, and cross-functional project outcomes through an
early analysis and planning of the interrelationships among systems. To provide a holistic
framework for project teams to collaboratively address decarbonization, quality of life, and
ecosystem conservation and restoration across the entire LEED rating system.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1
Integrative Design Process 1
OR
LEED-certified Building 1

Integrative Design Process

Beginning in predesign and continuing through early occupancy, identify and apply opportunities
to achieve synergies across disciplines and building systems through the following initiatives:

• Integrated team: Assemble and convene an interdisciplinary project team with diverse
perspectives. Ensure the process is an equitable team effort through organized
facilitation.
• Design charrette: During predesign or early in design, conduct a charrette with the
owner or owner’s representative and participants representing at least 4 key
perspectives (e.g., architect, contractor, energy modeler, or community engagement
representatives).
• LEED goal-setting: Work as a team to define a set of specific and measurable project
goals that address the LEED v5 impact areas of decarbonization, quality of life, and
ecosystem conservation and restoration. Incorporate these goals into the owner’s project
requirements (OPR).

OR

LEED-certified Building (1 point)

Locate the project in a LEED-certified building.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 35
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit requires a different approach to design than the conventional, linear architectural
process. Conventionally, the design and construction disciplines work separately, and their
solutions to design and construction challenges are fragmented. These “solutions” often create
unintended consequences–some positive, but mostly negative. The corollary is that when areas
of practice are integrated, it becomes possible to significantly improve building performance and
achieve synergies that yield economic, environmental, and human health benefits.

Integrative Design Process (IDP)

In an IDP, an entire team–clients, designers, builders, and operators–identifies overlapping
relationships, services, and redundancies among systems so that interdependencies and
benefits that might otherwise go unnoticed can be explored, with the goal of increasing
performance and reducing costs. To work this way requires that project teams, whose members
represent various disciplines, come together so that the knowledge, analyses, and ideas from
each discipline can inform and link with the systems and components of all other disciplines. In
this way, LEED credits become aspects of a whole rather than separate components, and the
entire design and construction team can identify the interrelationships and linked benefits across
multiple LEED credits.

Approaching certification using an integrative process gives the project team the greatest
chance of success. The process includes three phases:

• Discovery. The most important phase of the integrative process, discovery expands
what is conventionally called predesign. A project is unlikely to meet its environmental
goals cost-effectively without this discrete phase. Discovery work should take place
before schematic design begins.
• Design and construction (implementation). This phase begins with what is
conventionally called schematic design. It resembles conventional practice but integrates
all the work and collective understanding of system interactions reached during the
discovery phase.
• Occupancy, operations, and performance feedback. This phase focuses on
preparing to measure performance and creating feedback mechanisms. Assessing
performance against targets is critical for informing building operations and identifying
the need for any corrective action.

Achieving economic and environmental performance requires bringing every issue and all
essential voices — community, clients, designers, engineers, builders, and operators — into the
project at the earliest point, before the team designs anything.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 36
This holistic process of research, analysis, and workshops follows an iterative cycle that refines
the design solutions. In the best scenario, the research and workshops continue until the project
team optimizes the systems, identifies all reasonable synergies, and documents and
implements the related strategies associated with all LEED credits.

Integrated Team
The first step involves assembling an interdisciplinary design team with relevant and impacted
parties, including owners, building users, architects, engineers, contractors, and community
representatives. Participants are to consider all project phases — from early design to
construction and operations — to collaboratively set goals, refine strategies, and balance
performance, feasibility, and costs.

During construction and procurement, contractors and builders provide insights on

constructability, materials, and lifecycle impacts. During occupancy, collaboration ensures the
team upholds design intent, implements energy strategies effectively, and monitors performance
for continuous improvement.

Design Charrette
The first charrette with interdisciplinary members is crucial for collective agreement on goals,
priorities, and a shared project vision. Teams must proactively address major concerns early to
avoid redesign delays and inefficiencies later in the project life cycle. Leveraging tools such as
energy and daylight modeling, building information modeling, and lifecycle assessments (LCA)
during the conceptual design phase ensures a data-driven approach to identifying conflicts and
optimizing performance.

To foster engagement and collaboration, project teams must implement equitable processes by
facilitating well-structured meetings, workshops, and charrettes. Resources such as the U.S.
Department of Energy’s Handbook for Planning and Conducting Charrettes 9 provide practical
checklists and agendas to guide these efforts.

LEED Goal-setting: Decarbonization, Quality of Life, and Ecosystem

Conservation and Restoration Goals
Project teams must establish measurable goals aligned with LEED v5’s core impact areas:
decarbonization, quality of life, and ecological conservation and restoration. It is an opportunity
for project teams to further connect assessment findings to project outcomes. Clear metrics
guide decisions, such as carbon reduction percentages, well-being outcomes, or ecosystem
restoration targets.

9
“Handbook for Planning and Conducting Charettes”, U.S. Department of Energy, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.nrel.gov/docs/fy09osti/44051.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 37
 • Decarbonization. Strategies include reducing operational and embodied carbon
emissions. Teams can replace fossil fuel systems with renewable or electric solutions,
upgrade to energy-efficient equipment, and specify low-carbon materials such as high-
performance glazing and supplementary cementitious materials (SCMs) in concrete.
• Quality of life. A human-centered approach incorporates health, well-being, resilience,
and equity into the design. Strategies such as inclusive design and biophilic design,
connect occupants to nature, reduce stress, improve air quality, and enhance cognitive
performance. Selecting nontoxic and hazard-resilient materials promotes healthier
indoor environments, benefiting occupants' physical and mental health as well as long-
term sustainability.
• Ecosystem conservation and restoration. Sustainable practices such as minimizing
soil erosion, planting native vegetation, and integrating green infrastructure (e.g.,
permeable pavement, green roofs) reduce environmental impact and restore ecological
functions.

Teams must utilize this thorough research and analysis during the pre-design phase to inform
LEED documentation requirements, including the OPR, Basis of Design (BOD), and
construction documents. These documents are expected to clearly articulate how project goals
align with integrative design principles.

Narratives should comprehensively outline strategies and analyses, such as site assessments,
energy and water modeling, and LCAs, to demonstrate how the project meets sustainability
objectives. Teams should include robust justifications for their design decisions to ensure clarity
and accountability throughout the project life cycle.

AND/OR

LEED-certified Building
Interior design teams are to consider how base building certifications in areas such as energy
efficiency, water conservation, and indoor air quality can inform and enhance their sustainable
design strategies. Early coordination with base building managers is essential to align shared
sustainability goals and ensure a smooth process. It is crucial for the base building and interior
design teams to collaborate continuously, using regular check-ins or shared documentation
systems to ensure both teams work toward common LEED goals.

Certification under any LEED rating system shows that building owners have taken steps to
protect ecosystems, conserve resources, and create healthy indoor environments. The real
estate industry recognizes that LEED-certified buildings offer economic co-benefits such as
reduced operating costs and improved occupant productivity.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 38
Project teams should locate the LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors project within a previously
certified LEED building. Early collection of certification information can streamline the process
by identifying relevant credits and systems. Interior design teams should gather specific details
on the base building’s energy management systems, water-saving fixtures, and indoor air
quality controls to integrate these features into their design plan and maximize credit synergies.

For public projects, teams can find the scorecard in the USGBC project directory 10. For private
projects, the LEED administrator should work directly with the building owner to access the
scorecard. The LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiorsteam must provide details of the LEED-
certified building, including project name, ID number, rating system, certification level, and
certification date.

Interior design teams should regularly communicate with the base building management to
ensure that any changes or updates to the original LEED certification are documented and
confirm alignment with the building’s ongoing sustainability strategies.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Evidence of the Design Charrette date, the participants and
their roles, and the name and company of the facilitator (for
example, the meeting notes for the Design Charrettes).
All The OPR defining the goals for synergy across building
systems that address decarbonization, quality of life, and
ecosystem conservation and restoration, including how
success of each goal will be measured.
All Evidence of the base building LEED certification (for
example, the LEED project number or screenshot of the
project listed in the LEED project directory).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Integrative Process (IP) ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and
Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities (2012) (webstore.ansi.org/preview-
pages/MTS/preview).

10
“LEED Project Directory,” USGBC, accessed April 5, 2025, https://www.usgbc.org/projects.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 39
LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION (LT)
OVERVIEW
Location and transportation decisions play a crucial role in determining a project's long-term
sustainability potential. The project’s chosen location significantly influences the surrounding
environment and community, which affects how people access the site, who can use it, and
what impacts it has on local resources. By prioritizing strategies at the intersection of resource
access, land use patterns, and transportation, the Location and Transportation (LT) category
guides projects toward an efficient, equitable, and low-carbon future.

Given this significance, the LT category offers the third-largest number of potential points in
LEED v5. It prioritizes location-efficient sites that utilize existing infrastructure to promote land
conservation and support compact, connected communities. Increasing urban density has
manifold benefits: preserving natural habitats outside of major corridors, advancing equitable
development through transportation access and community connection, and improving
infrastructure efficiency. 11 The emphasis on transportation demand management (TDM) further
promotes connected alternatives for mobility and equitable development. These benefits could
also generate trillions of dollars in economic savings for cities before 2050. 12 One estimate
suggests that a more compact approach to urban growth could reduce infrastructure capital
requirements by more than $3 trillion USD between 2015 and 2030. 13

Next, the LT category recognizes electric vehicle (EV) adoption to further reduce GHG
emissions and cultivate a transition to more sustainable mobility solutions.

Decarbonization
Transportation is responsible for nearly one-quarter of global energy-related carbon
emissions. 14 Recognizing the enormous momentum in the transportation sector, LEED v5
introduces measures that anticipate a decarbonized future state. Strategies like a transportation
demand assessment, enhanced EV incentives, and support for low-carbon and micromobility
alternatives, such as public transit, scooters, and bikeshares, can significantly reduce
associated project emissions. Public transport like buses and trains, for example, can reduce
emissions by up to two-thirds per passenger, per kilometer, compared to private vehicles. 15

11
Haddaoui, Catlyne, “Cities Can Save $17 Trillion by Preventing Urban Sprawl”, World Resources
Institute.https://www.wri.org/insights/cities-can-save-17-trillion-preventing-urban-sprawl.
12
Haddaoui. “Cities Can Save $17 Trillion by Preventing Urban Sprawl.”
13
“New Climate Economy: Commission on the Economy and Climate,” New Climate Economy | Commission on the Economy and
Climate, accessed April 5, 2025, https://newclimateeconomy.net/.
14
International Energy Agency (IEA), “Transport - Energy System,” IEA, accessed April 5, 2025, https://www.iea.org/energy-
system/transport.
15
Ben Welle et al., “Post-Pandemic, Public Transport Needs to Get Back on Track to Meet Global Climate Goals,” World Resources
Institute, December 14, 2023, https://www.wri.org/insights/current-state-of-public-transport-climate-goals.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 40
Projects must rethink the dominance of traditional transportation approaches, encouraging a
fundamental mode shift away from single-occupancy vehicles to low-carbon alternatives (LTc2:
Transportation Demand Management, LTc3: Electric Vehicles).

Quality of life
By promoting more equitable and healthy communities through compact and connected growth,
the LT category provides pathways to affordable housing and sustainable transportation in the
surrounding community (LTc1: Compact and Connected Development). This holistic approach
fosters more inclusive, resilient, and economically vibrant neighborhoods. By encouraging
projects to embed these principles, the category helps create communities where people can
thrive.

Ecological conservation and restoration

Implementing low-carbon transportation and compact development options reduces emissions
and mitigates urban sprawl, which disrupt ecosystems and natural habitats. 16 Experts estimate
that about one-third of all terrestrial species will experience habitat loss, with some losing at
least a tenth of their remaining habitat if global urbanization continues at its current rate through
2050. 17

Through these strategies, the LT category aims to support a transformative increase in

understanding land use choices, to accelerate the adoption of EV infrastructure, to foster the
transition to low-carbon transportation, and to enable project teams to see the enormous
potential to use location choice for supporting not only their own building, but also their
surrounding community.

16
Haddaoui, Catlyne, “Cities Can Save $17 Trillion by Preventing Urban Sprawl”, World Resources
Institute.https://www.wri.org/insights/cities-can-save-17-trillion-preventing-urban-sprawl.
17
1. William F. Laurance and Jayden Engert, “Sprawling Cities Are Rapidly Encroaching on Earth’s Biodiversity,” Proceedings of
the National Academy of Sciences 119, no. 16 (March 31, 2022), https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2202244119.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 41
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Location and Transportation Credit and Restoration

COMPACT AND CONNECTED DEVELOPMENT

LTc1
1–8 points

INTENT
To conserve land and ecosystem resources by encouraging development in areas with existing
infrastructure. To promote livability, walkability, and transportation efficiency, including reduced
vehicle distance traveled and associated emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–8
Option 1. LEED BD+C-certified Base Building 1–8
OR
Option 2. Surrounding Density 1–3
AND/OR
Option 3. Access to Transit 1–5
AND/OR
Option 4. Walkable Location 1–3

Option 1. Base Building Certified with LEED BD+C (1–8 points)

Locate in a building certified with LEED v4/v4.1 BD+C that earned either LTc: Surrounding
Density and Diverse Uses or LTc: Access to Quality Transit, or locate in a building certified with
LEED v5 BD+C that earned LTc1: Compact and Connected Development.

Table 1. Points for buildings certified with LEED BD+C

Equivalent ID+C
Rating system Credit Points earned
points
LEED v4 or LTc: Surrounding Density and Diverse 1 1
LEED v4.1 Uses
2 2

3 3

4 or more 4

LTc: Access to Quality Transit 1 1

2–3 3

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 42
 Equivalent ID+C
Rating system Credit Points earned
points
4–6 4

LEED v5 LTc1: Compact and Connected 1 1

Development
2–4 4

5–6 8

OR

Meet any combination of the options below for a maximum of 8 points.

Option 2. Surrounding Density (1–3 points)

Locate in a building where the surrounding existing density within 0.25 miles (400 meters) offset
of the project boundary meets the values in Table 2. Use either the “separate residential and
nonresidential densities” or the “combined density” values.

Table 2. Points for average existing density within 0.25 miles (400 meters)
Combined density Separate density Points
Sq. ft. per Sq. m. per Residential Residential Nonresidential
acre of hectare of density density density (FAR)
buildable buildable land (DU/acre) (DU/hectare)
land
22,000 5,050 7 17.5 0.5 2
35,000 8,035 12 30 0.8 3

NOTE: DU = dwelling unit; FAR = floor area ratio

AND/OR

Option 3. Access to Transit (1–5 points)

Locate any functional entry of the building in which the project is located within either:

• A walking distance of 0.25 miles (400 meters) by existing or planned bus, streetcar, or
informal transit stops
• A walking distance of 0.25 miles (800 meters) by existing or planned bus rapid transit
stops, passenger rail stations (i.e., light, heavy, or commuter rail), or commuter ferry
terminals

The transit service at these stops and stations in aggregate must meet the minimums listed in
Table 3.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 43
Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met. For each qualifying transit route, only
trips in one direction are counted toward the threshold.

• If service varies by day:

o For weekday trips, count the weekday with the lowest number of trips.
o For weekend trips, only count the weekend day with the highest number of trips.
• If a qualifying transit route has multiple stops within the required walking distance, only
trips from one stop are counted toward the threshold.
• Planned stops and stations may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction
by the date of the LEED project’s certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24
months of that date.

Table 3. Minimum daily public transit service

Weekday trips Weekend trips Points

72 30 2
132 78 3
160 120 4
360 216 5

AND/OR

Option 4. Walkable Location (1–3 points)

Locate in a building that meets the location efficiency requirements in Table 4 via Walk Score®
or proximity to existing and publicly available uses within a walking distance of 0.25 miles (800
meters) from any functional entry.

Table 4. Points for location efficiency

Walk Score® Proximity to uses Points
60–69 4–7 1
70–79 8–10 2
80 or more ≥ 11 3

The following restrictions apply:

• A use may be counted as only one use type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only
once even if it sells products in several categories).
• No more than two uses in each use type may be counted (e.g., if five restaurants are
within walking distance, only two may be counted).
• The counted uses must represent at least three of the five categories.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 44
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit awards project sites near essential services and in densely built locations with
existing infrastructure. There are multiple paths to achieving credit compliance. Project teams
should review the site location and the urban context of the project, including building density,
community amenities, and public transportation routes, to optimize the options selected for the
project.

Option 1. Base Building Certified with LEED BD+C

Projects pursuing LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiorscertification rely on base building elements
for many credits. Prioritizing base buildings that have implemented sustainable practices or
achieved LEED BD+C certification gives tenants the opportunity to leverage these initiatives for
their spaces.

For LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors projects, locate in a building certified with LEED BD+C,
using versions LEED v4 or LEED v4.1, that earned either the LT Credit: Surrounding Density
and Diverse Uses or LT Credit: Access to Quality Transit, or locate in a building certified with
LEED BD+C under LEED v5 that earned LTc3: Compact and Connected Development.

Determining LEED BD+C Base Building compliance

The LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiorsteam must demonstrate that the base building achieved
certification under the LEED v4, LEED v4.1, or LEED v5 BD+C rating system and earned points
for the respective credits.

USGBC maintains an online directory of certified projects. Information in the directory includes
rating system version, level of certification, a copy of the final scorecard, and the project’s
unique LEED identification number. Teams can access the project directory at:
usgbc.org/projects.

For projects not listed in the USGBC project directory, the LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors
team must contact the base building owner or property manager to validate the project
information.

Option 2. Surrounding Density

Projects in high-density areas are likely to be more walkable and offer greater amenities.
Additionally, a denser and more compact neighborhood increases efficiency and reduces the
time needed to travel from one location to another. It provides easier access to basic services,
including supermarkets, pharmacies, banks, medical clinics, and offices. People can choose

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 45
alternative means of travel when amenities are closely located. More important, high
surrounding density promotes efficient land use and achieves more sustainable growth patterns
that protect natural habitats, farmland, and open spaces. This approach ultimately leads to more
resilient and livable communities.

Project teams must identify the building site and buildable land within 0.25 miles (400 meters)
offset of the project boundary on a map. Team should collect information on surrounding
residential and nonresidential building densities, including the number of dwelling units and
building floor area for all properties within the offset of the boundary, and confirm residential
densities and floor area ratios (FAR) meet or exceed a residential density of seven or 12
dwelling units (DU)/acre (17.5 or 30 DU/hectare) and a nonresidential density (FAR) of 0.5 or
0.8 using separate density measurements. Projects must meet the 22,000 or 35,000 sf/ acre of
buildable land for combined density. A density of seven DU/acre is the minimum required to
support public transit. The FAR and buildable land thresholds support this density level.

Option 3. Access to Transit

A project located in a densely built environment with a compact and connected transportation
and infrastructure network reduces environmental impact and enhances the quality of life for
regular occupants. When people take public transportation, fewer private vehicles occupy the
road, which reduces VMT and associated GHG emissions and air pollution. Additionally,
buildings close to public transportation significantly promote equity by providing various benefits
to communities, particularly underserved/disadvantaged ones. These buildings offer
accessibility and mobility to people without private vehicles and foster social interaction by
connecting different neighborhoods.

Teams pursuing this option must identify transit stops within the required walking distance from
the project’s functional entry to existing or planned transit. Types of transit may include bus,
streetcar, bus rapid transit, rail, ferry, or informal transit stops. Teams must provide maps with
all available and relevant public transportation options, and/or those that will be available within
24 months of the certificate of occupancy. Teams must measure all stops along walking routes
from the main entrance of the project site. Teams must also provide detailed information of the
transit services’ location, frequency, and routes, confirming the minimum number of daily trips is
met or exceeded. Projects should prioritize locations with multiple types of transit to optimize
transportation options for building occupants.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 46
Option 4. Walkable Location
Walk Score®
Knowing the Walk Score® of the project site provides a better understanding of how the building
location can encourage physical activity, reduce GHG emissions, and foster social
interactions. 18

Walk Score® data is categorized as either “supported” or “unsupported.” A supported Walk

Score® is based on verified, publicly available data and can be used to demonstrate compliance
with walkability requirements for credit achievement. An unsupported Walk Score®, however,
relies on incomplete or estimated data and cannot be used to achieve this credit.

A high Walk Score® means that the location is highly walkable, and that area is likely to have
many amenities and services within a short walking distance. A location with a low Walk Score®
indicates that the location is not as walkable or building users would most likely rely heavily on
public or private transit for daily activities.

Projects must be located on a site with a Walk Score® of at least 60. Sites without an official
Walk Score® can still be used. In areas where Walk Score® is not applicable, use local surveys
and observational studies instead.

Location efficiency
Locating a project close to existing and publicly available uses can significantly improve the
neighborhoods’ quality of life and achieve multiple social benefits. People have easy access to
basic amenities such as parks, restaurants, supermarkets, medical clinics, and educational
facilities, which promote a vibrant and interconnected community. Increased walkability
encourages building users to walk or bike to their destinations, promoting healthier, more active
lifestyles. A reduced dependence on cars directly results in reduced VMT, reduced GHG
emissions, and improved outdoor air quality.

The project team must map eligible existing uses or planned uses. Planned uses must be
available within one year of the date of a project’s certificate of occupancy. Existing and planned
uses must be classified with the use types in supplementary LEED guidance published by
USGBC. The team should conduct site visits and use satellite imagery or aerial photography to
map out the walking routes from the project’s main entrance to all eligible uses. To ensure a
diverse and balanced mix of amenities and services that cater to different needs (e.g., dining,
shopping, recreation, healthcare), the counted uses must represent at least three of the five
categories, exclusive of the building’s primary use category.

18
“Get your Walk Score®”, Walk Score®, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.walkscore.com/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 47
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All Confirmation that the project is located in a building
Base certified with LEED v4/v4.1 BD+C that earned the either the
Building LT Credit: Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT
Certified with Credit: Access to Quality Transit OR the project is located
LEED BD+C in a building certified with LEED v5 BD+C that earned the
LTc3: Compact and Connected Development.
Equivalent LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors Points
Earned
Option 2. Combined Vicinity map showing buildable land, any nonbuildable land
Surrounding Density excluded, project site, and footprint of existing buildings
Density within 0.25 miles (400 meters) offset from the project site.
LEED v5 Surrounding Density calculator, completed for
Combined Density.
Combined density (in sq. ft. per acre or sq. meters per
hectare).
Separate Vicinity map showing buildable land, any non-buildable land
Density excluded, project site, and footprints of existing residential
and nonresidential buildings within 0.25 miles (400 meters)
offset from the project site.
LEED v5 Surrounding Density calculator, completed for
Separate Density.
Nonresidential commercial density (in floor area ratio).
Residential density (in dwelling units per acre or per
hectare).
Option 3. All Vicinity map indicating the project location, location of the
Access to transit stop(s), routes serving each stop, and the walking
Transit routes (with walking distance noted) between the location
of the project functional entry and the stop(s).
Weekday and weekend route schedules showing the
frequency of trips and service.
For any planned transit service, documentation of planned
transit stops and stations sited, funded, and under
construction by the date of the project's certificate of
occupancy and scheduled for completion within 24 months
of that date
Option 4. Location Walk Score® document (e.g., screenshot) showing the
Walkable Efficiency score for the project's address.
Location Project's Walk Score®.
Public Vicinity map and table of uses identified by type of
Uses
uses accessible within a walking distance of 0.5 miles
(800 meters).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Walk Score® (walkscore.com)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 48
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Location and Transportation Credit —
and Restoration

TRANSPORTATION DEMAND MANAGEMENT

LTc2
1–4 points

INTENT
To reduce pollution and land development effects from automobile use through encouraging
alternative transportation networks. To promote more livable and healthy communities through
reduced vehicle miles traveled (VMT) and reduced associated emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–4
Transportation Demand Assessment
AND
Option 1. Parking 1–3
Path 1. Reduce Parking 1–3
AND/OR
Path 2. Unbundle Parking 2
AND/OR
Option 2. Active Travel Facilities 1–3
Path 1. Base Building certified with LEED BD+C 1–2
OR
Path 2. Active Travel Facilities in Base Building 1–2
AND/OR
Option 3. Compliant Base Building 1
Path 1. Bicycle Network and Storage 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Base Building Shower and Changing Facilities 1
AND/OR
Path 3. Tenant Space Shower and Changing Facilities 1
AND/OR
Path 4. Bicycle Maintenance 1

Transportation Demand Assessment

Assess the number of VMT and carbon emissions associated with regular building occupants’
travel to and from the project building as outlined below:

• Estimate the annual VMT.

• Estimate annual baseline case for carbon emissions.
• Assess low-carbon transportation options.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 49
 • Estimate annual proposed case for carbon emissions.
• Estimate the total reduction of carbon emissions between annual baseline case and
annual proposed case.

Projects that participate in a local or regional government-mandated TDM program satisfy the
transportation demand assessment requirement. Residential affordable housing projects in an
infill location or an office, mixed-use, residential, or retail project located within a transit priority
area, or within 0.5 miles (800 meters) walking distance of an existing or planned major transit
stop, are exempt from the above requirements.

AND

Implement one or more of the following strategies for up to a total of 4 points.

Option 1. Parking (1–3 points)

PATH 1. REDUCE PARKING (1–3 POINTS)
Locate in a building that provides a reduction in parking capacity using the base ratios for
parking spaces found in the Institute of Transportation Engineers Parking Generation Manual,
sixth edition, or a comparable resource applied by a qualified transportation engineer or planner
or in supplementary LEED guidance. Points are awarded according to Table 1.

Table 1. Points for percentage of reduced parking capacity

Reduced parking percentage Points
30% reduction from base ratios 1
60% reduction from base ratios 2
100% reduction from base ratios (no parking) 3

AND/OR

PATH 2. UNBUNDLE PARKING (2 POINTS)

Unbundle parking by purchasing parking separately from the tenant space lease. Do not provide
free parking for employees. Implement a daily, monthly, or annual parking fee at a cost equal to
or greater than the local market rate for public or private parking.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 50
Option 2. Active Travel Facilities (1–3 points)
PATH 1. BASE BUILDING CERTIFED WITH LEED BD+C (1–2 POINTS)
Locate in a building certified with LEED BD+C under LEED v4 or LEED v4.1 that earned LTc:
Bicycle Facilities, or in a building certified with LEED v5 BD+C that earned LTc2: Transportation
Demand Management.

Table 2. Points for LEED BD+C certified building

Certification Credit name Points earned Equivalent LEED

ID+C points
LEED v4 or LEED v4.1 LTc: Bicycle Facilities 1 2
LEED v5 LTc2: Transportation Demand 1 1
Management 2 2

OR

PATH 2. ACTIVE TRAVEL FACILITIES IN BASE BUILDING (1–2 POINTS)

Locate in a building that meets the requirements for Option 3, Compliant Base Building, Path 1,
for 1 point. Meet Option 3, Compliant Base Building, Path 2, for 1 additional point.

AND/OR

Option 3. Compliant Base Building (1 point)

PATH 1. BICYCLE NETWORK AND STORAGE (1 POINT)

Bicycle Network
Locate the project in a building such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a
600-foot (180-meter) walking distance or cycling distance of a bicycle network that meets the
following criteria:

• It is a contiguous network that spans a distance of at least 3 miles (4,800 meters).

• It consists of bicycle paths, lanes, multiuse trails, or streets with a maximum speed limit
of 25 mph (40 kph). Sidewalks where local code permits bicycles are acceptable.

Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the
certificate of occupancy and are scheduled for completion within three years of that date.

AND

Bicycle Storage
Provide short-term bicycle storage within a 600-foot (180-meter) walking distance of any main
entrance, and with no fewer than four storage spaces per building.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 51
Provide long-term bicycle storage within a 300-foot (90-meter) walking distance of any
functional entry, but with no fewer than four storage spaces per building in addition to the short-
term bicycle storage spaces.

Points are awarded according to Table 3 below.

Shared micromobility storage, bicycle-sharing stations, and/or publicly available bicycle parking
may be counted for up to 50% of the required short-term and long-term storage space if it meets
the maximum allowable walking distance, and is not double-counted (i.e., the short-term and the
long-term storage spaces are counted separately), and the storage location is communicated to
the building occupants and visitors.

Table 3. Number of spaces required for short- and long-term bicycle storage

Storage type Commercial, institutional, healthcare Retail

At least two short-term bicycle storage
At least 2.5% of all peak visitors but no spaces for every 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m.)
Short-term
fewer than four spaces per building but no fewer than two storage spaces per
building

At least 5% of all regular building At least 5% of regular building occupants

occupants but no fewer than four storage but no fewer than two storage spaces per
Long-term
spaces per building in addition to short- building in addition to the short-term
term storage bicycle storage spaces

NOTE: Healthcare projects can exclude patients from the regular building occupant count for long-term storage.

AND/OR

PATH 2. BASE BUILDING SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES (1 POINT)

Locate the facilities in a building that provides access to on-site showers with changing facilities
for 1% of all regular building occupants. Off-site showers and changing facilities are acceptable
if they meet the needs of all occupants and are within a walking distance of 0.25 miles (400
meters).

AND/OR

PATH 3. TENANT SPACE SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES (1 POINT)

Provide at least one shower within the tenant space with a changing facility for the first 100
regular building occupants and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants
thereafter.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 52
Large Occupancy Projects
Provide at least one on-site shower within the tenant space with a changing facility for the first
100 regular project occupants and one additional shower for every 150 regular project
occupants thereafter, up to 999 regular project occupants. Thereafter, provide:

• One additional shower for every 500 regular project occupants, for an additional 1,000–
4,999 regular project occupants
• One additional shower for every 1,000 regular building occupants, for an additional
5,000+ regular project occupants

AND/OR

PATH 4. BICYCLE MAINTENANCE (1 POINT)

Provide a permanently secured bicycle repair station that includes a complete set of tools, and
an air pump securely fastened to the repair stand in the area dedicated to long-term bicycle
storage.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit provides a holistic approach to reducing transportation impacts and supporting
decarbonization efforts for projects by managing travel behavior and enhancing accessibility
options. TDM includes both facility-related and behavioral strategies to encourage sustainable
transportation choices. TDM strategies may target facilities specifically related to the project,
such as bicycle maintenance stations, secure bicycle storage, and access to connected bicycle
networks (paths, trails, designated bicycle lanes). These strategies, however, go hand in hand
with behavioral approaches that involve offering incentives or disincentives, conducting
educational campaigns, and promoting flexible work locations. TDM helps reduce VMT, lower
parking demand, support ridesharing, and encourage public transit use by evaluating the current
and projected transportation demands of project occupants. The credit examines commuting
patterns and behaviors of the occupants by estimating VMT and assessing alternative mode
choices, making TDM a comprehensive framework for sustainable transportation planning.

Project teams pursuing this credit should adopt from a list of TDM strategies that can be
implemented in the project to model good transportation habits.

Transportation Demand Assessment

Sustainable transportation measures require assessing the number of VMT and carbon
emissions associated with the regular project occupants’ travel to and from the project building.
VMT and carbon emissions are important metrics in evaluating the impacts of transportation and
efforts toward creating a more sustainable transportation system. They provide critical data for

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 53
guidance in creating effective TDM strategies and insights in designing projects that aim to
reduce travel distances, encourage alternative transportation modes, and lead to more
sustainable and resilient communities. USGBC will provide a calculator to help to complete the
calculations below.

Projects that participate in a local or regional government-mandated TDM program are

considered to have met the Transportation Demand Assessment requirement because these
programs are typically designed to achieve the same goals of reducing traffic congestion,
lowering emissions, and supporting more sustainable transportation systems. Residential
affordable housing projects in infill locations, as well as office, mixed-use, residential, or retail
projects located within a Transit Priority Area or within a walking distance of 0.5 miles (800
meters) from an existing or planned major transit stop, are exempt from the TDM assessment
requirements because their location inherently promotes sustainable transportation options,
high trip frequency, and close proximity to sustainable transportation alternatives.

Estimate the annual VMT

Project teams must estimate the annual VMT as part of assessing transportation demand. This
process involves determining the number of days the project will be occupied, identifying the
number of regular project occupants commuting to and from the site — using either actual
occupant data or supplementary LEED guidance published by USGBC — and calculating the
VMT. Project teams can refer to federal transportation reports, data from metropolitan planning
organizations, and information from local or state transportation departments to estimate
commute distances accurately. If local data cannot be found, consider a regional source. These
resources provide insights into average commute lengths, which help refine the VMT calculation
and support the development of effective TDM strategies.

Equation 1. Calculating the total annual VMT

𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 ×
𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑎𝑎 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 × 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉

Estimate annual baseline case for carbon emissions

Project teams must estimate the annual baseline case for carbon emissions. Teams should
identify a vehicle emissions factor for a typical passenger vehicle, such as the amount of CO2
emitted per unit of distance traveled. This factor serves as the foundation for estimating
transportation-related emissions from commuting to and from the project building in a single-
occupancy vehicle. While it is not necessary to account for multiple fuel types or vehicle models,
the emissions factor should reflect an average vehicle commonly used in the region. All trips are
assumed to be a single mode of travel. Once the emissions factor is determined, teams must
calculate annual baseline emissions based on a worst-case scenario, which assumes maximum

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 54
vehicle usage and commuting distances without mitigation efforts. This baseline provides a
comprehensive view of the project's potential carbon impact from commuting transportation.

Equation 2. Calculating annual baseline case for transportation emissions

𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 × 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓

Assess low-carbon transportation options

After the baseline for annual transportation emissions has been established, teams must assess
the potential for reducing transportation-related emissions by utilizing data from national census,
metropolitan planning organizations, and transportation departments at local or state
governments. Teams should use other relevant data sources to estimate actual travel patterns,
if local or state data cannot be found. Based on the findings, teams must also estimate the
portion of regular project occupants likely to use these alternative and active transportation
options for their daily commutes to and from the project building. Teams are strongly
encouraged to prioritize Option 1: Parking and Option 2: Active Travel Facilities, as these
options support the promotion of low-carbon transportation strategies. Teams should also
account for unique conditions at the larger building site and assess whether the travel estimates
are realistic. Consider transportation facilities that are available to all tenants in the building.

Key guiding questions include:

• Are there bikeable routes leading to the project?

• Is there sufficient sidewalk connectivity?
• Is the project within walking distance of a residential neighborhood?

Walking and biking trips, which assume zero emissions, can significantly offset the overall
transportation carbon footprint of the project.

Estimate annual proposed case for carbon emissions

After assessing the low-carbon transportation option, project teams must determine the
anticipated number of regular project occupants who will commute using single-occupancy
vehicles, based on a realistic assessment of travel patterns to and from the site. This analysis
should account for various commuting methods, such as walking, cycling, public transit or
carpooling, and estimate the remaining number of individuals who are likely to rely on single-
occupancy vehicles. For example, if 50 employees are expected to regularly walk to and from
work, these individuals would produce no vehicle emissions for the year.

Equation 3. Calculate annual transportation emissions

𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 55
 (𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 ×
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑎𝑎 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 ×
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉) 𝑥𝑥 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓

Estimate the total reduction of carbon emissions

Project teams are required to calculate the difference in emissions to get the total estimated
reduction of carbon emissions between the annual baseline and proposed case.

Option 1. Parking
TDM strategies, like reducing parking spaces and implementing parking fees, tackle broader
land use and cost challenges tied to parking. By decreasing the need for large parking facilities,
TDM conserves valuable land and reduces infrastructure and maintenance expenses,
promoting more sustainable transportation options that align with project efficiency and
environmental goals.

Limiting parking availability also helps curb induced demand, as fewer parking spaces
discourage single-occupancy vehicle (SOV) trips and encourage alternative transportation
modes. Another effective approach is unbundling parking, which separates the cost of parking
from building rentals or leases. For instance, a mixed-use office building leases commercial
spaces to businesses. Instead of including parking spaces as part of the standard lease
package, the building owner offers parking spaces as a separate, optional service.

PATH 1. REDUCE PARKING

Limiting parking availability also helps curb induced demand, as fewer parking spaces
discourage SOV trips and encourage alternative transportation modes. This path uses a parking
baseline against which reductions in parking supply can be compared.

First, identify the total baseline capacity of parking. Teams should determine the total baseline
parking capacity using the base ratios from The Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Parking
Generation Manual 19 or supplementary LEED guidance published by USGBC. If the project type
does not fit any base ratio category or if the tenant is not yet known, select the best
approximation (i.e., the most applicable land use type for the anticipated tenant) and provide a
narrative justifying this selection. For projects with multiple space types, calculate and
separately track the base ratio for each use and compute the total project baseline capacity.

Next, teams must identify the total provided capacity they will supply based on their needs
assessment. Count both new and existing spaces.

19
“Parking Generation Manual”, The Institute for Transportation Engineers, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.ite.org/technical-
resources/topics/trip-and-parking-generation/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 56
Last, teams must determine whether the total provided capacity is less than the baseline
capacity calculated from the base ratios above. Calculate the percent parking reduction. Teams
should design projects that minimize parking demand. Integrate TDM strategies to reduce the
project’s parking demand, especially if achieving a significant parking reduction is the primary
goal.

Equation 4. Percentage of parking capacity reduction

(𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 − 𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊)

𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷 𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓 = × 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏
𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄

PATH 2. UNBUNDLED PARKING

In tenant-occupied projects, parking spaces are frequently bundled with leases, meaning
tenants pay for parking regardless of vehicle ownership. Unbundling parking spaces separates
parking costs from lease or purchase costs, allowing tenants who do not own a vehicle to save
money. This strategy helps reduce the parking demand for the project and can lower housing
costs, as tenants who do not require parking are not paying for it. More importantly, unbundling
brings visibility to the true cost of parking, which includes not only construction costs but also
land use, maintenance, environmental, social, and economic impacts.

For both tenant- and owner-occupied projects, an effective strategy is to charge market-rate
fees for parking spaces, aligning the cost with local rates and discouraging unnecessary car
use. In owner-occupied projects, this involves requiring all employees to pay for parking,
creating a consistent policy across occupants that encourages carpooling, active transportation,
and public transit use. By charging for parking at market rates, project teams reinforce the
understanding of parking’s true cost and promote more sustainable transportation choices.

To comply with this option, the project must unbundle all parking spaces within the project
boundary from the tenant lease or sales. The project must make this commitment for its entire
duration. This will allow tenants the option of renting or buying as many spaces as needed, with
an additional cost. It also allows projects that do not want parking spaces the option to save
money by not having the cost built into the rent.

Option 2. Active Travel Facilities

Active travel facilities promote sustainable, healthy, and efficient alternatives to car-based
transportation by providing comprehensive facilities that support cycling, e-bicycles, scooters,
and other eco-friendly travel modes. Essential components include secure storage for bikes,
well-designed on-road facilities such as dedicated lanes and paths, access to showers and

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 57
changing areas, and bike maintenance stations. Together, these elements create an integrated
system that enables convenient, active travel options for daily commuting and short trips. In
recent years, these modes have surged in popularity; as of 2017, there were around 1,250
bicycle-sharing systems globally with over 10 million bicycles. 20 Active transportation not only
reduces carbon emissions and improves public health through increased physical activity but
also helps manage transportation demand by reducing traffic congestion and lessening the
need for parking infrastructure.

PATH 1: BASE BUILDING CERTIFIED WITH LEED BD+C

Projects must locate the LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors project within a building certified with
LEED BD+C under LEED v4 or LEED v4.1 that earned the LT credit: Bicycle Facilities, or in a
building certified with LEED BD+C under LEED v5 that earned the LTc4: Transportation
Demand Management. Early collection of certification information can streamline the process by
identifying relevant credits and systems.

PATH 2. ACTIVE TRAVEL FACILITIES IN BASE BUILDING

Projects must be in a building that meets the criteria for Option 3: Compliant Base Building, Path
1 to earn one point. To earn an additional point, they must also meet the requirements for
Option 3: Compliant Base Building, Path 2.

Option 3. Compliant Base Building

Active travel facilities promote sustainable, healthy, and efficient alternatives to car-based
transportation by providing comprehensive facilities that support cycling, e-bicycles, scooters,
and other eco-friendly travel modes. Essential components include secure storage for bikes,
well-designed on-road facilities such as dedicated lanes and paths, access to showers and
changing areas, and bike maintenance stations. Together, these elements create an integrated
system that enables convenient, active travel options for daily commuting and short trips. In
recent years, these modes have surged in popularity, and, as of 2017, there were around 1,250
bicycle-sharing systems globally with over 10 million bicycles. 21 Active transportation not only
reduces carbon emissions and improves public health through increased physical activity but
also helps manage transportation demand by reducing traffic congestion and lessening the
need for vehicle parking infrastructure.

20
“Sustainable Transport, Sustainable Development: Interagency Report for Second Global Sustainable Transport Conference,”
United Nations, accessed April 5, 2025, https://sdgs.un.org/sites/default/files/2021-
10/Transportation%20Report%202021_FullReport_Digital.pdf.
21
“Sustainable Transport, Sustainable Development: Interagency Report for Second Global Sustainable Transport Conference,”
United Nations, accessed April 5, 2025, https://sdgs.un.org/sites/default/files/2021-
10/Transportation%20Report%202021_FullReport_Digital.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 58
PATH 1. BICYCLE NETWORK AND STORAGE
To promote bicycle-friendly design, this path rewards two factors: the provision of long- and
short-term bicycle storage, and access to a bicycle network (paths, trails, designated bicycle
lanes, and slow-speed roadways). Project teams consider short-term and long-term bicycle
storage capacity separately because visitors and regular project occupants have different
bicycle storage needs. Being adjacent to a bicycle network means that project occupants can
more easily bicycle to and from the project building.

Bicycle network
Project teams should identify bicycle network within a 600-foot (180-meter) walking distance or
bicycling distance of a functional entry and/or bicycle storage in project and gather information
and specifications on distance from the project site and street speed limit for the bicycle
network. A bicycle network must be a contiguous system that spans a distance of three miles
(4,800 meters). The three-mile contiguous path refers to the total length and does not need to
span three miles in a single direction. For example, it could consist of one mile to the north and
two miles to the south, totaling three miles. The bicycle network must also consist of bicycle
lanes, bicycle trails, and streets with a maximum speed limit of 25 mph (40 km/h). Both bicycle
lanes and bicycle trails must meet the credit’s width requirements. Sidewalks where bicycles are
allowed are acceptable.

Teams must locate the project close to an existing or planned bicycle network that meets credit
requirements for uses within the specified distance from the project boundary. For planned
bicycle trails or lanes, confirm the schedule for funding and completion.

Bicycle storage
Teams are required to determine the number of expected occupants in the project, the number
of bicycle storage spaces and shared mobility storage, and the stations required. Once the
number of bicycle storage spaces are determined, install the short-term and long-term bicycle
storage within 600 feet (180 meters) and 300 feet (90 meters) of walking distance from any
main entrance and functional entry, respectively, of the project building. Shared micromobility
storage facilities, such as those for e-scooters and e-bicycles, as well as bicycle sharing stations
and publicly accessible bicycle parking, can account for up to 50% of the required short-term
and long-term bicycle storage needs to encourage the use of communal, readily available
transportation solutions, and reduce the need for dedicated on-site storage infrastructure.
Teams must also clearly communicate the locations of bicycle storage to project occupants and
visitors, whether through building signage, regular newsletters, or posting transportation options
to a company’s internal website.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 59
For commercial, institutional, and healthcare projects, use Equation 5 to determine the number
of short- and long-term bicycle storage. Healthcare projects can exclude patients from regular
project occupant count for long-term storage.

Equation 5. Calculating bicycle storage for commercial, institutional, schools and healthcare
projects
𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜-𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = (𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 × 0.025) ≥ 4
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿-𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = (𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 occupants 𝑥𝑥 0.05) ≥ 4

For retail projects, use Equation 6 to determine the number of short- and long-term bicycle
storage:

Equation 6. Calculating bicycle storage for retail projects

(𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 𝒈𝒈𝒈𝒈𝒈𝒈𝒈𝒈𝒈𝒈 𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 (𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔 𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐 𝒎𝒎²)

𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐-𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕 𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔 = � � ≥ 𝟐𝟐
𝟓𝟓𝟓𝟓𝟓𝟓𝟓𝟓 𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐 𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒

𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿-𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = (𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 × 0.05) ≥ 2

PATH 2. BASE BUILDING SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES

Providing adequate infrastructure for active commuting, such as lockers and changing/shower
facilities, plays a key role in promoting physical activity for all project occupants, not just cyclists.
These amenities are especially beneficial for those who may engage in exercise or other
physical activities before work. Offering these facilities signals to occupants that active lifestyles,
including active commuting, encourage and support a culture that values health and wellness.

Projects must locate in a building that provides access to on-site showers with changing
facilities for 1% of all regular project occupants. Off-site showers and changing facilities are
acceptable if they meet the needs of all occupants and are within a walking distance of 0.25
miles (400 meters).

Project teams should gather occupant information and determine the number of shower and
changing facilities required, using Equation 7. Teams must provide vicinity or area map
indicating off-site shower and changing facilities.

Equation 7. Calculating the number of shower and changing facilities

𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵 𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐 𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇 = 𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹 𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑 𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐 × 𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 60
PATH 3. TENANT SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES
Project teams should gather occupant information and determine the number of shower and
changing facilities required, using Equation 8. Teams must provide vicinity or area map
indicating off-site shower and changing facilities.

Equation 8. Calculating the number of shower and changing facilities for tenant shower and
changing facilities
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ≤ 100, 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 1

𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜−100

𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 > 100, 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 1 +
150

For large-occupancy projects with additional 1,000–4,999 regular building occupants, use
Equation 9 to determine the number of shower and changing facilities required.

Equation 9. Calculating the number of shower and changing facilities for large occupancy of
1,000 or more
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜−1000
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑜𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 > 1000, 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 1 +
500

𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑗𝑗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜−5000

𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 > 5000, 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 1 +
1000

PATH 4. BICYCLE MAINTENANCE

Offering on-site bicycle maintenance services is a strategy to promote active commuting. By
providing access to basic bicycle repair tools and air-pump stations, projects can make cycling a
more convenient and reliable option for commuters. This proactive support ensures that bicycles
remain in good working condition and encourages more individuals to adopt active commuting
as part of their daily routine.

Project teams should provide a description of the available bicycle services and facilities, along
with a map or site plan, indicating the location of the bicycle repair station within the designated
long-term bicycle storage area to ensure that occupants are aware of where to access these
resources, making it easier for them to maintain their bicycles and promoting a cycling-
supportive environment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 61
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All Not Claiming USGBC TDM Assessment calculator
TDA Exemption Baseline VMT
Proposed VMT
Baseline Emissions from VMT
Proposed Emissions from VMT
Description of availability of alternative low-carbon
and active travel options.
Claiming TDA Documentation showing participation in a local or
Exemption regional government mandated TDM program.
Documentation showing project is an affordable
housing project in an infill location.
Documentation showing project (office, mixed-use,
residential, or retail) is located within a Transit Priority
Area or within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance
of an existing or planned major transit stop.
Option 1. Path 1. Reduce Calculations demonstrating percent reduction in the
Parking Parking parking capacity from baseline.
Parking Plan or Site Plan showing the LEED boundary
and the parking used by the project building.
Path 2. Parking Narrative identifying the parking fees and explaining
Fee how the rate charged is equal to or greater than the
local market rate for parking.
Documentation confirming local market parking rate.
Confirmation that free parking is not provided for
employees.
Option 2. Path 1. LEED LEED Certified Base Building project ID.
Active Certified Base Confirmation that the project is located in a LEED
Travel Building v4/v4.1 certified building that earned the LT: Bicycle
Facilities Facilities Credit, or in a LEED v5 certified building that
earned LTc4: Transportation Demand Management.
Equivalent LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors points
earned.
Path 2. Active Refer to Option 3. Compliant Base Building, Path 1,
Travel Facilities and Option 3. Compliant Base Building, Path 2.
in Base Building
Option 3. Path 1. Bicycle Vicinity map showing bicycle network meeting the
Compliant Network and required criteria and walking/bicycling distance of
Base Storage functional building entrance and/or bicycle storage to
Building existing or planned bicycle network.
Confirmation bicycle network meets all criteria
identified in the credit requirements.
Site Plan showing main and functional building
entrances, short-term bicycle storage and long-term
bicycle storage and shared micromobility storage (if
applicable), walking distance from short-term storage

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 62
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
to the main entrance and from long-term storage to a
functional entrance.

Calculations documenting the percentage of

occupants for which short-term bike storage is
provided.
Calculations documenting the percentage of
occupants for which long-term bike storage is
provided.
Path 2. Base Site plan showing shower and changing facilities
Building Shower location and walking distance within 0.25 miles (400
and Changing meters) for off-site facilities.
Facilities Calculation documenting the percentage of regular
building occupants with access provided to showers
with changing facilities.
For large occupancy projects: the number of project
occupants needed to determine the number of on-site
showers required.
For large occupancy projects: the number of on-site
showers with changing facilities provided.
Path 3. Tenant Plans showing tenant space shower and changing
Space Shower facilities.
and Changing The number of regular project occupants to determine
Facilities the number of showers with changing facilities
required within the tenant space.
Path 4. Bicycle Evidence of a permanently secured bicycle
Maintenance maintenance facility demonstrating a complete set of
tools and air pump securely fastened to the repair
stand (e.g., product information from the
manufacturer, photographs, contract specification).
Evidence of location of the bicycle maintenance
facility in the area dedicated to long-term bicycle
storage (e.g., contract documents).
Retail Path 1. Bicycle Number of short-term bike storage spaces provided.
Network and
Storage

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) Parking Generation Manual, 6th Edition
(ite.org/technical-resources/topics/trip-and-parking-generation).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 63
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Location and Transportation Credit and Restoration

ELECTRIC VEHICLES
LTc3
1–2 points

INTENT
To encourage the use of electric vehicles and infrastructure. To help reduce the negative health
effects on communities by lowering GHG emissions and other pollutants emitted from
conventionally fueled cars and trucks.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–2
Option 1: Base Building Certified with LEED BD+C 1–2
OR
Option 2: Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment 1–2

Projects can earn up to 2 points by meeting Option 1 or Option 2.

Option 1. Base Building Certified with LEED BD+C (1–2 points)

Locate in a building certified with LEED v4/v4.1 BD+C or LEED v5 BD+C that earned LTc:
Green/Electric Vehicles.

Table 1. Equivalent ID+C points for building certified with LEED BD+C
Certification Credit name Points Equivalent
earned ID+C points
LEED v4 or LEED v4.1 LTc: Green/Electric Vehicles 1 1

LEED v5 LTc3: Electric Vehicles 1 1

2 2

OR

Option 2. Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) (1–2 points)

Locate in a building that has EVSE meeting the thresholds listed in Table 2. EVSE must meet
the following criteria:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 64
 • Provide Level 2 or Level 3 charging capacity per the manufacturer’s requirements and
the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
• Provide 208–240 volts or greater for each required space.
• Meet the connected functionality criteria for ENERGY STAR®-certified EVSE and be
capable of responding to time-of-use market signals (e.g., price).
• Include at least one EV charging station for an accessible parking space at least 9 feet
(2.5 meters) wide with a 5-foot (1.5-meter) access aisle and have charging station
accessibility features for use by persons with mobility, ambulatory, and visual disabilities.

Table 2. Points for installed EVSE (% of total building parking spaces)

Commercial minimum EVSE parking Points
5% or at least two spaces, whichever is greater 1
10% or at least four spaces whichever is greater 2
Residential minimum EVSE parking Points
10% or at least five spaces, whichever is greater 1
15% or at least 10 spaces, whichever is greater 2

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit addresses the advancement of EV charging solutions in buildings. Option 1 rewards
tenants for prioritizing a base building certified with LEED BD+C which has implemented EVSE
and achieved compliance with the LEED BD+C LT credit Green or EVs under LEED v4, v4.1, or
v5. Option 2 provides an achievement path for projects, not previously LEED-certified, that
install EVSE within the base building.

Option 1. Base Building Certified with LEED BD+C

Projects pursuing LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors certification rely on base building elements
for many credits. Prioritizing base buildings that have implemented sustainable practices or
achieved LEED BD+C certification gives tenants the opportunity to leverage initiatives for their
spaces.

For LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors projects located in a building certified with LEED BD+C,
teams comply with Option 1 if the base building earned points for the LEED v4 LT credit Green
Vehicles, LEED v4.1 LT credit EV or LEED v5 LTc5 Electric Vehicles.

Determining LEED BD+C base building compliance

The LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors team must demonstrate that the base building achieved
certification under the LEED v4, LEED v4.1, or LEED v5 BD+C: Core and Shell rating system
and earned points for the respective Green Vehicles or Electric Vehicles credit, per Table 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 65
USGBC maintains an online directory of certified projects. Information in the directory includes
rating system version, level of certification, a copy of the final scorecard, and the project’s
unique LEED identification number. Teams can access the project directory at:
usgbc.org/projects.

For projects not listed in the USGBC project directory, the LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors
team must contact the base building owner or property manager to validate the project
information.

Example calculation 1
A tenant develops a new office space in a LEED v5 BD+C: Core and Shell Silver
base building. The LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors team confirms that the
project earned two points for LEED v5 BD+C: Core and Shell LTc5 Electric
Vehicles,

Option 1. EVSE
The LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors team also earns two points using Option 1.

Option 2. EVSE
Option 2 offers a compliance path for projects not located in a base building certified with LEED
BD+C, or for a base building previously certified with LEED BD+C that did not earn points for LT
credit Green Vehicles (LEED v4), EV (LEED v4.1), or LTc5: Electric Vehicles (LEED v5). Tenant
fit-outs developed in a base building with sufficient EVSE for all building occupants earn up to
two points for this option.

EVSE minimum requirements

All EVSE must have a Level 2 or Level 3 charging capacity, with dedicated services of 208–240
volts for each required space.

ENERGY STAR®-certified EVSE are verified to meet performance claims by manufacturers and
fully tested for safety and energy use. 22 EVSE do not require an ENERGY STAR® certification;
however, all installed EVSE must meet the ENERGY STAR® connected functionality criteria,
including capabilities of responding to time-of-use market signals.

22
“EV chargers”, ENERGY STAR®, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.energystar.gov/products/ev_chargers.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 66
Verify functionality requirements and ensure that equipment has the capability to integrate with
industry networks and connect to other devices. Devices may include Wi-Fi routers and electric
utility energy management and price signals.

For projects integrating EVSE with demand response programs or load flexibility and
management strategies, use guidance in EAc5: Grid Interactive.

Minimum number of spaces and accessible parking requirements

Commercial projects must demonstrate that the base building includes EVSE for at least 5% of
the total vehicle parking capacity, and no fewer than two spaces. Use Equation 1 to determine
the number of spaces required to meet the 5% threshold. If the equation does not result in a
whole number, round up to the next whole number.

Projects must demonstrate that the base building includes EVSE for the minimum number of
parking spaces, according to Table 2. Percentage thresholds only apply if the minimum number
of installed spaces meets or exceeds those listed in Table 2.

Equation 1. Commercial minimum EVSE parking

𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀. # 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 p𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (c𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜) = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 # 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 0.05 ≥ 2 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠

Residential projects must demonstrate that the base building includes EVSE for at least 10% of
the total spaces, and no fewer than five spaces. Determine the minimum number of spaces,
using Equation 2.

Equation 2. Residential minimum EVSE parking

𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀. # 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 p𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (r𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒) = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 # 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 0.10 ≥ 5 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠

Projects that double the number of spaces, calculated in Equations 1 or 2, can achieve an
additional point under this option.

For all projects, provide at least one EV charging station in an accessible parking space. The
charging station must have accessibility features that enable a person with mobility, ambulatory,
or visual limitations to equal access the EVSE.

Additional considerations
Projects should consider installing the accessible space in a preferred parking
location. Locating the accessible space close to the building encourages the use
of EVs while providing a space with close proximity to the entrance for persons
with disabilities.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 67
Example Calculation 2
A tenant develops new office space in a building with 125 surface lot parking spaces. The base
building does not have a previous LEED certification. The surface lot includes charging stations
for seven parking spaces, including one accessible parking space. The LEED ID+C:
Commercial Interiors project earns one point under Option 2.

125 × 0.05 = 12.5 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 7 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 1 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All LEED-certified base building project ID.
Certified Confirmation that the project is located in a LEED
Base v4/v4.1 certified base building or LEED v5 BD+C v5
Building certified base building that earned the LT Credit
with LEED Green/Electric Vehicles.
BD+C Equivalent LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors points
earned.
Option 2. Site plan indicating the total number of parking
EVSE spaces used by the project and the total number of
spaces with EVSE, including clear identification of at
least 1 EVSE in an accessible parking space.
Confirmation that the accessible parking space is at
least 9 feet (2.5 meters) wide with a 5-foot (1.5-meter)
access aisle and has charging station accessibility
features for use by persons with mobility, ambulatory
and visual limitations.
Calculation documenting the percentage of parking
spaces with EVSE (including break-out for accessible
parking spaces).
Evidence that EVSE meet all criteria identified in the
credit requirements (for example, product information
from manufacturer or contract specification).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• SAE Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772 (sae.org)
• SAE Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler (sae.org)
• IEC 62196 of the International Electrotechnical Commission (webstore.iec.ch)
• ENERGY STAR® (energystar.gov)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 68
WATER EFFICIENCY (WE)
OVERVIEW
LEED v5 integrates water efficiency with new stewardship strategies, redefining water as a
valuable and limited resource. The WE category encourages projects to conserve potable to
safeguard ecosystems, reduce energy use, and boost resilience on-site and in the wider
community.

In the LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors rating system, projects are rewarded for selecting
building locations that support their water stewardship plans. While global water efficiency has
improved, water stress and scarcity remain pressing challenges, with approximately 2.4 billion
people living in water-stressed regions as of 2020. 23 Climate change and population growth
intensify these issues, emphasizing the importance of adaptable, forward-thinking resource
management plans.

The connections between efficiency and stewardship are most evident within the whole project
water use strategy (WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency). Rather than isolating individual
components, this approach encourages comprehensive water consumption assessments.
Originally piloted in LEED v4.1, this strategy has become a permanent feature in LEED v5.

This stewardship approach aligns with growing market interest in alternative water use, seen in
water-limited regions like California. 24 By incorporating nontraditional water sources, projects
can reduce reliance on potable supplies, alleviating strain on overburdened systems (WEc2:
Enhanced Water Efficiency).

Decarbonization
Water efficiency can significantly reduce energy consumption and carbon emissions. For
example, letting your faucet run for five minutes consumes about as much energy as letting a
60-watt light bulb run for 14 hours. 25 LEED v5 advances decarbonization efforts by reducing the
energy use linked to inefficiencies within water treatment, transportation, distribution, and
heating (WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency, WEc1: Water Metering and Leak Detection).
Additionally, newly installed appliances must meet high performance requirements to ensure
that future water use meets ambitious performance targets (WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency).

23
1. “SDG Indicators: Clean Water and Sanitation,” United Nations, accessed April 5, 2025,
https://unstats.un.org/sdgs/report/2023/goal-06/.
24
“Water Reuse Case Study: Los Angeles County, California | U.S. EPA”, U.S. Environental Protection Agency, January 31, 2025,
https://www.epa.gov/waterreuse/water-reuse-case-study-los-angeles-county-california.
25
“Why Water Efficiency | WaterSense | U.S. EPA.” U.S. Environental Protection Agency, January 17, 2017,
https://www.19january2017snapshot.epa.gov/www3/watersense/our_water/why_water_efficiency.html.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 69
Quality of life
Reducing reliance on limited water resources enables it to go further for a wider array of
purposes and community members. Conserving potable water resources and identifying
opportunities for additional savings — by tracking down consumption both indoors and outdoors
— enables projects to prepare for a resilient future where needs are met (WEc1: Water Metering
and Leak Detection).

Ecological conservation and restoration

Through water reduction and optimization strategies, projects ease the strain on ecosystems
and preserve vital resources. Submetering and leak detection sensors can help to minimize
water waste from leaks or system inefficiencies. Through early leak identification, projects can
avoid potential water damage and ensure conservation efforts are on track (WEc1: Water
Metering and Leak Detection). Real-time data from these systems enables building managers
and tenants to take immediate action, ensuring conservation goals are met (WEc1: Water
Metering and Leak Detection).

By embracing the strategies in the WE category, projects not only protect one of the planet’s
most essential resources, but also set the foundation for a more resilient, sustainable, and
equitable future for all.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 70
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Water Efficiency Prerequisite and Restoration

MINIMUM WATER EFFICIENCY

WEp1
REQUIRED

INTENT
To reduce potable water consumption and the associated energy consumption and carbon
emissions required to treat and distribute water and preserve potable water resources through
an efficiency-first approach.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency
Option 1. Prescriptive Path — Maximum Flush and Flow Rates
OR
Option 2. Performance Path — Calculated Reduction
AND
Minimum Equipment Water Efficiency

Meet all minimum water efficiency requirements outlined below, as applicable to the project
scope.

Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency

Meet the minimum water efficiency requirements for fixtures and fittings outlined below.

Projects located where standard supply pressure is different than the LEED baseline supply
pressure may calculate the water consumption of flow fixtures and fittings at the local standard
supply pressure.

OPTION 1. PRESCRIPTIVE PATH — MAXIMUM FLUSH AND FLOW RATES

For all new and existing fixtures and fittings within the tenant space, do not exceed the
maximum flush and flow rates listed in Table 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 71
Table 1. Maximum installed flush or flow rates for prescriptive path
Fixture or fitting Maximum installed flush Maximum installed
or flow rate (IP) flush or flow rate (SI)
Toilet (water closet)* 1.28 gpf** 4.8 lpf**
Urinal* 0.50 gpf 1.9 lpf
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.50 gpm 1.9 lpm
Private lavatory faucets* 1.50 gpm 5.7 lpm
Kitchen faucet 1.8 gpm 6.8 lpm
Showerhead* 2.00 gpm 7.6 lpm
*The WaterSense label is available for this fixture type. WaterSense-labeled fixtures are recommended for projects located in the
U.S. and Canada.
**For dual-flush toilets, the full flush volume shall be equal to or less than 1.28 gpf / 4.8 lpf; a weighted average cannot be used.

OR

OPTION 2. PERFORMANCE PATH — CALCULATED REDUCTION

For all the new and existing fixtures and fittings within the tenant space, reduce aggregate water
consumption by 20% from the baseline listed in Table 2.

Table 2. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings

Fixture or fitting Baseline installed flush or Baseline installed flush or
flow rate (IP) flow rate (SI)
Toilet (water closet)* 1.6 gpf** 6.0 lpf
Urinal* 1.0 gpf 3.8 lpf
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.50 gpm at 60 psi 1.9 lpm at 415 kPa
Private lavatory faucets* 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
Kitchen faucet 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
Showerhead* 2.5 gpm at 80 psi per shower 9.5 lpm at 550 kPa per
stall shower stall
*The WaterSense label is available for this fixture type. WaterSense-labeled fixtures are recommended for projects located in the
U.S. and Canada.
**For dual-flush toilets, the full flush volume shall be equal to or less than 1.28 gpf / 4.8 lpf; a weighted average cannot be used.

AND

Minimum Equipment Water Efficiency

Newly installed appliances, equipment, and processes within the tenant space must meet the
requirements listed in Tables 3 and 4 below. Existing appliances and equipment can be
excluded.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 72
Table 3. Standards for appliances
Appliance Requirement
Residential clothes washer ENERGY STAR® or performance equivalent

Commercial clothes washer ENERGY STAR® for commercial clothes washers with ≤
8.0 cubic feet (227 liters) of capacity or performance
equivalent
Residential dishwashers (standard and ENERGY STAR® or performance equivalent
compact)
Prerinse spray valves ≤ 1.3 gpm (4.9 lpm)
Ice machine ENERGY STAR® or performance equivalent and use either
air-cooled or closed-loop cooling, such as chilled or
condenser water system
Commercial Kitchen Equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Dishwasher Undercounter ≤ 1.6 gal/rack ≤ 6.0 liters/rack
Stationary, single ≤ 1.4 gal/rack ≤ 5.3 liters/rack
tank, door

Single tank, ≤ 1.0 gal/rack ≤ 3.8 liters/rack

conveyor

Multiple tank, ≤ 0.9 gal/rack ≤ 3.4 liters/rack

conveyor

Flight machine ≤ 180 gal/hr ≤ 680 liters/hr

Food steamer Boilerless/ ≤ 2 gal/hr/pan ≤ 7.5 liters/hr/pan
connectionless
Steam generator ≤ 5 gal/hr/pan ≤ 19 liters/hr/pan
Combination Countertop or stand ≤ 1.5 gal/pan ≤ 5.7 liters/pan
oven
Roll-in ≤ 1.5 gal/pan ≤ 5.7 liters/pan

Table 4. Standards for processes

Process Requirement
Heat rejection and cooling No once-through cooling with potable water for any equipment or
appliances that reject heat
Discharge water Where local requirements limit the discharge temperature of fluids into
temperature tempering a drainage system, use a tempering device that runs water only when
the equipment discharges hot water.
OR
Provide a thermal recovery heat exchanger that cools drained
discharge water below code-required maximum discharge
temperatures while simultaneously preheating inlet makeup water.
OR
If fluid is steam condensate, return it to boiler.
Venturi-type flow-through Use no device that generates a vacuum by means of water flow
vacuum generators or through the device into the drain.
aspirators

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 73
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite identifies minimum water efficiency requirements for fixtures, fittings,
appliances, and process water. Two compliance options exist for fixture and fitting efficiency.

Minimum Fixture and Fitting Efficiency

Reducing potable water use for fixtures and fittings begins with conservation efforts. Selecting
high-efficiency fixtures reduces water consumption and demand. The selection of high efficiency
fixtures can lead to savings from reductions in pump energy and water heating requirements.
For example, selecting these fixtures for lavatories, faucets, and showerheads reduces the
electrical load required for water heating.

Choose either a prescriptive or performance pathway to demonstrate compliance for fixture and
fitting efficiencies.

OPTION 1. PRESCRIPTIVE PATH — MAXIMUM FLUSH AND FLOW RATES

The prescriptive path offers a streamlined approach for the prerequisite. Table 1 outlines the
maximum allowable flush or flow rate for fixtures and fittings within the project boundary. All
fixtures and fittings installed must not exceed these maximum values.

For projects that install dual-flush toilets, the volume of the full flush must be used when
calculating flush rate. The full-flush rate must not exceed 1.28 gallons per flush (gpf) (4.8 liters
per flush (lpf)). Projects cannot use a fixture with a weighted average flow of 1.28 gpf (4.8 lpf).

Teams conducting projects in the U.S. and Canada are encouraged to use WaterSense-labeled
toilets (water closets), urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads. WaterSense-labeled
products require testing and verification for efficiency by third-party vendors. These products
comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA) specifications.

OPTION 2. PERFORMANCE PATH — CALCULATED REDUCTION

Using the performance-based approach, teams can maximize water conservation across all
applicable fixtures and fittings within the project boundary. Teams pursuing points under WEc2:
Enhanced Water Efficiency should consider Option 2. Performance Path — Calculated
Reduction to show prerequisite compliance. Compliance with WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency,
Option 2. Performance Path — Calculated Reduction and WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency,
Option 2. Fixture and Fittings — Calculated Reduction requires documented compliance
through the USGBC-approved calculator.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 74
Teams must prove a 20% reduction from the baseline water use to meet the minimum
prerequisite requirements.

Determining the baseline and design case water use

Teams must determine the project’s baseline water consumption. Total annual consumption
depends on project-specific data, including fitting and fixture types, flush and flow rates, the
number of full-time equivalents and visitors, annual days of operation, and gender ratios. This
data must remain consistent across all LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors credits, to maintain
the integrity of the submission.

The total number of uses for each fixture and fitting remains the same in the baseline and
design case calculations. The baseline flush and flow rates must use values from Table 2, which
represent the maximum allowed flush and flow rates. The design case must use designed
values that represent the fixtures and fittings installed in the project. For projects that have dual-
flush toilets, use the full-flush volume in the design case calculations. Do not use the weighted
average.

Develop calculations using the USGBC-approved calculator for this option to determine the
percent reduction.

AND

Minimum Equipment Water Efficiency

During design, teams must identify appliances, kitchen equipment, and processes within the
project boundary and specify products that meet the requirements of Tables 3 and 4. Projects in
the U.S. and Canada must use ENERGY STAR®-labeled equipment. For international projects,
a performance-based equivalent meets the requirement.

ENERGY STAR®-qualified appliances perform better than conventional appliances. For

example, ENERGY STAR® washing machines and dishwashers use 30% and 18% less water,
respectively, than their conventional counterparts. These appliances also consume 10% to 50%
less energy than conventional appliances. 26 Commercial kitchens employ processes that use a
high level of energy and water, such as dishwashing and food preparation.

26
“Guide to home water efficiency”, U.S. Department of Energy, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.energy.gov/sites/prod/files/guide_to_home_water_efficiency.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 75
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Contract document(s) specifying the project's commercial
kitchen equipment water use, including performance
specifications.
Contract document(s) specifying the project's process
water equipment, including performance specifications.
Contract document(s) specifying the project's appliances,
equipment, and process water equipment, including
performance specifications.
Contract document(s) specifying the project's plumbing
fixtures and fittings, including performance specifications.
LEED v5 Fixture and Fittings Efficiency calculator,
documenting the fixtures/fittings within the tenant space
and the occupants who use them.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ENERGY STAR® (appliance standards) (energystar.gov/products)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 76
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Water Efficiency Credit and Restoration

WATER METERING AND LEAK DETECTION

WEc1
1–2 points

INTENT
To conserve potable water resources, support water management, limit potential material waste
due to water leak damage, and identify opportunities for additional water savings by tracking
water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–2
Option 1. Meters 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Submeters 1
AND/OR
Option 3. Leak Detection Sensors 1

Option 1. Meters (1 point)

Install (or use existing) permanent water meters or submeters that measure the total water
consumption for each water source for the tenant space that meet the following requirements:

• The tenant must be able to access the meter data.

• Meter alternative water sources separately from municipally supplied potable water.
• Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting tenant space water usage data at least
annually. This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building changes
ownership or lessee.

AND/OR

Option 2. Submeters (1 point)

Install permanent water submeters for each applicable subsystem defined below:
• Indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings with meter systems serving at least 80% of indoor
fixtures and fittings as described in WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency and fixtures and
fittings not addressed in the prerequisite, including janitor sinks, water coolers, and bottle
fillers, which may be included or excluded from the measured total water consumption of
the tenant space at the project team’s discretion.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 77
 • Commercial kitchen (if the kitchen serves at least 100 meals per day of operation)
• Laundry, if the project includes commercial laundry equipment that processes at least
120,000 lbs. (57,606 kg.) of laundry per year or if the project includes a public laundry
room)

The tenant must be able to access the submeter data in real time via local network, building
management system (BMS), cloud service, app, or online database. All submeters must be
capable of recording data at least hourly.

AND/OR

Option 3. Leak Detection Sensors (1 point)

Install permanent water flow meter/sensors for at least 50% of the project flush fixtures in the
tenant space; water sensors can be installed on each flush fixture or for a group of flush fixtures
(e.g., one per restroom facility).

The leak detection system should be able to identify a leak triggered by abnormal flow rate
above normal range, or physically detect a water leak, and initiate an alarm upon a leak
detection.

The tenant must be able to access the sensor data in real time via local network, BMS, cloud
service, app, or online database.

Develop an action plan that addresses how the tenant will have access to data in real time and
how the tenant will address and remedy any detected leak.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit encourages projects to develop water metering and submetering strategies. Projects
pursuing this credit must install permanent water meters or have access to data from existing
meters, submeters, and sensors necessary to report and track water use for applicable
subsystems.

Option 1 requires permanent meters or submeters on all water-using systems within the tenant
spaces. Option 2 requires the use of permanent meters or submeters for applicable
subsystems. Option 3 requires installation of permanent leak detection sensors and data
integration with the BMS or similar.

Submetering and leak detection strategies, when developed early in the design, provide
significant benefits to the owner and design team. Teams can identify all water-using systems
and prioritize submeters on major systems. Reviewing the systems during the schematic or

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 78
design phase allows for design optimizations including, but not limited to, meter placement,
water heater or boiler room locations, and distribution piping design.

Projects can achieve up to two points by combining a minimum of two of the three options. o

Option 1. Meters
Option 1 requires that projects install meters or utilize existing meters to collect water
consumption data (gallons or liters) from all water sources within the tenant space. This includes
potable and alternative water. Teams must report total project water consumption to USGBC at
minimum annually. The data must also be accessible to the tenant and/or other appropriate
person(s).

Tracking and reviewing data monthly allow tenants an ongoing opportunity to identify
inefficiencies or anomalies in consumption. The data review also immediately addresses
problems, such as leaks and failed valves, before larger issues or excess consumption occur.

Identifying all water sources and water end uses

Project teams must identify all water end uses in the tenant spaces and analyze water
consumption from each source. Common water sources include plumbing fixtures, cooling
towers, laundry facilities, dishwashers, indoor water features, and other building processes.

Identify the water source for each end use. Potable water sources include public water supply,
on-site wells, and on-site potable water treatment systems. Alternative water sources include
greywater, rainwater, recycled water, and reclaimed water. Alternative water sources must be
metered separately from municipally supplied potable water.

Meters and types of meters

Install meters only for systems within the scope of work. Specify permanent meter(s) that
provide water consumption data in gallons or liters. A utility-owned meter that provides the
required data meets the prerequisite requirements. Utility providers often read and bill total
water consumption monthly.

Tracking and reporting

Demonstrate that the key person(s) responsible for tracking and reporting water consumption
data can access the meter. If the location is inaccessible, providing access to monthly utility
bill(s) achieves the same goal. If projects cannot demonstrate access through direct, visual
readings or monthly utility bills, teams must install additional meter(s) to meet the prerequisite.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 79
Multiple sources of potable or alternative water in a project boundary
Teams must identify if multiple sources of potable water or alternative water are used within the
project boundary. A single meter per water source can meet the requirement if the design allows
for the proper placement of the meter.

Commitment to sharing data with USGBC

USGBC aims to collect data on water usage from all LEED ID+C projects. Having this data
allows USGBC to identify similarities between high-performing projects and recommend
solutions with proven results.

Projects must commit to reporting the total water consumption to USGBC at least annually. Data
must be shared for five years or until the building changes ownership or lessee. Share data
using a USGBC-approved data template or an approved third-party data source, like ENERGY
STAR® Portfolio Manager.

Option 2. Submeters
Teams must install submeters for indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings, commercial kitchen
water use, and laundry water use.

Facility managers and/or tenants must have access to the real-time data via the project’s local
network, BMS, cloud service, web-based application, or an online database.

Indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings

Most projects have indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings. Water use from water closets and
lavatories represents a significant amount of a building’s total water consumption for many
project types. Additionally, leaks from indoor fixtures and fittings often go unnoticed until water
damage occurs on walls, ceilings, or floors.

Projects must submeter at least 80% of the total indoor fixtures and fittings, as identified in
WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency.

Depending on the distribution piping and the metering strategy, projects can directly meter water
consumption from indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings or calculate the consumption by
subtracting all other subsystems from the total water consumption on the building and the
grounds.

Commercial kitchens
Typical commercial kitchen systems such as dishwashers, food steamers, and combination
ovens require large quantities of potable water. Even when using water-efficient equipment, it is

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 80
critical that projects track consumption from these appliances to ensure efficient operations and
identify water-supply failures.

The requirement for metering water use in a commercial kitchen depends on the number of
daily meals served. Kitchens designed to serve 100 or more daily meals must meter and report
all water use from kitchen operations.

Public laundry facilities

Typical commercial laundry systems include large top- or front-load washing machines used to
process thousands of pounds (or kilograms) of laundry annually. Front-load washers use less
water and energy than top-load washers. However, even when using ENERGY STAR®® (or
performance-equivalent) equipment, it is critical that projects track water consumption from
these machines to ensure efficient operations and identify water-supply failures.

The requirement for metering water use in a commercial laundry depends on the pounds (or
kilograms) of laundry processed annually. Laundry facilities designed to process 120,000 lbs.
(57,606 kg.) of laundry annually must meter and report all water use from the laundry
operations.

Option 3. Leak Detection Sensors

Water lost through leaks strains capital and natural resources while creating health and safety
risks. 27 Lower system pressures can allow pollutants to be drawn in from the surroundings,
leading to foul drinking water. 28 Capital losses can result from labor costs to identify a leak’s
location as well as from labor hours and material costs necessary to repair major damage.
Leaks that are not addressed commonly cause higher bills.

Projects pursuing this option must install permanent water flow meters or sensors for all flush
fixtures within the project boundary. The devices must report abnormalities and generate an
alarm at a local network, BMS, cloud service, app, or online database accessible by the facility
manager and tenants.

Data access and action plan

Providing access to data and regularly performing reviews optimizes an operator’s ability to
address water leaks. Develop an action plan that addresses, at minimum, data access for

27
“Overview of Available Leak Detection Technologies”, Pacific Northwest National Laboratory, (2019), retrieved from
https://www.pnnl.gov/main/publications/external/technical_reports/PNNL-28885.pdf.
28
R. Collins, J. Boxall, M. Besner, S. Beck and B. Karney, “Intrusion Modelling and the Effect of Ground Water Conditions”, Water
Distribution Systems Analysis 2010, (2011).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 81
operators and tenants, the approach for resolving detected leaks, and a communication plan to
alert building occupants when repairs impact the building.

Flush fixture leak detection requirements

For the flush fixtures, install sensors or meters for at least 50% of the flush fixtures identified in
WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency. Install the device at the flush fixture for an individual toilet
room, such as a unisex or family restroom. A single device that monitors all flush fixtures for
group restrooms is acceptable.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All Contract documents highlighting the locations and types of the
Meters project's permanent water meters or submeters that measure the
total water consumption for each water source for the tenant space
(for example, water supply system drawings).
Commitment from the project owner to share with USGBC the
resulting tenant space water usage data at least annually.
Confirmation that the data is accessible by the tenant.
All Option 2. All Confirmation that all submeters are capable of recording data at
Submeters least hourly (for example, product information from the
manufacturer and/or contract documents).
Contract documents highlighting the locations and types of the
project's permanent water meters for each applicable subsystem
(for example, water supply system drawings).
Contract documents demonstrating that facility manager and/or
tenant(s) will be able to access the submeter data in real-time via
local network, BMS, cloud service, app, or online database, and
that all submeters are capable of recording data at least hourly.

Calculation demonstrating the percentage of metered indoor

fixtures/fittings.
All Option 3. All Contract documents highlighting the locations and types of the
Leak project's permanent water flow meters/sensors for the project's
Detection flush fixtures in the tenant space (for example, water supply
Sensors system drawings).
Narrative or documents detailing the leak detection system
specifications, for when and how an alarm is triggered (for
example, the Owner's Project Requirements, BOD, Contract
Documents, or product information from the manufacturer)
The project's action plan that addresses how the tenant will have
access to data in real-time and will address and remedy any
detected leak.
Calculation demonstrating the percentage of flush fixtures with leak
detection.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 82
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 83
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Water Efficiency Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED WATER EFFICIENCY

WEc2
1–8 points

INTENT
To reduce potable water consumption and the associated energy consumption and carbon
emissions required to treat and distribute water and to reward the use of alternative water
sources that preserve potable water resources.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–8
Option 1. Whole-Project Water Use 1–8
OR
Option 2. Fixture and Fittings — Calculated Reduction 1–6
AND/OR
Option 3. Appliance and Process Water 1–2
AND/OR
Option 4. Optimize Process Water Use 1–2
Path 1. Limit Cooling Tower Cycles 1–2
OR
Path 2. Optimize Water Use for Cooling 1–2
OR
Path 3. Process Water Use 1–2

Implement a combination of the strategies below for a maximum of 8 points. Projects may either
attempt Option 1 or any combination of Options 2 or 3 below.

Option 1. Whole-Project Water Use (1–8 points)

To pursue this pathway, project teams must develop a water use baseline and create a
proposed use model. Points are achieved based on reductions from the baseline in Table 1.

Table 1. Points for reducing overall project water use

Percent reduction Points Total points for alternative water
30% 1 2
35% 2 3
40% 3 4
45% 4 5
50% 5 6
55% 6 7

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 84
 Percent reduction Points Total points for alternative water
60% 7 8
65% 8 0

OR

Option 2. Fixture and Fittings — Calculated Reduction (1–6 points)

Further reduce fixture and fitting water use from the calculated baseline in WEp1: Minimum
Water Efficiency, Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency, Option 2, Performance Path–
Calculated Reduction. Some of these fittings and fixtures may be outside the tenant space.
Additional potable water savings can be earned above the prerequisite level using alternative
water sources. Points are awarded according to Table 2.

Table 2. Points for reducing indoor water use

Percentage reduction Points
25% 1
30% 2
35% 3
40% 4
45% 5
50% 6

AND/OR

Option 3. Appliance and Process Water (1–2 points)

Newly installed equipment within the tenant space must meet the minimum requirements in
Tables 3, 4, and/or 5. 1 point is awarded for meeting all applicable requirements in any one
table for a maximum of 2 points. All applicable, newly installed equipment listed in each table
must meet the standard. Existing appliances and equipment can be excluded.

To use Table 3, the project must process at least 120,000 lbs. (57,606 kg.) of laundry per year.

Table 3. Compliant commercial washing machines

Washing machine Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units)
On-premise, minimum capacity 2,400 lbs. Maximum 1.8 gallons Maximum 7 liters per 0.45
(10,886 kg.) per 8-hour shift per pound* kilogram*
*Based on equal quantities of heavily, medium, and lightly soiled laundry.

To use Table 4, the project must serve at least 100 meals per day of operation.

Table 4. Standards for compliant commercial kitchen equipment

Commercial Kitchen Equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Dishwasher Undercounter ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or performance
equivalent

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 85
 Commercial Kitchen Equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Stationary, single ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or performance
tank, door equivalent
Single tank, ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or performance
conveyor equivalent
Multiple tank, ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or performance
conveyor equivalent
Flight machine ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or performance
equivalent
Food Boilerless/ ≤ 1.7 gal/hr/pan including ≤ 6.4 liters/hr/pan including
steamer connectionless condensate cooling water condensate cooling water
Steam generator ≤ 2.2 gal/hr/pan including ≤ 8.3 liters/hr/pan including
condensate cooling water condensate cooling water
Combination Countertop or ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or performance
oven stand equivalent
Roll-in ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or performance
equivalent
Food waste Disposer 3–8 gpm, full-load 11–30 lpm, full-load condition;
disposer condition; 10-minute 10-minute automatic shutoff or
automatic shutoff or 1 gpm, 3.8 lpm, no-load condition
no-load condition
Scrap collector Maximum 2 gpm makeup Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup water
water
Pulper Maximum 2 gpm makeup Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup water
water
Strainer basket No additional water usage No additional water usage

Table 5. Compliant laboratory and medical equipment

Lab equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)

Reverse-osmosis water purifier 75% recovery

Steam sterilizer For 60-in sterilizer: 6.3 gal/U.S. For 1,520-mm sterilizer: 28.5
tray liters/DIN tray
For 48-in sterilizer: 7.5 gal/U.S. For 1,220-mm sterilizer: 28.35
tray liters/DIN tray
Sterile process washer 0.35 gal/U.S. tray 1.3 liters/DIN tray

X-ray processor, 150 mm or more Film processor water recycling unit

in any dimension
Digital imager, all sizes No water use

AND/OR

Option 4. Optimize Process Water Use (1–2 points)

Include any associated base building water use that is necessary for equipment that serves the
tenant space.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 86
PATH 1. LIMIT COOLING TOWER CYCLES (1–2 POINTS)
For cooling towers and evaporative condensers, conduct a one-time potable water analysis,
measuring at least the five control parameters listed in Table 6.

Table 6. Maximum concentrations for parameters in condenser

Parameter Maximum level
Ca (as CaCO3) 600 ppm
Total alkalinity 500 ppm
SiO2 150 ppm
Cl– 300 ppm
Conductivity 3,300 μS/cm
NOTE: ppm = parts per million
NOTE: µS/cm = micro siemens per centimeter

Calculate the maximum number of cooling tower cycles by dividing the maximum allowed
concentration level of each parameter by the actual concentration level of each parameter found
in the potable makeup water analysis. Limit cooling tower cycles to avoid exceeding maximum
values for any of these parameters.

The materials of construction for the water system that come in contact with the cooling tower
water shall be of the type that can operate and be maintained within the cycles established in
Table 7.

Table 7. Points for cooling tower cycles

Cooling tower cycles Points
Maximum number of cycles achieved without exceeding any maximum concentration 1
levels or affecting operation of condenser water system.

Meet the maximum calculated number of cycles to earn 1 point and increase the 2
number of cycles by a minimum of 25% by increasing the level of treatment and/or
maintenance in condenser or makeup water systems.

OR

Meet the maximum calculated number of cycles to earn 1 point and use a minimum
of 20% alternative water.

Projects whose cooling is provided by district cooling systems are eligible to achieve Path 1 if
the district cooling system complies with the above requirements.

OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 87
PATH 2. OPTIMIZE WATER USE FOR COOLING (1–2 POINTS)
To be eligible for Option 2, the baseline system designated for a building using ASHRAE 90.1-
2019 or 90.1-2022, Appendix G, Table G3.1, 1–3 must include a cooling tower (systems 7, 8,
11, 12, and 13).

Achieve increasing levels of cooling tower water efficiency beyond a water-cooled chiller system
with axial variable-speed fan cooling towers having a maximum drift of 0.002% of recirculated
water volume and three cooling tower cycles. Points are awarded according to Table 8.

Table 8. Points for reducing annual water use compared to water-cooled chiller system
Percentage reduction Points
25% 1
50% 2

Projects whose cooling is provided by district cooling systems are eligible to achieve Path 2 if
the district cooling system complies with the above requirements.

OR

PATH 3. PROCESS WATER USE (1–2 POINTS)

Demonstrate that the project is using a minimum of 20% alternative water to meet the process
water demand for 1 point or using a minimum of 30% alternative water to meet the process
water demand for two points. Ensure that alternative water is of sufficient quality for its intended
end use.

The minimum percentage of alternative water used should be based on water use during the
month with the highest water demand.

Process water uses eligible for achievement of Path 3 must represent at least 10% of total
building regulated water use and may not include water used for cooling.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit builds on WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency and rewards teams for additional water
conservation strategies. Projects that pursue Option 1 can achieve up to eight points for the
whole project water use reductions. Projects that pursue Options 2–4 can achieve up to eight
points by combining any of the strategies outlined in the rating system.

Projects cannot combine Option 1 with Options 2–4.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 88
Option 1. Whole Project Water Use
Quantifying whole project water use and developing strategies to reduce consumption across
the entire project can lead to significant water savings. Analyzing all water sources enables
teams to identify large consumers and target both conservation and alternative water strategies.

Projects must demonstrate a minimum of 30% reduction from the project’s baseline to earn
points. Using alternative water sources earns additional points for the calculated reductions.

Develop a water balance model

Teams must calculate the building’s water demand and develop baseline and design case water
balance models. Models must account for all water sources within the project’s scope of work,
including fixtures and fittings, domestic hot water, appliances, commercial kitchen and laundry
equipment, laboratory and medical equipment, process water, and HVAC systems.

BASELINE REQUIREMENTS
The baseline model reflects the minimum requirements and typical water use for the
project type without any additional water-savings measures.

For fixtures and fittings, determine the baseline using a USGBC-approved calculator, as
described in WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency, Option 2. Performance Path —
Calculated Reduction.

Baseline values for appliances, kitchen equipment, and laboratory and medical
equipment must align with Tables 3–5 of this credit.

For cooling towers, the baseline water model represents the water use associated with
the minimum number of cooling tower cycles, such that parameters do not exceed the
values of Table 6.

DESIGN CASE REQUIREMENTS

The design-case water model must use fixtures and fittings, appliances, kitchen
equipment, and laboratory and medical equipment as specified within the contract
documents.

Projects with alternative water sources

Use of alternative water sources can be highly effective in reducing potable water demand and
utility costs associated with the building. Projects that use alternative water sources achieve 1
additional point for each threshold met under Table 1. For example, a project that reduces
potable water consumption by 30% earns 1 point. A project that reduces potable water

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 89
consumption by 30% and uses an alternative water source to achieve those reductions earn two
points.

Projects should always prioritize water efficiency first to reduce consumption and demand
before applying alternative water solutions. For any seasonally dependent sources, such as
rainwater, calculations must reflect annual, seasonal totals to confirm the available quantity of
the alternative water source.

Projects pursuing Options 2–4

Projects may earn up to eight points by combining strategies from Options 2–4. Projects with
limited scope or projects that use targeted reductions by equipment or system type, should
review Option 1 and all relevant Options 2–4 to determine the approach that maximizes points
for this credit.

Option 2. Fixtures and Fittings — Calculated Reduction

Option 2 focuses on reducing potable water use from fixtures and fittings. Using the baseline
and designed water usage calculations determined from WEp1: Minimum Water Efficiency,
Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency, Path 2: Performance Path – Calculated Reduction,
projects earn points for additional savings beyond the 20% requirement, based on specific
fixture flow and flush rates. Savings must be calculated using a USGBC-approved calculator.
Projects achieving a 25% reduction earn one point.

Along with the use of high-efficiency fixtures and fittings, projects that use alternative water
sources for these systems can report further savings and achieve additional points under this
option.

AND/OR

Option 3. Appliance and Process Water

Option 3 rewards projects that prioritize water-efficient appliances and process equipment.
Projects earn one point for meeting prescriptive water use requirements in a single equipment
category, for up to two total points.

Tables 3–5 outline the prescriptive measures for appliances and process equipment. All newly
installed equipment must meet the referenced standards, performance equivalents (outside of
the U.S.), and/or water use limits. Existing appliances and equipment should be excluded.

Projects that do not include any applicable systems in their scope of work or projects that can
document compliance with more than two tables, should review the whole project’s water

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 90
balance model from WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency, Option 1. Whole Project Water Use, as
it may optimize points for this credit.

AND/OR

Option 4. Optimize Process Water Use

Cooling towers and industrial processes use a significant amount of potable water. Projects that
include these systems must consider opportunities to reduce cycles of concentration, optimize
water use for cooling, or select alternative water sources.

Process water uses include, but are not limited to, cooling, humidification, sterilization,
dishwashers, clothes washers, and pools. This option offers three pathways, which depend on
the type of process water use. Path 3 also requires that process water use meets a minimum
percentage of the total building water use.

PATH 1. LIMIT COOLING TOWER CYCLES

This path prioritizes water conservation for cooling towers by limiting the cycles of concentration
from the equipment. A cycle of concentration is the number of times water can circulate through
the system without creating performance or operational problems. A low cycle of concentration
means more single-use water passes through the system, resulting in excess water
consumption. However, as water is reused, dissolved solids remain, which increases the
concentration levels of calcium, silicon dioxide (SiO2), and chloride. Higher cycles of
concentration may result in scaling and corrosion issues.

The intent of the credit is not to impact system operations, but to inform designers on alternative
solutions for reducing water consumption for cooling processes. Finding the correct balance of
cooling tower blowdown and chemical treatment maintains system efficiency, reduces
maintenance, and conserves potable water.

For each cooling process, conduct a potable water analysis to determine setpoints for the
chemical treatment system and the associated cycles of concentration. Teams must confirm
that the systems will operate at the specified cycles of concentration and not exceed parameters
outlined in Table 6.

Projects with alternative water sources

Projects using alternative water sources do not require one-time water analysis. Using a
minimum of 20% alternative water can help projects earn two points, if the maximum calculated
number of cycles is also met.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 91
Projects in a campus environment
Projects in a campus environment or those supplied by a district cooling system, may comply
with Path 1 if the district system conducts a potable water analysis and limits the cycles of
concentration for their system. Projects can determine compliance at the district level by
working with the utility provider.

PATH 2. OPTIMIZE WATER USE FOR COOLING

Path 2 has minimum eligibility requirements. Using ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019 (or later),
Appendix G Performance Rating Method, Table G3.1.1-2, confirm that the project’s baseline
case includes CHW for cooling and cooling towers in the baseline design. Table 9 outlines the
eligible baseline systems from Appendix G.

Projects pursuing this path do not require an Appendix G energy model. Other tools can be
used to perform water use calculations.

Table 9. ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019, Appendix G compliant baseline systems

System number System description
7 VAV with reheat
8 VAV with parallel fan-powered boxes and reheat
11 Single-zone VAV system with water-cooled chillers
12 Single-zone constant volume system with water-cooled chillers and
a hot-water fossil fuel boiler
13 Single-zone constant volume system with water-cooled chillers and
electric resistance heat

Projects can demonstrate a 100% reduction from baseline if the Appendix G baseline includes a
cooling tower and the final design eliminates the need for a cooling tower.

Projects may benefit from a combination of strategies to reduce water consumption for the
cooling system. Strategies include maximizing cycles of concentration, increased levels of
chemical treatment, smart controls for monitoring and optimization, drift eliminators, flow meters,
and water level controls.

Projects in a campus environment

For campus environments or projects that receive cooling from a district cooling system,
projects meet the requirements of Path 2 if the district system meets the reduction thresholds.
Projects should consider working with their utility provider to determine compliance at the district
system level.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 92
PATH 3. PROCESS WATER USE
Projects pursuing this path must demonstrate that process water exceeds 10% of the total
building-regulated water use, excluding cooling water.

Using alternative water sources, such as captured condensate from air handling units, reduces
reliance on fresh water for process systems. Diversifying the water sources on a project site
also builds resilience in buildings. This allows projects to divert freshwater for human
consumption instead of processes during a water crisis.

When selecting the alternative water source, ensure that the quality of the water is sufficient for
its intended use and that the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) allows that alternative
water source, per local codes and standards.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All LEED v5 Whole Project Water Use calculator.
Whole Project
Water Use Contract documents and manufacturer information to
support the baseline and proposed water use values in
the calculator.
Option 2. All LEED v5 Fixture and Fittings Efficiency calculator,
Fixtures and documenting the fixtures/fittings within and outside of
Fittings the tenant space. If there are fixtures both within and
outside the tenant space, this will be a separate,
additional calculator from that submitted for the
prerequisite.
Evidence of any plumbing fixtures and fittings used by
the project occupants outside of the tenant space,
including flush/flow rates (recommended: product
information from the manufacturer, photographs with
date/time/location stamp, and/or as-built documents).
Option 3. All Contract document(s) specifying the project's newly
Appliance and installed commercial washing machines, commercial
Process Water food waste disposers, commercial laboratory and
medical equipment, and/or municipal steam systems
and process water equipment, as applicable, including
performance specifications.
Option 4. Path 1. Limit Results from the potable water analysis for cooling
Optimize Cooling Tower towers and evaporative condensers. Include the
Process Water Cycles concentration levels for all five parameters listed in
Use Table 8 of the rating system.
Path 2. Optimize Equipment schedule indicating cooling tower type.
Water Use for
Cooling Calculation showing the baseline process water use.

Calculation showing the design process water use,

including any alternative water savings.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 93
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Path 3. Process Total % of process water use in building.
Water Use
Description of systems included in the project that
account for more than 10% of the total building
regulated water use (excluding cooling water).
Calculation showing the baseline process water use.

Calculation showing the design process water use,

including any alternative water savings.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ENERGY STAR® (appliance standards) (energystar.gov/products)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 94
ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE (EA)
OVERVIEW
As of 2025, buildings are responsible for one-third of global energy emissions, accounting for
approximately 37 percent of energy and process-related carbon emissions and over 34% of
energy demand. 29 To stabilize the climate, the world must decarbonize its buildings — both new
and existing — by mid-century. Many regions and organizations have identified zero energy and
zero carbon goals, targeting 2030 for new construction and by 2050 for existing buildings. 30
Thankfully, there are now time-tested and cost-effective strategies to achieve this imperative
and we now know how to design and construct the low-carbon buildings of the future. To
stabilize the climate, the world must decarbonize its buildings — both new and existing — by
mid-century. Many regions and organizations have identified zero energy and zero carbon
goals, targeting 2030 for new construction and 2050 for existing buildings. Thankfully, there are
now time-tested and cost-effective strategies to achieve this imperative, and we now know how
to design and construct the low-carbon buildings of the future.

Well-designed, well-constructed, and well-operated buildings use less energy, produce fewer
emissions, and increase the resilience of a building to withstand disruptions like power outages
or extreme weather events. LEED v5’s EA credit category aims to make low-carbon buildings
easy to achieve by increasing carbon literacy and providing a clear framework for all buildings to
significantly reduce or eliminate emissions, achieve greater energy independence and security,
and lower operational energy costs.

As businesses and regulatory agencies now regularly prioritize resilience and sustainability as
cornerstones of their financial and social continuity planning, decarbonization is a means to
meet these goals and is an increasingly central priority for leaders worldwide.

Decarbonization
LEED v5 drives decarbonization, and over half of the LEED v5 credits that support
decarbonization are found in the EA category. By capitalizing on advances in technology and
industry expertise, project teams can use EA prerequisites and credits to create more value for
owners, occupants, and communities.

First, LEED v5 helps increase the carbon literacy of design teams. In EAp1: Estimated Energy
Use and Operational Carbon Projection, project teams develop a visual prediction of future

29
“2022 Global Status Report for Buildings and Construction”, UNEP - UN Environment Programme, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.unep.org/resources/publication/2022-global-status-report-buildings-and-construction.
30
“Support the Net Zero Carbon Buildings Commitment | U.S. Green Building Council”, USGBC, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.usgbc.org/articles/support-net-zero-carbon-buildings-commitment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 95
carbon emissions. Teams learn to identify how carbon emissions will change over time due to
changes in the grid.

Then, through the credits of the EA category, LEED v5 provides a simple framework for
designing zero carbon–ready buildings. This framework, through the EA category, lays out
critical steps and additional strategies for decarbonization. These critical steps are the design
strategies inherent to the building itself, which must be incorporated from the beginning of the
project. The additional strategies, which also provide significant carbon impacts, complement
and build upon the primary strategies.

EAc1: Electrification is a new credit within LEED v5. As electrical grids decarbonize, the carbon
emissions from electrical usage will decrease drastically. However, the emissions from fuel-
powered systems in buildings, usually for space heating and service hot water, will remain.
Replacing those fuel-powered systems with electrically powered equipment, which can provide
heat efficiently, will help emissions shrink to near zero by 2050. The Electrification credit
rewards projects that electrify as many of their systems as possible, while providing compliance
options for operations during extreme low temperatures and with emergency backup systems.

Energy efficiency, a cornerstone of LEED and high-performing buildings, is the third critical step
in the decarbonization framework. All LEED v5 projects will begin with a baseline of energy
efficiency, pairing climate zone–appropriate building envelopes with building systems and
management practices (EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency, EAp4: Energy Metering and
Reporting, EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning). Energy efficiency provides critical benefits,
including lower operational costs, less damage due to the extraction and transport of fuels, and
less air pollution and accompanying health issues. Moreover, efficiency reduces carbon
emissions, even from electricity, because most grids are not yet and will not soon be carbon-
neutral. For teams that prefer an alternative to energy modeling, LEED v5 offers an updated
prescriptive option for full achievement of points (EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency).

The additional decarbonization strategies represent industry-leading best practices, found in

EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning, EAc3: Renewable Energy and EAc5: Grid-Interactive, as well
as EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management and EAc6: Enhanced Refrigerant
Management. Carried over from earlier versions of LEED and refined in LEED v5, these
approaches continue to be highly effective in reducing carbon emissions and minimizing energy
waste.

LEED v5 Platinum projects will achieve industry best practices for energy efficiency, eliminate
on-site combustion (except for emergency and back-up needs), use 100% renewable energy,
and reduce embodied carbon.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 96
Quality of life
By reducing energy demand and emissions and using technology to communicate with the grid,
buildings can maintain operations and provide enhanced value to the communities they serve.
Teams are encouraged to reduce air leakage from the envelope and mechanical systems, while
incentivizing energy storage opportunities (EAc5: Grid-Interactive). These strategies, combined
with energy-efficient design and electrified operations, can lead to a more resilient and reliable
building.

LEED v5 EA prerequisites and credits provide clear paths to greater efficiency and reduced
costs and emissions. These tactics will enhance energy and carbon literacy in the building
industries and empower communities to achieve energy and carbon neutrality by 2050.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 97
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite and Restoration

ESTIMATED ENERGY USE AND

OPERATIONAL CARBON PROJECTION
EAp1
REQUIRED

INTENT
To enable tenants and interior design teams to visualize the scale and relative impact of design
decisions that will impact their project’s long-term operational carbon emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Provide Data on Project and Annual Energy Use
AND
Sign-Off on 10-Year Operational Carbon Projection

Comply with the following:

Provide Data on Project and Annual Energy Use

If the project has an energy model that includes all energy used within the project, including
energy provided by base building systems, provide USGBC with the estimated annual energy
use of each energy type.

If the project does not have such an energy model, provide USGBC with the following data to
facilitate an annual energy calculation:

• Project information: Occupancy type, age of building, gross area, location by zip code,
and the approximate hours of occupancy on a weekly basis.
• High-load amenity information: Include commercial kitchens, commercial laundries,
data centers, etc., and the percent of gross area attributable to each.
• Energy-related information: Lighting power density; number of LEED points pursued in
reducing plug and process loads; and fuel types used for space heating, service hot
water, cooking, and clothes drying as applicable.

From the data provided, USGBC will provide the project team with a rough estimate of the
annual energy used of each energy type by the project.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 98
Sign-off on 10-year Operational Carbon Projection
From the modeled energy data or the energy estimate, USGBC will provide the project team
with a 10-year operational carbon projection. The assumptions behind the estimate include the
following:

• No changes are made over the decade that impact energy use.
• The initial electrical carbon coefficient is the latest subregional eGRID coefficient for
projects in the U.S., or national coefficient elsewhere, or other more local coefficient that
can be credibly documented.
• The electrical carbon coefficient will decline linearly at 3.8% per year (the equivalent of
declining by 95% over 25 years).

For tenant spaces, the tenant, or for owner-occupied spaces, the owner, must attest that they
have reviewed the 10-year carbon projection.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite has two requirements which work together to help project teams understand
their energy use and the impact on carbon emissions.

Provide Data on Project and Annual Energy Use

Teams must either estimate the project’s annual energy use per energy source or submit project
information to inform a rough estimation of project energy usage in Arc.

When estimating energy use, include the proportionate energy use from shared base-building
systems serving the project space, such as chilled water (CHW), hot water, or shared air
handling units.

Estimated annual use — energy simulation

For projects completing energy modeling for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency, use the
summary results from the proposed energy model.

Otherwise, simplified energy modeling may be used to estimate the energy use. The simplified
modeling may be from an individual model developed specifically for the project or a prototypical
model representative of the project.

Other estimates of project energy consumption may include corporate estimates across the
portfolio, or projections generated from the base building Energy Information System (EIS).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 99
Project information to inform annual energy use estimation
For projects that did not create a model, provide USGBC with information to estimate project
energy use in Arc 31. Examples of information that may need uploading include:

• General project information. Expected occupancy, age of the building, gross floor
area, and location
• High load amenity information. Any large process energy contributions to energy use,
such as equipment for commercial kitchens, commercial refrigeration, laundry, data
centers, laboratories, or manufacturing
• Regulated energy information. Lighting power densities, fuel types, HVAC system
types, and other factors

Sign-off on 10-year operational carbon projection

USGBC will provide all LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors projects with a business as usual
(BAU) projection of the project’s operational carbon emissions over the next 25 years, based on
the estimated annual energy use and the project’s current grid emissions factor. This BAU
projection assumes that grid emissions factor starts with the latest national or regional
coefficient, such as the subregional eGRID 32 coefficients in the US, and declines in a straight
line by 95% over the next 25 years. This is meant to reflect the overall direction of grid
decarbonization globally, and is not intended to be an exact prediction of individual project
performance

The projection should educate owners, tenants, and designers on the carbon impacts of their
design decisions over the next 10 years. Tenants, or owners in an owner-occupied space, must
review the data and attest to the review.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Design analysis during the early project design phase
analyzed energy efficiency, peak load reduction, and
decarbonization strategies for their impact on long-
term operational carbon emissions.
Estimated total annual energy use of each energy
source (electricity, natural gas CHW, steam, etc.) and
the annual energy use for each of the following end
uses: space heating, service hot water, cooking,

31
“Home page”, Arc, Green Business Certification Inc.(GBCI), accessed March 31, 2025, https://arc.gbci.org/.
32
“Emissions and Generation Resource Integrated Database”, U.S. EPA, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.epa.gov/egrid.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 100
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
cooling, refrigeration, ventilation, plug and process
loads, other.
Confirmation that the required entity has reviewed the
carbon projection.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE Standard 209 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-209-
2024?product_id=2922396)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 101
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite and Restoration

MINIMUM ENERGY EFFICIENCY

EAp2
REQUIRED

INTENT
To promote resilience and reduce the environmental and economic harms of excessive energy
use and GHG emissions by achieving a minimum level of energy efficiency.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Option 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019
OR
Option 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022

Projects registering before January 1, 2028, may comply with either Option 1 or Option 2.

Projects registering on or after January 1, 2028, must comply with Option 2.

Option 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019

Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2019.

For projects applying the Normative Appendix G, “Performance Rating Method,” compliance
path, use the following:

• Future source energy metric: The future source energy metric may be used in place of
the “cost”.
o Replace all references to “cost” with “future source energy.” Use an electric site-
to-source energy conversion factor of 2.0 based on future projections for the U.S.
A lower national average value may be used as applicable for projects outside of
the U.S.
o Replace ASHRAE 90.1, Table 4.2.1.1, building performance factors (BPFs), with
the BPFs derived for the future source energy metric in Table 1.
• Alterations: For interiors project scope except initial build-out construction, apply the
following ASHRAE 90.1-2022 addenda.
o Substantial alteration: Multiply the BPF by 1.05 if the alterations are defined as a
substantial alteration in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section G3.1.4(a).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 102
 o Other alterations: Apply ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section G3.3 (“Performance
Calculations for Other Alterations”), replacing all references to ASHRAE 90.1-
2022, Sections 5–10, prescriptive criteria with the corresponding ASHRAE 90.1-
2019, Sections 5–10 criteria.

Table 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 — Equivalent BPFs for a future source energy metric
Building type Climate zone
0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
Multifamily 0.74 0.69 0.73 0.70 0.73 0.70 0.71 0.70 0.63 0.70 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.74
Healthcare/hospital 0.72 0.72 0.73 0.73 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.73 0.71 0.74 0.73 0.80 0.73 0.77 0.78 0.79
Hotel/motel 0.72 0.71 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.71 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.73 0.73 0.71 0.73 0.74 0.70 0.72 0.70 0.70
Office 0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.60 0.57 0.62 0.55 0.55 0.61 0.57 0.58 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.60 0.54 0.58
Restaurant 0.65 0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.73 0.72 0.74 0.77
Retail 0.57 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.48 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.52 0.50 0.56 0.57 0.53 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.53 0.60
School 0.57 0.57 0.58 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.57 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.51 0.52 0.51 0.53 0.51 0.53 0.50 0.51 0.58
Warehouse 0.28 0.30 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.33 0.26 0.28 0.40 0.32 0.29 0.44 0.38 0.40 0.44
All others 0.65 0.62 0.64 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.57 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.57 0.60 0.60 0.59 0.65 0.62 0.62 0.61 0.64

OR

Option 2. ASHRAE 90.l-2022

Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2022. Use any applicable compliance path in
ASHRAE 90.1, Section 4.2, or an approved equivalent standard for elements within the project
scope.

For projects applying the Normative Appendix G, “Performance Rating Method” compliance
path, one of the following metrics may be used in place of “cost”:

• Future source energy

o Replace all references to “cost” with “future source energy.” Use an electric site-
to-source energy conversion factor of 2.0 based on future projections for the U.S.
A lower national average value may be used as applicable for projects outside of
the U.S.
o Replace ASHRAE 90.1, Table 4.2.1.1, BPFs with the BPFs derived for the future
source energy metric in Table 2.
• Site energy or source energy documented using ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Informative
Appendix I.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 103
Table 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 — Equivalent BPFs for a future source energy metric
Building type Climate zone
0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
Multifamily 0.64 0.59 0.62 0.60 0.61 0.59 0.61 0.60 0.49 0.57 0.59 0.56 0.55 0.57 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.60
Healthcare/hospital 0.64 0.64 0.66 0.65 0.66 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.62 0.64 0.62 0.69 0.63 0.68 0.69 0.70
Hotel/motel 0.65 0.63 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 0.62 0.63 0.62 0.59 0.60 0.60 0.57 0.58 0.59 0.56 0.58 0.56 0.56
Office 0.54 0.54 0.53 0.54 0.49 0.52 0.49 0.52 0.45 0.46 0.52 0.47 0.48 0.51 0.48 0.48 0.50 0.45 0.49
Restaurant 0.61 0.58 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.54 0.58 0.59 0.57 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.67 0.66 0.69 0.72
Retail 0.47 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.40 0.39 0.37 0.39 0.36 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.45 0.43 0.46 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.46
School 0.52 0.53 0.53 0.53 0.51 0.51 0.53 0.48 0.46 0.43 0.48 0.47 0.45 0.49 0.46 0.46 0.44 0.44 0.48
Warehouse 0.25 0.25 0.21 0.24 0.20 0.21 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.30 0.22 0.25 0.36 0.28 0.25 0.40 0.34 0.36 0.40
All others 0.58 0.56 0.56 0.56 0.50 0.47 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.49 0.49 0.50 0.51 0.50 0.55 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.55

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Widely referenced in building codes and regulations, the ASHRAE 90.1 standard determines the
minimum energy efficiency required for prerequisite compliance.

Required ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Version

The required efficiency increases for project registrations beginning in 2028, stepping up from
ASHRAE 90.1-2019 standard to the more stringent ASHRAE 90.1-2022 standard. Compliance
with the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2022 achieves a net average site energy savings of
14% compared to ASHRAE 90.1-2019, when including savings for prescriptively required
renewable energy.

OPTION 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019

Only projects registered before January 1, 2028, can use ASHRAE 90.1-2019.

OPTION 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022

Projects registered after January 1, 2028, must use ASHRAE 90.1-2022.

Projects registered before January 1, 2028, can elect to use the 2022 version of the standard to
earn points under EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.

For a summary of key changes to the ASHRAE 90.1 standard between the 2019 and 2022
publications, refer to ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Foreword and ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Informative
Appendix M, Addenda Description.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 104
Summary of ASHRAE 90.1, Section 4.2.1 compliance paths
Projects must choose from one of the following compliance paths from ASHRAE 90.1, Section
4.2.1.3. Alterations of Existing Buildings:

• Prescriptive method
o ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Sections 5–10 (for projects applying Option 1)
o ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Sections 5–11 (for projects applying Option 2)
• Energy cost budget method (ECB)
• Appendix G performance rating method (PRM)

The path commonly referred to as the prescriptive method requires individual compliance with
each referenced 90.1 section for the elements within the project scope (building envelope,
HVAC, SWH, electrical power, lighting, other equipment, and in 90.1-2022, additional efficiency
requirements). It is the most appropriate path for projects with limited scope.

The ECB method and Appendix G PRM offer greater flexibility to trade-off performance between
different systems. These methods rely on energy modeling to demonstrate that the proposed
project performs at least as well as a project meeting the prescriptive requirements.

Project teams must apply either the prescriptive method or the Appendix G PRM to pursue
additional credit for regulated energy efficiency in EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.

Initial build-out, substantial alterations, and other alterations

ASHRAE 90.1-2022 requires initial build-out projects and substantial alterations to meet a
higher bar for energy efficiency than other interiors projects. Similar increased efficiency criteria
apply to initial buildouts and substantial alterations documented using ASHRAE 90.1-2019,
Appendix G.

• Initial buildout. This refers to work to finish a space within a building for initial
occupancy.
• Substantial alterations. This refers to major replacement of systems or components in
existing buildings for two out of three major building systems (HVAC, lighting, or building
envelope). Refer to ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.1.4.1 Substantial Alterations to
Existing Buildings for a full definition.
• Other alterations. This refers to interior fit-outs of existing buildings that are not
substantial alterations.

ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 Additional Efficiency Requirements apply to initial buildouts and
substantial alterations, but not to other alterations. These additional savings are also accounted
for in determination of ASHRAE 90.1-2022, ECB method requirements.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 105
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Appendix G PRM differentiates the methodology used for new buildings,
substantial alterations, and other alterations. This provides a fairer evaluation of project
performance than earlier versions of ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM, where compliance was
unachievable for projects with limited scope.

For projects documented using ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Appendix G PRM, the LEED rating system
pairs this improved methodology from the 90.1-2022, Appendix G PRM with less stringent BPFs
than from the 90.1-2019, Appendix G PRM.

ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory provisions

All projects must meet mandatory provisions applicable to the project scope from the referenced
version of ASHRAE 90.1, found in Sections: 5.4 (Building Envelope), 6.4 (HVAC), 7.4 (SWH),
8.4 (Power), 9.4 (Lighting), and 10.4 (Other Equipment).

Early in the design process, the project architect, engineer, and lighting designer should review
these provisions and ensure they are integrated into the project design.

EXCEPTIONS TO MANDATORY PROVISIONS

Project-specific exceptions or Project Priority Library alternatives to the mandatory
provisions may apply to:

o Projects outside the U.S. where variations in equipment rating methodologies or

limited availability of the required equipment or controls precludes compliance.
o Provisions exempted by the local AHJ in areas regulated by codes of similar
stringency to the referenced version of ASHRAE 90.1.
o Provisions that can be directly accounted for in ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM
energy simulation.

Further description of ASHRAE 90.1 Section 4.2.1 compliance paths

ASHRAE 90.1 4.2.1 compliance path: prescriptive method

For the prescriptive method, projects must meet all requirements applicable to the project scope
from each referenced ASHRAE 90.1 section. No trade-offs are permitted between the
provisions of each section.

• Section 5. Building Envelope

• Section 6. HVAC
• Section 7. SWH
• Section 8. Power
• Section 9. Lighting

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 106
 • Section 10. Other Equipment

For ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 Additional Efficiency Requirements (applicable to initial

buildouts and substantial alterations), the intent behind this method is to provide a
straightforward, easy-to-follow path to compliance. This method is particularly useful for smaller
projects or those with less complex designs, where flexibility is less of a concern.

The prescriptive method is primarily a checklist approach. It specifies minimum requirements for
various building components, such as insulation levels, window performance, lighting power
densities, HVAC system efficiencies, and system controls. 33

Some sections provide an option for limited trade-offs within the section. For example, spaces
matching the ASHRAE 90.1 definition of computer room, such as data centers or server rooms,
may comply with ASHRAE 90.4 (i.e., 90.1, Section 6.6.1 Computer Room System Path and
90.1 Section 8.6.1 Computer Room Systems). The other trade-off methods do not typically
apply to Interiors scope of work (i.e., 90.1, Section 5.6 Building Envelope Trade-off Compliance
Path and 90.1-2022, Section 6.6.2 Mechanical System Performance Path).

Additional considerations
EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 1. Prescriptive Path

ASHRAE 90.1-2019. Projects that comply with Option 1 of the prerequisite using
the ASHRAE 90.1-2019 prescriptive method may earn points for additional
improvements to regulated systems. (Refer to Path 2. Regulated Loads).

ASHRAE 90.1-2022. Projects that comply with Option 2 of the prerequisite using
the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 prescriptive method are awarded three points under
Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 compliance for project scope.

Further points are available for additional improvements to regulated systems

(Refer to Path 2. Regulated Loads).

Prescriptive method: Option 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 Additional Efficiency

Requirements
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 Additional Efficiency Requirements is applicable to initial build-
out construction and substantial alterations.

33
“Performance-Based Compliance, Building Energy Codes Program”, U.S. Department of Energy, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.energycodes.gov/performance_based_compliance.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 107
For these project types, designers must select from a list of additional efficiency measures in
Section 11 to earn the minimum number of “Energy Credits” required for the project’s building
type and climate zone per Table 11.5.1-1. This affords a greater degree of flexibility for the
project team to select the additional measures most feasible and appropriate for their project
application.

Each of the efficiency measures referenced in Section 11 are awarded a specific number of
base “Energy Credits” per building type and climate, equating to approximately 0.1% savings
per credit (see ASHRAE 90.1-22, Tables 11.5.3-1–11.5.3-9). Section 11.5.2 outlines
opportunities for further adjustments to augment these base credits for certain efficiency
measures.

For example, an office project in climate zone 4A earns 8 base credits for achieving a 5%
reduction in lighting power (L06), but this increases to 16 credits for a 10% reduction per the
adjustment described in the detailed summary of this measure.

Combined credits for renewable and load management measures are limited to 60% of the total
required energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.

ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum J provides an option for projects to use the Total System
Performance Ratio (TSPR) to demonstrate overall improvement in HVAC performance rather
than applying individual system efficiency measures.

ENERGY CREDIT ADJUSTMENTS (ASHRAE 90.1-2022 11.5.1)

o Mixed use projects. For projects with multiple building types, minimum required
credits and credits achieved are weighted by the gross floor area of each building
type.
o Minimum required “Energy Credits” are adjusted lower than the default thresholds in
Table 11.5.1.1-1 for initial build-out construction and substantial alterations.
• Initial buildout projects must achieve between 25% and 50% of the referenced
thresholds dependent on the project scope.
• Substantial alterations must achieve 50% of the referenced thresholds.
o Projects without roof availability for photovoltaic (PV) or meeting Section 10.5.1
exceptions may use the referenced equation to adjust required credits below the
default threshold per Section 11.5.1(e).
• Unconditioned spaces, semi-heated spaces, and parking garages must
achieve 50% of the credits referenced for “Other” building types in Table
11.5.1.1-1.

ASHRAE 90.1 4.2.1 compliance path: ECB method

This approach compares the annual energy cost of the proposed design to that of a budget
building. The budget building is essentially a clone of the proposed design but adjusted to just

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 108
meet the prescriptive requirements. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 compliance is achieved if the proposed
design’s energy cost is no greater than the budget. For ASHRAE 90.1-2022, an additional
improvement below the ECB must be met based on an adjustment referencing the prescriptively
required “energy credits” from Section 11. Refer to the Building Envelope Backstop section for
further guidance addressing limitations on envelope trade-offs when applying the ECB Method.

The ECB Method may not be used to demonstrate improvement in regulated energy savings for
EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.

ASHRAE 90.1 4.2.1 compliance path: Appendix G PRM stable baseline

For initial buildouts and substantial alterations, this path holistically evaluates building
performance including base building systems and systems modified in the project scope.
Projects locating in underperforming buildings will have difficulty showing compliance using this
path.

For initial buildouts and substantial alterations, ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM utilizes a
“stable baseline” methodology that supports comparison of building performance across
versions of ASHRAE 90.1 using a variety of performance metrics. Using the PRM, an energy
modeler can develop a single set of ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G Baseline Building Design and
Proposed Building Design models to document compliance with this prerequisite, with EAc2:
Enhanced Energy Efficiency, and with any code requirements linked to ASHRAE 90.1-2016 or
later, or IECC-2018 or later.

The stable baseline methodology in the PRM requires a Performance Index (PI) less than or
equal to the Performance Index Target (PIT), with further adjustments and limitations
addressing on-site renewable energy. The scale for the PI ranges from one to zero (1–0), where
one (1) represents a baseline building that minimally complies with 90.1-2004 ASHRAE
requirements and zero (0) represents a net zero building.

The PIT is calculated using the results of the baseline building model completed in accordance
with the PRM protocol and the BPF for the project type and climate zone. The BPFs are
provided in ASHRAE 90.1, Table 4.2.1.1 for the metric of energy cost.

Substantial alterations have slightly less stringent PITs than new buildings, determined by
multiplying published BPFs by a factor of 1.05 (See ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Addendum cr or
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 4.2.1.3).

Appendix G PRM, performance calculations for other alterations (90.1-2022 G3.3)

For other alterations (alterations that are not initial buildouts or substantial alterations), the
stable baseline methodology does not apply. The methodology is similar to ASHRAE 90.1-2010,

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 109
Appendix G, which directly compares the performance of the proposed design to that of a
baseline building matching the prescriptive requirements. A BPF of 1.0 is used for all projects.
Systems and equipment excluded from the scope of retrofit are modeled identically in the
baseline and proposed models.

Appendix G PRM, alternative metrics in lieu of energy cost

Although the ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM references a cost metric, the energy modeler
may instead demonstrate EAp2: Minimum Energy compliance for the PRM using the future
source energy metric referenced in EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, or a site energy metric,
or a current source energy metric. Substitute all PRM references to “cost” with the new metric.
BPFs used to assess compliance must be specific to the metric and the referenced version of
ASHRAE Standard 90.1.

EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency only uses the future source energy metric and does not
allow the use of the energy cost, site energy, or source energy metrics (See EAc2: Enhanced
Energy Efficiency, Option 2).

Energy modelers can limit documentation level of effort by calculating both prerequisite and
credit compliance using the future source energy metric.

For initial buildout and substantial alterations, adjust the BPFs to align with the selected metric.
For other alterations, the BPF is always 1.

OPTION 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019, APPENDIX G PRM. ALTERNATIVE METRICS

• Future source energy. Calculate the PIT for both the prerequisite and EAc2: Enhanced
Energy Efficiency with BPFs from the prerequisite Table 1. 90.1-2019 equivalent BPFs
for a future source energy metric.

• Site energy or source energy metric. (prerequisite only) Apply ASHRAE 90.1-2019,
Addendum ch. For a source energy metric, match those listed in Addendum ch Table
X4-1 and follow Addendum ch Section X5 Methodology for BPF Adjustment to Account
for Localized Conversion Factors.

OPTION 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022, APPENDIX G PRM. ALTERNATIVE METRICS

Future source energy metric - Calculate the PIT for the prerequisite with BPFs from the
prerequisite. See Table 2, ASHRAE 90.1-2022 — Equivalent BPFs for a future source energy
metric.

Calculate the less stringent PIT for EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency using Table 6. 90.1-2019
equivalent BPFs for a future source energy metric.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 110
 • Site energy or source energy metric. (prerequisite only). Apply ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Informative Appendix I. For the source energy metric, use the 90.1-2022 Appendix I5.
Methodology for BPF Adjustment to Account for Localized Conversion Factors if the
project source energy conversions do not match those listed in Addendum Table I4-1.

• Appendix G PRM, treatment of on-site renewable energy. Per ASHRAE 90.1, the
renewable energy contribution toward meeting PRM requirements is limited to 5% of
baseline building performance (BBP).

This varies from EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 2, which either includes or excludes
the entire renewable contribution from determination of credit compliance.

Appendix G PRM, exceptions to mandatory measures

For mandatory measures where the savings associated with the measure can be documented
in the energy simulation, the modeler may account for the absence of the mandatory measure in
the energy simulation in lieu of compliance with the mandatory provisions. Model the BBP per
Appendix G requirements and the proposed building performance (PBP) as designed for
measures that are not required to be included in the BBP, such as daylighting controls. For
measures where Appendix G requires the PBP to match the BBP, model the measure as
present in the baseline BBP and absent in the proposed PBP.

Appendix G PRM, modeling shared HVAC and SWH systems

For projects with shared base building HVAC or service water heating (SWH) systems, teams
may model only the project space instead of following Appendix G PRM, Table G3.2, Additions
and Alterations requirements to model the full area served by the shared HVAC systems.

If modeling only the project space, either treat shared CHW and shared hot water as District
Energy Systems (DES) or allocate the base building HVAC and SWH to the project space.

Baseline design for projects with shared systems

The Baseline HVAC system type must be determined based on the base building parameters
unless Section G3.1.1 or additional or adjusted baseline HVAC system types applies to the
interiors project space.

Base building parameters include building type, number of floors, conditioned floor area, and
building peak cooling load.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 111
Proposed design: Allocation of shared systems
For shared systems serving similar occupancies, allocate based on area served by the system.
Multiply each shared system design parameter by the ratio of “total project floor area served” to
“total gross floor area served.”

For shared systems serving dissimilar occupancies, allocate based on the proportion of total
design capacity serving the project.

Equivalence to ASHRAE 90.1

Refer to the Project Priorities Library for regional paths addressing equivalence to ASHRAE
90.1.

For projects in the U.S., state or local codes are considered “equivalent” to ASHRAE 90.1-2019
or ASHRAE 90.1-2022 when the U.S. Department of Energy Building Energy Codes Program
status of state energy code adoption indicates a commercial code efficiency category matching
the referenced version of ASHRAE 90.1 or later for the project location in effect at the time of
project permit application.

The 2021 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC 2021) is recognized as equivalent to
ASHRAE 90.1-2019.

The 2024 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC 2024) is recognized as equivalent to
ASHRAE 90.1-2022.

For both versions of IECC:

• IECC Section C407 Total Building Performance may be used to document prerequisite
compliance only.
• IECC Prescriptive compliance (C402–C406) may be used in lieu of the ASHRAE 90.1-
2019 prescriptive method.

District energy systems (DES)

ASHRAE 90.1 refers to DES as “purchased CHW” or “purchased heat” even when this energy is
part of a campus distribution plant and not directly purchased from a utility or municipality.

Because DES systems are outside of the project scope of work, DES efficiency cannot
contribute toward achievement of prerequisite compliance. Central hot water and CHW systems
serving the Interiors project space may be treated the same as purchased heat and/or
purchased CHW using this guidance.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 112
For projects that use the ECB method, model purchased heat and/or purchased CHW as
independent energy sources using the same utility rates per unit of energy for the ECB and
design energy cost models.

For projects that use the PRM, use one of the following modeling methods to document the
DES:

METHOD A. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 ADDENDUM A.

(Removes inherent DES Penalty)

The project may apply ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum A to either the ASHRAE 90.1-
2019 or ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Appendix G criteria as applicable to avoid the inherent
penalty in the Appendix G PRM Performance Index Targets when modeling “purchased
heat” and “purchased CHW.”

Model HVAC systems for the baseline building design per ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Addendum A criteria as if all heating and cooling generation equipment is on-site.

Model the proposed design with natural gas forced draft boilers in place of district
heating and water-cooled chillers in place of district cooling, matching the type and
number specified in Addendum A. For projects using ASHRAE 90.1-2019, replace all
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum A references to Section 6 prescriptive criteria for the
proposed building design with ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 6.
Additional Considerations
Additional considerations: Linked credits

EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency. Use Method A for prerequisite

compliance if crediting DES efficiency toward the project performance in
EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.

EAc3: Renewable Energy. In the energy simulation, use submetering to

distinguish fuel used on-site from the modeled fuel use for the district hot
water plant. This information is necessary to inform the EAc3: Renewable
Energy, Renewable Energy Attributes, Project Energy Source criteria.

METHOD B. DIRECTLY MODEL PURCHASED HEAT AND/OR PURCHASED CHW.

Apply the PRM requirements to model purchased heat and/or purchased CHW as
independent energy sources in the baseline and proposed design, with the same utility
rates or source energy conversion factors for the baseline and proposed design. Use
published utility rates or source energy conversion factors when available. Otherwise, if
purchased energy rates or source energy conversion factors are not published for the

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 113
 district energy sources serving the project, derive these purchased energy rates and/or
conversion factors as follows:

o Purchased chilled water (CHW). Multiply the utility rate or source energy
conversion factor for electricity by a factor of 0.325 to estimate the CHW utility
rate or source energy conversion factor.
o Purchased heat from district hot water (HHW). Multiply the utility rate or
source energy conversion factor by a factor of 1.5 for the predominant fossil fuel
source used to generate the district hot water or natural gas if unknown.
o Purchased heat from district steam. Multiply the utility rate or source energy
conversion factor by a factor of 1.7 for the predominant fossil fuel source used to
generate the district hot water or natural gas if unknown.

Summary of EA credit linkages to EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency

Option 1 Option 2.
ASHRAE 90.1-2019 ASHRAE 90.1-2022
Applicability Limited to projects registered prior to Available to all projects.
January 1, 2028. Required for projects registered on or
after January 1, 2028.
Linked Credits:
EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency
Prescriptive Required as precondition to document 3 points automatically awarded for
Method points for additional efficiency. prerequisite compliance using
Prescriptive Method. (Path 1)
(Option 1, Paths (See Path 2, Case 1)
1 and 2 of the Further points for additional efficiency
credit) using either Case 1. Systems
Optimization or Case 2. Additional
efficiency requirements beyond ASHRAE
90.1-2022.
Appendix G PRM Incremental performance improvement Points awarded for improvement beyond
documented using the future source a 90.1-2019 equivalent-baseline using
(Option 2 of the energy metric earns points. the future source energy metric.
credit)
Performance target for prerequisite and
NOTE: Treatment credit determined separately using
of on-site simple calculation adjusting referenced
renewable energy BPF.
varies from
prerequisite.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 114
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Document compliance with mandatory measures from
ASHRAE Standard 90.1

Prescriptive ASHRAE 90.1 compliance forms or Comcheck

method compliance report confirming a system-by-system
approach.
Energy ASHRAE 90.1 compliance forms.
simulation
(ASHRAE Input-output reports from modeling software.
90.1, Energy consumption and demand for each building
Appendix G end-use and energy source.
PRM or ECB
Method) Exceptional calculation and supporting documentation
for referenced metrics (if applicable)
USGBC Minimum Energy Efficiency calculator or
ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Performance Based
Compliance Form
DES All Documentation on DES including energy source
serving the project.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• IECC 2021 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2021P3)
• IECC 2024 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2024P1)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 115
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING
EAp3
REQUIRED

INTENT
To improve energy performance and limit GHG emissions by verifying that systems are
operating per the OPR.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Comply With Commissioning Requirements

Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1’s commissioning requirements for building

systems, controls, and the building envelope, as applicable to the project scope, with the
following additional provisions:

• All projects shall provide commissioning that addresses the project scope of work,
including any tenant interfaces or interconnections with base building systems. Section
4.2.5.2 exceptions shall not apply.
• The referenced version of Standard 90.1 with errata shall be:
o 2019 or later for projects registered before January 1, 2028.
o 2022 or later for projects registered on or after January 1, 2028.
• By the end of the design development phase, the owner shall designate a
commissioning provider (CxP) with experience completing commissioning on at least
two projects of equal or larger scope and complexity. For alterations meeting the criteria
in Exception 4.2.5.2, the CxP may be directly associated with design or installation of the
building systems or controls being commissioned.
• In addition to the requirements of the applicable version of ASHRAE 90.1, the CxP shall:
o In predesign, or as early as possible, assist in the development of the OPR,
reviewing and updating the OPR through design and construction. OPR must
address project scope of work for HVAC, SWH, power, lighting, other equipment
including on-site renewable energy, and envelope.
o During design, review the BOD for compliance with the OPR, and attend at least
one meeting to discuss review comments and commissioning.
o During construction, review submittals and substitutions for design deviations
that impact the OPR, attend at least one milestone meeting, and perform a

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 116
 sample review (minimum 10%) of completed contractor documentation for
QA/QC.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
For the elements within the project scope of work, the prerequisite stipulates that projects
perform commissioning for building systems, controls, and the building envelope in compliance
with the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1, and additional provisions of the
LEED ID+C rating system.

Automatic achievement of prerequisite through EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning, Option

1
Projects that achieve EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning, Option 1 automatically comply with the
prerequisite requirements, since the credit requirements encompass all commissioning
requirements from the ASHRAE 90.1 standard referenced in EAp3: Fundamental
Commissioning.

Therefore, when planning commissioning scope, review the EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning,
Option 1 requirements, paying special attention to the required timing for CxP engagement
during predesign or very early in the commissioning process to accomplish the broader
commissioning scope of work required for credit compliance.

Tables 1 below provide a comparison of required tasks for EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning
compared to EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning, Option 1.

Required ASHRAE Standard 90.1 version

Projects registered before January 1, 2028, can reference ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019, or any
later version. Projects registered on or after January 1, 2028, must use ASHRAE Standard 90.1-
2022 or later.

The commissioning requirements are similar for the 2019 and 2022 versions of ASHRAE 90.1.

Additional considerations
Using a single version of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 for EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency, EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning, and EAp4: Energy Metering
and reporting streamlines documentation efforts.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 117
Approved equivalent standards
Projects may use IECC 2021 34 in lieu of ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019 and IECC 2024 35 in lieu
of ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022. Projects that use IECC instead of ASHRAE must still comply
with all additional LEED ID+C rating system requirements.

Selecting the CxP

As buildings and systems become more complex and as the systems required for Cx expand
beyond traditional mechanical equipment, many CxPs will consist of a team instead of an
individual person. Therefore, either an entity or an individual can act as the CxP. For projects
that use a CxP entity, designating a single person as the Cx project lead or manager ensures
consistency in documentation and quality control of the process.

Minimum qualifications
The CxP must have direct commissioning experience from the design phase through the
construction phase for at least two projects with equal or larger scope and complexity. The
previous experience should address projects of similar types and size range, similar types and
capacities of HVAC and SWH equipment, and controls with similar complexity.

Experience documented for a CxP entity must reflect the team performing the commissioning
work for the project.

Eligible entities
Per ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019, Section 4.2.5.2, the CxP must be completely independent
from the design or construction team. Consider the following when selecting a CxP:

• The CxP can be a third-party entity not currently contracted for any design or
construction aspects of the project.
• The CxP can be employed by the owner, provided that the entity meets the CxP
minimum qualifications.
• If the CxP is employed by any company that has direct influence on the design and
construction, the commissioning plan must clearly address any potential conflicts of
interest and demonstrate that the CxP acts and operates solely on the behalf of the
owner, reports directly to the owner, and works entirely independently from the design
and construction team.
• The CxP can be employed by the company performing the design or construction of the
project; however, they must be a completely independent member of the design team,

34
“International Energy Conservation Code”, International Code Council (ICC), accessed March 31, 2025,
https://codes.iccsafe.org/codes/i-codes.
35
International Energy Conservation Code”, ICC.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 118
 and not directly associated with any aspect of the design and/or installation of the project
systems.

CxP eligible entities for projects with limited scope

For prerequisite compliance, the CxP may be directly associated with design or installation of
the commissioned systems if one of the ASHRAE 90.1, Section 4.2.5.2 exceptions apply:

• There are fewer than 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of conditioned space with
combined heating, cooling, and SWH equipment capacity totaling fewer than 960,000
Btu/h (280 kW).
• The project complies with ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.3 Simplified Building Compliance
Path for Systems.
• There are nonrefrigerated warehouses.

Verification and testing (V&T) providers

ASHRAE Standard 90.1 also requires that the CxP include V&T providers. A V&T provider is an
entity that completes the activities needed to implement the project functional performance
testing (FPT) activities or verify that elements of the project meet stated requirements. In many
cases, the entity acting as the CxP fulfills this requirement. Confirm that an individual, qualified
in verification and FPT execution is part of the commissioning team.

CxP requirements for building envelope commissioning

If the project scope includes the building envelope, the CxP must include qualified individuals
who can perform the envelope design review and air barrier inspection or a V&T provider who
can perform air leakage testing.

Timing for CxP engagement

Identify a CxP no later than the end of the design development phase. The CxP has the primary
responsibility of leading the design and construction team through all aspects of the
commissioning.

Additional considerations
A single entity can perform all system commissioning efforts, provided that
the entity meets the minimum requirements outlined.

For projects that use different qualified individuals to perform various Cx

tasks, ensure sufficient collaboration within the team to provide continuity
from design through operations. For example, an entity may have different

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 119
 CxP team members review the design documents than the team witnessing
testing.

Scope of fundamental commissioning

The prerequisite stipulates that projects conform with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 requirements for
all referenced systems and additional provisions as outlined in the LEED ID+C: Commercial
Interiors rating system.

Systems requiring commissioning.

At a minimum, commissioned systems must include all energy-using systems within the project
scope of work that are referenced in ASHRAE 90.1, Sections 5–10, including the building
envelope, HVAC, SWH, power, lighting, on-site renewable energy, energy monitoring systems,
refrigeration equipment, energy storage systems, load management systems, and other energy-
using systems.

Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR)

The OPR documents the functional requirements of the building. It also details the expectations
of the project’s use and operation. The OPR includes objectives for the project which verify that
all stated goals become integral with the project design, construction, and operation.

The owner or a design professional can develop the OPR. However, the owner must provide
input during the development. This ensures that the OPR captures critical elements, like
sustainability goals and targets for the project. If a CxP’s engagement begins prior to the OPR
development, the CxP may provide input on the initial development efforts. The OPR is a living
document, which requires ongoing updates throughout the design phases.

Additional considerations
The owner plays a critical role in developing and updating the OPR. The OPR
establishes a clear vision for the project, identifying expected outcomes and
goals for sustainable project development. As the project progresses, decisions
made for the project should align with the OPR. It is important that the owner
remain a key stakeholder, and ultimate approver of the final version of the
document.

Basis of design (BOD)

The project’s design professionals typically create the BOD. The BOD explains how the design
and construction team will execute the OPR. Processes and assumptions made early in the
design phases to achieve the OPR’s intent should be included in the BOD, along with relevant
project information. A BOD addresses performance criteria, general project characteristics
(envelope, HVAC, water), and governing codes and standards, at minimum.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 120
The BOD is a living document, which requires updates throughout the design and construction
phases.

Design reviews and design phase meetings

Design reviews by the CxP are critical elements of the commissioning process. Reviews support
the energy efficiency goals of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 by verifying that the design meets the
requirements of the standard. Early reviews allow teams to correct areas of the design that do
not meet the requirements before construction begins. This avoids costly change orders during
construction.

Along with design reviews, the CxP must review the OPR and BOD. The CxP must also confirm
that the construction documents include required commissioning information.

The design reviews should confirm that the design meets relevant energy efficiency, energy
metering and reporting, peak thermal load reduction, renewable energy, and grid-interactive
requirements documented for the LEED v5 EA credit category.

During the design phase, the CxP must participate in at least one coordination meeting to
discuss design review comments.

Submittal reviews and FPT development

During construction, the CxP must review submittals for equipment included in the Cx scope of
work. This review allows the CxP to identify deviations from the design and OPR, and provide
comments to the owner, engineer, and contractor on any significant issues. Addressing these
issues prior to procurement saves time and money by avoiding incorrect equipment purchases.

The CxP has primary responsibility for developing the FPTs. FPTs written specifically for the
equipment and systems designed for the project provide the most value. Therefore, CxPs must
use the design team’s approved submittals to develop any testing procedures for the project.
The FPTs should cover all modes of operations, including seasonal testing.

Pre-commissioning site visits and contractor documentation review

Determining commissioning readiness before execution is an important step to minimizing
potential delays from failed testing efforts. Through visual inspections and a sample review of
the contractor’s completed documents, the CxP can confirm timing for FPT execution efforts.

The CxP must review at least 10% of the contractor-completed Cx documents. This quality
assurance review allows the CxP to understand the quality of documentation efforts and identify

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 121
any gaps in the process. Performing this review prior to the Cx readiness site visit also allows
the CxP to determine timing for the required site visit.

Prior to Cx execution, the CxP must complete at least one site visit to verify Cx readiness.

Additional considerations
Projects that have phased construction, and phased Cx testing, should
consider multiple Cx readiness site visits that align with each phase of the
construction efforts.

Execution of FPTs
The CxP must witness FPT executed by the contractors and the subcontractors. Perform testing
when all system components are installed, energized, programmed, balanced, and checked for
functionality.

FPT sampling
For projects that have a large quantity of similar system types, such as an office with multiple
VAV boxes, a sampling strategy is acceptable for functional testing of those similar systems.

An acceptable sampling rate is typically 10%. When using a sampling rate, the CxP should
consider the testing procedure’s failure rate. If multiple failures occur for the same equipment or
system type, determine if there is a systemic issue.

Additional example: Sampling rate and failure eate

A hotel has 200 fan coil units. The owner and CxP agree to a 10% sampling
strategy. During testing, the CxP tests 20 fan coil units. If 10 of the 20 tested
fail, additional testing is highly recommended. Failures of that magnitude
would be cause for greater concern.

Seasonal or deferred testing

The CxP can use seasonal or deferred testing, when necessary. For example, if the initial FPT
effort occurs in the summer, tests for heating mode can occur during colder months. The CxP is
responsible for amending the final report and other documents, once testing is complete.

Meetings
During the construction phase, the CxP participates in at least one milestone meeting to discuss
the commissioning findings and work toward resolution of identified issue.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 122
Final Cx report
The CxP has primary responsibility for authoring the Final Cx report. The final report should
include, at minimum, an executive summary of the Cx process and the results of the project’s
testing efforts, an updated issues and resolution (I/R) log that identifies items which are closed
and proposed resolutions for outstanding items, copies of the final versions of the OPR and
BOD, design review logs, copies of the approved submittals used for the FPTs, and copies of
the completed FPTs.

Provide a preliminary Cx report for projects that finalize the LEED application prior to the
completion of Cx. The report must address all major envelope, MEP, renewable, and grid-
interactive systems; confirm system installation; and indicate that Cx has commenced for all
systems.

The CxP must provide the final Cx report to the Owner once Cx is complete.

Key Tasks and Milestones for Commissioning

The CxP is responsible for completing the following tasks to comply with the Fundamental
Commissioning prerequisite requirements:

Predesign (or immediately upon engagement of the CxP, no later than the end of design
development)
• Assist in the development of the OPR.
• Develop the Cx plan.

Design phase
• Review BOD.
• Develop or approve Cx specifications.
• Design document reviews (design drawings and specifications).
• Attend coordination/design meetings to discuss review comments and commissioning.
• Assist in update to OPR.

Construction phase
• Perform focused submittal reviews for design deviations that impact the OPR.
• Perform field reviews.
• Review/witness performance testing.
• Attend at least one Cx meeting.
• Review sampling of QA/QC documentation (checklist and tests).
• Track identified issues to resolution (I/R log).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 123
 • Develop preliminary commissioning report.

Occupancy / operations phase

• Review training program.
• Develop final commissioning report.
• Develop or review on-going Cx plan.

A detailed comparison of key tasks and milestones for EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning and
EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning is provided in Table 1.

Table 1. Tasks for EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning and EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning

Phase Task Fundamental Enhanced Minimum requirements as

descriptions ASHRAE ASHRAE listed
90.1-2019 202-2018
Identification of Section Section 5.1.1, Fundamental. By the end of
CxP 4.2.5.2, with with timing design development phase.
timing required by
required by LEED Enhanced. During predesign or
LEED very early in the design phase.
Predesign Assist in Required by Section 6.2, Enhanced. OPR shall list and
development/ LEED 6.3 define the systems and
For CxP review and assemblies to be commissioned,
engaged later update OPR to including sampling strategies
than include HVAC, accepted by the owner. It should
predesign, SWH, Power, clearly define objectives, the Cx
tasks must be Lighting and scope and requirements, and
completed other identify the number, format, and
immediately equipment scheduling of design and
upon CxP submittal reviews.
engagement. Develop Cx Section Section 7.2, Fundamental and Enhanced.
Plan 4.2.5.2.1 7.3 Development of Cx plan.
Section
4.2.5.2.2 Enhanced. Update Cx plan at
least once per phase (Design
Development, Construction
Documents, Construction).
Design Review BOD Required by Section 8.2, Enhanced. Review BOD for
Phase LEED 8.3 compliance with OPR.
Update Cx Plan Not Required Section 7.2, Enhanced. Update Cx plan at
7.3 least once per phase (DD, CD,
Construction).

Develop Cx Section Section 9.2,

Specification 4.2.5.1.1, 9.3
4.2.5.2.1,
6.9.2

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 124
 Design Section Section 10.2, Full drawing and specification
Document 4.2.5.2, 10.3 review for systems to be
Reviews 4.2.5.2.2 commissioned.
(Design
Drawings and Fundamental and Enhanced:
Specifications). detail compliance with the OPR
and provisions in respective
standards.

Each design review to include

issues log for tracking/resolution
of issues.

Enhanced: Back-check review

to confirm if
recommendations/comments
have been addressed.
Attend Required by Required by Fundamental and Enhanced:
coordination / LEED LEED Minimum of one
design coordination/design review
meetings to meeting to discuss design review
discuss review comments.
comments and
commissioning.
Update to OPR Required for Section 6.2, Fundamental and Enhanced:
LEED 6.3 Update OPR as needed prior to
end of Design Phase.

Construction Pre- Not required Section Enhanced: CxP shall conduct a

phase construction 12.2.4 Cx kick-off and scoping meeting
kick-off meeting with the project team to explain
Cx procedures and coordinate
Cx Activities throughout the
construction phase.
Update Cx plan Not required Section 7.2, Enhanced: Update Cx plan at
7.3 least once per phase (DD, CD,
Construction).
Submittal Required by Section 11.2, Fundamental: Review
review LEED 11.3 submittals/substitutions for
design deviations that impact the
OPR

Enhanced: Thorough review of

relevant building system
submissions for compliance with
the design documents and OPR
Schedule Required Section Fundamental: Ensure Cx
relative to 7.2.3.d requirements/ milestones are
other tasks included in the project
construction schedule.

Enhanced: Detailed description

of Cx activities and a schedule of

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 125
 activities. Schedule is included in
the Cx plan.

Field reviews Section Section Fundamental: Minimum of one

4.2.5.1 12.2.6 site visit to verify Cx readiness.

Enhanced: Minimum of one site

visit to review contractor
completed construction
checklists. A checklist for each
major system type should be
reviewed during the site visit.
Testing Section Section Fundamental and Enhanced:
(review/witness 4.2.5.2 12.2.6 Minimum of one site visit to
performance witness execution of functional-
testing) performance testing, per the
scope of the project.
Meetings Required by Required by Fundamental: At least one
LEED LEED meeting to discuss review
comments and commissioning

Enhanced: At least two

milestone meetings (i.e., 25%,
50%, 75%, and 100% of
schedule).
QA/QC Required by Section Fundamental: Sample review of
Documentation LEED 12.2.2a, completed contractor
(checklist and 12.2.6.c documentation (i.e., 10%)
tests)
Enhanced: Additional reviews of
completed contractor
documentation (i.e., 25%)
Track Identified 4.2.5.1, Section 13.2, Fundamental: Include (I/R) log
Issues to 4.2.5.2 13.3 in the Preliminary Cx Report
Resolution Enhanced: A formal I/R log shall
(Issues / be maintained throughout the
Resolution Log) project until all issues are
resolved or accepted by the
owner. Include the final I/R log,
with all items closed, in the final
Cx report.

Systems Not Required Section 14.2, Enhanced: Compile the systems

Manual 14.3 manual, which includes all
information needed to
understand, operate, and
maintain the building's systems
and assemblies.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 126
 Operations and Not Required Required for Enhanced: Compile an
Maintenance LEED operations and maintenance
Manual manual from contractor
submissions.
Preliminary 4.2.5.1.2, Section Fundamental and Enhanced:
Commissioning 4.2.5.2.2 17.2.1 Completion of LEED online
Report documentation as well as report
summarizing Cx activities to end
of construction phase, including
OPR, Cx plan and reports.
Occupancy / Review 4.5.2.2.2.c.5 Section 15.2, Fundamental: Review the
Operations Training 15.3 training plan.
Phase Program
Enhanced: Review the training
plan and confirm that it has been
implemented. Include training
plan in the systems manual.
Post- Not Required Section 16.2, Enhanced: Conduct minimum of
Occupancy 16.3 one in-person, post-occupancy
Review site visit with facility maintenance
staff (or similar) prior to end of
the warranty period.
Final 4.2.5.2.2 Section Full report summarizing Cx
Commissioning 17.2.3 activities, including occupancy
Report phase activities
Ongoing Cx Not Required Required for Enhanced: Provide an ongoing
Plan LEED Cx plan that allows project
operators to maintain high
performance. At minimum,
include a set of blank forms for
future use by the LEED AP O+M
team.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 127
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Final (or draft) commissioning report. If the report is a draft,
include a plan for the completion of commissioning and
training, including climatic and other conditions required for
performance of any deferred tests.
Identification of CxP including key personnel and V&T
providers (as applicable).
Qualifications of CxP and V&T providers.
Confirmation that BOD/OPR were reviewed by CxP.
Confirmation of design phase/milestone meetings.
Confirmation that submittals were reviewed and at least
10% were QA/QC’d.
Confirmation of compliance with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES
Standard 90.1 commissioning requirements for building
systems, controls, and the building envelope (Section
4.2.5.2 exceptions shall not apply) as applicable to the
scope of work.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 commissioning requirements for building systems,
controls, and the building envelope, with the following additional provisions
• The referenced version with errata shall be:
o 2019 for projects registered prior to January 1, 2028,
(store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
o 2022 for projects registered on or after January 1, 2028,
(store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• IECC 2021 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2021P3)
• IECC 2024 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2024P)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 128
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
—
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite and Restoration

ENERGY METERING AND REPORTING

EAp4
REQUIRED

INTENT
To support energy management practices and facilitate identification of ongoing opportunities
for energy and GHG emissions savings by tracking and reporting building energy use and
demand.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Energy Monitoring and Recording
AND
Report Energy Data

This prerequisite applies only to project scope including at least 1 of the following:

• An initial fit-out of project with gross area of at least 10,000 square feet (929 square
meters).
• An alteration replacing electric power distribution for project with gross area of at least
10,000 square feet (929 square meters).
• New service for electricity, fuel, or thermal energy supplied directly to the tenant by a
utility, energy provider, or plant that is not in the building.
• New on-site renewable energy.

Energy monitoring and recording

For initial fit-out of interior spaces with gross area of at least 10,000 square feet (929 square
meter), install (or use existing) measurement devices to monitor and record tenant energy use
per ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1.

The referenced version of Standard 90.1 with errata shall be:

o 2019 or later for projects registered before January 1, 2028.

o 2022 or later for projects registered on or after January 1, 2028.

For initial fit-out of interior spaces fewer than 10,000 square feet (929 square meters), or for all
alterations replacing electrical power distribution or providing new energy service directly to the

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 129
tenant from a utility, energy provider, or plant that is not in the building, provide measurement
devices capable of measuring total energy consumption for each new service, at least monthly.

For new on-site renewable energy generation systems installed in the project scope, provide
measurement devices capable of measuring renewable energy generation:

o At 15-minute intervals for tenant spaces larger than 10,000 square feet (929
square meters)
o At least monthly for interior spaces fewer than 10,000 square feet (929 square
meters)

Report energy data

Commit to reporting the following data to USGBC at least annually: monthly energy data for 12
consecutive months of total energy consumption for each tenant-metered energy source;
tenant-metered on-site renewable energy generation; and, if available, tenant-metered peak
electrical demand. This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building
changes ownership or lessee.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Applicability
The prerequisite requirements only apply to projects of a certain size or extent of construction
within the project’s scope of work:

• Initial buildout with at least 10,000 square feet (929 square meters) of area. Comply
with ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
• New energy service connections to the tenant. Provide metering capturing monthly
energy use.
• Initial buildout fewer than 10,000 square feet (929 square meters). Provide monthly
electricity metering.
• Alteration replacing electric power distribution. Provide monthly electricity metering.
• On-site renewable energy. Provide metering for renewable electricity generation.

All projects referenced above must also report energy data to USGBC. Refer to Table 1 for a
summary of the prerequisite energy metering and reporting requirements.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 130
Table 1. Summary of LEED v5 EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting Requirements
Alterations of Initial buildout or addition >=
spaces in 10,000 sq. ft.
existing buildings Applicability or Referenced
recording 90.1 Sections
frequency or
LEED-specific
MONITORING
(excludes shared base building energy)
New energy service supplied directly to Monthly Monthly 90.1-2019
the project space. Total energy by 10.4.6.1
energy source for: 90.1-2022
• Natural gas 10.4.7.1
• Fuel oil
• Propane
• District CHW
• District steam
• District hot water
Total electricity for project space Monthly 15-minute 90.1-2019
(For new service, 8.4.3.1
or alteration 90.1-2022
replacing electric 8.4.3.1
power distribution)
Submetered electricity for project N/A 15-minute 90.1-2019
space (except residential dwelling 8.4.3.1
units): 90.1-2022
• HVAC 8.4.3.1
• Interior lighting
• Exterior lighting
• Receptacle circuits
• Refrigeration systems (90.1-
2022)
On-site renewable electricity in project Monthly 15-minute LEED-Specific
scope.
REPORTING
For metered data, commit to annually X X LEED-Specific
sharing monthly data with USGBC for:
• Energy consumption by energy
source
• On-site renewable energy
generation
• Peak electrical demand.
Capable of creating user reports for X 90.1-2019
consumption and demand at least 10.4.6.2 90.1-
hourly, daily, monthly, and annually, 2022 10.7.4.2
with system capable of maintaining all
data collected for 36 months.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 131
Energy Monitoring and Recording
ASHRAE STANDARD 90.1, MONITORING AND RECORDING REQUIREMENTS
Initial buildouts with at least 10,000 square feet (929 square meters) of gross building area shall
meet ASHRAE Standard 90.1 energy monitoring and recording requirements:

Tenant energy monitoring requirements

Electricity meters must be capable of metering and recording total project electricity use at 15-
minute intervals, excluding shared systems (ASHRAE 90.1, Sections 8.4.3.1). Exclude
electricity from shared HVAC equipment (e.g., a central air handling unit providing supply air to
the tenant space) when determining the tenant submetering requirements. Include electricity for
system components in the tenant space, such as fan coil units and VAV terminals.

For all other energy sources delivered directly to the project space from outside the building’s
site boundary, provide measurement devices capable of monitoring energy use at least monthly.
Examples include fuel, district heating, or district cooling delivered from a utility or from a
campus energy plant directly to the project space.

Electricity submetering requirements (ASHRAE 90.1 Section 8.4.3.1)

Projects must submeter end use electricity data at 15-minute intervals for HVAC, interior
lighting, exterior lighting, and receptacle; and if using ASHRAE 90.1-2022-compliant
refrigeration systems.

Electricity end uses that contribute less than 10% of total project electrical load may be
excluded. For example, if tenant exterior lighting loads are less than 10% of total tenant
electricity use, teams can report exterior lighting with interior lighting. Electricity end uses may
also be excluded if the whole-building contribution of the end use comprises less than 10% of
whole-building electricity use.

ASHRAE Standard 90.1 reporting

(ASHRAE 90.1, Sections 8.4.3.2 and 90.1-2019 10.4.6.1 or 90.1-2022 10.4.7.1)

The monitoring system must include the capability to report both total and submetered electricity
data at least hourly, daily, monthly, and annually, and this data must be accessible to the
operators of the space.

Third-party energy monitoring services or applications may be used to comply with the data
reporting and data storage requirements.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 132
Electricity data must be graphically displayed in buildings that are required to have digital control
systems — for example, buildings with air handling units with fans > 10 hp (7.5 kW), CHW
plants, or hot water plants.

ASHRAE Standard 90.1 version

Projects registered before January 1, 2028, must reference the energy monitoring and recording
requirements in ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019 or later version. Projects registered on or after
January 1, 2028, must use the slightly augmented energy monitoring and recording
requirements from ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022. For example, ASHRAE 90.1-2022 adds a
submetering requirement for refrigeration systems.

Additional considerations
Teams that use a single version of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 for EAp2:
Minimum Energy Efficiency, EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning, and EAp4:
Energy Metering and Reporting can streamline documentation efforts.

International Energy Conservation Codes (IECC) equivalent standard

IECC is an approved equivalent standard for this prerequisite. IECC 2021 requirements can
replace ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019. IECC 2024 requirements can replace ASHRAE Standard
90.1-2022.

New energy service connections to the tenant

For each new service connection of electricity, fuel, or thermal energy delivered directly to the
project space from outside the building’s site boundary, provide measurement devices capable
of monitoring energy use at least monthly. Examples include fuel, district heating, or district
cooling delivered from a utility or from a campus energy plant to directly to the project space.

Initial buildout less than 10,000 square feet (929 square meters) or alteration replacing
electric power distribution
Provide measurement devices capable of monitoring monthly electricity use for the project,
excluding shared system uses, such as central air handling units.

On-site renewable energy

For any new on-site renewable energy system, projects must provide new meters that can
measure, record and report on energy generation. For projects that are 10,000 square feet (929
square meters) or greater, record data in 15-minute intervals. Projects that do not meet this
threshold can provide data monthly.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 133
Report Energy Data
Report data annually to USGBC for at least five years, post-occupancy for each energy source
that is required to be metered above. Include monthly energy consumption from each metered
energy source, including on-site renewable energy generation. For interior buildouts larger than
10,000 square feet (929 square meters), provide monthly peak electric demand. Provide data
using the USGBC-provided platform, which includes third-party interfaces with tools such as
ENERGY STAR® Portfolio Manager.

For project owners and managers, this valuable data enhances the understanding of building
performance. The data also educates occupants and building users on behaviors that impact
energy consumption and how positive behavioral changes can create better buildings.

USGBC aims to collect data from all LEED projects. Comparing data across similar project
types allows for ongoing benchmarking of high-performing buildings within the LEED portfolio.
The data influences refinements and enhancements to future LEED rating system requirements.
Data shared with USGBC gives critical insight to the industry on the design, construction, and
operation of high-performing buildings.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Confirmation of project scope of work.
Confirmation that the project complies with the necessary
90.1 sections for the project type(s).
Confirmation that the project includes compliant devices to
monitor and record on-site renewable electricity generation
(as applicable).
Evidence of a commitment from the owner or responsible
party that the required energy data will be shared with
USGBC.
Confirmation of data-sharing source.

Note energy sources delivered to the tenant space.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• IECC 2021 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2021P3)
• IECC 2024 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2024P1)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 134
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite —
and Restoration

FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

EAp5
REQUIRED

INTENT
To reduce GHG emissions from refrigerants by accelerating the phaseout of refrigerants with
high global warming potential (GWP) and by reducing refrigerant leakage.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Option 1. No Refrigerants
OR
Option 2. Refrigerants

Option 1. No Refrigerants
Do not use refrigerants in the project.

OR

Option 2. Refrigerants
Meet the following requirements for refrigerant-containing equipment installed, replaced, or
altered in the project scope of work:

• Complete refrigerant inventory: Complete an inventory of the refrigerant-containing

equipment installed within the project scope of work and any existing equipment under
control of the tenant. The inventory shall include the refrigerant type, GWP, amounts of
refrigerants contained in each, and the total GWP of all refrigerants.
• Do not use hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) refrigerants in new equipment.
• Evaluate available alternatives during the design process for any refrigerants with GWP
> 700.
• Leak check and repair. Prior to substantial completion, check both new and existing
refrigerant-containing equipment for refrigerant leaks and repair all leaks identified. For
systems with field-assembled joints, perform a leak check, vacuum check, and pressure
check prior to charging with refrigerant.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 135
NOTE: The refrigerant inventory may be documented for the tenant or for the entire building,
provided that these include tenant systems.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Option 1 applies to projects without refrigerants. Projects with refrigerants must follow Option 2.

Option 1. No Refrigerants
Projects with no new or reused refrigerant-containing equipment under the control of the tenant
automatically meet the prerequisite.

Option 1 criteria does not preclude the use of equipment containing less than 0.5 lbs. (225 g),
such as standard residential refrigerators, small wine coolers, or portable space dehumidifiers.

OR

Option 2. Refrigerants
Teams pursuing this path must avoid HCFC refrigerants, analyze alternatives for refrigerants
with a GWP greater than 700, inventory refrigerant-using equipment, and ensure no leaks from
refrigerant-containing equipment.

No HCFC refrigerants
New equipment installed within the project scope of work cannot use HCFC refrigerants, which
cause damage to the ozone layer and often have very high GWP.

Developed and developing countries

In developed countries, government regulations have already phased out HCFC refrigerants for
new equipment per the Kigali Amendment to the Montreal Protocol 36.

In developing countries, teams must take precautions to limit selections to equipment that does
not use HCFCs. Equipment specifications must clearly disallow HCFCs such as R-22, used in
air conditioners, or R-123, commonly used in chillers.

Evaluation of alternative refrigerants

GWP measures the relative contribution of a substance toward heating the atmosphere
compared to the same mass of carbon dioxide (CO2). For example, R-410A with a GWP of
2,088 traps 2,088 times more heat in the atmosphere than CO2.

36
“About Montreal Protocol”, UN Environment Programme, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.unep.org/ozonaction/who-we-
are/about-montreal-protocol.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 136
This prerequisite references 100-year GWPs assessed in accordance with the IPCC Fourth
Assessment report or later.

Reviewing refrigerant properties during the design process allows teams to address high GWP
refrigerants and find suitable alternatives before construction begins. As the industry continues
to develop new alternative refrigerants, projects can find cost-effective solutions that also meet
efficiency and environmental goals.

Equipment with GWP > 700

During the design process, if the specifications reference equipment with refrigerant GWP
exceeding 700 or do not specify the refrigerant(s) that can be used, develop a list of alternative
equipment options with refrigerant GWP less than or equal to 700. Review all proposed options
with the owner.

Refrigerant properties vary in efficiency, toxicity, flammability, volumetric capacity, and pressure
ratings. Not all refrigerants are interchangeable within a piece of equipment or in a system.
Therefore, completing this evaluation early in design provides the most benefit.

For applications where GWP less than 700 is impractical, consider the use of reclaimed
refrigerant instead of newly manufactured virgin refrigerant, to limit overall impact.

Table 1 provides a common list of refrigerants and their GWP, adapted from the Net Zero
Carbon Guide 37 and The Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Institute of Canada
(HRAI). 38

Table 1. Common refrigerants and their applications

Refrigerant Classification GWP Common System Applications
R404A HFC blend 3,920 Low-Medium Temperature Commercial
Refrigeration
Low-Medium Temperature Industrial
Refrigeration
Ice Machines
R410A HFC 2,088 Conventional VRF systems
Heat Pumps
Chillers
R22 HCFC 1,810 Commercial Refrigeration
Industrial Refrigeration
Commercial Air Conditioning
Residential Air Conditioning
R134a HFC 1,430 Heat Pumps

37
“Refrigerants and their Contribution to Global Warming”, Net Zero Carbon Guide, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.netzerocarbonguide.co.uk/guide/designing-and-building/heating-your-building/refrigerants-and-their-contribution-to-
global-warming.
38
“Refrigerant Table: Explanation and Glossary of Terms”, The Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Institute of Canada
(HRAI), accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.hrai.ca/uploads/userfiles/files/refrigerant_table_June2019.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 137
 Refrigerant Classification GWP Common System Applications
Chillers
R32 HFC 633 Hybrid VRF systems
Heat Pumps
Chillers
R513A HFO 573 Medium Temperature Commercial Refrigeration
Medium Temperature Industrial Refrigeration
Chillers
Air Conditioning Units
Heat Pumps
R600 HC 4 Heat Pumps
(Butane) Chillers
R290 Natural 3 Commercial Refrigeration
(Propane) Heat Pumps
Chillers
R1234ze HFO <1 Heat Pumps
Chillers
R744 (CO2) Natural 1 Heat Pumps
R717 (NH4, Natural 0 Heat Pumps
ammonia)

Equipment inventory
Project teams must identify all refrigerant-containing equipment in the LEED ID+C: Commercial
Interiors project, including new equipment installed in the project scope and any existing
equipment within the project boundary, owned or controlled by the tenant. Equipment that
contains less than 0.5 pounds (225 grams) of refrigerant, such as standard residential
refrigerators in dwelling units, can be excluded from the calculations.

Manage the inventory during the construction phase. If equipment substitutions occurred during
the submittal and procurement phases, update the inventory to reflect the actual installed
equipment.

Table 2 is a sample and noncomprehensive list of the types of refrigerant-using equipment that
may be included in a project’s scope of work.

A refrigerant inventory for the complete building is acceptable in lieu of a project-specific

inventory. Ensure that the inventory is updated with any new equipment installed within the
project scope.

Additional considerations — equipment inventory

Completing the inventory in the Construction Documents phase provides
owners and design professionals with a complete understanding of the future
climate impacts.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 138
Table 2. Refrigerant-containing equipment
Application Equipment/System Type
HVAC, Space Cooling Equipment Stationary Air Conditioners and Heat Pump
Chillers
Computer Room Air Conditioning Units
Service Water Heaters Heat pump Service Water Heaters
Retail Food Refrigeration
Cold Storage
Commercial Vending Machines
Ice Machines
Industrial Process Refrigeration Process Chillers
Ice Rink Chillers
Other Process Refrigeration

Data collection
For each piece of equipment, document the refrigerant properties, including type of refrigerant,
refrigerant GWP (GWPREFRIGERANT), and refrigerant charge (Rc).

When the project design includes field-assembled refrigerant piping with long pipe lengths or
large pressure drops (e.g., variable refrigerant flow (VRF) systems, industrial process
equipment), teams must account for additional required Rc in the calculations per
manufacturer’s specifications or confirm that the manufacturer’s default charge or referenced
submittals already account for this additional charge.

Calculate the total equipment GWP for each equipment using Equation 1.

Equation 1. GWPEQUIPMENT calculation

𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = 𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅

The project’s total GWP is the sum of the GWPs for all refrigerant-using equipment in the
project:

Equation 2. GWPTOTAL calculation

𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = � 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑈𝑈𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼

Determine the weighted average GWP for the project by dividing the project’s total GWP by the
sum of refrigerant charge for all equipment:

Equation 3. Weighted average GWP calculation

𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝐿𝐿
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊ℎ𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 =
𝛴𝛴𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 139
Leak check and repair
Perform leak checks for all refrigerant-containing equipment in the project, including new and
existing equipment. Field-installed piping requires vacuum and pressure testing during the
installation process per the International Mechanical Code Chapter 11 39, EPA Clean Air Act
Section 608 40, European Union F-Gas Regulations 41, or similar referenced standards.

For existing systems or self-contained systems, leak check inspections may leverage electronic
leak detectors, data from the building automation system, visual inspections for oil residue on
joints or for bubbling from leaks after applying soapy water, audible detection of hissing or
bubbling sounds, and/or pressure testing.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. No All Description of the cooling and heating systems used for
Refrigerants the project. Confirmation that no refrigerants are used
within the project boundary and how the project meets
cooling, heating, and other project loads without
refrigerants.
Option 2. All Narrative summarizing the evaluation of available
Refrigerants alternatives for any refrigerant with a GWP >700. Include
a list of the original selected refrigerants as compared to
the recommended alternative.
Refrigerant inventory with complete list of all refrigerant-
containing equipment. Each piece of equipment shall
include the equipment type, refrigerant type, GWP, and
Rc.
Total GWP of all refrigerants.

Narrative describing the refrigerant leak check

evaluation. Include confirmation that the leak check has
occurred for all equipment.
Attestation that all leaks are repaired prior to charging
with refrigerant.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• EPA 2023 AIM ACT Technology Transitions Rule (epa.gov/climate-hfcs-
reduction/regulatory-actions-technology-transitions)
• EPA regulations - 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart F (ecfr.gov/current/title-40/chapter-I/subchapter-
C/part-82/subpart-F)
• International Mechanical Code Chapter 11 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IMC2021P3)

39
“International Mechanical Code Chapter 11”, ICC, accessed March 31, 2025, https://codes.iccsafe.org/content/IMC2021P3.
40
“EPA Clean Air Act Section 608, U.S EPA”, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.epa.gov/section608/section-608-clean-air-act.
41
“European Union F-Gas Regulations”, EUR-Lex, European Union, accessed March 31, 2025, https://eur-
lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/573/oj.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 140
• EPA Clean Air Act Section 608 (epa.gov/section608/section-608-clean-air-act)
• European Union F-Gas Regulations (eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/573/oj)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 141
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit —
and Restoration

ELECTRIFICATION
EAc1
1–5 points

INTENT
To encourage buildings to be designed so that they do not depend on burning fuel on-site,
leading to better indoor and outdoor air quality and to low-carbon operations as the grid
decarbonizes.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–5
Option 1. No On-Site Combustion—Base Building and Tenant Systems 5
OR
Option 2. No On-Site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures—Base 1–5
Building and Tenant Systems
Path 1. Space Heating 2
AND/OR
Path 2. Service Water Heating 1
AND/OR
Path 3. Cooking and Other Process Loads 1–2
Option 3. No On-Site Combustion, Limited Scope 1–3
OR
Option 4. Base Building Documentation and Tenant Compliance 5

Option 1. No On-Site Combustion — Base Building and Tenant Systems (5

points)
Design and operate the project from start-up with no on-site combustion except for emergency
support systems.

The combined weighted average equipment efficiency for space heating and service water
heating (SWH) must be at least 1.8 Coefficient of Performance (COP) for initial build-out
construction or at least 1.2 COP for alterations.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2

• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 142
 • SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water heater
criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions

OR

Option 2. No On-Site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures—Base Building

and Tenant Systems (1–5 points)
Pursue any combination of the following paths for a maximum of 4 points:

PATH 1. SPACE HEATING (2 POINTS)

Design space heating to be capable of operating without on-site combustion except at low
temperatures. Projects in climate zones 3 and above must have a weighted average space
heating equipment efficiency of at least 1.8 COP for initial build-out construction or at least 1.2
COP for alterations.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures

AND/OR

PATH 2. SWH (1 POINT)

Design SWH systems to be capable of operating without on-site combustion except at low
temperatures. Projects with total SWH capacity exceeding 34,000 Btu/hr (10 kW) must have a
weighted average service hot water equipment efficiency of at least 1.8 COP for initial build-out
construction or at least 1.2 COP for alterations.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water heater
criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions
• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures

AND/OR

PATH 3. COOKING AND OTHER PROCESS LOADS (1–2 POINTS)

Design cooking, laundry, process equipment, and on-site power generation except emergency
support systems to be capable of operating without on-site combustion.

Not in scope (1 point)

• Cooking, laundry, or process heating systems are not in project scope of work.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 143
In scope (2 points)
• Cooking, laundry, process heating, process drying, and/or on-site power generation are
installed within the project scope.

The following equipment may be excluded:

• Process heating equipment designed for operation at low temperatures

Option 3. No On-Site Combustion, Limited Scope (1–3 points)

For the project scope of work:

• Do not install on-site combustion equipment in the project scope of work.

• Combined weighted average equipment efficiency for new space heating and SWH must
be at least 1.8 COP for initial build-out construction or at least 1.2 COP for alterations.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2

• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures
• SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water heater
criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions

Points are awarded according to Table 1 based on the minimum project scope of work.

Table 1. Points for no on-site combustion, limited scope

Minimum project scope of work Points
One or more cooking, heating, SWH, or process heating systems 1
At least 20% of the project’s peak combined heating and SWH load, or all commercial 2
cooking equipment
At least 50% of the project’s peak combined heating and SWH load, or all commercial 3
cooking equipment

OR

Option 4. Base Building Documentation and Tenant Compliance (5 points)

Points are awarded according to Table 2. Locate in a building that has documented a LEED
credit per Table 2.

AND/OR

Meet the following criteria per system type in the project scope of work. The system types are
defined as:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 144
 • Space heating
• SWH
• Cooking and other process loads

Criteria per system type:

• Do not install on-site combustion equipment.

AND

• Combined weighted average equipment efficiency for space heating system type and
SWH system type must be at least 1.8 COP for initial build-out construction or at least
1.2 COP for alterations.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2
• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures
• SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water heater
criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions

Table 2. Points for achievement of base building performance and tenant performance
Base building documentation Minimum system types in Points
LEED LEED EA credit name Base building project scope complying awarded
rating and credit option minimum with criteria
system(s) threshold
LEED v5 EAc1: Electrification 1 point None 1
BD+C 2 points None 2
3 points At least one, or all systems in 3
scope
4 points At least two, or all systems in 4
scope
5 points (NC) All systems in scope 5
4 points (CS)
LEED v5 EAc1: GHG Emissions 2 points None 1
O+M: Reduction 3 points None 2
Existing Performance, Option 4 points At least one, or all systems in 3
Buildings 1, GHG From On-Site scope
Combustion 5 points At least two, or all systems in 4
scope
6 points All systems in scope 5

For all options

Equipment efficiency (for Options 1 and 2)

Determine weighted average COP using either of the following:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 145
 • Equipment efficiencies at rated conditions. For equipment with multiple rated conditions,
use the rating closest to 17°F (-9°C) OA db, 32°F (0°C) entering liquid temperature, or
44°F (6°C) heating source leaving liquid temperature.
• Annual average COP calculated with an energy simulation.

District energy
Projects with district energy must comply with the requirements of this credit at the district
facility or see additional guidance for interpretation of credit requirements.

Fuel cells
Fuel cells using fossil fuel are ineligible for credit.

Low temperatures
“Low temperatures” refers to outside air dry-bulb temperatures (OA db) below 20°F (-6.5°C).

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit rewards decarbonization achieved through electrification of building systems
traditionally fueled with on-site combustion, including space heating, SWH, cooking, and other
process equipment.

Projects may choose between Options 1–4. For all options, electrified space heating and SWH
equipment must meet efficiency criteria to limit undue burden on the electric power grid. Refer to
the Weighted Average COP section for further guidance.

The requirements for Options 1, 2, and 4 encompass base building systems serving the project
and systems within the project scope. These options are most appropriate for projects with the
majority of HVAC and SWH capacity in the project scope of work or projects that intentionally
locate in electrified or partially electrified buildings.

• Maximum points are available under Option 1 to projects that fully electrify all base
building and project systems.
• Option 2 selectively rewards electrification per system category for heating, SWH, and
cooking and other process loads; and affords flexibility for a hybrid design capable of
limiting on-site combustion to low-temperature operation.
• For projects located in buildings certified under LEED v5 (either LEED BD+C or LEED
AP O+M), Option 4 provides a streamlined documentation method for demonstrating
project performance. Requirements for Option 4 are similar to those in Options 1 and 2;
however, for existing buildings using Option 4, the efficiency requirements only apply to
elements within the project scope.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 146
Option 3 solely addresses equipment installed or replaced in the project scope of work and
therefore is appropriate for projects where base building systems serving the project are not
electrified.

Option 1. No On-site Combustion — Base Building and Tenant Systems

Electrification
Projects designed to operate entirely without on-site combustion for all building systems serving
the project offer the greatest emission reduction through electrification. Projects pursuing this
option must eliminate on-site combustion from the project system design and operations. If a
tenant space is designed without on-site combustion, but fossil fuels are used for any base
building system serving the project (such as a central hot water boiler, water heater, or shared
air handling unit with fossil fuel furnace), the LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors project cannot
pursue this option. Refer to the Exemptions section for limited exceptions.

Efficiency
Combined weighted average equipment efficiency for applicable space heating and SWH
equipment serving the project must be at least 1.8 COP for initial buildout or at least 1.2 COP
for projects in existing buildings. Refer to the guidance in the Weighted Average COP section.

Option 2. No On-site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures — Base

Building and Tenant Systems
For Option 2, teams may apply any combination of Path 1, Path 2, and Path 3, which separately
address electrification of space heating, service hot water heating, and cooking and other
process systems serving the project, respectively.

PATH 1. SPACE HEATING

Electrification
All space heating systems serving the project must be capable of operating without on-site
combustion, except in low-temperature operating mode at or below 20°F (-6.5 °C).
Electrified space heating equipment serving the project must be designed with sufficient
capacity to meet the entire project space heating load at the system, zone and space levels for
outdoor temperatures above 20°F (-6.5 °C) or the project’s design heating temperature. Hybrid
designs with fuel/electric equipment must have a sequence of operations with at least one all-
electric operating mode available above 20°F (-6.5 °C).

Efficiency
Space heating equipment serving the project in climate zones 3 and above must have a
weighted average equipment efficiency of at least 1.8 COP for initial buildout, or at least 1.2

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 147
COP for projects in existing buildings. Refer to the Weighted Average COP section for
calculations and exclusions from COP determination.

Projects without heating

Credit achievement is automatic for projects that have no space heating from base building
systems or from equipment installed in the project scope.

PATH 2. SWH
Path 2 requirements apply to all SWH use for the project, including for shared restrooms or
shower facilities that are not in the project boundary but are accessed regularly by occupants of
the space.

SWH is the supply of hot water for purposes other than space heating and process applications.
It is primarily used for handwashing, showering, and cleaning.

Electrification
All SWH serving the project must be capable of operating without on-site combustion, except in
low-temperature operating mode at or below 20°F (-6.5 °C).

Electrified SWH equipment must be designed with sufficient capacity and distribution capability
to provide all necessary SWH at outdoor temperatures above 20°F (-6.5 °C) or the project’s
design heating temperature.

Efficiency
If the project’s total SWH load exceeds 34,000 Btu/h (10 kW), the SWH systems serving the
project space must use efficient heat pump technology to achieve a weighted average SWH
equipment efficiency of at least 1.8 COP for initial buildout, or at least 1.2 COP for existing
buildings; or must generate at least 40% of the project’s total SWH load with solar thermal
energy.

Point of use SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces may be excluded from the weighted
average COP determination if it meets ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without
exceptions. Refer to the Weighted Average COP section for calculations and exclusions from
COP determination.

PATH 3. COOKING AND OTHER PROCESS LOADS

This path encourages design teams to eliminate on-site combustion from cooking, laundry, pool
or spa heating, power generation, and all other process applications that traditionally use fuel.

Examples of other process applications commonly addressed through electrification include

process heating, process drying, pre-conditioned air or 400 Hz systems in airports, and

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 148
powering of vehicles or equipment operated exclusively on the project site (e.g., forklifts or golf
carts).

All process systems serving the project must be capable of operating without on-site
combustion, except in low-temperature operating mode for outdoor dry-bulb temperatures at or
below 20°F (-6.5 °C). This requirement extends to any process heating or on-site electricity
generation supplied from the base building systems to the project.

Exception
Clothes washers supplied with SWH from the base building systems are not
required to show compliance for the hot water connection.

Not in scope
One point is rewarded to projects that do not have cooking, laundry, and/or process heating
systems in the project scope of work, provided that any existing cooking or other process
equipment reused in the project, and any process heating or on-site electricity systems serving
the project, meet the criteria above.

In scope
A second point is available under this path for projects that electrify process systems within the
scope of work, since this contributes more heavily to overall decarbonization achieved for the
project. One of the following must be in scope:

• Cooking. Cooktops, ovens, fryers, griddles, or any other commercial or residential

cooking equipment traditionally fueled by natural gas or other fossil fuels
• Laundry. Clothes dryers or clothes washers with hot water supply free of on-site
combustion
• Process heating equipment. Industrial boilers or furnaces
• Drying equipment used for industrial processes
• On-site power generation such as solar PV

Other cooking or process equipment that can only be powered by electricity such as
microwaves cannot be used to achieve the 2nd point.

Option 3. No On-site Combustion, Limited Scope

This option is intended for projects with limited scope that do not install systems using on-site
combustion. Combined weighted average equipment efficiency for space heating and SWH
systems installed in the project scope of work must be at least 1.8 COP for initial buildout or at
least 1.2 COP for projects in existing buildings. Refer to the guidance in the Weighted Average
COP section.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 149
Project scope of work
Projects must fully electrify any systems in scope. Refer to the Exemptions section for limited
exceptions.

Minimum project scope for projects without commercial cooking equipment must include
installation of at least one space heating, SWH, laundry, or process heating system for one
point; at least 20% of the project’s combined heating and SWH load for two points; or at least
50% of the project’s combined heating and SWH load for three points.

For projects that install electrified commercial cooking equipment, such as cooktops, ovens,
fryers, griddles, or other equipment traditionally fueled by natural gas or other fossil fuels, the
maximum three points are awarded. This does not apply to cooking appliances that can only be
powered by electricity such as microwaves.

Option 4. Base Building Documentation and Tenant Compliance

Prioritizing a LEED-certified base building provides tenants the opportunity to leverage
integrated sustainable elements and improve their tenant space.

LEED-certified base building requirements

The project must be in a LEED v5 base building, certified under any LEED v5 rating system
(LEED BD+C: New Construction, LEED BD+C: Core and Shell, or LEED AP O+M). The project
must have achieved points for EAc1: Electrification (LEED BD+C: New Construction, LEED
BD+C: Core and Shell) or EAc1: GHG Emissions Reduction, Option 1. GHG from on-site
combustion (LEED AP O+M).

Point thresholds
Interiors projects achieve points based on both the base building achievements, and additional
considerations within the project scope of work. Maximum credit achievement is awarded to
project’s that achieve full electrification of the base building and tenant systems and utilize
efficient heat pump equipment for most of the space heating and SWH capacity installed in the
project scope.

Example 1. Base building with no tenant scope

The project is an initial buildout of an office space in a base building certified
with LEED v5 BD+C: Core and Shell that achieved two points under EAc1:
Electrification. No new space heating, SWH, cooking, or process equipment

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 150
 is in the project scope. Therefore, all systems in scope comply with the
criteria.

The LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors project would earn two points for
Option 4, because the base building only earned two points.

Example 2. Base building with tenant scope

Referring to Example 1 above, the project scope is amended to include new
point-of-use SWH equipment that meets ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section
11.5.2.3.3. The LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors project earns two points for
Option 4, because the base building only earned two points.

Example 3. Base building with electrification of some tenant systems

The project is an initial buildout of an office space in a base building certified
with LEED v5 BD+C: Core and Shell that achieved four points under EAc1:
Electrification.

The project scope includes installation of:

Fully electrified space heating equipment with a weighted average equipment
efficiency of 1.8 COP, meeting the credit criteria for space heating.

Electric resistance storage water heating equipment with capacity totaling 20

kW which does not meet the criteria for efficiency and cannot achieve a
combined weighted average 1.8 COP when paired with space heating.

New gas cooktop that does not meet the cooking and other process loads
criteria.

The LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors project earns three points for Option 4 because the base
building earned at least three points and the tenant met the project scope requirements for one
system type in scope.

Example 4. Base building with full points achieved and fully compliant
tenant scope
Five points are achieved for an initial buildout of an office space in a base
building certified with LEED v5 BD+C: Core and Shell that achieved four
points under EAc1: Electrification, where all systems installed in the Interiors
scope meet the minimum system type criteria.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 151
Weighted Average COP
Minimum weighted average COP criteria is predicated on a design that uses heat pump
technology instead of inefficient electric resistance heating to meet most of the project’s space
heating and SWH loads for new systems; or approximately 20% of the project’s space heating
and SWH loads for existing buildings. This limit increased grid peak demand associated with
electrification.

Exclusions from weighted average COP determination

The following equipment may optionally be excluded from the weighted average COP
determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2. This equipment is not required to be
included because electric resistance heating contributes much less to peak grid load in
hot climates than in cooler climates. To determine the project’s climate zone, refer to
ASHRAE Standard 169, Climatic Data for Building Design Standards 42.
• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at or below 20°F (-
6.5 °C). This equipment is not required to be included because it can skew the average
efficiencies calculated using capacity weightings of rated efficiencies. This exclusion
applies to supplemental or auxiliary electric heating used for space heating or SWH, as
well as fuel used for low temperature operation for space heating or SWH in Option 2.
• Point of use SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces meeting ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions. For nonresidential projects
with low SWH demand distributed throughout the building, electric point-of-use water
heaters are often more appropriate than centralized heat pump equipment and negligibly
increase peak electric demand. Therefore, teams may exclude point-of-use water
heaters in nonresidential spaces from the COP determination if they comply with
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 11.5.2.3.3, W05 without exception.

Nonresidential SWH equipment that does not comply with the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 11.5.2.3.3
criteria must be included in the determination of weighted average COP. For example, storage
water heaters supplying showers or commercial kitchen operations must be included in the
determination of weighted average COP.

This exception does not apply to equipment in residential spaces, due to higher SWH demand
for these space types.

42
“ASHRAE Standard 169 Climatic Data for Building Design Standards”, ASHRAE, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.ashrae.org/file%20library/technical%20resources/standards%20and%20guidelines/standards%20addenda/169_2020_a
_20211029.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 152
 • SWH equipment for projects with total SWH capacity less than 34,000 Btu/h (10
kW). This refers to total capacity necessary to meet project loads, regardless of whether
the equipment is installed in the project scope of work.

Projects are not required to calculate the weighted average COP if all equipment meets one of
the criteria above. For example, no minimum COP is required for a non-residential project in
climate zone 1 with point-of-use water heating for 100% of its SWH load per ASHRAE 90.1-
2022 11.5.2.3.3.

When heat pump space heating is installed for a project in climate zones 0–2 or heat pump
SWH is installed for projects with total SWH load less than 34,000 Btu/h (10 kW), the analyst
may include all heating and SWH equipment in the calculations to demonstrate the required
COP.

Included equipment for weighted average COP determination

All equipment not specifically excluded above must be included in the weighted average COP
determination.

For Options 1 and 2, include all applicable equipment serving the project, including base
building equipment and equipment installed within the project scope.

• Option 1. No On-Site Combustion. Base Building and Tenant Systems. Include all
space heating and SWH serving the project, except equipment specifically excluded
above.
Option 2. No On-Site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures. Base Building and
Tenant Systems. Projects pursuing both Path 1 and Path 2 may optionally show a
combined weighted average equipment efficiency for space heating and SWH, rather
than demonstrating weighted average COP per system type.
o Path 1. Space Heating. Include all space heating equipment serving the project,
both in the base building and in the project boundary, except equipment
specifically excluded above.
o Path 2. SWH. Include all SWH equipment serving the project, except equipment
specifically excluded above.
• Option 3. No On-Site Combustion, Limited Scope. Include all space heating and
SWH equipment included in the project scope of work, except equipment specifically
excluded above.
• Option 4. Base building documentation and tenant compliance. Include space
heating and SWH installed in the project scope if demonstrating compliance with the
“Criteria per system type.”

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 153
Methodologies For weighted average COP determination
Projects may determine weighted average COP using a streamlined method, rated capacities,
or energy simulation.

METHOD 1. STREAMLINED WEIGHTED AVERAGE COP DETERMINATION

The streamlined method conservatively estimates compliance based on ASHRAE 90.1,
Section 6.8 mandatory rated heating efficiencies of at least 2.0 COP for heat pumps and
heat recovery chillers.

o To confirm a weighted average COP of at least 1.8, document that at least 80% of
equipment capacity consists of heat pumps, heat recovery chillers, or solar heating.
o To confirm a weighted average COP of at least 1.2, document that at least 20% of
equipment capacity consists of heat pumps, heat recovery chillers, or solar heating.

For Options 3 and 4, assess compliance based on total installed equipment capacity.
For projects served by centralized base building equipment that is shared with other
spaces, either calculate the weighted average COP separately for base building systems
and for project-installed systems or prorate the base building equipment capacity to the
project based on the percentage of design load serving the project or based on
proportion of gross floor area.

For Options 1 and 2, assess compliance based on the total capacity serving the project.

METHOD 2. ENERGY SIMULATION

Calculate the COP by dividing total annual heating generation by total annual heating
energy consumption (using consistent units in numerator and denominator) per Equation
1.

Equation 1. COP calculation using energy simulation data

𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 =
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

Ensure that all applicable space heating and SWH energy used at the plant, system, and zone
levels are included.

Projects may use any of the following to document the weighted average COP:

• Modeling used for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency

o ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G Performance Rating Method, proposed model
o ASHRAE 90.1, ECB method design energy cost model

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 154
 o TSPR. Simplified model from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 6.6.2.2 Mechanical
System Performance Rating Method. This only shows space heating efficiency.
SWH compliance must be demonstrated using one of the other methods.
• Energy simulation used to document local code compliance
• Simplified energy simulation used to estimate energy consumption for EAp1: Operational
Carbon Projection and Operational Carbon Projection, provided that the model inputs
include sufficient detail relevant to equipment efficiencies, capacities, and loads
estimations

METHOD 3. RATED CAPACITIES

Calculate weighted average COP based on the capacity-weighted average rated
equipment efficiency per Equation 2.

Equation 2. Weighted average COP

𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊ℎ𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
∑ 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒ℎ 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 × 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒ℎ 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
=
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒

If equipment has more than one rated condition, calculate the weighted average COP using the
rated conditions closest to the following:

• Air source heat pumps. 17°F (-9°C) OA db

• Ground source heat pumps. 32°F (0°C) entering liquid temperature
• Liquid source heat pump and heat recovery water-chilling packages. 44 °F (6°C)
heating source leaving liquid temperature

Reference ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.8 tables to identify applicable rated conditions. For
equipment with efficiency ratings using HSPF, AFUE, or any rating other than COP or COPH,
convert these ratings to COP using Table 3 below before calculating weighted average COP.

Additional considerations
For heat pump water-chilling packages or heat recovery water-chilling
packages rated per ASHRAE 90.1, Table 6.8.1-16, COP may be adjusted
using the equations from Table 3 below to align equipment ratings for
entering/leaving heating liquid temperature at medium, high, or boost
conditions with the default low ratings.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 155
Table 3. Determination of equipment COP for calculation of weighted average COP
Heating Equipment Type Heating Equipment Equation to Convert Test
Efficiency Rating to COP Procedure
Electrically operated air- HSPF2 = -0.0296 x HSPF22 AHRI 210/240-
cooled unitary heat pumps + 0.7134 x HSPF2 2023
SCOP2H = -0.3446 × AHRI 210/240-
SCOPH22 2023
+ 2.434 × SCOPH2
COPH = COPH AHRI 340/360
at 17°F db/15°F wb
(–8.3°C db/–9.4°C wb)
PTHP COPH = COPH AHRI 310/380
SPVHP COPH = COPH AHRI 390
VRF air cooled HSPF = -0.0296 x HSPF2 + AHRI 1230
0.7134 x HSPF
COPH = COPH AHRI 1230
at 17°F db/15°F wb
(–8.3°C db/–9.4°C wb)
SCOPH = -0.3446 × SCOPH2 AHRI 210/240-
+ 2.434 × SCOPH 2023
VRF water source COPH = COPH AHRI 1230
68°F (20°C) entering
water
VRF groundwater source COPH = COPH AHRI 1230
50°F (10°C) entering
water
VRF ground source COPH = COPH AHRI 1230
32°F (0°C) entering
water
Electrically Operated DX- ISCOP = ISCOP AHRI 920
DOAS Air-source heat pump
or water-source heat pump
Electrically operated water- COPH = COPH ISO 13256-1
source heat pump, water-to- 68°F (20°C) entering
water, water loop water
Electrically operated water- COPH = COPH ISO 13256-1
source heat pump, water-to- 50°F (10°C) entering
air, groundwater water
Electrically operated water- COPH = COPH ISO 13256-
source heat pump, brine-to- 32°F (0°C) entering 1
air, ground loop. water
Air-source heat pump and COPH = COPH AHRI 550/590
heat recovery chiller at 17°F db/15°F wb (–
packages. 8.3°C db/–9.4°C wb),
Low leaving heating
water temperature =
105°F (40 °C)
COPH at 17°F db/15°F = 1.14 x COPH
wb (–8.3°C db/–9.4°C
wb), Medium leaving
heating water
temperature = 120°F
(50 °C)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 156
 Heating Equipment Type Heating Equipment Equation to Convert Test
Efficiency Rating to COP Procedure
COPH at 17°F db/15°F = 1.37 x COPH
wb (–8.3°C db/–9.4°C
wb), High leaving
heating water
temperature = 140°F
(60 °C)
Water source electrically COPH = COPH AHRI 550/590
operated positive Low leaving hot water
displacement. temperature = 105°F
(COPH evaluated at 54°F (40 °C)
(19°C) source water entering COPH = 1.26 x COPH
temperature / 44 °F (7°C) Medium leaving hot
source water leaving water temperature =
temperature). 120°F (50 °C)
COPH = 1.73 x COPH
High leaving hot water
temperature = 140°F
Water source electrically COPH = 1.31 x COPH AHRI 550/590
operated positive Boost leaving hot water
displacement or centrifugal. temperature = 140°F
(at 75°F / 65 °F source (60 °C)
entering / leaving water
temperature).
Electric furnace AFUE = 1.0 x AFUE 10 CFR 430
Appendix N
Electric boiler None listed COP = 0.96 if not 10 CFR 430
rated
Electric service hot water COP = COP AHRI Standard
heaters 50°F (10°C) entering air 1301
and 60°F (21°C)
entering water
UEF 10 CFR 430
= UEF x 1.3
Appendix E
NOTE: Equations to convert HSPF, HSPF2, and SCOP2 to COP are from ASHRAE 90.1-2019 11.5.2(c) and 90.1-2022 12.5.2(c).
The remaining conversions are rough approximations not accounting for variability in standby losses or other factors referenced
in the test procedures.

District Energy Systems (DES)

If the project is supplied with thermal energy from a DES, for Options 1 and 2, either refer to
DES compliance paths in the Project Priorities Library, or demonstrate that the DES complies
with the following credit requirements at the district facility:

OPTION 1. NO ON-SITE COMBUSTION — BASE BUILDING AND TENANT

SYSTEMS
No on-site combustion may be used in the district energy facility to generate heating, cooling, or
electricity supplied to the project. Average district heating efficiency must be at least 1.8 for
initial buildout projects, or at least 1.2 for projects in existing buildings.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 157
OPTION 2. NO ON-SITE COMBUSTION EXCEPT AT LOW TEMPERATURES —
BASE BUILDING AND TENANTS SYSTEMS
If district heating is used to supply any of the project’s space heat (Path 1), SWH (Path 2), or
process energy (Path 3), the district heating facility must be capable of generating the entire
required district heating capacity without using on-site combustion above 20°F (-6.5 °C).
Average district heating efficiency must be at least 1.8 for initial buildout projects or at least 1.2
for projects in existing buildings.

Fuel Cells and Combined Heat and Power Ineligible

For Options 1 and 2, projects supplied with base building electricity from fuel cells that use fossil
fuel to generate electricity or with base building fuel from combined heat and power systems
(CHP) that use fuel to generate heat and electricity are ineligible for credit.

Exemptions
On-site combustion may be used for the following limited circumstances:

EMERGENCY SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Emergency support systems generate electricity, heating, or cooling upon failure of the
primary system in a power outage or extreme temperature event.

To apply the exemption, sequence of operations must specifically limit emergency

support system operation to emergency events associated with power disruptions or with
extreme temperatures falling outside of ASHRAE 99% design conditions for a prolonged
period of time.

Emergency power systems are not exempt for locations where power outages
commonly occur for more than 200 hours per year.

PORTABLE EQUIPMENT
Portable equipment for outdoor cooking amenities or outdoor patio heating not in the
project scope may be excluded when limited to less than 200 hours per year. Fuel lines
cannot be permanently piped to the equipment.

SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES
Limited on-site combustion is permitted for specialty use cases, where on-site
combustion is integral to system function. Examples include:

o Portable laboratory equipment

o Wood-fired ovens in commercial kitchens fitted with emissions control devices
o Vocational schools using fossil fuels solely for the purpose of training

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 158
 o Electric incinerators for medical waste
o Fireplaces, hearths, and fire pits exclusively designated to support ceremonial
practices (such as those unique to indigenous cultures or religious practices that
require the use of fire)

These special circumstances do not extend more broadly to process equipment except where
approved on a project-specific basis for systems with very low GHG emissions.

Platinum Requirements
Projects that aim to achieve LEED Platinum cannot install new on-site combustion equipment in
the project scope of work. This includes alterations replacing existing systems with new
systems, such as replacement of gas furnaces or gas cooktops.

Platinum projects may replace components that use base building systems fueled by on-site
combustion, such as fan coils supplied by a central natural gas boiler.

The LEED Platinum requirements intentionally encompass industrial and manufacturing

processes. On-site boilers used for manufacturing production must comply with the credit
criteria to obtain LEED Platinum certification.

Exceptions to LEED Platinum requirements, such as for renewable fuels, may be included in the
Project Priorities Library.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Documentation that the project is subject to local code that
requires full electrification down to 20 °F (-6.5 °C) or lower.
Provide relevant code language and applicability. (if
applicable).
Provide equipment cutsheets or schedules for all heating,
SWH, solar water heating, and process heating equipment
within the project. Include information on the energy source,
equipment quantity, and the capacity and efficiency for
each piece of equipment.
Document emergency support and on-site generation
equipment including system type, fuel source and capacity.
Description of emergency support and on-site generation
equipment and how it is used on-site. Include estimated
annual run-time for any combustion equipment.
Weighted average COP calculation, as applicable for SWH
and space heating. Project may determine weighted

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 159
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
average COP using a streamlined, rated capacities, or
energy simulation.
Option 1 Narrative or mechanical drawings showing that systems
used for heating, SHW, and cooking and other process
loads are not fueled by on-site combustion.
Option 2 All Sequence of operations for hybrid electric/nonelectric
systems and evidence that electric equipment (electric
mode) can meet space heating, SHW, and process heating
loads >20F (as applicable). Evidence may include
equipment capacities and accompanying design load
calculations, energy simulation reports, or other.
For projects attempting no on-site combustion except at low
temperatures, document how the applicable systems can
operate without on-site combustion at outside air
temperatures above 20°F (-6.5 °C).
Path 3 Systems in scope of work (cooking, laundry, other process).

Option 3 All Systems in scope of work (cooking, laundry, other process).

Schedules or cutsheets showing electrified equipment.

Calculation of the installed space heating and SWH

equipment capacity as a percentage of the project's peak
combined heating and SWH load.
Option 4 All LEED project number for base building

Systems in scope of work (space heating, SWH, cooking,

laundry, other process)
Equipment schedules or cutsheets showing electrified
equipment.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 160
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit —
and Restoration

ENHANCED ENERGY EFFICIENCY

EAc2
1–12 points: 7 points are required for LEED Platinum projects.

INTENT
To design buildings that minimize energy use to reduce the environmental damage caused by
resource extraction, air pollution, and GHG emissions, and to facilitate the transition to a clean
energy future.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–12
Option 1. Prescriptive Path 1–12
Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Compliance for Project Scope 3
AND/OR
Path 2. Regulated Loads 1–4
Case 1. Additional Efficiency — Systems Optimization 1–4
OR
Case 2. Additional Efficiency Requirements Beyond ASHRAE 90.1- 1–4
2022
OR
Path 3. Plug and Process Loads (PPL) 1–5
Case 1. Plug Load Management 1
AND/OR
Case 2. Efficient Plug and Process Load Equipment 1–5
OR
Case 3. Plug and Process Load Exceptional Calculation 1–5
Path 4. Base Building Energy Efficiency 2
OR
Option 2. Energy Simulation 1–12
Path 1. Percentage Reduction Excluding On-Site Renewable 1–12
Contribution
OR
Path 2. Percentage Reduction Including On-Site Renewable Contribution 1–12

Option 1. Prescriptive Path (1–12 points)

PATH 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 COMPLIANCE FOR PROJECT SCOPE (3 POINTS)
Comply with the provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Sections 5–11 for the project scope of work.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 161
PATH 2. REGULATED LOADS (1–4 POINTS)
Apply Case 1 or Case 2, up to a maximum of 4 points:

Case 1. Additional Efficiency — Systems Optimization (1–4 points)

Points are awarded according to Table 1. For projects complying with Path 1, reference
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 or approved equivalent standard. For other projects registered prior to
January 1, 2028, reference ASHRAE 90.1-2019 or approved equivalent standard.

Table 1. Systems optimization

Threshold Points
Lighting power. Reduce connected lighting power, including 15% 1
existing fixtures below the lighting power allowance by the
specified percentage. 30% 2
Cooling, heating, and SWH efficiency. Demonstrate the
specified percent improvement in prescriptive efficiencies for at
15% 1
least 75% of the combined cooling, heating, and SWH capacity
installed or replaced in the project scope of work.
Fan power. Demonstrate the specified percent improvement in
fan power below the prescriptive fan power limitation for systems 20% 1
altered or replaced in the project scope of work.

OR

Case 2. Additional Efficiency Requirements Beyond ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (1–4 points)

Applicable only to projects complying with ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Sections 5–11 that are also
defined as “substantial alterations to existing buildings” per ASHRAE 90.1, Section 11.1.4.
Points are awarded according to Table 2.

Document achievement of incremental ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 energy credits, above

the minimum required by ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 from the following list of eligible
measures:

Eligible measures from ASHRAE 90.1, Section 11.5.2, for LEED points
• HVAC measures (H01 to H07)
• SWH measures (W01 to W09)
• Lighting measures (L01 to L06)
• G07 Building Mass/Night Flush

Table 2. Points for ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 credits

ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 credits Points
Minimum required by 90.1-2022 plus 13 credits 1
Minimum required by 90.1-2022 plus 25 credits 2

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 162
 ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 credits Points
Minimum required by 90.1-2022 plus 38 credits 3
Minimum required by 90.1-2022 plus 50 credits 4

AND/OR

PATH 3. PLUG AND PROCESS LOADS (1–5 POINTS)

Case 1. Plug Load Management (1 point)
Implement the following:

• Provide a plug load dashboard that is accessible through an application to all regular
occupants of the space.
• For tenant types with IT departments, implement policies for PCs, monitors, and visual
displays to be controlled off when not in use, except scheduled maintenance periods.

AND/OR

Case 2. Efficient Plug and Process Load Equipment (1–5 points)

Implement one or more of the following:

• Install or reuse eligible plug and process equipment meeting the criteria in Table 3 for
90% of applicable equipment by quantity or rated load. Either include or exclude all
eligible equipment reused in the project from the calculations. For one Table 3
equipment category (1 point)
• For two Table 3 equipment categories (2 points)
• For three or more Table 3 equipment categories (3 points)

OR

For process-intensive spaces, install or reuse eligible plug and process equipment meeting the
criteria in Table 3 for at least 90% of total applicable equipment rated load. Rated load of
compliant equipment must total at least:

• 0.3 W/sq. ft. (3.2 W/sq. m.) (3 points)

• 0.5 W/sq. ft. (5.4 W/sq. m.) (4 points)
• 1.0 W/sq. ft. (10.8 W/sq. m.) (5 points)

Table 3. Plug, process, refrigeration, and conveyance equipment criteria

Equipment Applicable equipment Criteria
category
ENERGY STAR® Office equipment ENERGY STAR® rated or
products: plug Appliances approved equivalent with at
Electronics

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 163
 Equipment Applicable equipment Criteria
category
loads and small Other least 0.1 W/sq. ft. (1.1 W/sq.
appliances (e.g., vending machines, pool m.) of total rated load
pumps, water coolers)
ENERGY STAR® Commercial food service equipment ENERGY STAR® rated or
products: process Data center/server equipment approved equivalent with at
loads Commercial laundry equipment least 0.1 W/sq. ft. (1.1 W/sq.
Electric vehicle chargers (EVSE) m.) of total rated load
Other (e.g., laboratory-grade
refrigerators and freezers)
People conveyance Elevators ISO 25745
Escalators At least Class A-rated
Moving walkways
Data center Electrical system design ASHRAE 90.4-2022
electrical system Design electrical loss
component (ELC) is at least
20% lower than the maximum
design electrical loss
Refrigeration Referenced in ASHRAE 90.1, 10% improvement beyond
systems Section 6.8, tables AND not ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.8,
ENERGY STAR®® eligible tables
Refrigerated warehouse California Title 24-2022,
Section 120.6, refrigerated
warehouse requirements
Airport equipment Baggage handling equipment Individual carrier systems
(ICS) with variable frequency
drive
Aircraft and jetway air-conditioning Preconditioned air (PCA)
systems with efficiencies
meeting ASHRAE 90.1
prescriptive efficiencies for
HVAC equipment

OR

Case 3. Plug and Process Load Exceptional Calculation (1–5 points)

Using the ASHRAE 90.1, Section G2.5, exceptional calculation method, demonstrate a
minimum percentage improvement in total project plug and process, refrigeration, and
conveyance loads. Points are awarded according to Table 4 below.

Table 4. Points for percent improvement in plug and process loads

Percent improvement Points
8% 1
16% 2
24% 3
32% 4
40% 5

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 164
PATH 4. BASE BUILDING ENERGY EFFICIENCY (2 POINTS)
Locate in a base building that complies with one of the following:

• ASHRAE 90.1-2022
• Current ENERGY STAR® score of at least 75
• LEED base building documentation of energy efficiency per Table 5

Table 5. LEED base building documentation of energy efficiency

Interior fit-out LEED Base Building Documentation of Energy Efficiency
classification Rating EA credit name and credit Base building
system(s) option minimum threshold
Initial build-out LEED v5 EAc3: Enhanced Energy 5 points
BD+C Efficiency

Alterations of LEED v5 EAc2: Optimized Energy 5 points

previously O+M Performance
occupied space
Initial build-out LEED v4 or EAc2: Optimized Energy 8 points
LEED v4.1 Performance
BD+C

OR

Option 2. Energy Simulation (1–12 points)

Demonstrate an improvement in future source energy calculated per ASHRAE Standard 90.1,
Normative Appendix G, “Performance Rating Method,” with the following additional provisions:

• Use the ASHRAE 90.1 version applied for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency.
• Replace ASHRAE 90.1-2019 or 90.1-2022, Table 4.2.1.1, BPFs, with Table 7 below. For
alterations except initial build-out construction, the following ASHRAE 90.1-2022
adjustments may be applied:
o Substantial alteration. Multiply the BPF by 1.05 if the alteration is defined as a
substantial alteration in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section G3.1.4(a).
o Other alterations. Apply ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section G3.3 (“Performance
Calculations for Other Alterations”). For projects documented using ASHRAE
90.1-2019, Appendix G, replace all references to 90.1-2022, Section 5–10,
prescriptive criteria with the corresponding 90.1-2019, Section 5–10 criteria.
• Replace all references to “cost” with “future source energy.” Use an electric site-to-
source energy conversion factor of 2.0 based on future projections for the U.S. A lower
national average value may be used as applicable for projects outside of the U.S.
• Model energy efficiency measures for plug and process loads using Section G2.5,
“Exceptional Calculation Method,” or approved calculations in the LEED reference

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 165
 guidance. Calculate the PI and percentage improvement with and without the plug and
process savings.
• Calculate the PI and performance index target (PIt) as follows:
• PInre = PBPnre / BBP
• PI = PBP / BBP
• PIt = [BBUE + (BPF x BBRE)] / BBP
where:
o PInre = PI for future source energy excluding on-site renewable contribution
o PI = PI for future source energy including on-site renewable contribution
o PIt = performance index target for future source energy use
o BBP = baseline building performance for baseline building future source
energy use
o BBUE = baseline building unregulated future source energy use
o BBRE = baseline building regulated future source energy use
o PBPnre = proposed building performance without any credit for reduced
annual future source energy from on-site renewable energy generation
systems
o PBP = proposed building performance, including the reduced annual future
source energy associated with all on-site renewable energy generation
systems

Points are awarded according to Table 6, using either Path 1 or Path 2.

Table 6. Points for percentage improvement in PI below PIt

Path 1. Percentage reduction OR Path 2. Percentage reduction Points
excluding on-site renewable excluding on-site renewable
contribution (100%–PInre / PIt) contribution (100%–PI / PIt)
0% 5% 2
2% 10% 3
4% 20% 4
6% 30% 5
8% 40% 6
10% 50% 7
12% 60% 8
14% 70% 9
16% 80% 10
18% 90% 11
20% 100% 12

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 166
Table 7. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 — Equivalent BPFs for a future source energy metric

Building type Climate zone

0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
0.74 0.69 0.73 0.70 0.73 0.70 0.71 0.70 0.63 0.70 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.74
Multifamily
0.72 0.72 0.73 0.73 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.73 0.71 0.74 0.73 0.80 0.73 0.77 0.78 0.79
Healthcare/hospital
0.72 0.71 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.71 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.73 0.73 0.71 0.73 0.74 0.70 0.72 0.70 0.70
Hotel/motel
0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.60 0.57 0.62 0.55 0.55 0.61 0.57 0.58 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.60 0.54 0.58
Office
0.65 0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.73 0.72 0.74 0.77
Restaurant
0.57 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.48 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.52 0.50 0.56 0.57 0.53 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.53 0.60
Retail
0.57 0.57 0.58 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.57 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.51 0.52 0.51 0.53 0.51 0.53 0.50 0.51 0.58
School
0.28 0.30 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.33 0.26 0.28 0.40 0.32 0.29 0.44 0.38 0.40 0.44
Warehouse
0.65 0.62 0.64 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.57 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.57 0.60 0.60 0.59 0.65 0.62 0.62 0.61 0.64
All others

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit rewards increased energy efficiency addressing regulated and unregulated systems
in the project scope, and improved base building performance. To limit documentation level of
effort, use the same ASHRAE 90.1 compliance method for prerequisite and credit compliance:
either the prescriptive method or Appendix G PRM.

Table 8. Linked prerequisite and credit compliance options for energy efficiency
EAp2: Minimum Linked EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency Available
Energy Efficiency (choose Option 1 OR Option 2) points
Option 1. Option 1. Prescriptive Path 1–11
ASHRAE 90.1-2019 Path 2. Regulated Loads, Case 1. Additional efficiency 1–4
systems optimization
Prescriptive method Reduce lighting power, increase HVAC and SWH equipment
efficiency, and/or reduce fan power.
AND/OR +
Path 3. Plug and process loads 1–5
AND/OR +
Path 4. Base building energy efficiency 2
Option 2. Option 1. Prescriptive Path 3–12
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 compliance for project scope. 3
Automatically achieved
Prescriptive method AND +
Path 2. Regulated loads 4
Case 1. Additional efficiency systems optimization. Reduce
lighting power, increase HVAC and SWH equipment efficiency, +
and/or reduce fan power.
OR
Case 2. Additional efficiency requirements beyond ASHRAE
90.1 2022
(Applicable to substantial alterations)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 167
 EAp2: Minimum Linked EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency Available
Energy Efficiency (choose Option 1 OR Option 2) points
Implement incremental efficiency measures for HVAC, SWH,
lighting, and/or building mass with night flush per ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 11.
AND/OR
Path 3. Plug and process loads 1–5
AND/OR +
Path 4. Base building energy efficiency 2
Option 1 or Option 2. Option 1. Prescriptive Path 1–7
90.1-2019 or 90.1- Path 3. Plug and process loads 1–5
2022 AND/OR +
Path 4. Base building energy efficiency 2
ECB Method
Option 1 or Option 2. Option 2. Energy Simulation 1–12
90.1-2019 or 90.1- Implement efficiency measures to achieve a percentage
2022 reduction in “future source energy” below a performance Index
Target (PIt).
Appendix G — PRM
Initial build-out or substantial alteration. PIt referenced to 90.1-
2019 equivalent performance.

Other alterations. PIt referenced to ASHRAE 90.1 prescriptive

requirements from referenced version of ASHRAE.

Option 1. Prescriptive Path

Option 1 offers a streamlined approach to achieving energy efficiency without requiring complex
energy modeling. Teams can combine paths under Option 1 to achieve up to 12 points for the
credit. This option is particularly beneficial for projects with limited scope, or simple systems, or
that or located in inefficient base buildings that detract from overall project performance
documented using energy simulation.

The first three paths focus solely on efficiency implemented in the project scope. Path 1 rewards
prescriptive method compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2022. Paths 2 and 3 reward improved
efficiency for regulated loads and for plug and process loads respectively, with points weighted
based on the typical distribution of regulated versus plug and process loads addressed in
Interiors projects.

Path 4 recognizes energy efficiency in the base building.

PATH 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 COMPLIANCE FOR PROJECT SCOPE

Projects earn three points for complying with EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency, Option 2.
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 using the prescriptive method, regardless of whether project registration
occurs after ASHRAE 90.1-2022 becomes obligatory January 1, 2028.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 168
For initial buildouts and substantial alterations, any ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2
efficiency measures may be used to achieve the minimum energy credits required by ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 11 for the project’s type and climate zone. However, per ASHRAE 90.1-
2022 11.5.2, the combined contribution of renewable and load management measures is limited
to 60% of the total required energy credits.

PATH 2. REGULATED LOADS

For projects that comply with EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency using the prescriptive method,
Path 2 rewards further energy efficiency for the lighting, HVAC, and SWH systems installed in
the project scope of work.

Case 1. Additional Efficiency — System Optimization

APPLICABILITY
Case 1 primarily applies to projects documenting prerequisite compliance using
ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 5–10 and to limited scope alterations of existing buildings
complying with Path 1 above using ASHRAE 90.1-2022.

Case 1 has limited applicability to substantial alterations and interior buildouts required
to achieve energy credits by ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11, because only strategies
incremental to those used to achieve minimum required energy credits in ASHRAE 90.1,
Section 11 may be used to show compliance:

o The lighting strategy cannot be used when measure L06: Reduce Interior Lighting
Power contributes toward minimum required energy credits (ASHRAE 90.1-2022
11.5.2.5.6).
o The cooling, heating, and SWH efficiency strategy cannot be used when ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 11 measures H01, H02, H03, or W03 addressing HVAC and
SWH equipment efficiency contribute toward minimum required energy credits.
o The fan power strategy cannot be used when measure H06: Dedicated Outdoor Air
System contributes toward minimum required energy credits (ASHRAE 90.1-2022
11.5.2.2.6).

SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION STRATEGIES

For projects pursuing Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 above, refer to the prescriptive
requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2022 for each strategy.

For other projects registered prior to January 1, 2028, refer to the prescriptive
requirements from ASHRAE 90.1-2019 for each strategy.

Projects can combine multiple strategies to earn up to four points for all implemented
strategies.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 169
Lighting
Design efficient lighting that reduces connected lighting power by the specified percentage
below the referenced version of ASHRAE Standard 90.1.

Use either the building area method compliance path (ASHRAE 90.1, Section 9.5) or the Space-
by-Space Method Compliance Path (Section 9.6) to calculate the lighting power allowance.

Include all new and existing interior lighting in the project boundary in the connected lighting
power determination. For any existing or additional lighting power fixtures that are excluded
from the ASHRAE 90.1 lighting power allowance calculated in Section 9.5 or 9.6, report this
lighting power identically for the connected lighting power and for the adjusted ASHRAE 90.1
lighting power allowance used for this credit.

Cooling, heating, and SWH efficiency

Install HVAC and SWH equipment that improves upon ASHRAE 90.1 minimum required
efficiencies.

To confirm compliance, identify all equipment installed in the project scope that generates
cooling, heating (including preheat and reheat), or SWH. Up to 25% of this capacity may be
excluded for determination of credit compliance. Also exclude existing unmodified equipment or
base building equipment supplying thermal energy to the space.

Calculate the percent improvement in equipment efficiency compared to the referenced version
of ASHRAE 90.1 for each installed equipment. For heat pumps that have both heating and
cooling efficiencies, use the capacities and efficiencies from both heating and cooling mode.

• ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.8 Tables for heating and cooling efficiencies
• ASHRAE 90.1, Section 7.4 Tables for SWH

Efficiency improvement is 0% for electric resistance heating in baseboards, fan coils, VAV
reheat, or air handling units.

Either achieve a 15% improvement for each individual equipment, totaling at least 75% of total
installed capacity, or achieve a 15% weighted average efficiency improvement encompassing at
least 75% of total installed capacity.

Equation 1. Weighted average % improvement

𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊ℎ𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 a𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 % 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 =
∑(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒ℎ 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 × % 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒ℎ 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒)
(𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 170
 Additional considerations
Guidance for calculating weighted average efficiency improvement for heating or
cooling equipment with multiple rated conditions is available in ASHRAE 90.1-
2022, Sections 11.5.2.2.2 and 11.5.2.2.3, respectively.

Fan power
The sum of all fan power installed within the project scope of work must be 20% less than the
sum of total fan power allowed by ASHRAE 90.1 6.5.3.1.1.

Eligibility for this credit requires the installation of at least one HVAC system with associated
fans. Include all supply fans, return/relief fans, and fan-powered terminal units associated with
the HVAC systems installed in scope. The project is ineligible to apply this strategy if for each
HVAC system in scope, less than 50% of total system fan power is installed in scope.

For partial HVAC system installations (such as fan coils installed in the project scope with base
building dedicated outside air), use the prorated fan power from the base building system to
calculate the total percent improvement in system fan power for the associated HVAC system.
Use only the fan power installed in scope to determine the overall percent improvement in fan
power below the prescriptive limitation:

Equation 2. Fan power % improvement

𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 % 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 =
∑(𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒ℎ 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × % 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒ℎ 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠)
(𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑡𝑡 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠)

Additional considerations
This strategy cannot be used when ASHRAE 90.1-2022 measures H01: HVAC
System Performance Improvement (11.5.2.2.1) or H06: Reduce Interior Lighting
Power (11.5.2.5.6) are used to document minimum required energy credits, since
these are necessary for compliance with Path 1.

Case 2. Additional Efficiency Requirements Beyond ASHRAE 90.1-2022

APPLICABILITY
Case 2 applies only to interior build-outs or substantial alterations that document
compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Sections 5–10 and document a minimum number
of required energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.

For these project applications, Case 2 is more effective than Case 1 at distinguishing
incremental energy improvements beyond the minimum level of performance required by
ASHRAE 90.1-2022.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 171
 INCREMENTAL ENERGY CREDITS
Projects must achieve incremental energy credits above the minimum required for
prescriptive method compliance. These incremental energy credits must be from the list
of eligible HVAC, lighting, SWH, or building mass/night flush measures rather than the
full list of measures from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2. To assess achievement of
incremental energy credits (ECinc):

o Identify the minimum energy credits required by ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11

(ECreq).
• Determine the total combined energy credits achieved using ASHRAE 90.1-
2022, Section 11 from eligible measures and from noneligible measures (ECtotal).
o Determine the total combined energy credits achieved from the list of eligible
measures. (ECeligible).
o The quantity of incremental energy credits achieved is equal to the lesser of the
energy credits from eligible measures, or the total combined energy credits minus
the energy credits required by ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.

ECinc = Minimum (ECeligible, ECtotal – ECreq)

Example 1: Substantial alteration retail project in climate zone 4A

All energy credits from eligible measures.

ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 requires 25 energy credits, determined by multiplying the 50%
factor for substantial alterations referenced in ASHRAE 90.1, Section 11.5.1(c) by the 50 energy
credits required for retail in climate zone 4A from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Table 11.5.3-6 (ECreq =
25).

The project documents achievement of 52 total energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section
11, all of which are from measures eligible for LEED points.

• H02: HVAC Heating Performance Improvement. 20% or greater weighted average

improvement in ASHRAE 90.1-2022 heating efficiency achieves 28 energy credits.
• L04: Increased Daylighting Control Area. 65% of total daylighting area with continuous
daylight dimming achieves 4 energy credits.
• L06: Reduce Interior Lighting Power. 10% or greater improvement in ASHRAE 90.1-
2022 regulated lighting power achieves 20 energy credits.

ECtotal = ECeligible = EC_H02 + EC_L04 + EC_L06

ECtotal = ECeligible = 28 + 4 + 20 = 52

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 172
The project achieves 27 incremental energy credits above the minimum required for prescriptive
method compliance, which exceeds the 25 required for two LEED points.

ECinc = Minimum (ECeligible, ECtotal − ECreq)

ECinc = Minimum (52, 52 − 25) = 27

Example 2. Substantial alteration retail project in climate zone 4A

Renewable energy used to earn energy credits for prerequisite compliance.

The project referenced in Example 1 adds a roof-mounted PV array with a rated capacity of at
least 0.75 W/sq. feet (8.1 W/sq. m.) of the project’s gross floor area, achieving 15 energy credits
for measure R01: On-site Renewable Energy, and maximizing the combined allowable
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 contribution for renewable and load management credits. The
project achieves 67 total energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.

ECtotal = EC_H02 + EC_L04 + EC_L06 + EC_R01

ECtotal = 28 + 4 + 20 + 15 = 67

Of these energy credits, 52 are from measures eligible for LEED points (H02, L04, and L06).
Therefore, the project achieves 42 incremental energy credits above the minimum required for
prescriptive method compliance, which exceeds the 38 required for three LEED points.

ECinc = Minimum ( ECeligible , ECtotal - ECreq )

ECeligible = Minimum ( 52 , 67 - 25 ) = 42

ELIGIBLE MEASURES FOR PATH 1. REGULATED LOADS

Table 1. Eligible measures from ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Section 11.5.2 for LEED points
HVAC Measures Lighting Measures
H01: HVAC System Performance L01. Lighting System Performance**
Improvement (ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Addendum J)*
H02: HVAC Heating Performance L02: Lighting Dimming and Tuning.
Improvement.
H03: HVAC Cooling Performance L03: Increase Occupancy Sensor.
Improvement.
H04: Residential HVAC Controls. L04: Increase Daylight Area.
H05: Ground-Source Heat Pump. L05: Residential Light Controls.
H06: DOAS/Fan Controls. L06: Light Power Reduction.
H07: Guideline 36 Sequences.
SWH Measures Load Management Measures
W01: SHW Preheat Recovery. G07: Building Mass/Night Flush.
W02: Heat-Pump Water Heater.
W03: Efficient Gas Water Heater.
W04: SWH Pipe Insulation.
W05: Point-of-Use Water Heaters.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 173
 HVAC Measures Lighting Measures
W06: Thermostatic Balancing Valves.
W07: SHW Submeters.
W08: SHW Distribution Sizing.
W09: Shower Drain Heat Recovery.
*Cannot be used in conjunction with H02, H03, or H06
*Not included in ASHRAE 90.1-2022 but may be in future ASHRAE addenda

The remaining measures referenced in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2 are ineligible for
incremental LEED points, since these measures are separately rewarded in other LEED credits:

• P01: Energy Monitoring is rewarded under EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning, Option 2.

Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx)
• R01: Renewable Energy rewarded in EAc3: Renewable Energy
• Q01: Efficient Elevator Equipment and Q02: Efficient Kitchen Equipment rewarded in
EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 1, Path 3. Plug and Process Loads.
• G01 to G06 Load Management and E01: Improved Envelope Performance measures
rewarded in EAc5: Grid Interactive

EQUIVALENCE TO ASHRAE 90.1 FOR OPTION 1. PRESCRIPTIVE PATH, PATHS 1

AND 2.
Refer to the Project Priorities Library for regional paths addressing equivalence to ASHRAE
90.1.

To be eligible to apply Paths 1 or 2 of EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 1. Prescriptive

Path, projects using an ASHRAE 90.1 equivalent standard must use a prescriptive method from
that standard: compliance must be demonstrated per category of building systems (building
envelope, HVAC, lighting, SWH, etc.), without trade-offs between system categories.

Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Compliance for Project Scope

This path is awarded to projects documented using a prescriptive method of an ASHRAE 90.1-
2022 equivalent standard.

Path 2. Regulated Loads

CASE 1. ADDITIONAL EFFICIENCY — SYSTEMS OPTIMIZATION APPLIES TO
MOST PROJECTS USING AN EQUIVALENT STANDARD
Prescriptive values from the ASHRAE 90.1-2019-equivalent standard for efficiencies
such as lighting power density allowance or equipment efficiency may replace ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 11 referenced values. Any strategies applied must be incremental to

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 174
 the minimum prescriptive requirements documented for the standard, including any
additional efficiency measures required by the standard.

CASE 2. ADDITIONAL EFFICIENCY — REQUIREMENTS BEYOND ASHRAE 90.1-

2022
This may only be applied to interior buildouts documented using International Energy
Conservation Code 2024 (IECC-2024) when Section C406 requires these projects to
achieve a minimum number of energy credits. To use Case 2, directly replace energy
credits from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11, Additional Efficiency Requirements with
C406 energy credits. Implement incremental C406 energy credits, above the minimum
required in Section C406 from the list of eligible measures:

o HVAC (H01 to H05)

o Lighting (L01 to L06)
o SWH (W01 to W10)

PATH 3. PLUG AND PROCESS LOADS

Path 3 places a spotlight on plug, process, cooking, refrigeration, and elevator/escalator system
energy use that represent 30%–50% of building energy usage yet are only partially or
peripherally addressed through ASHRAE 90.1 standard requirements.

Projects may apply Case 1 in conjunction with Case 2 or document compliance with Case 1,
Case 2, or Case 3 independently.

Case 1. Plug Load Management

A plug load dashboard empowers occupants to actively engage in reducing project energy
consumption from plug loads. To comply with the credit requirements, the dashboard must be
accessible to all regular occupants of the space and summarize project receptacle use, at least
monthly. For projects with required monitoring and recording of receptacle use at 15-minute
intervals per EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting, use the dashboard to visualize this data,
and compare receptacle energy consumption to the prior interval annually, monthly, daily, and
hourly. The dashboard is only required to show usage for receptacle circuits but may optionally
address other process usage (such as elevators), or other project end uses (such as lighting or
HVAC energy).

If the operator of the space has an IT department that oversees computing operations in the
space, policies must be employed to control equipment off or in a very low power mode when
not in use, except during scheduled maintenance periods. The policy must address monitors,
visual displays, personal computers, and laptops.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 175
Case 2 Efficient Plug and Process Load Equipment
Case 2 provides a streamlined path for rewarding plug and process equipment efficiency. The
path is best suited for projects where a significant proportion of the project’s plug and process
load consists of equipment referenced in Table 3 of the rating system.

One point is rewarded for each equipment category where at least 90% of applicable project
equipment in the project scope meets the efficiency criteria, up to a maximum of three points.
Ninety percent of applicable equipment may be assessed using either equipment quantity or
rated load:

• Equipment quantity. Divide the total quantity of equipment that meets the efficiency
criteria for the equipment category by the total quantity of applicable equipment within
the project scope for the equipment category.
• Rated load. For applicable equipment in the equipment category, divide the sum of
rated load for equipment that meets the efficiency criteria by the sum of rated load for all
equipment within the project scope.

Either include or exclude all applicable equipment reused in the project from the calculations.
Reused ENERGY STAR® products are deemed compliant even when not meeting current
ENERGY STAR® specifications.

To ensure a measurable impact on project performance, Table 3 criteria for both ENERGY
STAR® products categories stipulate a minimum 0.1 W/sq. ft. (1.1 W/sq. m.) of eligible
equipment per unit of gross floor area. When the project has less than 0.1 W/sq. ft. (1.1 W/sq.
m.) of rated load for each individual ENERGY STAR® Products Equipment Category but
exceeds this value for the sum of the two categories, credit will be rewarded as one
consolidated Table 3 equipment category.

Process-intensive spaces
Process-intensive spaces such as data centers, restaurants, or refrigerated warehouses have
greater potential to achieve substantial project energy savings from a single equipment
category. Therefore, projects with combined equipment load from the equipment categories in
Table 3 totaling at least 0.3 W/sq. ft. (3.2 W/sq. m.) of gross floor area may assess compliance
based on 90% of total applicable equipment rated load rather than per equipment category. All
applicable equipment from all Table 3 equipment categories must be included in the
assessment of credit compliance.

Equivalence to ENERGY STAR® products

Refer to the Project Priorities Library for regional paths addressing equivalence to ENERGY
STAR® products.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 176
Case 3 Plug and Process Load Exceptional Calculation
Case 3 primarily applies to project applications with unique plug and process loads largely
unaddressed by Table 3 equipment categories (such as manufacturing or laboratory) or projects
where the streamlined methodology from Case 1 and 2 insufficiently reveals magnitude of
impact for plug and process efficiency measures implemented for the project. Case 3 cannot be
combined with Case 1 or Case 2.

Project analysts must use the ASHRAE 90.1, Section G2.5 exceptional calculation method to
demonstrate a minimum percentage improvement in total plug and process energy usage
compared to a baseline representative of standard practice for a similar project.
Perform a detailed assessment to determine the total estimated annual energy consumption
from all new and existing plug and process equipment in the project space, even when
regulated under ASHRAE 90.1:

• Receptacle equipment
• Cooking equipment
• Refrigeration equipment
• Conveyance equipment including elevators, escalators, or moving walkways
• Process heating or process cooling (e.g., for manufacturing processes)
• Data center IT equipment and Electrical Loss Component
• All other process energy used to support a manufacturing, industrial, or commercial
activity other than conditioning spaces and maintaining comfort and amenities for the
occupants of a building

For each process efficiency measure implemented in the project, document that the efficiency
measure is not conventional practice. Examples include:

• A recent study with researched tabulations or monitored data establishing standard

practice for the given application in similar newly constructed facilities
• A new-construction utility or government program that provides incentives for the
measure
• A document showing the systems used to perform an analogous function in similar
facilities built or reconstructed within the past 10 years
• Applicable prescriptive requirements from the version of ASHRAE 90.1 or equivalent
standard used for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency

Use the conventional practice references to define the baseline systems. Provide detailed
calculations and supporting narrative justification for any variations in baseline and proposed
energy use.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 177
PATH 4. BASE BUILDING ENERGY EFFICIENCY
When developers and owners are identifying leasing opportunities for their fit-out, targeting
high-performing buildings will allow the tenant fit-outs to optimize their energy performance.

ASHRAE 90.1 or ENERGY STAR®

For projects that are in a building that meets ASHRAE 90.1-2022, or for buildings that achieve
an ENERGY STAR® score of at least 75, two points can be earned under this path.

Previously LEED-certified base building

For projects located in a previously LEED-certified base building, coordinate with the building
owner or facility manager to gather information about the rating system, the version of the rating
system, the level of certification, and the number of points achieved for the respective Energy
Efficiency credits. Points are awarded according to Table 5.

Option 2. Energy Simulation

Option 2 rewards future source energy improvement below a Performance Index Target (PIt)
documented per ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM. The credit structure prioritizes efficiency over
on-site renewable energy, setting the performance improvement thresholds five times higher for
Path 2 (including on-site renewable contribution) than for Path 1 (excluding on-site renewable
contribution).

Assessment of credit compliance often requires simple additional calculations applied to the
outputs from the ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM energy models used to document EAp2:
Minimum Energy Efficiency, adjusting the metric, treatment of renewable energy, and/or BPF.

• Future source energy. The future source energy metric must be used to assess credit
compliance even when a different metric is used to document prerequisite compliance.
• BPF. For substantial alterations or initial build-outs, Performance Index Target (PIt) must
be calculated using LEED-published BPFs derived for the future source energy metric.
• Treatment of on-site renewable energy.
o The on-site renewable energy contribution must either be fully excluded for Path 1 or
fully included for Path 2.
o The Performance Index Target (PIt) includes no adjustments for renewable energy,
unlike ASHRAE 90.1-2022 which adjusts for prescriptively required on-site
renewable energy.

Further energy savings may also be documented for plug and process and/or district energy
efficiency measures that do not contribute toward prerequisite compliance.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 178
FUTURE SOURCE ENERGY METRIC
All projects must use the future source energy metric for credit compliance. This metric reflects
the average environmental impact of project energy consumption through 2050, considering the
primary energy sources and their associated emissions.

Future Source Energy Conversion Factor (Primary Energy Factor — PEF)

The terms “source energy” and “source energy conversion factor” referenced below may be
used interchangeably with the corresponding terms “primary energy” and PEF commonly used
in the European Union.

Source energy is defined as the site energy plus the estimated energy consumed or lost in the
extraction, processing, and transportation of primary energy forms such as coal, oil, natural gas,
biomass, and nuclear fuel; energy consumed in conversion to electricity or thermal energy; and
energy consumed or lost in transmission and distribution to the building site.

Source energy conversion factors must be at least one for all electricity and combustible fuel
sources.

Electricity
Future source energy is determined using a national average electric site-to-source conversion
factor rather than a more granular determination by grid region or province to enable broader
comparison of project energy efficiency across the entire spectrum of projects, and to account
for the interconnectedness of electric grids.

• For projects located in the U.S., use a national average electricity source energy
conversion factor of 2.0 based on projections through 2050.
• Projects located in other countries must use this same source energy conversion factor
of 2.0 or provide data supporting a lower average source energy conversion factor for
the project’s country. EU-average values may be used instead of the national average
for projects in the European Union. The source energy conversion factor must be one of
the following:
o Current published national- or EU-average source energy conversion factor.
o National- or EU-average source energy conversion factor from the present through
2050 or earlier, determined based on published, policy-based grid renewable
projections. This can be calculated by averaging the current published national or
EU-average source energy conversion factor and the predicted source energy
conversion factor for the year 2050 or earlier; or by an average that accounts for
year-to-year source energy projections.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 179
For example, projects in Europe may use the current default factor from the EU directive (1.9 as
of this publication 43), a lower published factor from the project’s EU member state, or a factor
determined based on policy-based published grid renewable projections through 2050 for the
EU or the project’s member state.

More granular future source energy conversion factors per state, province, or eGRID region are
not allowed because these necessitate greater complexity of EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency
requirements and increase ambiguity in comparative results.

Fuel
Use one of the following references for conversion factors:

ENERGY STAR® Portfolio Manager Technical Reference: Source Energy 44

Natural gas source energy conversion factor = 1.09 per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Table I5-1.
• ASHRAE 100-2024 45 Table 5-2 or ASHRAE 228 46 Table 4.
• Published national or EU-average source energy conversion factor conforming to the
definition of source energy provided above.

District energy systems (DES)

For projects that directly model purchased heat and/or purchased CHW as independent
sources, refer to EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency, DES, Method B.

Source energy factors published by the DES provider or calculated for a campus DES system
must conform to the definition of source energy provided above.

Future Source Energy Only Acceptable Metric for EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency
The future source energy metric prioritizes energy efficiency, limiting “trade-offs” with
decarbonization measures recognized in other LEED credits. Other metrics used for code
compliance or EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency are not applicable for EAc2: Enhanced Energy
Efficiency:

43
“Directive (EU) 2023/1791 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 September 2023 on energy efficiency and
amending Regulation (EU) 2023/955”, European Parliament, Council of the European Union, June 13, 2024, https://eur-
lex.europa.eu/eli/dir/2023/1791/.
44
“ENERGY STAR® Portfolio Manager Technical Reference: Source Energy”, ENERGY STAR®, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.energystar.gov/buildings/tools-and-resources/portfolio-manager-technical-reference-source-energy.
45
“ASHRAE 100-2024”, ASHRAE, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://webstore.ansi.org/standards/ashrae/ansiashraeiesstandard1002024?srsltid=AfmBOoooV3ze-
h4CHWn8HWU7alLQbx6KJcwyN28B1uQaa-fa4tdweiwc.
46
“ASHRAE 228”, ASHRAE, accessed March 31, 2025, https://store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-228-
2023?product_id=2562375.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 180
 • Energy costs can fluctuate due to market conditions, subsidies, and other economic
factors, skewing the representation of the environmental footprint of energy use for the
cost metric.
• A site energy metric overemphasizes the decarbonization already credited under EAc1:
Electrification.
• A GHG emissions metric overemphasizes the decarbonization already credited under
EAc1: Electrification and EAc3: Renewable Energy.

Building Performance Factor (BPF)

For substantial alterations and initial buildouts, Performance Index Target (PIt) must be
calculated using LEED-published BPFs from the rating system Table 7, which are derived for a
future source energy metric based on ASHRAE 90.1-2019 equivalent performance. For projects
that document prerequisite compliance using ASHRAE 90.1-2022, this directly rewards the
differential future source energy savings from ASHRAE 90.1-2019 to ASHRAE 90.1-2022.

For substantial alterations, multiply the LEED-published BPFs by 1.05 for the proportion of
existing project area associated with each building area type.

BPFs are not used for other alterations of existing buildings. Refer to the EAp2: Minimum
Energy Efficiency guidance for further context.

Treatment of on-site renewable energy (Option 2. Energy Simulation)

The Performance Index Target (PIt) for EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency omits the ASHRAE
90.1-2022 4.2.1.1 “PRE” adjustment for prescriptively required on-site renewable energy,
matching the ASHRAE 90.1-2019 equation for PIt:

PIt = [BBUE + (BPF × BBRE)] / BBP

To determine the PI, either fully exclude the renewable contribution for Path 1, or fully include
the renewable contribution for Path 2.

PATH 1. PERCENTAGE REDUCTION EXCLUDING ON-SITE RENEWABLE

CONTRIBUTION
Path 1, the default energy simulation path, focuses solely on energy efficiency, requiring energy
savings at or near achievable technical potential for maximum achievement of points.

This path does not recognize any on-site renewable contribution for the project (striking out
ASHRAE 90.1 G2.4, on-site renewable energy guidance). Calculate the PBP with total
proposed design energy for all electricity, fuel, and district energy use, regardless of whether
this energy is purchased or generated from on-site renewable systems.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 181
PATH 2. PERCENTAGE REDUCTION INCLUDING ON-SITE RENEWABLE
CONTRIBUTION
Path 2 applies primarily to project types that have limited opportunities for incremental energy
savings beyond the referenced standard, such as unconditioned warehouses, and to projects
that generate a large proportion of total project energy from on-site renewables.

Consistent with ASHRAE 90.1 G2.4, this path credits the on-site renewable contribution for the
project. Prior to calculating the PBP, subtract eligible on-site renewable energy generation from
the proposed design energy consumption. Total savings documented for on-site renewable
electricity generation can be up to 100% of project electricity use on an annual basis. To qualify
for credit compliance, the on-site renewable energy must be installed and commissioned within
the project scope of work, or an earlier scope of work on the base building or the site of a
contiguous campus, with all renewable attributes allocated to the project.

Plug and process efficiency

For EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, projects may document credit for plug and process
efficiency using ASHRAE 90.1 G2.5, Exceptional Calculation Method.

Document that each process efficiency measure is not conventional practice and provide
detailed calculations and narrative justification supporting the future source energy savings
claimed. (See additional guidance from Option 1, Path 3, Case 3 Plug and Process Load
Exceptional Calculation). To convey the magnitude of impact associated with process efficiency
measures, the energy analyst must separately report the PI, Performance Index Target, and all
associated terms with and without the process efficiency savings.

District energy
For EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, energy analysts may optionally replace prescriptive
purchased heat and purchased CHW efficiencies modeled per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum
A with improved virtual DES efficiencies representative of the DES purchase heat and
purchased CHW systems serving the project.

Provide an engineering analysis based on monitored data and/or energy simulation to justify the
improved virtual DES efficiencies modeled for the project. For each DES source, virtual DES
efficiency must account for total annual energy required to generate and distribute the district
energy. Include all pump energy use from the DES and within the project, thermal distribution
losses, heat rejection, and all operational effects influencing efficiency such as standby losses,
equipment cycling, equipment staging, and partial-load operation. When thermal distribution
losses are not measured or modeled, estimate default losses of 5% for CHW, 10% for hot
water, 15% for closed-loop steam, and 25% for open-loop steam.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 182
No further adjustments are required to a BBP model with purchased heat and purchased CHW
documented per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum A in EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency.

Combined heat and power (CHP)

To limit undue credit for site-recovered energy from CHP with on-site combustion emissions,
projects must model CHP systems using one of the following methods instead of ASHRAE 90.1
G2.4.2.1:

• CHP in baseline and proposed. Model CHP systems including all fuel inputs and
associated site-recovered energy identically in the baseline design and the proposed
design.
• Purchased electricity in baseline and proposed. Model purchased electricity instead
of the on-site electricity generation. Either credit site-recovered energy from the CHP
toward the thermal loads for the baseline and proposed design identically; or ignore the
site-recovered energy contribution in the baseline and proposed design).
• CHP in proposed and purchased electricity in baseline. Model CHP systems
including all fuel inputs and associated site-recovered energy in the proposed design.
Model the baseline design per ASHRAE 90.1 with purchased electricity and with no
credit for site-recovered energy.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Demonstrate compliance with EAp2: Minimum
Energy Efficiency.
Option 1 Path 1 Demonstrate compliance with EAp2: Minimum
Energy Efficiency ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Sections 5–
11.
Path 2: Case Upload calculator to demonstrate compliance.
1
Path 2: Case Upload calculator to demonstrate compliance.
2
Path 3: Case Demonstrate compliance that plug load dashboard
1 has been supplied and meets requirements.
Examples include screenshots of dashboard, photos,
specifications etc.
Provide documentation and/or IT policy.

Path 3: Case Provide documentation installed equipment meets

2 criteria in Table 3
Path 3: Case Upload plug and process load exceptional calculation
3 and associated documentation.
Path 4 ENERGY STAR® certificate; Comcheck or other
approved method showing compliance with ASHRAE
90.1 2022 or LEED credits.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 183
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Performance Demonstrate compliance with EAp2: Minimum
Path Energy Efficiency.
Option 2 Path 1 Demonstrate improvement in future source energy
calculated per ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Normative
Appendix G “Performance Rating Method” with noted
provisions [On-site RE excluded].
Path 2 Demonstrate improvement in future source energy
calculated per ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Normative
Appendix G “Performance Rating Method” with noted
provisions [On-site RE included].

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• ASHRAE 100-2024 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standard-100)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 184
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

RENEWABLE ENERGY
EAc3
1–5 points: 100% of tenant annual site energy consumption from any combination of Tier 1, Tier
2, and Tier 3 renewable energy is required for LEED Platinum projects.

INTENT
To encourage and recognize the use of renewable energy to reduce environmental and
economic impacts associated with fossil fuel energy use and increase the supply of new
renewable energy within the electrical grid, fostering a just transition to a green economy.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–5
Renewable Energy Supply or Procurement 1–5

Supply or procure renewable energy meeting the renewable energy criteria referenced below.
Points are rewarded according to Table 1.

Points documented for Tier 1, Tier 2, and/or Tier 3 renewable energy may be added together up
to a maximum of 5 points.

Tenant annual site energy consumption must include the total estimated annual electricity and
fuel use for systems and equipment within the project boundary or exclusively serving the
project space (excludes shared air handling units or thermal energy).

AND

The total estimated annual energy consumption for thermal energy (CHW or hot water) supplied
directly to the tenant by a utility, energy provider, or plant that is not in the building.

Renewable energy may be allocated to the tenant from the base building, provided it is
allocated equally for the entire building area (including tenant area and base building core area)

OR

Incremental to the renewable energy required for the base building for LEED Core and Shell
EAc4: Renewable Energy.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 185
Table 1. Points for renewable energy procurement

Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3

Percent of tenant Percent of tenant Percent of
Points Minimum rated
OR annual site annual site tenant annual
capacity1
energy energy site energy
A* 1 W / sq. ft.
1 (A * 10.8 W/sq. OR 5% 20% 50%
m.)
A* 2 W / sq. ft.
2 (A* 21.6 W/sq. OR 10% 40% 100%
m.)
3 20% 60%
4 35% 80%
100% Tier 1 and/or Tier 2 renewable
5
energy
*A = the sum of gross floor area of all floors of the building up to the three largest floors of the building, prorated to the project
based on project area.

Renewable Energy Criteria

RENEWABLE ENERGY CLASSIFICATIONS
Tier 1. On-site Renewable Energy Generation or Social Impact Project
The renewable generation equipment may be located:

• On the project site.

• On the campus on which a project is located.
• On the site of an equity project, as long as the renewable power system is provided,
installed, and commissioned at no cost to the equity entity; that the ownership of the
renewable power system is transferred to the equity entity; and that the rights to the
power provided be given to the equity entity.

Tier 2. New Off-site Renewable Electricity

Off-site renewable electricity produced by new generation asset(s) must be:

• Contracted to be operational within two years of building occupancy, OR

• Contracted no more than five years after the renewable asset’s commercial operations
date

Tier 3. Off-site Renewable Energy

• Off-site renewable electricity that is Green-e® Energy certified or equivalent
• Renewable fuels that are Green-e® Energy certified or equivalent

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 186
CONTRACT LENGTH
• Contract length shall be 10 years or prorated across 10 years for shorter contract
lengths.

ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES
• Ownership: All environmental attributes (energy attribute certificates, EACs) or
renewable energy certificates, RECs) associated with renewable energy generation
must be retired on behalf of the LEED project for the renewable energy procurement to
contribute to credit achievement.
• Project energy source: Renewable electricity generation and EAC procurement can
only be applied to tenant electricity use or district energy use up to 100% of annual
electricity plus district energy use. Renewable fuels can only be applied to tenant fuel
use or district heat up to 100% of annual fuel plus district heat use.
• Vintage: EACs credited to the project must be generated no earlier than 18 months
before the LEED project’s initial application submission date.
• Location: Tier 2 and Tier 3 renewable assets must be in the same country or region
where the LEED project is located.
• Tier 2 bulk purchase: Green-e® Energy certification or equivalent is required for one-
time purchase or annual purchase of EACs or renewable power totaling more than 100%
of the tenant’s annual electricity use.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit establishes a three-tier hierarchy for renewable energy, preferentially rewarding
renewable energy supply and procurement that has the most direct and long-term impacts on
building decarbonization:

• Tier 1. On-site renewable energy generation or social impact project

• Tier 2. New off-site renewable electricity
• Tier 3. Off-site renewable energy

Projects may choose to supply or procure renewable energy from Tier 1, Tier 2, and/or Tier 3 for
a maximum of five points.

For all three tiers of renewable energy, the project team should first confirm that the project will
comply with the credit requirements for renewable energy environmental attributes and
renewable contract length before proceeding with procurement and/or installation of the
renewable energy.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 187
Tenant Annual Site Energy Determination
For Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 percent of tenant annual site energy

Tenant annual site energy includes all electricity and fuel used within the project boundary, all
electricity and fuel for systems exclusively serving the project space, and all district energy
supplied from outside of the project boundary directly to the project space.

Include all project lighting and plug and process energy use.

• Include all electricity and fuel use for HVAC and SWH systems that are wholly contained
in the project boundary or exclusively serve the project space. Examples include
packaged single zone rooftop systems, water source heat pumps, VRF systems, water
heaters, and floor-by-floor VAV air handling units dedicated for project use.
• Include all electricity use for components of shared HVAC systems within the project
boundary, such as VAV terminal units or fan coil units.

Tenant annual site energy does not include common area use or base building energy
consumption from shared systems serving tenants, such as chiller plants, boiler plants, central
water heating, shared VAV air handling units, or dedicated outside air handling units.

For projects that meter their electricity and fuel use, tenant annual site energy use aligns with
this usage, supporting procurement of Tier 2 or Tier 3 renewable energy through a utility green
tariff.

Exclusion of energy for electric vehicle charging

Exclude energy for electric vehicle charging of vehicles used for off-site transportation purposes.

Renewable energy procurement may be contractually linked to a percentage of monthly

metered data for each project energy source, summing together to the renewable percent of
tenant annual site energy claimed for the project, or tenant annual site energy may be estimated
for the project.

ENERGY SIMULATION
Projects using energy modeling to demonstrate compliance with EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency must use the PBP without renewable contribution as the basis for tenant annual site
energy.

• For projects referencing the ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM, begin with the site energy
consumption for the PBP without any credit for the on-site renewable energy
contribution.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 188
 • For projects referencing the ASHRAE 90.1 ECB method, begin with the site energy
consumption for the proposed design without any credit for the on-site renewable energy
contribution.

For projects that have shared HVAC or SWH systems (including district energy distributed from
the base building plant), use submeters in the energy model or post-processing to exclude the
energy from these shared systems in the determination of tenant annual site energy.

PRESCRIPTIVE PATH
Projects using the prescriptive method to show compliance with EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency must rely on estimations from EAp1: Estimated Energy Use and Operational Carbon
Projection to determine tenant annual site energy for renewable energy credit calculations.
Break down the site energy into electric, fuel, and district energy consumption.

For projects that have shared HVAC or SWH systems, provide additional estimations to support
exclusion of the shared system energy use from the estimated tenant annual site energy.

Renewable energy classifications

TIER 1. ON-SITE RENEWABLE ENERGY GENERATION OR SOCIAL IMPACT
PROJECT
On-site renewable energy generation when strategically integrated with grid-interactive
strategies can increase project resilience and support effective grid management.
To qualify as a Tier 1 renewable system, the renewable energy must be produced and
generated on the project site, on the site of the contiguous campus where the project is located,
or on the site of a social impact project.

Eligible Tier 1 Renewable Resource Types

Eligible Tier 1 renewable energy resources include:

• Solar electric (PV)

• Solar thermal (i.e., for SWH or hot water heating)
• Wind
• Recovered heat from municipal wastewater

Only usable energy generated from the renewable system shall be considered toward the Tier 1
renewable energy contribution. Usable energy is defined as the output energy from the system
less any transmission and conversion losses, such as standby heat loss, losses when
converting electricity from DC to AC, or waste heat that is exhausted to the atmosphere. Excess
energy, beyond the project’s energy demand at a given point, can be sold to the utility company

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 189
(net metering) when all associated renewable attributes are retained by the project owner. Net
metered electricity may count toward the renewable contribution up to 100% of annual electricity
and district energy use.

Additional considerations: Non-qualifying systems

Renewable fuels harvested, produced, or refined offsite and used to generate
thermal energy or electricity on-site are classified as Tier 3 renewable energy,
and shall not be counted as Tier 1 renewable energy.

Tier 1 social impact project

Project owners may opt to install renewable energy on the site of a social impact project with a
capital investment similar to that incurred for installing a new renewable system on their own
project site. A social impact project is defined as a building or project site providing housing
and/or community services to historically marginalized communities. Examples include, but are
not limited to, affordable housing projects, community centers, schools, or recreational facilities
serving historically marginalized communities.

For social impact projects, the social impact project owner who owns, operates, and/or occupies
the project shall have no financial burden for the renewable equipment, the installation, or the
commissioning of the renewable system. The social impact project owner must gain ownership
of the system. They will have the right to power generated from the new system. This provides
affordable clean power that will result in permanent cost savings to members of historically
marginalized communities.

For residential social impact projects, residents responsible for payment of their own electricity
bills must receive proportionate cost savings for the renewable power generation. Renewable
generation may be allocated first to central water heating and HVAC equipment serving the
residential units before proportioning the remainder to the residents.

Additional considerations: Non-qualifying Tier 1 social impact project

Most community renewable energy installations do not comply with the social
impact project requirements for location of the renewable system and permanent
transfer of ownership and rights to the power to the social impact project owner.

Tier 1 commissioning
Tier 1 renewable systems must be installed and commissioned per EAp3: Fundamental
Commissioning. For projects pursuing EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning, Option 1. Enhanced
Commissioning, Tier 1 renewable systems must also comply with the commissioning criteria for
that credit. Functional testing of renewable systems must commence before the final LEED
certification application to qualify for credit.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 190
The CxP for an equity, base building, or campus renewable project may be different than the
project’s CxP. Documentation of previous commissioning of equity, base building, or campus
renewable projects is acceptable, provided it complies with the requirements for EAp3:
Fundamental Commissioning and EAc4: Enhanced Commissioning. For existing campus or
equity systems that were not commissioned during the original system design and construction,
re-commissioning of the system is required.

Tier 1 methods for demonstrating compliance

To achieve points in Tier 1 on-site renewable energy systems, a project must either install the
minimum rated capacity of on-site renewable energy as a function of project area or install
qualifying renewable energy that will generate the specified percent of the tenant annual site
energy. Projects may quickly calculate compliance using either method and apply the method
that leads to greatest achievement of points.

Tier 1 minimum rated capacity method for demonstrating compliance

The minimum rated capacity method is most appropriate for projects in multi-story buildings or
projects with high process loads that are not capable of supplying a significant proportion of
building site energy use through on-site renewable energy.

The area (A) used to calculate the minimum rated capacity is "the sum of the gross floor area of
all the floors in the base building up to the three largest floors" proportionally allocated to the
project.

This value refers to the base building and project dimensions, regardless of whether the
renewable system is installed on the project site, on the campus, or on the site of a social
impact project.

• For projects in buildings with 3 or fewer floors, A is equal to the total gross floor area of
the project.
• For projects in multi-story buildings with equal floor plates across all floors, A is
determined by Equation 1.

Equation 1.
3 × 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 × 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝐴𝐴 =
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏

For all other projects, A is determined by identifying the three largest floors in the building and
summing the area for these three floors, then multiplying by the ratio of project area and total
gross area of the building.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 191
Equation 2.
[∑(𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 3 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓] × 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝐴𝐴 =
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏

Use the area (A) to calculate the required minimum rated capacity of renewable energy for up to
two points. For solar PV panels, use the direct current (DC) rated capacity, without degrading
for system losses.

Table 2. Minimum rated capacity

Points Minimum rated capacity
IP units SI units
1 A x 1.0 Watt / sq. ft. A x 10.8 Watt / sq. m.
2 A x 2.0 Watt / sq. ft. A x 21.6 Watt / sq. m.

For a building three stories or taller, the minimum required rated capacity corresponds to
approximately 20% of gross roof area covered by solar PVs for one point, or approximately 40%
of gross roof area covered by solar PVs for two points. The one-point threshold for minimum
rated capacity is double the value of on-site renewable energy prescriptively required by
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 for new buildings.

Tier 1 percent of tenant annual site energy method for demonstrating compliance
This method is most appropriate for projects located in buildings with three or fewer floors that
have relatively low process loads. Projects must use the percent of tenant annual site energy
method when documenting more than two points for Tier 1 renewable energy.

TIER 2. NEW OFF-SITE RENEWABLE ELECTRICITY

Age of the renewable generator marks the key difference between Tier 2 and Tier 3 qualified
electricity generation resources. Tier 2 requires new off-site renewable power either from
generators contracted to be built and operational within two years of building occupancy, or from
generators with a commercial operations date (COD) no more than five years before the
execution of the purchase contract.

Older contracts
It is acceptable to utilize older long-term purchase contracts to comply with the COD
requirement, provided that the contract shows the COD for the generators occurred less than
five years before the contract was executed and the allocated energy generation from the
contract meets all Renewable criteria. For example, a 20-year purchase contract for newly
installed wind power executed 10 years ago allocated to the project in accordance with
Renewable criteria below qualifies as Tier 2 renewable energy.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 192
TIER 3. OFF-SITE RENEWABLE ENERGY
Tier 3 encompasses both renewable electricity that is Green-e® Energy 47 certified or equivalent,
and renewable fuels certified to the Green-e® Renewable Fuels standard or equivalent.

For renewable electricity, the COD of the renewable power generator may be up to 15 years old
to meet the Green-e® Energy “Generator Age and New Date” criteria.

Eligible renewable electricity resource types — Tier 2 and Tier 3

Eligible renewable power generation resources for Tier 2 and Tier 3 electricity include:

• Solar electric (PVs)

• Wind
• Geothermal energy (electricity or heat generated from subterranean steam or hot water)
• Ocean-based energy (such as wave or tidal energy conversion)
• Low-impact hydropower
• Biomass production

These renewable electricity generation sources should meet the criteria in Green-e®
Framework for Renewable Energy Certification Section III.A Renewable Resource Types,
including any applicable location-specific criteria (e.g., Section II. Eligible Sources of Supply
from the Green-e® Renewable Energy Standard for Canada and the United States).

Nearly all solar electric, wind, and geothermal power generation systems that meet the
Green-e® “New Date” criteria qualify as Green-e® renewable resource types.

By contrast, many hydropower, biomass power generation, and ocean-based energy systems
do not meet the Green-e® Framework criteria governing those system types. If considering a
renewable resource that is not wind or solar and is not Green-e® certified, review applicable
criteria to confirm resource eligibility.

For instance, in the U.S., hydropower must meet one of the following criteria per the Green-e®
Renewable Energy Standard for Canada and the United States, Section II. Eligible Sources of
Supply:

• New generation capacity on a non-impoundment OR

• New generation capacity on an existing impoundment from a hydropower facility certified
by the Low Impact Hydropower Institute or from a hydropower facility consisting of a
turbine in a pipeline or in an irrigation canal

47
“Green-e® Energy”, Green-e®, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.green-e.org/programs/energy.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 193
 Additional considerations: Geoexchange systems ineligible
Geoexchange systems such as geothermal heat pumps that use vapor
compression cycles are not considered a renewable energy resource. These
systems are credited in EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.

Eligible Tier 3 renewable fuel resource types

For any fuel used on the project site or for district heating, the project may procure renewable
fuel that is Green-e® certified or equivalent. The Green-e® renewable fuels standard certifies
biomethane (also called Renewable Natural Gas, or RNG) that meets specific production facility
and feedstock criteria and is purified to meet gas pipeline specifications.

Renewable Energy Criteria

CONTRACT LENGTH
Projects must retain EACs for the annual renewable energy generation for a minimum of 10
years. Contractual documentation must show ownership of the EACs for the required duration.
Examples include a 10-year contract for renewable power from:

• Tier 1. Third-party-owned, on-site renewable energy system

• Tier 2. Virtual Power Purchase Agreement
• Tier 3. Green Tariff

For contract durations shorter than 10 years, prorate the renewable energy across 10 years. For
a one-time bulk purchase of renewable energy, the annual renewable energy quantity allocated
to the project is the total purchase quantity divided by 10.

For older contracts, only count the remaining time left in the contract no earlier than 18 months
before the initial submission date for LEED certification (consistent with the Vintage criteria).

For Tier 3 renewable energy, where a 10-year contract is not available, project teams may show
compliance with the 10-year minimum contract term by demonstrating the following:

• The project has an executed contract for a minimum of one year, or where contracts are
not available per regulatory requirements, document that the project has been enrolled
in the Green-e® or equivalent utility tariff for a minimum of one month. AND
• The project owner must provide a signed letter of commitment indicating that the project
will remain continuously enrolled in the 100% renewable Green-e® or equivalent utility
tariff, or alternate 100% Green-e® or equivalent procurement source for a minimum of
10 years (or the number of years documented for credit if less than 10 years).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 194
Environmental Attributes
When procuring off-site electricity, environmental attributes must meet specific requirements for
ownership, source, vintage, and location.

An EAC is a transferrable certificate, record or guarantee used to track the environmental

attributes for a unit of energy and the rights to those attributes. Examples of EACs include
Renewable Energy Certificates (RECs) and Guarantees of Origin (GOs), where one REC or one
GO corresponds to one megawatt-hour (MWH) of renewable electricity.

Ownership
Ownership of the renewable energy environmental attributes must reside with the LEED AP
BD+C project, demonstrated through retirement of the EACs on behalf of the LEED project.

If the renewable attributes are not retained by the project owner, the renewable project is
disqualified from credit compliance. For example, if the project cedes ownership of the RECs
from on-site PVs in exchange for a utility incentive, the system is ineligible for credit.

The renewable energy contract does not permit the replacement of EACs from one project with
that of a different renewable energy project (referred to as REC Arbitrage) unless the contract
specifies that the replacement EACs meet all relevant LEED criteria. For example, the contract
shall not allow replacement of Tier 2 EACs with those of an asset older than five years at the
time of contract execution.

RENEWABLE ENERGY ALLOCATION FROM BASE BUILDING

EACs from base building renewable energy may be allocated to the project. Use one of
the following approaches:

Equal allocation
Allocate the renewable energy equally for the entire building area (including tenant area
and base building core area).

For the Tier 1 rated capacity method for demonstrating compliance, the capacity per unit
of project area allocated in a LEED BD+C: Core and Shell base building application
must equal the capacity per unit of project area allocated to the tenant project.

When allocating as a percent of annual site energy, a lease agreement or similar

contract must confirm equal allocation of EACs across all building spaces. Determine the
total annual site energy use for the building (including base building contribution and
tenant spaces); and the total annual renewable energy for each Tier supplied or

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 195
 procured to the building. Use this to calculate the percent of annual site energy use that
is allocated to the Interiors project (incremental credit cannot be claimed in the Core and
Shell application above the percentage documented).

Incremental to the renewable energy required for the base building for LEED
BD+C: Core and Shell EAc3: Renewable Energy
If the building owner supplies or procures renewable energy in excess of that used to
achieve Core and Shell certification, the owner may assign this excess usage to tenants
in the building. For example, the owner may offer an opt-in lease agreement to provide
100% Tier 2 renewable electricity to tenants in excess of the 100% base building site
energy use secured for Core and Shell certification.

Project Energy Source

Renewable electric generation from Tier 1, Tier 2, and/or Tier 3 can only be applied to electricity
or district thermal energy up to 100% of total combined electricity and district thermal energy.
Tier 3 renewable fuels can only be applied to project fuel use or district heat up to 100% of the
total combined fuel and district heat.

Therefore, if the project’s systems use any fuel:

• The qualifying combined Tier 1 and Tier 2 energy use as a percentage of tenant annual
site energy will be less than 100%.
• The project must procure both Tier 3 electricity and Tier 3 renewable fuel to achieve
100% Tier 3 renewable energy required for two points.

Vintage
Renewable energy cannot be generated more than 18 months before the initial submission date
for LEED certification.

• A one-time purchase of EACs or RECs cannot occur more than 18 months before the
initial submission date for LEED certification unless the terms of the purchase
agreement ensure renewable energy generation occurs no earlier than the referenced
date.
• Allocation of renewable power to the project from a multi-year contract must be limited to
power generation beginning 18 months prior to LEED initial submission.

Location
For projects in large countries such as the United States, India, and China, the renewable
energy must be generated in the same country as the project. For projects in smaller countries

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 196
such as those in the European Union, the renewable energy must be generated in the same
multi-country geographical region as the project, provided that these countries share an
interconnected electric utility grid or that EACs are unavailable in the project’s country.

Tier 2 Bulk Purchases

Tier 2 bulk purchases totaling more than 100% of the project’s total combined annual electricity
and district energy usage require Green-e® energy certification (or equivalent). This ensures the
proper level of transparency and verification necessary to confirm additionality and
environmental impact associated with the EACs.

GREEN-E® EQUIVALENCE
Projects not using Green-e® certified products for Tier 2 bulk purchases or for Tier 3 electricity
or fuel must demonstrate equivalency to the Green-e® requirements.

For electricity, the EACs retired on behalf of the LEED project must:

• Be certified under an eco-label or similar program developed by an independent

organization or government entity with transparent accounting process and standards in
place.
• Be from an eligible renewable energy resource (see Green-e® Framework for
Renewable Energy Certification, Section IIIA, “Renewable Resource Types,” and
additional regional requirements as applicable, i.e. Appendix D: Green -e Renewable
Energy Standard for Canada and the United States, Section II, Eligible Sources of
Supply).
• Be from renewable assets that have come online within the last 15 years or for projects
outside the U.S. The eco-label program may instead include provisions ensuring
incremental environmental benefits for assets older than 15 years.
• Have a verifiable chain of custody.
• Have a mechanism to prevent double-counting.

For Tier 3 fuel, the EACs retired on behalf of the LEED project must have a mechanism to
prevent double counting and meet one of the following criteria:

• Certified under an eco-label or similar program developed by an independent

organization with transparent accounting process and standards in place, OR
• Officially recognized as a renewable fuel source in the country, province, state, or
locality in which the project is located.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 197
DISTRICT ENERGY SYSTEMS (DES)
DES Fueled by Renewable Energy
For DES fueled by renewable energy, projects may either allocate this renewable energy toward
credit compliance, or exclude the renewable energy proportion from the project’s annual site
energy determination:

Allocation of DES Renewable Energy to the Project

For each DES directly supplied to project, assign the project the proportion of DES input energy
that meet the LEED requirements for each tier of renewable energy:

• Tier 1. On-site renewable electricity generation or solar thermal energy generation at the
District Energy Plant
• Tier 2. New off-site renewable electricity
• Tier 3. Green-e® or equivalent off-site renewable electricity for DES electricity inputs, or
Green-e® or equivalent fuel for DES fuel inputs

Example
Allocate the project Tier 3 renewable fuel totaling 60% of the project’s annual
district heating energy consumption for a district heating system with 60% of
annual energy inputs from Green-e® or equivalent fuel. EACs must be retained
by either the DES supplier or the project owner to be eligible for this approach.

In lieu of documentation showing a 10-year contract for renewable fuels, the

project may submit evidence of annual DES renewable percentage achieved for
the most recent three years of operation and provide narrative confirmation
justifying that ongoing achievement is anticipated at or above the specified level.

OR

Exclusion of DES Renewable Energy Proportion from Annual Site Energy Determination
For each DES supplied directly to the project and fueled by renewable energy, exclude this
proportion of renewable energy from the tenant annual site energy determination. To be eligible
for exclusion, the renewable energy shall either be an Eligible Renewable Electricity Resource
Type or an Eligible Tier 3 Renewable Fuel Resource Type per the descriptions above or shall
be classified as renewable energy by national, state, or local policy governing the project
location.

Example
For a district heating system fueled by 70% biofuel classified as renewable in the
project’s country, include only the 30% of project district heating associated with

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 198
 nonrenewable fuel inputs in the annual site energy determination used for credit
compliance.

Annual site energy adjustments for DES (optional)

For projects where the high efficiency associated with district CHW generation artificially inflates
total estimated site energy consumption, projects may optionally apply either the DES Multiplier
or the Virtual DES Efficiency to all DES sources serving the project:

DES MULTIPLIER
o Multiply total reported site energy consumption for “purchased CHW” by 0.325.
o Multiply total reported site energy consumption for “purchased heat” by 1.2.

VIRTUAL DES EFFICIENCY IN EAC2: ENHANCED ENERGY EFFICIENCY.

Projects crediting DES efficiency toward the project performance in EAc2: Enhanced
Energy Efficiency by modeling the proposed district energy use as virtual on-site CHW
and hot water plants may optionally use the total modeled site energy consumption from
this proposed rather than separating out the site energy consumption for “purchased
CHW” and “purchased hot water.”

In the energy simulation, use submetering to distinguish fuel used onsite from the
modeled fuel use for the district hot water plant. Per the Renewable Attributes, Project
Energy Source criteria, either renewable electricity generation or renewable fuel may be
applied to the submetered fuel and/or electricity use associated with the district heating
system; whereas only renewable fuel may be applied to fuel used on the project site.

DES site energy adjustments are not applicable to projects modeled using ASHRAE Standard
90.1-2022, Addendum A. Projects applying Addendum A should use submetering to distinguish
fuel used on-site from the modeled fuel used for the district hot water plant.

LEED Platinum Requirements

To achieve LEED Platinum, projects must supply 100% of tenant annual site energy from any
combination of Tier 1, Tier 2, and/or Tier 3 renewable energy. Refer to the Project Priorities
Library for regional compliance alternatives.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 199
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Plans or documentation confirming Tier 1 renewable
systems and their rated capacity (DC and AC).
Total tenant area.
For third-party-owned systems, provide a purchase letter or
contract of commitment showing renewable energy for
targeted point threshold, including confirmation of renewable
attribute ownership, quantity of renewable energy, type of
renewable energy, country / region, duration of contract, and
COD.
Evidence that EACs meet ownership, vintage, location,
Green-e®, or equivalent requirements as applicable.
Calculation for Tier 1 renewable energy system rated
capacity per floor area W/sq. ft. using Equation 1 and
Equation 2.
Tenant annual site energy consumption.

Documentation describing method and/or calculations for

determining tenant annual site energy consumption.
Calculator showing the percentage of tenant annual site
energy per Tier (1,2,3).
Documentation showing the system meets the requirements
for a social impact project. (As applicable).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Green-e® Energy (green-e.org/programs/energy/documents)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 200
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
—
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
EAc4
1–4 points

INTENT
To further ensure that the building systems function as designed, and that they continue to
maintain energy performance over time.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–4
Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning 1–2
AND/OR
Option 2. Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx) 1–2
Path 1. Basic MBCx 1
OR
Path 2. Enhanced MBCx 2

Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning (1–2 points)

Owner must designate an independent commissioning provider (CxP) during predesign or very
early in the design phase.

Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202-2024, “Commissioning Process” for mechanical,

electrical, plumbing, data center, process, building monitoring, building enclosure, and
renewable energy systems within the project scope of work (including any interconnection with
base building systems).

The CxP must comply with the following additional requirements:

• Attend at least one coordination meeting during the design phase, and at least two
milestone meetings during the construction phase to discuss review comments and
commissioning.
• Provide an ongoing commissioning plan.
• During occupancy, review the training materials to confirm that they meet the training
plan, and confirm that the training occurred.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 201
If the project scope includes alterations to 25% or more of the building envelope area or 5,000
square feet (465 square meters) of the building enclosure, then field testing for the building
enclosure shall include the following if applicable:

• Water penetration testing, as per ASTM E1105 or AAMA 501.2, as appropriate.

• Infrared imaging, as per ASTM C1153 or ASTM C1060, as appropriate.

AND/OR

Option 2. Monitoring-based Commissioning (MBCx) (1–2 points)

PATH 1. BASIC MBCX (1 POINT)
Process and communications
Commit to implementing MBCx for a minimum of three years. Include all of the following:

• MBCx plan: Develop an MBCx plan and include it in the current facilities requirements
and operations and maintenance plan. The MBCx plan must describe:
o Roles and responsibilities
o Training of operations staff
o A software technology description, including frequency and duration of trend
monitoring.
o An action plan for identifying, prioritizing, correcting, and verifying correction of
operational errors.
o Review and reporting criteria. At least annually, provide a summary report of trends,
benchmarks, faults, energy savings opportunities, corrective actions taken, and
planned actions.
• Energy information system (EIS): Have in place a remotely accessible platform with
software functionality to perform smart analytics and visually present project electricity
consumption and fuel consumption, excluding shared systems serving the project space.
Tenant access to the building EIS is acceptable.

Include the following functionality:

• Annual energy benchmarking of energy use intensities.

• Comparison of total project energy consumption and energy consumption of fuel and
electricity to the prior interval annually and monthly.
• If electricity interval metering is required in EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting,
provide visualization and reporting of hourly total electricity and submetered data. For
total tenant electricity, include an hourly loadshape and comparison of hourly electricity
to the prior interval, and to the same interval of the prior year annually, monthly, weekly,
and daily.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 202
 • Provide hourly monitoring and visualization of electric energy use for:
o Commercial kitchen equipment in project spaces with more than 20 kW of rated
capacity.
o Process equipment in project spaces with more than 20 kW of rated capacity.
• Training: Train operations staff to use the EIS to proactively inform energy-efficient
operations or confirm training occurred within the past six years.

OR

PATH 2. ENHANCED MBCX (2 POINTS)

Comply with Path 1 and implement the following enhanced MBCx practices and software
capabilities:

• Provide MBCx through a corporate MBCx program or contracted service. Fully

coordinate the MBCx process between the space operations staff and the monitoring-
based commissioning provider (MBCxP).
• Process and communications: The MBCxP process must include:
o Expeditious communication of major anomalies or faults identified by MBCxP to
facilities staff.
o At least quarterly, an MBCxP summary of anomalies and faults detected and
communication with facilities staff to discuss and prioritize issues.
o For projects with fault detection and diagnostics (FDD), training of operations staff in
the use of FDD to proactively identify and correct building system issues for
optimized system operation or a confirmation that training occurred within the past
six years.

Enhanced energy information system (EIS). Include the following additional functionality:

• Normalization of energy consumption

• Automated reporting of energy use anomalies
• Greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) emissions reporting
• Hourly metering and visualization of electricity for the following, if applicable:
o On-site electricity generation
o At least 90% of lighting power altered or installed in the project scope of work.
o HVAC or refrigeration equipment with thermal energy capacity exceeding 900,000
Btu/hr (264 kW, 75 tons), or with rated fan power exceeding 75 hp (56 kW).
o Electricity use for process equipment with thermal energy capacity exceeding
900,000 Btu/hr (264 kW, 75 tons)

FDD for projects with large HVAC and refrigeration capacity. For total project installed capacity
of either cooling systems, heating systems, or refrigeration systems exceeding 7,200 kBtu/hr

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 203
(600 tons, or 2,110 kW), provide a remotely accessible FDD system that addresses at least
60% weighted by capacity of:

• Air-handling equipment AND

• Large hydronic or commercial refrigeration equipment (chillers, boilers, etc.).

The FDD system must be able to:

• Perform smart analytics and visually present FDD data.

• Direct link from reported fault to view relevant trend data.
• Sort and filter faults.
• Export fault reports (summary reports and detailed individual faults).
• Act as a data historian capable of storing critical trend data for at least three years.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit rewards projects that provide commissioning beyond the EAp3: Fundamental
Commissioning requirements. Option 1 requires early engagement of a CxP to lead a
comprehensive commissioning process spanning from pre-design through the warranty period.

Option 2 requires the implementation of a MBCx process that verifies ongoing performance
post-occupancy leveraging automated data analytics and reporting.

Projects can combine Options 1 and Option 2 to achieve up to four points.

Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning

Enhanced commissioning activities lead to optimized system performance and further
integration of the CxP into the design and post-occupancy efforts.

Enhanced commissioning provides substantial value for the limited additional efforts beyond
EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning. In Table 1 of the credit, a comparison of the ASHRAE
Standard 90.1, Commissioning Requirements for the prerequisite versus the credit requirements
from ASHRAE Standard 202 48, along with typical milestones for key tasks to occur is presented.
Projects that comply with Option 1 will automatically achieve EAp3: Fundamental
Commissioning.

48
“ASHRAE standard 202”, ASHRAE, accessed March 31, 2025, https://store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-202-
2024?product_id=2908468.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 204
ASHRAE STANDARD 202-2024
ASHRAE Standard 202-2024 outlines the Commissioning Process for mechanical, electrical,
plumbing, control, data center, process, building monitoring, and renewable energy systems in
the project scope. It is a systematic process that begins in the early design phase and continues
through the warranty or post-occupancy phase. Along with the ASHRAE Standard 202-2024
requirements, teams must also comply with incremental LEED AP ID+C requirements.

EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning, Table 1 provides a detailed comparison of the ASHRAE

Standard 90.1 commissioning requirements for the prerequisite and the ASHRAE Standard 202
requirements for Enhanced Commissioning of MEP systems. The table also provides timing for
each task.

TIMING OF CXP ENGAGEMENT

ASHRAE 202 requires CxP review of the OPR, and initial development of the Commissioning
Plan during pre-design, necessitating very early engagement of the CxP in the design process.
If the CxP is engaged after pre-design, alternative measures must be taken to ensure alignment
with the intent of the Standard 202 timeline.

Examples of acceptable CxP engagement after pre-design

• Portfolio applications where the OPR and Cx Plan at the predesign phase are similar to
other projects.
• A qualified employee of the owner provides the initial review of the OPR and initial draft
of the Cx Plan and CxP is designated early in design development to continue the
analysis.

COMMISSIONING SCOPE
The enhanced MEP commissioning scope must comprehensively address alignment with the
OPR, expanding the focus beyond energy and GHG emissions to address water efficiency, air
quality, and thermal comfort. Commissioned systems must address all the following systems or
components in the project scope of work and any interconnection with base building systems.

• Mechanical. HVAC and refrigeration, including any process heating or cooling systems
in the project
• Electrical. Lighting, receptacle power
• Plumbing. Indoor fixtures, SWH, pool equipment, etc.
• Data center. Electrical, cooling, humidity. Identify a mechanism for evaluating whether
server equipment efficiency targets are met.
• Building monitoring. Include all monitoring systems required by ASHRAE 90.1, as well
as any EIS and Fault Detection and Diagnostic (FDD) systems referenced in Option 2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 205
 • On-site renewable systems. Include all Tier 1 systems credited in EAc3: Renewable
Energy.
• Controls. Include systems credited in EAc5: Grid-Interactive.

Additional LEED tasks

LEED appends additional required tasks to those referenced in ASHRAE 202-2024:

MEETINGS
During the design phase, the CxP participates in at least one coordination meeting to
discuss design review comments.

During the construction phase, the CxP participates in at least two milestone meetings to
discuss the commissioning findings and work toward resolution of identified issue.

ONGOING CX PLAN
An ongoing Cx plan ensures that systems remain operationally efficient throughout the
life of the building. The plan should provide facility managers with procedures, blank
FPTs, and a recommended schedule for ongoing Cx activities.

The ongoing Cx plan should address requirements for continuous documentation and
updates. Building operations change over time, including retrofits or equipment
replacement projects. Ensure the ongoing Cx plan reflects the most current information
for the building.

REVIEW OF TRAINING MATERIALS

Facility staff training represents a critical step between the construction phase and post-
occupancy. Before or during occupancy, the CxP must review training material to
confirm that the training documents meet the training plan and sufficiently address the
OPR and BOD. The CxP must also confirm that training occurred.

Enhanced commissioning for building enclosure (when in scope)

If the project scope includes major alterations to the envelope addressing more than 25% or
total building envelope area or more than 5,000 square feet (465 square meters) of the building
enclosure, then the commissioning scope must include field testing for water penetration and
infrared imaging, using one of the referenced standards.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 206
 • Water penetration testing. For projects with scope of work including fenestration or
exterior doors, apply ASTM 1105 49 or AAMA 501.2 50 to provide water penetration of
installed exterior windows, skylights, doors, and curtain walls. Otherwise, water
penetration testing is not required.
• Infrared imaging. ASTM C1060 51 is appropriate for envelope scope of work that
includes framed members. For scope that includes a roof with insulation above deck,
ASTM C1153 52 can be used to locate wet insulation. Otherwise, infrared imaging is not
required.

Option 2. Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx)

MBCx enables building operators to identify operational issues as they occur, facilitating
achievement of the project’s performance goals on an ongoing basis.

Both paths require an EIS that enables visualization, analytics, and automated reporting of
monthly energy data and any additional metered data referenced in EAp4: Energy Metering and
Reporting; and a minimum three-year commitment to implement MBCx informed by the EIS.

Path 2 requires enhanced monitoring and software functionality and strengthened engagement
with the MBCxP.

Additional considerations: MBCx at the building level

Centralized MBCx at the building level complies with the requirements when
tenants have access to EIS reporting and visualization of tenant-monitored data
and MBCxP reporting of issues identified within the tenant space.

PATH 1. BASIC MBCX

MBCx Plan
Teams must develop a comprehensive MBCx plan that summarizes the complete process
building operators will follow for a minimum three-year period. Refer to the rating system
language for the specific details that must be included in the plan.

EIS and Monitoring

An EIS empowers operators to review trends, identify anomalies, perform preventative and
predictive maintenance, and reduce energy consumption and GHG emissions over the
building’s life span.

49
“ASTM 1105”, ASTM International, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.astm.org/e1105-15.html.
50
“AAMA 501.2”, Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA), accessed March 31, 2025, https://store.fgiaonline.org/AAMA-
501.2-15/
51
“ASTM C1060”, ASTM International, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.astm.org/c1060-11ar15.html.
52
“ASTM C1153”, ASTM International, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.astm.org/c1153-10r15.html.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 207
A certain minimum level of energy monitoring is required for all projects, even if not required in
EAp4: Metering and Reporting. Monitored data shall be automatically transmitted for use in the
EIS platform analytics. The EIS system must provide visualization and analytics of this
monitored data.

• Monitor monthly electricity consumption and peak monthly electric demand for project
electricity use, not including shared energy systems serving the project.
• Monitor monthly energy consumption for fuel delivered directly to the project space.
• Per EAp4: Metering and Reporting, for initial build-out of tenant spaces ≥ 10,000 square
feet (929 square meters), monitor total hourly electricity use, and the hourly electricity
use for end uses including HVAC, interior lighting, exterior lighting, receptacles, and
refrigeration. For these spaces, the credit only requires marginal additional EIS
visualization and analytics capabilities beyond the ASHRAE 90.1 energy monitoring and
recording requirements.
• Monitor hourly electricity use for large power uses including elevators and commercial
kitchen equipment.

The EIS system must include all visualization and analytic capabilities referenced in the Rating
System.

PATH 2. ENHANCED MBCX

In addition to meeting the requirements for Path 1, projects must provide enhanced MBCx
practices and software capabilities:

MBCx Provider
Contract with a third-party MBCxP for a minimum three-year time frame or provide MBCx
through a corporate program that has qualified staff designated to lead the MBCx process. The
MBCxP must have direct experience on similar projects. Many MBCxPs have a programming or
controls integration background and extensive experience with EIS and FDD technologies.

The MBCxP can be the same as the CxP or can be a different entity. If the CxP and the MBCxP
are different entities, a communication plan must be established so both entities can coordinate
during the construction phase and the warranty period.

Process and Communications

The MBCx plan and contract or corporate program must include the required level of
communication and reporting between the MBCxP and the facilities staff referenced in the rating
system.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 208
Monitoring and Software

EIS
Include the additional functionality required for the EIS:

• Normalization of energy consumption

• Automated reporting of energy use anomalies
• GHG emissions reporting
• Additional hourly monitoring. For alterations to existing buildings or small initial buildouts
less than 10,000 square feet (929 square meters), provide additional hourly metering for
each of the following if applicable to the project scope:
o On-site electricity generation
o At least 90% of lighting power altered or installed in the project scope of work
o HVAC or refrigeration equipment with thermal energy capacity exceeding 900,000
Btu/h (264 kW, 75 tons), or with rated fan power exceeding 75 hp (56 kW)
o Electricity use for process equipment with thermal energy capacity exceeding
900,000 Btu/h (264 kW, 75 tons)

The EIS shall provide visualization and analytics of this metered data.

FDD for Projects with Large HVAC or Refrigeration Capacity

FDD Software is only required for project scope that installs or alters a total capacity of
equipment exceeding any of the following values:

• Cooling. 7,200 kBtu/h (600 tons or 2110 kW)

• Heating. 7,200 kBtu/h (2110 kW)
• Refrigeration. 7,200 kBtu/h (600 tons or 2110 kW)

FDD is a program procedure for identifying and isolating system operational flaws. FDD uses
data-driven or knowledge-driven techniques. Data-driven techniques include artificial
intelligence (AI) and machine learning. Knowledge-driven techniques include having an FDD
specialist use qualitative methods to analyze fault scenarios. Refer to the credit language for
minimum required FDD software functionality.

Include fault detection algorithms that address at least 60% of total air handling unit capacity.
Additionally, include fault detection algorithms that address at least 60% of total combined
capacity for large commercial refrigeration systems, large hydronic heating systems, and large
hydronic cooling systems, where large systems are defined as a system with total installed
capacity exceeding 7,200 kBtu/h (600 tons or 2110 kW).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 209
Faults assessed may include improper economizer or energy recovery operation, faulty sensor
readings, improper valve and damper operation, improper equipment schedules, Improper
operation of control system reset algorithms (e.g., setpoint always at maximum value), non-
optimal zone temperature setpoints (e.g., lower than recommended deadband; same values for
occupied and unoccupied setpoints), equipment short cycling, improper chiller and boiler plant
lockouts, and unstable/hunting control loop.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1 Documentation verifying CxP involvement during
predesign or very early in the design phase (contract,
meeting notes, etc.).
Dates of design and milestone meetings.
Confirmation that training materials were reviewed and
details on training, including dates of training, agenda
items, and sign-in sheets.
Field report or completed tests that demonstrating water
penetration and/or infrared imaging testing was completed.
Option 2 Path 1 Documentation of owner commitment to at least three
years of MBCx for the building and identification of key
individual(s) responsible for MBCx (contract, letter signed
by owner, job descriptions or other evidence).
Upload MBCx Plan.
Narrative describing the EIS, including functionality,
accessibility, and sample graphics. Identify systems
included in the MBCx plan.
Confirmation of operation staff training on EIS within the
past six years.
Option 2 Path 2 Confirm MBCx is through a corporate MBCx program or
provide the MBCx service contract.
Schedules, drawings, or other documentation confirming
FDD devices installed in the system
Narrative describing the FDD system functionality,
accessibility, and sample graphics, reports or trends from
the system.
Confirmation of operation staff training in FDD within the
past six years.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202-2024 (ashrae.org/technical-
resources/bookstore/commissioning)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 210
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit —
and Restoration

GRID INTERACTIVE
EAc5
1–3 points

INTENT
To enhance power resilience and position buildings as active partners contributing to grid
decarbonization, reliability, and power affordability through peak thermal load reduction and
integrated management of building loads in response to variable grid conditions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–3
Option 1. Peak Thermal Load Reduction 1–3
Path 1. Ventilation Energy or Heat Recovery 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Low Thermal Conductance 1
AND/OR
Path 3. Infiltration 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Energy Storage 1–2
AND/OR
Option 3. Demand Response Program 1
AND/OR
Option 4. Automated Demand-Side Management 1
Path 1. System-Level Controls 1
OR
Path 2. Building Automation System 1
Option 5. Power Resilience 1

Comply with any of the following up to a maximum of 3 points. Each requirement may be
documented at the building level or for the project only.

Option 1. Peak Thermal Load Reduction (1–3 points)

Comply with any of the following peak thermal load reduction criteria for 1 point each.

PATH 1. VENTILATION ENERGY OR HEAT RECOVERY (1 POINT)

Each fan system supplying outdoor air to the project shall have an energy or heat recovery
system with a minimum 70% enthalpy recovery ratio or a minimum 75% sensible heat recovery
ratio. Provisions must be made to bypass or control the energy recovery system during
moderate outside air conditions.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 211
In aggregate, fan systems supplying less than 15% of the project’s total outdoor air can be
excluded.

AND/OR

PATH 2. LOW THERMAL CONDUCTANCE (1 POINT)

For initial build-out, comply prescriptively with the thermal bridging requirements of ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 5.5.5. Projects in climate zones 0–3 shall not be excepted.

For projects locating in an existing building, demonstrate one of the following:

• Total envelope UA (the sum of U-factor times assembly area) no more than 125% of the
total building envelope UA meeting the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 prescriptive building
envelope criteria for new construction.
• Minimum 30% improvement in total envelope UA for the alteration versus historical total
envelope UA (no more than three years prior to project registration), AND total envelope
UA is no more than 200% of the conductance of a total building envelope UA meeting
the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 prescriptive envelope criteria for new construction.

AND/OR

PATH 3. INFILTRATION (1 POINT)

Either at the building level, or for the compartmentalized tenant space, demonstrate one of the
following through air leakage testing conducted within five years of project occupancy:

• Measured air leakage of the building envelope less than or equal to Table 1, below. OR
• For projects locating in existing buildings, a reduction in air leakage of at least 30%, to a
measured air leakage less than 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5 L/s*sq. m.) at 75 Pascals (0.3 in H2O)
documented through air leakage testing before and after alterations are implemented.

Table 1. Caps on air leakage rates

Pressure test conditions across Maximum air leakage*
the building envelope Initial build-out Renovation of previously
occupied space
At pressure difference of 50 Pascals 0.17 cfm/sq. ft. 0.26 cfm/sq. ft.
(0.2 in H2O) (0.85 L/s*sq. m.)* (1.3 L/s*sq. m.)*
At pressure difference of 75 Pascals 0.24 cfm/sq. ft. 0.35 cfm/sq. ft.
(0.3 in H2O) (1.20 L/s*sq. m.)* (1.75 L/s*sq. m.)*
*Air leakage per square foot or square meter of building envelope area (including exterior walls, roofs, and base floor/slab).
PATH 3 NOTE: Complete air leakage testing using ASTM E779, ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380, ASTM E3158, ASTM E1827, or
equivalent.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 212
Option 2. Energy Storage (1–2 points)
Provide on-site electric storage and/or thermal storage meeting the criteria in Table 2.

Include automatic load management controls capable of storing the electric or thermal energy
during off-peak periods or periods with low grid carbon intensity, as well as using stored energy
during on-peak periods or periods of high grid carbon intensity.

Table 2. Peak storage capacity relative to peak demand

Storage 1 point 2 points
Electric storage capacity 0.2 kWh / kW 0.4 kWh / kW
Relative to peak electric demand
Thermal storage capacity 1.0 kWh / kW 2.0 kWh / kW
Relative to peak coincident thermal demand or Btu / Btu/hr or Btu / Btu/hr
(heating + cooling + SWH + process heat) or ton-hr / ton or ton-hr / ton

AND/OR

Option 3. Demand Response Program (1 point)

Enroll in a minimum one-year demand response (DR) contract with a qualified DR program
provider, with the intention of multiyear renewal.

On-site combustion-based electricity cannot be used to meet the demand-side management

criteria.

AND/OR

Option 4. Automated Demand-Side Management (1 point)

On-site combustion-based electricity cannot be used to meet the demand-side management
criteria.

PATH 1. SYSTEM-LEVEL CONTROLS (1 POINT)

Provide automated demand response controls for at least two of the following systems installed
within the project scope of work:

• HVAC systems (50% of rated capacity)

• Lighting systems (50% of power)
• Automatic receptacle controls (50% of number of receptacles)
• Service water heating (90% of capacity)
• Electric vehicle supply equipment

OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 213
PATH 2. BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (1 POINT)
Develop a plan for shedding at least 10% of the project’s peak electricity demand for a minimum
of one hour. The plan shall address both winter and summer peaks considering electrified grid
projections.

Use a control system that automatically sheds electricity demand in response to triggers
denoting strain on the grid or high grid emissions. For example:

• Signal from a DR program provider

• Data obtained through an API indicating high grid emissions.
• Peak demand tariff period when the grid is operating in the highest demand window.
• Time-of-use rate when pricing is highest.

AND/OR

Option 5. Power Resilience (1 point)

Identify critical equipment that requires continuous operation. Design the project to be capable
of islanding and operating independently from the grid to power the critical loads with the
project’s on-site renewable and energy storage systems for a minimum of three days.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit rewards projects that implement solutions to reduce stress on the grid and increase
building resilience. Projects are encouraged to implement a combination of strategies from
Options 1–5 that are most appropriate to their scope of work to optimize resilient solutions for
the project.

Compliance with each option and each path can be documented at the building level or for the
project only. This recognizes the variable scope of Interiors projects, encouraging projects with
minimal scope to locate in base buildings that support grid-interactive operations and
incentivizing projects with a more comprehensive scope to directly integrate grid-interactive
strategies into the project design.

Option 1. Peak Thermal Load Reduction

This option rewards measures that reduce peak heating and peak cooling loads, curbing strain
on the grid during peak summer and winter operation when grid capacity and associated grid
emissions are highest. The three paths can either be pursued individually or combined.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 214
PATH 1. VENTILATION ENERGY OR HEAT RECOVERY
Energy Recovery Ventilators (ERV) or Heat Recovery Ventilators (HRV) reduce peak heating
and cooling loads associated with ventilation by pre-treating the incoming outside air with
heated or cooled air recovered from the exhaust stream.

Ventilation systems supplying a combined total of at least 85% of the project’s outdoor air must
have an ERV or HRV with a 70% enthalpy recovery ratio or 75% sensible heat recovery ratio.
This includes both base building and project air handling units that supply outdoor air to the
project.

Controls for ERVs and HRVs

ERVs must have controls to disable energy exchange or bypass air during economizer
operation. The requirement does not apply to systems that have design outdoor airflow rates
less than 80% and design outdoor air volume less than 10,000 cfm. Refer to ASHRAE 90.1-
2022, Section 6.5.6.1.2.2 Provision for Air Economizer or Bypass Operation for details.

PATH 2. LOW THERMAL CONDUCTANCE

This path rewards reduced heat gains and losses through the building envelope that contribute
to lower peak thermal loads. Requirements differ for initial build-outs and alterations of existing
buildings.

To apply this path for the project only, the project boundary must have exterior exposure
including at least one roof, exterior above-grade wall, or exterior floor that is not slab-on-grade.
To assess credit compliance, account for all exterior envelope components within the project
boundary.

Projects wholly comprised of interior space may only show compliance at the building level.

Initial build-out
Initial build-out projects must document prescriptive compliance with each thermal bridging
requirement in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 5.5.5a, ensuring a continuous thermal barrier that
minimizes heat conductance associated with thermal bridges. A thermal bridge is an element
that penetrates the building insulation, such as a wall and roof intersection, a wall and window
intersection, an exterior cladding support, or a beam penetrating the exterior wall assembly.

Account for all thermal bridges in the project’s building envelope, regardless of whether these
were constructed for the base building or included in the project scope.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 215
Climate zones 0–3
Projects in warmer climate zones (0–3) cannot apply any exceptions and must comply entirely
with Section 5.5.5. Providing thermal breaks, continuous insulation, and using reflective exterior
coatings on exterior surfaces can reduce solar heat gain and prevent moisture intrusion.

Alterations of existing buildings

Projects in existing buildings can either show low conductance for the building envelope or
improve the conductance of a poorly performing envelope by adding insulation, addressing
thermal bridging, or upgrading windows and doors.

Both methods necessitate an analysis comparing the project’s overall envelope conductance to
prescriptive requirements for the project’s climate zone in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Tables 5.5-0 to
5.5-8. Account for all project exterior assemblies including roofs, floors, walls, windows,
skylights, and doors. Assess the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 total UA by multiplying the area of each
exterior envelope assembly by the U-factor from Tables 5.5-0 to 5.5-8 and summing together all
UA values.

Determine the U-value for each project envelope assembly, including adjustments for thermal
bridges per ASHRAE 90.1-2022 A10.2 for any thermal bridges that do not meet the
requirements in ASHRAE 90.1, Sections 5.5.5. Assess the project’s total UA by multiplying the
area of each exterior envelope assembly by the U-factor of the assembly and summing together
all UA values.

The project complies if the project total UA is no more than 125% of the ASHRAE 90.1-2022
UA.

If the project total UA is between 125% and 200% of the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 UA, perform
additional UA calculations for the envelope before renovations were implemented not more than
three years before project registration. Show that the current total project UA is at least 30%
lower than the pre-retrofit UA.

PATH 3. INFILTRATION
Either for the whole building or for the compartmentalized space, design or renovate the
project’s air barrier to minimize air leakage through the building enclosure. To apply this path for
the project only, the project boundary must have exterior exposure including at least one roof,
exterior above-grade wall, or exterior floor that is not slab-on-grade. Provide air leakage testing
conducted within five years of project occupancy to confirm the project achieves one of the
following targeted performance levels.

Initial buildouts or projects in existing buildings:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 216
 • Comply with the maximum air leakage thresholds referenced in Table 1 of the credit
requirements. These are more stringent than required by ASHRAE 90.1 for initial
buildouts and aligned with the new buildings criteria from ASHRAE 90.1 for projects in
existing buildings.

Projects in existing buildings:

• Conduct a pre- and post-alternation air leakage test. For this option, projects must
improve the existing envelope such that leakage is reduced by at least 30% from the
pre-alteration test values. The post-alteration value must be less than 1.0 cfm/SF (5
l/s*sq. m.) at 75 Pascals (0.3 in H20), even if this represents a reduction of more than
30%.

Air Leakage Testing Standards

Testing should conform to one of the referenced air leakage testing standards:
ASTM defines air leakage testing criteria. ASTM E779 53 uses the fan-pressurization method for
testing. ASTM E3158 54 provides a standard method for testing large or multizone buildings.
ASTM E1827 55 determines air tightness using an orifice blower door. Residential spaces in
mixed use buildings may also apply ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 56.

Option 2. Energy Storage

Projects are awarded points for installing on-site electric and/or thermal storage that meets
capacity requirements, relative to peak demand, per Table 2 of the rating system.

For an all-electric project, the Table 2 thermal storage capacity thresholds that compare to peak
coincident thermal demand are expected to achieve similar electricity demand reductions to the
Table 2 electric storage capacity thresholds that compare to peak electric demand. This is
because the peak electric demand includes the contribution of thermal demand and other loads
such as lighting, plug and process loads, pumps, and fans.

Electricity storage refers to large batteries that store electricity until it is needed.

Thermal energy storage (TES) stores heating or cooling energy for later reuse. Examples
include ice storage, CHW storage, and hot water storage.

53
“ASTM E779”, ASTM International, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.astm.org/e0779-19.html.
54
“ASTM E3185”, ASTM International, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.astm.org/e3158-18.html.
55
“ASTM E1827”, ASTM International, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.astm.org/e1827-11r17.html.
56
“ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380”, ICC Digital Codes, accessed March 31, 2025, https://codes.iccsafe.org/content/RESNET3802019P1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 217
Determine the total capacity required to meet thresholds for the type of storage, following the
guidance below for Peak Demand Determination.

Provide automatic load management controls for the thermal or electric storage systems.

For projects that include both an electric and thermal storage system on-site, points can be
prorated to achieve the minimum required thresholds of Table 1.

PEAK DEMAND DETERMINATION

Peak demand refers to the highest average use during any one-hour period over a twelve-
month timeframe.

Peak coincident thermal demand includes the simultaneous load from heating, cooling, SWH,
and process heating. It is acceptable to ignore categories with peak contribution or annual
energy use less than 10% of the primary load.

To assess peak coincident thermal demand when more than one category contributes
substantively to peak load:

• Determine the category with the highest peak load (the primary load).
• Determine the time (month, day, and hour) when this highest peak load occurs.
• Calculate peak coincident load by adding the primary load to the simultaneous load for
all other categories with substantive use.

Project space only

When documenting compliance for the project space only, the peak electric demand and peak
coincident thermal demand are not required to include the demand from shared systems serving
the project.

Peak Electric Demand

Include all electricity used within the project boundary or used by systems exclusively serving
the project space:

• Include all project lighting and plug and process energy use.
• Include all electricity use for HVAC and SWH systems that are wholly contained in the
project boundary or exclusively serve the project space.
• Include all electricity use for components of shared HVAC systems within the project
boundary, such as VAV terminal units or fan coil units.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 218
Peak Coincident Thermal Demand
Take into consideration all thermal energy generated within the project boundary or by systems
exclusively serving the project space. If the project does not generate thermal energy,
documentation must be shown at the building-level.

Energy Modeling for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency

For projects documented using the ECB Method or Appendix G PRM in EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency, use the modeled coincident peak demand for the proposed design. For projects that
have shared HVAC or SWH systems, use submeters in the energy model or post-processing to
exclude the energy from these shared systems in the determination of peak electric demand or
peak coincident thermal demand.

Prescriptive method for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency

For projects documented using the prescriptive method, generate estimates of peak thermal or
peak electric demand (e.g., estimates from monitored data for similar projects, simplified energy
models, or energy model results from similar projects).

Exception for EVSE

The peak electric demand contribution from EVSE for recharging vehicles used for off-site
transportation may be excluded.

Example 1. Limited Scope Project — TES

The project installs electric heat pump storage water heaters with 20 kWh of
excess storage capacity beyond the minimum storage needed to meet the
project’s 20 kW peak SWH demand (1 kWh/kW of thermal storage capacity). The
project receives all heating and cooling from the building’s shared systems, so
these are not included in the peak coincident thermal demand determination.
This achieves 1 point.

Example 2. Substantial Scope Project — TES

A large project generates its own heating, cooling, and SWH. Peak space
heating loads are 1,000,000 Btu/h (290 kW), and coincident cooling loads
occurring at the same time are negligible. The energy modeling results indicate
peak space heating occurs January 10th at 6 a.m., based on the modeled
weather data. Peak space cooling loads occurring in the summer are lower than
the space heating peak. The analyst uses the simulation outputs to identify
simultaneous SWH loads of 200,000 Btu/h (60 kW), resulting in peak coincident
loads of 1,2000,000 Btu/h (350 kW). This requires the project to install
1,2000,000 Btu (350 kWh) of thermal storage capacity to earn 1 point.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 219
Option 3. Demand Response Program
Established demand response (DR) programs and contracting with a qualified provider offers a
streamlined path to credit compliance. Projects can contract directly with the utility or with a DR
program provider.

Project teams must clearly identify what systems will be included in the program during a DR
event. Teams should work with the DR provider to determine the best strategy for the specific
project and contract. For example, teams can commit to a reduction of a specified percentage,
when a signal is received. Teams may also commit to automated reductions in select equipment
or systems, in response to a direct, automated signal from the DR program provider.

CONTRACT LENGTH
Execute contracts for at least one year and commit to ongoing renewal of the contract.

Cannot rely on electricity generation and fuel combustion

On-site electricity generation and fuel combustion cannot be used to meet the demand-side
management criteria. This includes renewable electricity generation, which is separately
credited in EAc3: Renewable Energy.

Option 3. Automated Demand-side Management

Projects must select between Paths 1 and Path 2.

On-site electricity generation and fuel combustion cannot be used to meet the demand-side
management criteria. This includes renewable electricity generation, which is separately
credited in EAc3: Renewable Energy.

PATH 1. SYSTEM-LEVEL CONTROLS

Path 1 is most suitable for small projects or projects without a Building Automation System
(BAS).

Projects must provide Automated Demand Response (ADR) controls for at least two systems,
selecting from HVAC, lighting, automatic receptacle controls, SWH, or EVSE.

• HVAC systems. Provide ADR for at least 50% of the total rated capacity of HVAC
serving the project. Examples include smart thermostats that adjust the cooling and
heating setpoints or controllers for variable-speed equipment that limits maximum speed
during a DR event.
• Lighting systems. Provide ADR for at least 50% of connected lighting power. For
example, provide automated dimming for 50% of connected lighting power.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 220
 • Automatic receptacle controls. Provide ADR to turn off automatic receptacle controls
as defined in ASHRAE 90.1 Section 8.4.2.
• SWH. Provide ADR for at least 90% of SWH capacity. For example, provide storage
water heaters with ADR technology that controls the heating cycle off during a DR event.
• EVSE. Provide ADR capable of curtailing and scheduling vehicle charging for all EVSE.
The project must have at least some EVSE equipment in scope.

PATH 2. BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)

Path 2 requires overarching controls that automatically shed at least 10% of project electricity
demand in response to triggers denoting strain on the grid. A signal from a DR provider is the
most common trigger. Refer to the rating system for other examples.

Develop a comprehensive plan that provides clear direction for implementing the automated
load shedding, both in summer and in winter. Address the following in the plan:

• Individual assignments
• Communication protocols
• Project total peak electricity demand
• Systems and end uses targeted for peak load shedding
• Justification for why systems and end uses were selected
• Triggers for initiating automated load shedding and rationale for selecting these triggers.
Address both current grid context and future projections that account for renewables and
electrification trends.
• Total percentage of load included in the load shedding program, and a description of the
method used to estimate this percentage. Address both winter and summer peaks.

Cannot rely on electricity generation and fuel combustion

On-site electricity generation and fuel combustion cannot be used to meet the demand-side
management criteria. This includes renewable electricity generation, which is separately
credited in EAc3: Renewable Energy.

Option 4. Power Resiliency

This option requires on-site renewable generation paired with energy storage capable of
powering the project’s critical equipment operation for at least 72 hours. Critical equipment
refers to those most essential to maintain functionality during a power outage, often related to
life safety or business continuity. Examples include servers, communication equipment, life
support equipment, security systems, emergency lighting, or minimum HVAC capacity need to

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 221
maintain life-support conditions. To be eligible for this option, the project must have at least
some critical equipment.

The design must include an automatic transfer switch and controls that enables the project to
operate the project’s on-site renewable systems, energy storage, and critical equipment in the
event of a power outage (referred to as islanding).

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Documentation that the technology and controls in place for
energy storage, DR, automated demand-side management,
and power resiliency, as applicable, are within the CxP
scope of work.
Affirmation that the technology and controls in place for
energy storage, DR, automated demand-side management,
and power resiliency, as applicable, are documented in the
project systems manual, or Current Facilities Requirements
(CFR) and Operations and Maintenance (OM) plan.
Option 1 Path 1 Documentation showing outdoor air delivery systems with
required energy recovery devices and efficiencies, and OA
bypass (e.g., mechanical schedules, specifications,
submittals, controls diagram).
Path 2 The total project envelope UA calculation and percent
improvement compared to baselines as defined in credit
requirements.
Comcheck or ASHRAE 90.1-2022 prescriptive thermal
bridging compliance forms (as applicable).
Path 3 Confirmation of air tightness testing and TAB in OPR and
Cx plan.
Air leakage test report describing method, conditions, and
results. For renovation projects; Test results from before
and after alterations for projects in existing buildings
attempting to show air leakage reductions.
Option 2 All Calculation showcasing achievement of point threshold.
(Estimated Energy Use, Peak Demand, Storage Capacity,
Peak Storage Capacity Relative to Peak Demand).
Narrative documenting the automatic load management
controls.
Option 3 All Proof of enrollment in DR program.
Option 4 Path 1 Identification of systems with automatic DR controls and
calculation showing required thresholds have been met.
Path 2 Project total peak electricity demand and total percentage
of load included in the load shedding program.
Description of how the project will shed 10% of the peak
demand for one hour and what triggers the event. (e.g.,
short narrative, Sequence of Operations, etc.).
BAS sequence of operations illustrating demand
management for building equipment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 222
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Option 5 All Define and give examples of critical equipment that
requires continuous operation. Provide evidence of controls
capable of meeting power resiliency.
Narrative describing the on-site renewable and energy
storage system design and operation and calculation to
demonstrate islanding capabilities for the critical
infrastructure for at least three days.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• ASTM E779 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization
(astm.org/e0779-19.html)
• ASTM E3158 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Air Leakage Rate of a Large or
Multizone Building (astm.org/e3158-18.html)
• ASTM E1827 Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an
Orifice Blower Door (astm.org/e1827-11r17.html)
• ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 Standard for Testing Airtightness of Building, Dwelling Unit, and
Sleeping Unit Enclosures; Airtightness of Heating and Cooling Air Distribution Systems; and
Airflow of Mechanical Ventilation Systems (resnet.us/wp-content/uploads/Std380-2022_Strk-
Undrln_blk_wCover_cln5.pdf)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 223
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

EAc6
1–2 points

INTENT
To reduce greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) by accelerating the use of refrigerants with low
global warming potential (GWP) and promoting better refrigerant management practices.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–2
Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low GWP 1–2
Path 1. No Refrigerants 2
OR
Path 2. Low GWP Refrigerants 1–2
AND/OR
Option 2. Limit Refrigerant Leakage 1
Retail 1–2
Option 1 or 2 1
AND/OR
Option 3. GreenChill Certification for Food Retailers 1–2

Commercial Interiors

Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low GWP (1–2 points)

PATH 1. NO REFRIGERANTS (2 POINTS)
Do not use refrigerant-containing equipment in the project.

OR

PATH 2. LOW GWP REFRIGERANTS (1–2 POINTS)

The maximum total weighted average refrigerant GWP in all new refrigerant-containing
equipment is less than or equal to 80% (1 point) or 50% (2 points) of the total weighted average
GWP of refrigerants meeting the benchmarks in Table 1.

Projects that limit effective refrigerant GWP by reducing refrigerant charge per unit of capacity
relative to comparable equipment may use adjusted benchmarks per additional guidance.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 224
Table 1. Refrigerant GWP benchmarks

GWP benchmark* Equipment and systems

1,400 Heat pump service hot water heaters
700 HVAC
Data centers, computer room air-conditioning, and information
technology equipment cooling
Process chiller equipment or ice rink refrigeration equipment
300 All other process refrigeration for retail, industrial, or cold storage

*GWP benchmarks are based on a 100-year time horizon GWP relative to CO2.

AND/OR

Option 2. Limit Refrigerant Leakage (1 point)

Design, construct, and operate the project’s refrigerant-using equipment to minimize refrigerant
leakage. For initial build-out of projects with less than 50% of the capacity of refrigerant-using
equipment installed in the project scope of work, compliance must be documented for base
building systems as well as any systems installed in the project scope of work.

Design
Refrigerant-using equipment shall be self-contained, with no field-installed piping:

• For equipment with refrigerants > 700 GWP AND

• For at least 80% of the total GWP of refrigerants used in the project

Specify an “automatic leak detection” system in fully enclosed spaces with equipment that has
an overall refrigerant charge exceeding 100 tons of equivalent CO2 emissions (tCO2e).

Installation
Field-installed refrigerant piping shall use brazed or press-type fittings.

Operation
Have in place a refrigerant maintenance plan and designate a responsible oversight party. The
plan shall include standards for recordkeeping and protocols for:

• Updating the refrigerant inventory.

• Tracking and recording refrigerant charge and leakage rates for all refrigerant-using
equipment.
• Ensuring that installation, maintenance, and removal of refrigeration-containing
equipment is performed by appropriately certified refrigeration personnel, including in
tenant spaces.
• Auditing annually and calibrating automatic leak detection systems.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 225
 • For equipment without automatic leak detection systems, this means checking pressure
loss and leaks at least as frequently and with the minimum intervals for equipment
containing refrigerants as follows, with a total GWP as follows:
o Every 24 months for 50 tCO2e or less
o Every 12 months for 50 to 500 tCO2e
o Every 3 months for more than 500 tCO2e
• Identifying the maximum time frame for repairing leaks.
• More frequent leakage testing and repairing, to be twice as frequent if the total annual
refrigerant recharge/leakage exceeds 1%.

Retail (1–2 points)

• Meet Option 1 and/or Option 2 above, or Option 3 below, for a maximum of two points.

AND/OR

Option 3. GreenChill Certification for Food Retailers (1–2 points)

Available to projects where food retailing constitutes more than 20% of the project’s gross area.

Demonstrate achievement of the Environmental Protection Agency’s GreenChill certification for

projects in the U.S. For international projects, comply with the relevant GreenChill requirements
for the certification level.

• GreenChill Silver certification (1 point)

• GreenChill Gold or Platinum certification (2 points)

For all options

DISTRICT ENERGY
Projects with district energy must comply with the requirements of this credit at the district
facility or see additional guidance for interpretation of credit requirements.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit builds on the EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management requirements and
rewards teams who further minimize or eliminate refrigerant impacts for their projects.
Refrigerants used in equipment that provides thermal comfort, SWH, process heating or cooling,
or refrigeration for food storage or other process application in buildings are powerful GHGs,
typically causing over a thousand times the detrimental impact of carbon dioxide. As projects
electrify heating and SWH systems with heat pumps, mitigation of refrigerant impact becomes
increasingly important.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 226
This credit rewards strategies for reducing refrigerant impact by limiting refrigerant GWP under
Option 1 and by reducing refrigerant leakage under Option 2. Projects may achieve the
maximum of two points using either Option 1, Path 2, or by combining Option 1, Path 2, and
Option 2.

For food retailers, a third path is available that comprehensively addresses the high refrigerant
emissions associated with refrigeration equipment for cold storage.

Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low GWP Refrigerants

Path 1 rewards the elimination of refrigerants for the few project applications that are able to
accomplish this without jeopardizing thermal comfort or total GHG emissions.

Path 2 requiring the selection of low-impact refrigerants is more appropriate for most projects,
supporting a design that comprehensively addresses decarbonization through electrification
using efficient heat pump technology.

PATH 1. NO REFRIGERANTS
To pursue this path, the project cannot use refrigerants in the project space, in the base
building, or in DES serving the building.

Alternative design solutions, including passive strategies, present opportunities to remove

refrigerants from buildings and promote further decarbonization. Consider employing passive
cooling strategies such as natural ventilation, night flushing, and thermal massing solutions; or
passive heating strategies such as solar storage and added insulation. Review opportunities to
minimize infiltration and ventilation losses through the building envelope.

Additional considerations
Projects are encouraged to pursue a design that includes electrification of space
heating, SWH, and process heating systems with efficient heat pump technology
per EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, rather than using electric resistance or
fuel heating to meet the requirements for this path. Therefore, Path 1 is limited to
one point.

PATH 2. LOW GWP REFRIGERANTS

Path 2 requires the use of refrigerants with weighted average GWP that average at least 20%
lower than the Refrigerant GWP benchmarks in Table 1 of the credit.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 227
These GWP benchmarks are primarily derived from GWP limits in the EPA 2023 AIM Act
Technology Transitions Rule, which are similar to those in the European Union F-Gas
Regulations 57, and other regulations following the Montreal Protocol and Kigali Agreement.

Calculations
Use equipment data and the project’s total weighted average GWP reported in the refrigerant
inventory completed for EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management.

For each refrigerant-using equipment, determine the GWP benchmark using the equipment’s
refrigerant charge reported in the refrigerant inventory, and the Table 1 GWP benchmark for the
equipment:

Equation 1. GWP benchmark for each piece of equipment

𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸_𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

Calculate the total benchmark GWP by summing the GWP benchmark for each piece of
equipment:

Equation 2. Total GWP benchmark

𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇_𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝛴𝛴 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸_𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

Calculate the weighted average GWP benchmark by dividing the total GWP benchmark by the
sum of refrigerant charge for all equipment.

Equation 3. Weighted average GWPBenchmark calculation

𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑇𝑇𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜_𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊ℎ𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =
𝛴𝛴𝛴𝛴𝛴𝛴 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒

Total weighted average GWP for the project cannot exceed 80% of the weighted average GWP
benchmark for 1 point; and cannot exceed 50% of weighted average GWP to achieve both
points.

Equation 4. Percentage (%) threshold calculations

𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊ℎ𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺
% 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊ℎ𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

57
“European Union, Regulation (EU) 2024/573 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 7 February 2024 on Fluorinated
Greenhouse Gases, Amending Directive (EU) 2019/1937 and Repealing Regulation (EU) No. 517/2014,” European Parliament,
Council of the European Union, February 7, 2024, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/573/oj.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 228
Adjusted benchmarks for limiting effective GWP
For equipment that has been specifically designed to limit effective refrigerant GWP by
minimizing refrigerant charge, projects may reference comparable equipment to establish an
adjusted benchmark instead of using the refrigerant charge for the project equipment.

To be eligible to apply adjusted benchmarks, neither the GWP for the comparable equipment
nor the GWP for the referenced project equipment may exceed the GWP benchmark in Table 1.
Comparable equipment shall have the same equipment type description and size category as
the referenced project equipment (see section 6.8 tables in the ASHRAE 90.1 standard for
equipment types and size categories).

Calculate the adjusted benchmark by multiplying the original Table 1 benchmark by the ratio of
refrigerant charge per unit of capacity for the comparable equipment versus the project
equipment.

Example: Adjusted benchmark calculation

The project team evaluates two water-cooled centrifugal chiller alternatives with
GWP less than 700, the first with a refrigerant charge per unit of capacity equal
to 3.0 lb/ton (0.38 kg/kW), the second with a refrigerant charge per unit of
capacity equal to 1.5 lb/ton (0.19 kg/kW). The project team selects the second
chiller.

From Table 1, the GWP Benchmark for HVAC equipment is 700. The adjusted
GWP Benchmark is 1,400, calculated as 700 x 3.0 / 1.5.

Building-level documentation
Teams can elect to include the refrigerant impacts from the base building when compliance
cannot be demonstrated based solely on new equipment within the project scope.
At minimum, include all new and existing refrigerant-containing equipment that supplies heating,
cooling, SWH, or process energy to the project.

Option 2. Limit Refrigerant Leakage

Combine design and construction strategies with operational best practices to effectively
manage refrigerant leakage for the life of the project.

Compliance must be documented at the building-level for initial buildout of projects with less
than 50% of the capacity of refrigerant-using equipment in the project scope and for all other
projects that do not have refrigerant-using systems in the project boundary.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 229
All other projects have the option of showing compliance for the project only or at the building-
level.

Design
Field-installed piping experiences much higher leakage rates than self-contained equipment.58
During design, prioritize self-contained equipment. At minimum, projects must specify self-
contained equipment for systems that use refrigerants with a GWP ≥ 700. Additionally, teams
must use self-contained equipment for at least 80% of the total refrigerant GWP. Self-contained
equipment is less prone to leakage, and better accommodates leakage detection measures,
than equipment with field-installed piping.

Installation
For projects that include field-installed piping, install piping in a manner that limits leakage. Use
brazed or press type fittings to minimize the potential for refrigerant leaks.

Install automatic leak detection systems in any fully enclosed space that houses equipment with
an overall refrigerant charge greater than 100 tCO2e. (tCO2e is a metric ton of carbon dioxide
equivalent, where a metric ton equals 1,000 kilograms or 2,205 pounds.)

Operations
Maintaining systems during operations provides continued assurance that refrigerant leaks are
identified as soon as possible, reducing GWP for leakage. Teams must develop a refrigerant
maintenance plan that requires updates to the refrigerant inventory, tracking and recording of
refrigerant charge and leakage rates, routine pressure testing on required systems, annual
audits, and calibration of automatic leak detection system devices.

Major leaks identified during operations require immediate corrective action. Additionally, where
leakage exceeds 1% of the total annual refrigerant recharge, teams must conduct additional
testing and repairs to reduce the total leakage of the system. This ensures systems operate as
intended and minimizes global warming associated with leakage.

Teams must designate a key individual or the appropriate management team to manage and
enforce the plan.

58
PAE Engineers, “City of Seattle Refrigerant Emissions Analysis”, City of Seattle, May 5, 2020,
https://www.seattle.gov/documents/Departments/OSE/Building%20Energy/SEA_Refrigerant_Analysis_May2020.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 230
District energy systems (DES)

Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low-GWP Refrigerants

PATH 1. NO REFRIGERANTS
Refrigerants cannot be used to generate any DES serving the project. Teams connected to a
DES for any energy source should work directly with their provider to determine if compliance is
met for this option.

PATH 2. LOW-GWP REFRIGERANTS

Teams can elect to include the refrigerant impacts from the DES in building-level calculations
when compliance cannot be demonstrated for the project space or at the building-level.
Where teams include DES equipment within the calculations, account for all new and existing
equipment containing refrigerant from all DES serving the project. Teams must work with the
district energy provider to determine the equipment type, refrigerant type, and refrigerant
charge.

For projects that also have refrigerant-containing equipment within the building, the weighted
average GWP can be determined using the percentage capacity from each source. For
example, if 90% of the energy comes from a DES and 10% from systems on-site, teams can
apply those percentages to respective DES and on-site equipment weighted average GWP
values.

Retail Only
• Meet Option 1 and/or Option 2 under the LEED BD+C: New Construction criteria.

AND/OR

Option 3. GreenChill Certification for Food Retailers

Option 3 offers another path, eligible for up to two points for projects with 20% or more gross
floor area of food retail space. Food retail spaces include grocery stores, convenience stores,
big-box wholesalers, and general merchandise retailers with large refrigeration sections.
Additional spaces may include bakeries, seafood and meat markets, and juice and smoothie
bars.

In 2007, the U.S. EPA launched a voluntary partnership program called GreenChill that works
cooperatively with the food retail industry to reduce refrigerant emissions and decrease their
impact on the ozone layer and climate change. 59 A food retailer achieves Silver, Gold, or
Platinum level.

59
“GreenChill Program”, U.S. EPA, November 4, 2024, accessed March 31, 2025, https://epa.gov/greenchill.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 231
U.S. projects that document GreenChill certification earn points based on the level of
certification achieved. International projects must document compliance with each requirement
outlined on the EPA GreenChill website for the targeted certification level.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Interior All All Mechanical schedules (or similar) that show equipment
Design type, capacity, quantity, refrigerant type, and maximum
and refrigerant charge, or evidence that the project meets
Construction cooling, heating, and other project loads without
refrigerants.
Option 1 Path 2 Weighted average GWP Benchmark calculation
(Equation 3).
Weighted average GWP calculation from EAp5:
Fundamental Refrigerant Management
Option 2 All Confirmation of project scope (initial build-out or
renovation, and, if initial build-out, percent of capacity of
refrigerant-using equipment installed in the project
scope of work).
Documentation of compliance with field-installed piping
limits.
Contractor documentation demonstrating that
installation complies with credit criteria.
Refrigerant Maintenance Plan that describes how the
refrigerant-using systems will be maintained. The plan
must identify the designated responsible party for
implementing the plan.
Plans, specifications, or field photos confirming
automatic leak detection, if applicable.
Option 3 All Demonstrate that the project has achieved EPA’s
GreenChill Certification.
Compliance documentation demonstrating that the
project meets relevant GreenChill requirements for the
certification level specified.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE Standard 15-2019: Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems
(ashrae.org/technical-resources/standards-and-guidelines/read-only-versions-of-ashrae-
standards)
• EPA Green Chill (epa.gov/greenchill)
• EPA 2023 AIM Act Technology Transitions Rule (epa.gov/climate-hfcs-reduction/regulatory-
actions-technology-transitions)
• European Union F-gas regulations (eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/573/oj)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 232
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR)
OVERVIEW
The Materials and Resources (MR) category in LEED v5 focuses on critical areas that result in
reductions in embodied carbon, protecting human and environmental health, and fostering a
circular economy. Alongside these critical areas of focus, the credits target data availability,
transparency, and supply chain improvements, ultimately increasing the accessibility of
compliant materials for all.

The MR credits support LEED v5’s materials strategy by furthering the shift toward multi-
attribute product selection and procurement. This approach evaluates materials based on a
variety of key metrics, from their sourcing to manufacturing processes and overall environmental
and social impacts, to guide projects toward well-rounded material choices that go beyond
single-issue solutions.

Another key focus of the MR credit category is embodied carbon: the emissions generated
during the extraction, manufacturing, transportation, installation and disposal of products. As
embodied carbon from building materials accounts for at least 11% of annual global emissions,
LEED v5 optimizes credits for high-impact actions like supply chain decarbonization, low-
embodied-carbon material selection, and zero waste operations planning to help project teams
achieve meaningful carbon reductions immediately.

LEED v5 simplifies strategies to maximize impact and promote industry alignment. The MR
category harmonizes terminology and standards across systems, aligning with initiatives like the
Embodied Carbon Harmonization and Optimization (ECHO) project 60, the Mindful Materials
Common Materials Framework (CMF) 61 and the AIA Architecture & Design Materials Pledge. 62
These efforts reduce complexity, making it easier for manufacturers and project teams to meet
sustainability goals and establish workflows that will keep industry advancement moving
forward.

Decarbonization
The MR category equips projects to reduce embodied carbon across the supply chain using
strategies like whole building life cycle assessments, analysis of environmental product
declarations (EPDs), and jobsite emissions tracking (MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon, MRp2:
Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon). Reducing construction waste and promoting circularity

60
“Embodied Carbon Harmonization and Optimization (ECHO) Project”, Embodied Carbon Harmonization and Optimization
(ECHO) Project, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.echo-project.info/.
61
“Mindful MATERIALS Home”, Mindful MATERIALS, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.mindfulmaterials.com/.
62
“Materials Pledge | AIA,” AIA, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.aia.org/design-excellence/climate-action/zero-
carbon/materials-pledge.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 233
lessens demand for virgin resources and extends material life, which also directly reduces
embodied carbon emissions from the supply chain (MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste
Diversion, MRp1: Planning for Zero Waste Operations).

Embodied carbon could account for half of new construction’s carbon footprint by 2050. LEED
v5 plans for a different outcome by rewarding manufacturing innovations that decarbonize new
materials, coupled with circular strategies that preserve resources and cut emissions.

Quality of life
The MR category enhances indoor environmental quality by promoting low-emitting materials
that reduce occupant exposure to harmful chemicals (MRc3: Low-Emitting Materials, MRc4:
Building Product Selection and Procurement). Improved air quality supports health, cognitive
function and overall well-being, benefiting building occupants. Upstream and downstream
impacts from product manufacturing can also affect fenceline communities, supply chain actors,
and installers, making the selection of materials focused on green chemistry and ecological
protections a priority (MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement).

Ecological conservation and restoration

Prioritizing reuse and diverting waste from landfills decreases reliance on virgin material and
reduces methane emissions, preserving natural resources and reducing environmental harm
(MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion, MRp1: Planning for Zero Waste
Operations). When product manufacturing is shifted to support a circular economy,
improvements to ecological conservation and restoration can be significant (MRc4: Building
Product Selection and Procurement).

Ultimately, LEED v5 empowers project teams to make practical, high-impact choices that cut
embodied carbon emissions, improve health outcomes, and advance a sustainable market:
building a future where both people and the planet can thrive.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 234
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Prerequisite and Restoration

PLANNING FOR ZERO WASTE OPERATIONS

MRp1
REQUIRED

INTENT
To reduce the amount of waste that is generated by building occupants and hauled to and
disposed of in landfills and incinerators through reduction, reuse, and recycling services and
education, and to conserve natural resources for future generations. To set the building up for
success in pursuing zero waste operations.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Storage and Collection of Recyclables
AND
Zero Waste Operations Planning

Comply with the following requirements:

Storage and Collection of Recyclables

Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers, janitorial staff, and building occupants for
the collection and storage of recyclable materials for the entire building.

• Collection and storage areas may be separate locations.

• Recyclable materials must include organics/food waste, mixed paper, corrugated
cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals.
o Mixed recyclables are acceptable for paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics,
and metals if required by local conditions.
o Space for the storage of organics/food waste recycling is required even if service is
not available at the time of building occupancy.
• Take appropriate measures for the safe collection, storage, and disposal of batteries,
mercury-containing lamps, and electronic waste.

Zero Waste Operations Planning

Include design details, maintenance manuals, and/or other resources from the design and
construction team that help facilitate building occupants and operators to meet high-
performance waste prevention and recycling goals once in operation.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 235
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The goal for the prerequisite is to minimize waste generated by building occupants and to
implement strategies in reducing, reusing, and recycling waste throughout the building’s life
cycle. This includes incorporating design measures that prioritize waste prevention, material
reuse, and effective waste management. It also encourages project teams to thoughtfully
consider and plan for the access requirements of all individuals who will service and use the
building. Additionally, teams should anticipate and accommodate the operational needs
necessary for achieving zero waste by enabling effective waste diversion practices. This
includes ensuring proper sorting, storage, and access solutions to facilitate recycling,
composting, and other waste diversion methods, while prioritizing reuse as a key strategy.

Storage and Collection of Recyclables

Municipal solid waste has become a growing concern as the volume of waste generated in the
U.S. continues to increase. 63 An obstacle to effective recycling in buildings is the lack of
convenient, dedicated physical spaces for collection. Incorporating recycling infrastructure early
in the design process encourages successful recycling once operations begin. Well-designed
and accessible waste management infrastructure is intuitive—easy to locate, reach, and use—
for all occupants, regardless of physical ability or mobility, and anticipates how and where waste
will be discarded by occupants. Steps should be taken to also address concerns for noise, odor,
and vectors.

Recycling includes traditional materials like glass, plastic, and metals. It also includes organic
materials such as food scraps, paper products, and landscape materials. Organic materials
collected in buildings can be composted on-site or off-site. Composting can occur at multiple
scales and locations: small-scale systems might include basic compost piles or bins, while
large-scale operations involve centralized, commercial facilities that process organic waste from
an entire region.

To meet the prerequisite, teams must provide dedicated area(s) for recyclable items, including
organics (compostables), mixed paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals.
Teams should work with the owner and architects to provide sufficient collection and storage
space for all required recyclables based on the building size, occupants, and local recycling
markets. In many places, recycling of various materials is required by laws or regulations.
Project teams are encouraged to check for local requirements and service vendors to ensure
maximal waste diversion.

63
“Municipal Solid Waste Factsheet”, University of Michigan Center for Sustainable Systems, (2024), accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.css.umich.edu/publications/factsheets/material-resources/municipal-solid-waste-factsheet.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 236
Given the substantial GHG emissions from discarded organic waste in landfills (from methane
production), it is essential to plan space for composting organic materials generated by
occupants, even if composting services are not immediately available at time of building
occupancy. For organics collection, some material processors will encourage paper products to
be recycled separately (such as office paper placed in mixed-paper recycling bins and excluded
from food scraps collection). Check with local authorities for guidance on best practices for
mixed paper or cardboard and other forms of organics composting.

To meet the prerequisite, project teams must provide an adequate amount of dedicated space
for recycling with the appropriate infrastructure to handle such recycling. This includes planning
for the installation of collection systems or bins for the collection of recyclable materials that are
expected to be collected by the building and sent for recycling at time of occupancy. These
installed bins or collection systems can be based on current service offerings in the project
region.

Commingled recycling bins (excluding organics) are acceptable if the local municipality or
recycling vendor allows commingled recycling, though commingled recycling tends to reduce
the quality of diverted materials and leads to lower overall recovery rates. Therefore, source
separation of recycled material types is encouraged to maximize diversion rates and help meet
zero waste goals, but is not required unless separate streams are required by local regulations
or guidelines.

The increasing volume of electronic waste (e-waste), such as computers, cameras, printers, and
keyboards, has become a growing environmental concern. The disposal procedure for e-waste
is more hazardous than cardboard, glass, plastic, metals, and paper. Therefore, identifying safe
storage areas, recycling facilities, and haulers that can process e-waste is important. Teams
must indicate space dedicated to the storage and collection of recyclables, composts, and e-
waste areas on a floor plan and describe how these spaces will be serviced and accessed
safely by building occupants and staff.

Project teams are recommended to follow the TRUE 64 waste hierarchy framework that
prioritizes waste management actions to minimize environmental impact and conserve
resources. It ranks waste management strategies from most to least preferred, focusing on
reducing waste generation and maximizing resource recovery before resorting to disposal, in
this order:

• Reduce. Minimizing waste at the source (e.g., use fewer materials and resources)
• Reuse. Extending the life of products by using them more than once

64
“TRUE”, Green Business Certification, Inc. (GBCI), accessed March 31, 2025, https://true.gbci.org/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 237
 • Recycle. Transforming waste material into new products
• Compost. Decomposing organic waste into nutrient-rich soil
• Anaerobic Digestion. Breaking down organic material into a form of nutrient-rich liquid
for soil application; does not necessarily equal composting.

Zero Waste Operations Planning

Project teams must include design details, maintenance manuals, and other resources in a plan
to help building operators to minimize waste and implement recycling practices post-occupancy.
Projects should consider implementing reusable infrastructure, such as refillable dispensers,
reusable service ware, and reusable event items, while also establishing comprehensive
systems for waste diversion, including take-back programs for specialty items and user-friendly
sorting stations with adequate storage.

The plan should consist of materials for training staff and contractors, such as literature,
presentations, and onboarding training resources. These resources may cover topics like
designated recycling and composting areas, waste separation procedures, and proper disposal
guidelines. It can include strategies to help with waste prevention, materials recovery, and
operational procedures that support zero waste objectives.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Storage and All Proof of space for recycling and composting
Collection of
Pictures of final spaces incorporated into the building with
Recyclables
signage
Narrative describing the dedicated recycling storage areas
for the project, including the size, accessibility, and
expected volume for the project
Zero Waste Zero waste plan, including any resources used to train staff
Operations and contractors (e.g., literature, presentation, onboarding
Planning training, etc.)

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Compostable BPI standard (bpiworld.org)
• TRUE diversion rate guidelines (true.gbci.org/true-diversion-data-additional-guidance)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 238
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Prerequisite and Restoration

QUANTIFY AND ASSESS EMBODIED CARBON

MRp2
REQUIRED

INTENT
To quantify embodied carbon impacts of materials used in commercial interiors projects and
assess the top sources of embodied carbon.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Embodied Carbon
AND
High-Priority Embodied Carbon Sources

Comply with the following requirements:

Embodied Carbon
Quantify the embodied carbon impacts (global warming potential, or GWP) and quantities of
interior materials for the project. Include the following when included in the scope of work:
gypsum wallboard, flooring, insulation, wood and wood composites, wall framing, ceiling
systems, concrete, metals, and paints and coatings. Project teams may include furniture at their
discretion.

Quantify the cradle-to-gate (A1–A3) embodied carbon emissions for each material defined as
the product’s GWP/unit times the amount of material used.

Alternatively, projects using life cycle assessment or embodied carbon software tools may
report A1–A3 results from their tool.

AND

High-priority Embodied Carbon Sources

Identify the top three sources of embodied carbon on the project and describe how project-
specific strategies were considered to reduce the impacts of these hot spots.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 239
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite ensures that all projects become acquainted with embodied carbon and gain a
basic understanding of how to quantify and measure it. It also highlights the critical role of
material selection, emphasizing that informed choices across major material categories are
essential to achieving meaningful reductions in embodied carbon. The prerequisite aims to raise
awareness of the upfront embodied carbon associated with key materials used in interior
finishes and materials of a project. This prerequisite does not mandate reductions in embodied
carbon.

Project teams can achieve this prerequisite in two ways:

• As a stand-alone assessment conducted for projects not attempting the MRc2: Reduce
Embodied Carbon

OR

• As an output from projects that are attempting the MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon.

The intention is that many projects will attempt to earn points from MRc2: Reduce Embodied
Carbon and therefore will use the analysis as the documentation for this prerequisite with no
additional analysis needed.

In addition, all projects will need to summarize the top three sources of embodied carbon in their
project and describe what strategies in the project were considered to reduce the impact of
these hotspots.

Embodied Carbon
The extraction and manufacturing phases of building materials account for a substantial portion
of embodied carbon emissions, primarily due to energy-intensive raw material extraction,
transportation from manufacturers to construction sites, and the waste produced during
manufacturing. Projects that seek carbon reductions in the early design phases (schematic
design and design development) can make the most significant decisions to reduce embodied
carbon early in projects, not after design is complete, when material substitutions may not be
allowed or become cost-prohibitive. The owner, designers, and contractors can collectively
make decisions to reduce the impacts a building’s materials will have on the environment by
using a fully integrated and collaborative design process.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 240
Quantify Embodied Carbon Impacts
Quantifying the embodied carbon impacts provides a holistic assessment across major material
groups within the project: interior materials (i.e., gypsum wallboard, flooring, insulation, wood
and wood composites, wall framing, ceiling systems, concrete, metals, paints, and coatings).
Project teams may include furniture at their discretion. The GWP is calculated for quantities of
all major materials within the project scope of work. By summing up the impacts of all materials,
the project team can achieve a detailed understanding of the embodied carbon for each product
group, enabling informed decisions to reduce the project’s overall environmental impact.

Teams must use building project documents, including construction drawings and specifications,
or software tools to group materials into a bill of materials (BOM) of interior materials and
furniture used on the project. The BOM must encompass all substantial elements within the
LEED project boundary. As a minimum requirement, the BOM should cover materials such as
gypsum wallboard, flooring, insulation, wood and wood composites, wall framing, ceiling
systems, concrete, metals, paints, and coatings. Project teams may include furniture at their
discretion. Quantities may come from as-built data or estimated quantities from the design
phase.

Quantify the Cradle-to-gate Embodied Carbon Emission

Quantifying the Cradle-to-gate (A1–A3) embodied carbon emissions for each material focuses
on emissions associated with raw material extraction (A1), transportation to the manufacturing
site (A2), and the manufacturing processes (A3). Calculate the GWP based on the cradle-to-
gate (A1–A3) impacts for each applicable material used in the project. This involves multiplying
the GWP/unit (from EPDs or default values) by the quantity of each material.

Teams will locate EPDs to determine the embodied carbon values for each material. If EPDs
are unavailable, teams may use industry-standard defaults provided by regional data sources or
integrated within qualifying software tools. Projects should follow a hierarchy of data: first, use
specific EPDs for the product, as published by the manufacturer. If a product-specific EPD is not
available, use the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA) default values when
available. Next, refer to the most recent Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) Material Baselines
report. 65 Then, consult other credible and widely recognized publications, including industry-
wide EPDs relevant to the project region.

65
“Carbon Leadership Forum Material Baselines for North America / August 2023”, Carbon Leadership Forum, (2023), accessed
March 31, 2025, https://www.carbonleadershipforum.org/clf-material-baselines-2023/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 241
Tools and databases
A growing number of tools and databases are becoming available for calculating embodied
carbon of whole-project interiors and finishes, though the tools are not yet as well known or
developed as whole-building LCA tools. The data sources within these databases vary: EPDs,
manufacturer-provided data, academic research, industry statistics, government publications,
and other databases. These differences in data sources can influence the accuracy and
comparability of the results. Some databases account for regional variations in life cycle
inventory (LCI) data, baseline LCA values, and EPD information, while others may only support
analysis within specific countries or regions.

Teams should select tools and databases that best align with their project needs, considering
factors such as geographic relevance, data accuracy, and software compatibility. Some
common whole building life-cycle assessment (WBLCA) tools in North America may have data
for interiors, including Athena Impact Estimator 66, One Click LCA 67, and Tally 68. Some commonly
used material and product databases include Embodied Carbon in Construction Calculator
(EC3)69, Ecomedes 70, and Sustainable Minds Transparency Catalog 71. All of these continue to
add more finishes and interior product categories every year.

Results of the Embodied Carbon Quantification

When tallied up, the results of the embodied carbon quantification represent the total embodied
carbon calculated from the cradle-to-gate (A1–A3) stages of materials used in the project’s
interior scope of work. With the results of this quantification, teams are able to identify the high
GWP materials early in design and prioritize alternatives or modifications.

High-priority Embodied Carbon Sources

An incredible opportunity exists for embodied carbon reduction in high-impact materials for
interiors projects through policy, design, material selection, and specification. For example,
selecting low embodied carbon options for finish materials like flooring, ceiling tiles, and paints
can result in a 5% embodied carbon reduction without added cost. 72 Deeper reductions can be
achieved by targeting materials with highest impacts based on EPDs and other data gathered

66
“Impact Estimator for Buildings”, Athena Sustainable Materials Institute, 2022, https://calculatelca.com/software/impact-estimator/.
67
“One Click LCA”, One Click LCA Ltd., 2025, https://oneclicklca.com/software/design-construction.
68
“Tally”, Building Transparency, 2023, https://choosetally.com/.
69
“Embodied Carbon in Construction Calculator” (EC3), Building Transparency, 2024, https://www.buildingtransparency.org/.
70
“Ecomedes”, Ecomedes, Inc., 2024, https://products.ecomedes.com/.
71
“Sustainable Minds Transparency Calculator”, Sustainable Minds® Transparency Catalog™,
https://transparencycatalog.com/search
72
Esau, R., Jungclaus, M., Olgyay, V. & Rempher, A. (2021, July), RMI, Reducing Embodied Carbon in Buildings,
https://www.rmi.org/wp-content/uploads/dlm_uploads/2021/08/Embodied_Carbon_full_report.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 242
as part of this prerequisite and then writing specifications to required low embodied carbon
alternatives.

Projects must identify the three primary contributors to embodied carbon, focusing on materials
or processes with the highest carbon emissions. For each of these key sources, provide a
detailed explanation of how the team evaluated and implemented project-specific strategies to
reduce their environmental impact. A hot spot analysis is mandatory to identify the most carbon-
intensive materials, allowing teams to focus on areas with the greatest potential for impactful
reductions.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Embodied All Bill of Materials (worksheet) that lists the quantities of
Carbon interior materials and furniture used on the project, along
with the cradle-to-gate (A1–A3) embodied carbon
emissions for each material.

Provide a description of the data sources utilized to

determine the embodied carbon values for each material.
Include justification of baselines (regional, industry, similar
construction type, etc.) utilized if EPA GSA, CLF, or other
recommended embodied carbon values are not available.

Projects using life-cycle assessment or embodied carbon

software tools may report the results from their tool.
Provide alternative documentations if EPDs are not
available.
High- Document the top three high priority embodied carbon
Priority sources and describe the solutions considered to reduce
Embodied the impacts.
Carbon
Sources

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Material Requirements, LEC Program Details, U.S. General Services Administration
(https://www.gsa.gov/real-estate/gsa-properties/inflation-reduction-act/lec-program-
details/material-requirements)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 243
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

INTERIOR MATERIALS REUSE

MRc1
1–4 points

INTENT
To discourage unnecessary demolition and encourage the on-site reuse of existing interior
elements and furniture, and to incorporate reused materials into new project design wherever
possible. Such practices reduce embodied carbon, keep materials in circularity, reduce demand
for virgin material sourcing, preserve cultural resources and histories, and foster markets for
reused materials.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–4
Option 1. Reuse Existing Interior and Minimize Renovation 1–4
Path 1. Furniture and Interior Nonstructural Elements Reuse 1–4
OR
Path 2. Furniture Reuse 1–2
AND/OR
Option 2. Materials Reuse 1–3

Demonstrate reduced environmental impacts during initial project decision-making by reusing

existing building resources and by incorporating off-site reused materials into the project design.
For projects with deconstruction or demolition in scope, conduct a salvage assessment prior to
deconstruction or demolition activities and identify materials that can be retained on-site or
diverted off-site to reuse markets.

NOTE: Materials sent for off-site reuse contribute to waste diversion in MRc5: Construction and
Demolition Waste Diversion. Materials retained on-site or acquired from off-site sources and
incorporated into the project contribute to this credit.

Achieve points through building and/or material reuse. Pursue Option 1 and/or Option 2 for a
maximum of four points.

Option 1. Reuse Existing Interior and Minimize Renovation (1–4 points)

Maintain the existing interior nonstructural elements and furniture. Only materials that remain in
place (on-site reuse) are included in this credit option. On-site reuse can include materials that
come from the same project owner’s stockpile or warehouse but excludes any off-site reused
materials incorporated into the project that originate from external sources. Hazardous materials
remediated as a part of the project must be excluded from the calculation.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 244
PATH 1. FURNITURE AND INTERIOR NONSTRUCTURAL ELEMENTS REUSE (1–4
POINTS)
Compile the total cost for the project’s on-site reused and new nonstructural elements and
furniture, pricing reused elements as if they were new. Include all the following elements in the
project, as applicable to the scope of work: flooring, walls, ceilings, insulation, and furniture.
Determine the cost of the elements of the project that are reused on-site and calculate the
percentage of the total value of the project, including both new and reused. Points are awarded
according to Table 1.

Table 1. Points for on-site reuse of interiors and furniture as a percent of total

Percent of furniture and interior systems reused on-site (by cost) Points

10% 1

20% 2

30% 3

40% 4

OR

PATH 2. FURNITURE REUSE (1–2 POINTS)

Compile the total cost for the project’s furniture that is reused on-site. Include the total project
cost for reused and new furniture, pricing the reused furniture as if it were new. Determine the
percentage of reused furniture based on cost and earn points according to Table 2.

Table 2. Points for furniture reuse

On-site furniture reuse (by cost) Points

20% 1

40% 2

AND/OR

Option 2. Material Reuse (1–3 points)

Survey and identify material procurement opportunities from off-site reuse and/or salvage
sources. Incorporate reused materials into the project design. Specific targeted reuse materials
are valued higher because they have high impacts (embodied carbon or pollution) and are hard
to recycle, and because significant amounts of these materials end up in landfill.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 245
Earn points according to Tables 3 and 4. Calculate the percentage reused per material type
according to Equation 1.

Table 3. Points for salvaging materials

Salvage strategies and percentages Points
Incorporate off-site reused materials for at least 25% of 1 targeted material type 1 point
OR
Incorporate off-site reused materials for at least 25% of 2 other material types
OR
Incorporate an equivalent weighted average of targeted and other material reuse types
Incorporate off-site reused materials for at least 50% of 1 targeted material type 2 points
OR
Incorporate off-site reused materials for at least 25% of 2 targeted material types
OR
Incorporate off-site reused materials for at least 25% of 4 other material types
OR
Incorporate an equivalent weighted average of targeted and other material reuse types
Incorporate off-site reused materials for at least 75% of 1 targeted material type 3 points
OR
Incorporate off-site reused materials for at least 50% of 2 targeted material types
Or
Incorporate an equivalent weighted average of targeted and other material reuse types

Table 4. Salvage material types and correlating units

Material type Unit
Targeted Materials
Carpeting Surface area
Ceilings Surface area
Furniture (ancillary and systems) Count, weight, volume, or floor area
Other Materials
Dimensional lumber Board foot or linear
Doors Count
Casework Linear
Floor-covering materials (not including carpet) Surface area
Lighting fixtures Count
Plumbing fixtures Count
Mechanical equipment Count
Door hardware Count
Project defined other; must be permanently installed Project defined

Equation 1. Reuse % per material type

Reuse % per material type = Amount of material type reused / Total amount of material type in
commercial interiors scope

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 246
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit encourages projects to reuse existing building materials. Option 1 rewards projects
that reuse existing interior nonstructural elements and furniture (on-site reuse). This option
offers two different pathways for projects. Path 1 addresses interior nonstructural materials and
furniture, while Path 2 solely addresses furniture. Option 2 requires projects to identify
opportunities to procure materials from off-site sources and rewards the reuse of both targeted
and other materials.

The table below shows how different types of reuse are recognized within the LEED v5
Materials and Resources category, including their contributions to MRc5: Construction and
Demolition Waste Diversion and MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement.

Table 1. Types of reuse and credit contributions

Credits/Options/Paths On-site reuse Procure off-site Divert on-site
(keep materials salvaged materials to
in place or within materials salvage markets
the same project)
(On-site-on-site) (Off-site-on-site) (On-site-off-site)
MRc1: Interior Materials Reuse, x
Option 1. Path 1. Furniture and
Interior Nonstructural Elements
Reuse
MRc1: Interior Materials Reuse, x
Option 1. Path 2. Furniture Reuse
MRc1: Interior Materials Reuse, x
Option 2. Materials Reuse
MRc5: Construction and x
Demolition Waste Diversion
MRc4: Building Product Selection x x
and Procurement (nonstructural
materials)

Conduct salvage assessment for projects with deconstruction or demolition in scope

All projects with deconstruction or demolition in scope, conduct a salvage assessment to
document the quantity of materials that could be salvaged and reused on- or off-site. A salvage
assessment is most useful when conducted before construction activities begin. Conducting a
salvage assessment identifies valuable materials and components that can be reclaimed and
reused, thus reducing waste and disposal costs. Examples of salvageable materials include
clean wood, siding, roofing materials, plumbing, furniture, and light fixtures.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 247
Beyond traditional salvage yards, teams should explore creative options for material reuse, such
as partnering with local organizations or marketplaces. Resources like BuildReuse.org 73,
Rheaply 74, and All for Reuse 75 can connect projects to potential outlets for salvaged materials.

In addition, while conducting the salvage assessment, projects can explore local reuse sources
to identify opportunities for incorporating reclaimed materials into the project (note: this strategy
is rewarded in Option 2, but not eligible for contributing toward Option 1 credit achievement).
Examples of available materials may include wood, carpet, tile, flooring, doors, and other
finishes. These materials offer flexibility in their application and do not need to be limited to their
original intended purpose. For instance, doors can be repurposed as partition walls or furniture
(desktops), and windows can serve as interior clerestories between enclosed rooms.

Option 1. Reuse Existing Interior and Minimize Renovation

Reusing existing interior nonstructural elements and furniture into the project are impactful
strategies to minimize the long-term environmental impact of an interior space. By prioritizing
the reuse of existing materials, projects can extend the life of valuable resources and minimize
the need for new raw material extraction. This, in turn, decreases the need for energy-intensive
manufacturing and transportation, which helps lower embodied energy and GHG emissions.

PATH 1. FURNITURE AND INTERIOR NONSTRUCTURAL ELEMENTS REUSE

Project teams are recommended to develop drawings showing the location of existing furniture
and nonstructural interior elements and identify the areas that are in good condition and are to
be reused, salvaged, or refurbished on-site for the project. Reused elements may originate from
the same project owner’s stockpile or warehouses that are within the owner’s control, but
excludes any off-site reused materials incorporated into the project that originate from external
sources (those would be captured under Option 2). Materials received as donations or by a third
party are not considered part of the owner’s stockpile and are excluded from this path.

Teams are encouraged to create a list of materials for all on-site reused and new nonstructural
elements and furniture. Projects can add additional product categories or materials that are
within the scope of work. The list of materials serves as a comprehensive inventory, detailing
quantities, material types, and sources, allowing for streamlined tracking and decision-making
throughout the project.

Points are awarded based on the percentage of reused elements retained on-site by cost.
Teams must quantify the existing and reused interior nonstructural elements based on final as-

73
“Home page”, Build Reuse, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.buildreuse.org/.
74
“Home page”, Rheaply, accessed March 31, 2025, https://rheaply.com/.
75
“Home page”, All For Reuse, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.allforreuse.org/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 248
built quantities and costing them as if they were new. When estimating the cost of reused
materials, ensure that the costs reflect comparable products of similar quality, function, and
condition. For example, a reused particleboard table cannot be assumed to have the same
value as a new hand-carved marble and oak table. Costs must be based on reasonable
comparisons to avoid overinflating or underestimating the value of reused items, ensuring
transparency and fairness in the assessment process. Teams are suggested to match the
reused material to a product with similar material type, design, condition, and functionality, and
use sources such as salvage yards or online reuse platforms for cost comparisons.

Equation 1. Percentage of reused nonstructural elements and furniture

𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 =
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑓𝑓𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
× 100
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓

Include all of the following elements in product categories below, as applicable to the project
scope of work:

• Flooring. The flooring product category includes all types of hard and soft surface
flooring (carpet, ceramic, vinyl, rubber, engineered, solid wood, laminates), wall base,
underlayment, and other floor coverings. Subflooring is excluded.
• Wall panels. The wall panels product category includes all nonstructural wall elements
(framing and drywall), finish wall treatments (wall coverings, wall paneling, wall tile),
surface wall structures such as gypsum or plaster, cubicle/curtain/partition walls, trim,
doors, hardware, frames, windows, and window treatments. Removable/interchangeable
fabric panels and vertical structural elements are allowed to be included in the
calculations. Structural elements such as wall framing, curtain walls, brick or concrete
are excluded.
• Ceilings. The ceilings product category includes all ceiling panels, ceiling tile, surface
ceiling structures such as gypsum or plaster, suspended systems (including canopies
and clouds), and glazed skylights. Overhead structural elements (exposed, finished, and
unfinished) are excluded.
• Insulation. The insulation product category includes all thermal and acoustic boards,
batts, rolls, blankets, sound attenuation fire blankets, foamed-in place, loose-fill, blown,
and sprayed insulation
• Furniture. The furniture product category includes all built-in and stand-alone furniture
items, furniture systems, and cabinetry.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 249
PATH 2. FURNITURE REUSE
Teams are encouraged to conduct an inventory of existing furniture and furnishings early in the
design process to determine what products could be incorporated into the project design.
Teams should develop a tracking list of all actual and potentially reusable furniture and
furnishings to help efficiently identify, document, and manage items that can be incorporated
into the project. Teams must determine the total cost of the project’s furniture and calculate the
percentage of reused items used. When determining the total cost of reused furniture, ensure
that the costs reflect comparable products of similar quality and condition. The cost assigned to
each reused item should be based on its current state and market value relative to the
equivalent product. Resources like Rheaply and All for Reuse provide an exchange platform to
share, buy, or sell reused furniture and can be good sources of cost information.

Equation 2. Percentage of reused furniture

𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = × 100
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓

Option 2. Materials Reuse

This option rewards projects for incorporating off-site reused elements into the building. The
sources for reused materials can be from on-site or gathered off-site from vendors, other
projects, salvage yards, donations, and can leverage local resources and community networks
to locate quality materials. For instance, organizations such as Habitat for Humanity ReStores 76
and Salvage Yards also offer gently used and reclaimed furniture at discounted prices.

Teams are encouraged to maintain a set of photos to document and verify the reuse of
materials. These include photos per material being reused which includes a record of the
materials, both before and after reuse, and images of materials being processed or repaired for
reuse (if applicable).

In the credit Table 2, specific materials are targeted due to their higher impacts and the potential
for greater reuse and recovery in the near term. The prioritization of these materials is based on
several criteria, including high embodied carbon, toxic impacts in landfills, and significant
potential for recovery in existing or emerging salvage and reuse markets. These targeted
materials receive a 2x multiplier compared to other reused materials. However, all forms of
reuse are recognized in this credit and can be quantified in the various material types listed in
Table 2, or the “project defined other” category.

76
“Home page”, Habitat for Humanity ReStores, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.habitat.org/restores.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 250
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1 Path 1. Worksheet demonstrating the percentage of furniture
Furniture and and interior systems reused onsite.
Interior
Nonstructural
Elements
Reuse
Option 1 Path 2. Worksheet demonstrating the percentage of furniture
Furniture reuse.
Reuse
Option 2 Worksheet demonstrating the percentage of off-site
Material reuse.
Reuse

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Build Reuse Association (buildreuse.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 251
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

REDUCE EMBODIED CARBON

MRc2
1–4 points: A 10% reduction of embodied carbon is required for LEED Platinum projects.

INTENT
To reduce the embodied carbon impacts of materials used in commercial interiors projects.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–4
Option 1. Reduce Embodied Carbon of New Materials 1–4
AND/OR
Option 2. Interiors Life-Cycle Assessment 1–4

Option 1. Reduce Embodied Carbon of New Materials (1–4 points)

Points are awarded according to Table 1. Industry averages for material categories are defined
by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, the most recent Carbon Leadership Forum
Material Baselines report, or similarly robust and widely recognized publications and industry-
wide environmental product disclosures applicable to the project region.

Projects must track the GWP/unit of the materials installed, reconciling the design-phase
embodied carbon intensities if materials or GWP values have changed. The reconciliation of
material quantities is not necessary unless quantities have changed more than 10% from design
through construction.

Projects must use project-specific material quantities and identify product-specific or facility-
specific Type III EPDs for covered materials to demonstrate reductions. Biogenic carbon may
only be included for calculations that include C-stage emissions.

Table 1. Points awarded for embodied carbon assessment and reduction

Points
Meet baseline or industry average 1
10% reduction 2
20% reduction 3
30% reduction 4

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 252
Option 2. Interiors Life Cycle Assessment (1–4 points)
For tenant improvements and renovation projects, conduct a cradle-to-grave (modules A–C,
excluding operating energy and operating water-related energy) life cycle assessment (LCA) of
the project’s entire scope of work, including structure and enclosure (if any); ceiling; wall;
flooring; and interior partition assemblies, including acoustic insulation, metal framing, finishes,
coatings, and furniture. LCA data sets must be compliant with ISO 14044. Biogenic carbon may
only be included for calculations that include C-stage emissions. Include results for the following
impact categories in the Interiors LCA report:

• GWP (greenhouse gases), in kg CO2e

• Depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11e
• Acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2e
• Eutrophication, in kg nitrogen eq or kg phosphate eq
• Formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethene
• Depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ using CML/depletion of fossil fuels
in TRACI

Compare results to a baseline developed for the project and earn points according to Table 2.

Table 2. Points awarded for interiors LCA

Pathway Threshold Points
Path 1 Conduct an LCA of the project’s complete interior design and compare 1
against a baseline interiors project.
Path 2 Meet the requirements of Path 1 and demonstrate at least a 10% reduction 2
in GWP compared with the interiors project baseline
Path 3 Meet the requirements of Path 1 and demonstrate reductions compared 4
with the interiors project baseline of at least 20% for GWP and demonstrate
at least a 10% reduction in two additional targeted impact categories

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The goal of this credit is to raise awareness about the upfront embodied carbon associated with
interior finish materials. It aims to promote using various tools and resources to reduce
embodied carbon for the interior scope of work. There are multiple options for compliance and
points are earned by evaluating the embodied carbon of materials and demonstrating a
reduction of GWP. This credit is meant to provide flexibility while incentivizing the completion of
a life cycle analysis of the project interior based on software tools and/or product research
through EPD analysis.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 253
Option 1. Reduce Embodied Carbon of New Materials
Projects can earn points by demonstrating a reduction in embodied carbon. The reduction is
measured by comparing the project's total embodied carbon to the calculated industry average.
Points are awarded based on the extent to which the project's embodied carbon is lowered
relative to this benchmark, encouraging the use of low-carbon strategies such as material
optimization, specification of products with lower embodied carbon impacts, and sourcing
reused or salvaged materials.

To achieve this option, project teams will create a bill of materials that lists all the major
materials used in the scope of work, their material quantities, embodied carbon intensities, and
unit of materials in the project. For each material, the worksheet should multiply the material
quantity by its embodied carbon intensity to calculate the total embodied carbon contribution for
that material. Points will be awarded according to Table 1 in the credit and the accompanying
embodied carbon reductions achieved.

Option 2. Interiors Life Cycle Assessment

This pathway is intended to reward projects that seek embodied carbon reductions by
conducting an interiors LCA. The most significant decisions can be made to reduce embodied
carbon early in projects, not after design is complete, when material substitutions may not be
allowed or may become cost-prohibitive. Using a fully integrated and collaborative design
process, decisions can collectively be made by the owner, designers, and contractors to
substantially cut embodied carbon emissions.

The analysis can be implemented by utilizing software tools that include interior assemblies, by
gathering EPDs or product-specific LCAs for interior products, or through a combination of both
approaches. The LCA process must be compliant with ISO 14044. Tools and data may have
limitations; therefore, project teams are advised to document all assumptions if a full analysis is
not possible. At a minimum, project teams pursuing this credit must:

• Define the project boundary and scope of work.

• Provide information on where life cycle data was obtained (document data sources).
• Demonstrate how the LCA impacts were quantified.
• Include modules A-C in the system boundary at a minimum.
• Include results for all impact categories listed in the credit
• Exclude operational energy and operating water-related energy
• LCA data sets must be compliant with ISO 14044.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 254
The team must develop a baseline interior LCA for the project and demonstrate that both the
baseline and the proposed project are of the same relative size, function, operating energy use,
system boundaries, and service life. Baseline assumptions must be based on standard design
and material selection for the project location and building type. Use the same life cycle
assessment software tools and data sets to evaluate both the baseline and the proposed
interiors scope and report all listed impact categories.

If a team iterates early in design and makes changes to create a lower embodied carbon
design, they may utilize their early design iteration as a baseline given that it aligns with the
comparative requirements listed above. A team may also make a copy of their proposed design
which includes low embodied carbon materials and actual EPD data (for example), and use that
copy to develop a baseline scenario by replacing materials with appropriate regional default or
average material intensity values and recalculating the results. Points are awarded by providing
a comparison between the baseline model and the proposed design and calculating reductions.

DOCUMENTATION
Project types Options Paths Documentation
All Option 1. Reduce Bill of Materials worksheet that includes the
Embodied Carbon of materials and quantities used, embodied
New Materials carbon intensities, and unit of materials in
the project.
Option 2. Interiors Provide baseline LCA report and Proposed
LifeCycle Assessment Design LCA report.
Compare the outputs of the baseline vs.
proposed reports to identify reductions.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Athena (athenasmi.org/our-software-data/lca-databases/)
• Embodied Carbon in Construction Calculator (EC3) (buildingtransparency.org/ec3/users/me)
• Institut Bauen and Umwelt e.V. (ibu-epd.com)
• ISO 14044 (iso.org/obp/ui/en/#iso:std:iso:14044:ed-1:v1:en)
• LCA Digital Commons (lcacommons.gov)
• OneClick LCA (oneclicklca.com)
• Open LCA Nexus (nexus.openlca.org)
• Quartz (pharos.habitablefuture.org/common-products)
• Sustainable Minds (sustainableminds.com)
• Tally (choosetally.com)
• The ICE Database (circularecology.com/embodied-carbon-footprint-database.html)
• The International EPD System (portal.environdec.com)
• UL Spot (spot.ul.com)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 255
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
MRc3
1–4 points

INTENT
To reduce concentrations of chemical contaminants that can damage air quality and the
environment. To protect human health and the comfort of installers and building occupants.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–4
Low-Emitting Material Criteria 1–4

Specify and install permanent products, paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, flooring, walls,
ceilings, insulation, furniture, and/or composite wood products that meet the low-emitting
criteria. Points are awarded according to Table 1 below.

Table 1. Thresholds for low-emitting materials

Number of product categories Threshold Points

2 > 90% of all products in each product category 1

4 > 90% of each additional product category 2

6 > 80% of each product category 3

8 > 80% of each product category 4

Product categories
The following products and materials are not applicable to the low-emitting materials product
categories: structural elements, equipment related to fire suppression, HVAC (including
ductwork), plumbing, electrical, conveying and communications systems, poured concrete,
structural framing, structural insulated panels, and water-resistive barriers (i.e., material installed
on a substrate to prevent bulk water intrusion).

Paints and coatings

• Paints and coatings, by volume, cost, or surface area, must meet the volatile organic
compound (VOC) emissions evaluation criteria.
• The paints and coatings product category includes all interior paints and coatings wet-
applied on-site.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 256
 • Exclude foamed-in-place and sprayed insulation (include in insulation category).

The following products and materials are applicable:

Adhesives and sealants

• Adhesives and sealants, by volume or cost, must meet the VOC emissions evaluation
criteria.
• The adhesives and sealants product category includes all interior adhesives and
sealants wet-applied on-site, including those used to install air or vapor barrier
membranes and floor-setting materials.

Flooring
• Nonstructural flooring materials, by surface area or cost, must meet the VOC emissions
evaluation criteria.
• The flooring product category includes all types of hard and soft surface flooring finishes
(e.g., carpet, ceramic tile, vinyl, rubber, engineered wood, solid wood, stone, and
laminate), raised flooring systems, entryway (“walk-off”) systems, area rugs, wood
subflooring, underlayments, sandwich panels, and air barrier membranes and vapor
barrier/vapor retarder membranes (if used inside an air barrier membrane).
• Exclude poured concrete, composite wood subflooring (include in the composite wood
category, if applicable), and wet-applied products applied on the floor.

Walls
• Nonstructural wall materials, by surface area or cost, must meet the VOC emissions
evaluation criteria.
• The walls product category includes all finish wall treatments (e.g., wall coverings and
wall tile), finish carpentry (e.g., millwork, paneling, railings, and trim/moldings), gypsum
wallboard, wall base/skirting, interior and exterior doors, nonstructural wall framing, and
nonstructural sandwich panels.
• Exclude wet-applied products applied on the wall, case goods, cabinetry (include in the
furniture category), countertops (include in the furniture category), bathroom
accessories, door hardware, and curtain wall and storefront systems.

Ceilings
• Nonstructural ceilings materials, by surface area or cost, must meet the VOC emissions
evaluation criteria.
• The ceilings product category includes all types of ceiling finishes (e.g., ceiling panels
and ceiling tile), suspension grids, surface ceiling structures (such as gypsum wallboard
or plaster), suspended systems (including canopies and clouds), and nonstructural
sandwich panels.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 257
 • Exclude wet-applied products applied on the ceiling and corrugated metal decking.

Insulation
• Insulation products, by surface area or cost, must meet the VOC emissions evaluation
criteria.
• The insulation product category includes all thermal and acoustic boards; batts (faced
and unfaced); rolls; blankets; sound attenuation fire blankets; and foamed-in-place,
loose-fill, blown, and sprayed insulation.
• Exclude insulation installed outside an air barrier membrane.

Furniture
• Furniture in the project scope of work, by cost, area, or number of units, must meet the
furniture emissions evaluation criteria or VOC emissions evaluation criteria.
• The furniture product category includes all permanently installed office furniture,
cubicles/systems furniture, seating, desks, tables, filing/storage, specialty items, beds,
case goods, casework, countertops, moveable/demountable partitions, bathroom/toilet
partitions, shelving, lockers, retail fixtures (including slatwall), window treatments, and
furnishing items (such as nonfixed area rugs, cubicle curtains, and mattresses)
purchased for the project.
• A custom item in the furniture category is considered to meet the low-emitting criteria if
all components of the finished piece, applied on- or off-site, are declared under the
furniture category and meet the VOC emissions evaluation criteria. Alternatively, a
custom piece meets the criteria if the finished piece, as a whole, meets the furniture
emissions evaluation or VOC emissions evaluation criteria.
• Exclude office and bathroom accessories, art, recreational items (such as game tables),
cabinet and drawer hardware, and planters from the credit.

Composite wood
• Composite wood products, by surface area or cost, must meet the formaldehyde
emissions evaluation criteria.
• The composite wood product category includes all particleboard, medium-density
fiberboard (both medium density and thin), hardwood plywood with veneer, composite or
combination core, and wood structural panels or structural wood products.

Low-emitting Criteria
VOC EMISSIONS EVALUATION CRITERIA
Third-party certification: Product has a qualifying third-party certification, valid at the time of
product purchase, that demonstrates testing and compliance according to the California

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 258
Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2-2017 using the private office
scenario. Products used in classrooms may be modeled using the schools or private office
scenario.

OR

Qualified independent laboratory report: Product has a qualifying laboratory report (or
summary) demonstrating the product has been tested no more than three years prior to the
product’s purchase, according to the CDPH Standard Method v1.2-2017. Products may use the
private office scenario and must meet the VOC limits in Table 4-1 of the private office scenario.
Products used in classrooms may be modeled using the schools or private office scenario.

OR

Product is inherently nonemitting, salvaged, or reused.

FURNITURE EMISSIONS EVALUATION

Product has a qualifying third-party certification, valid at the time of product purchase, that
demonstrates testing according to ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1-2011 (R2021) and
complies with specific sections of ANSI/BIFMA e3-2014 or e3-2024, “Furniture Sustainability
Standard.” Statements of product compliance must include the exposure scenario(s).

Seating products must be evaluated using the seating scenario. Classroom furniture must be
evaluated using the standard school classroom scenario. Other products should be evaluated
using the open plan or private office scenario, as appropriate. The open plan scenario is more
stringent.

OR

Product is inherently nonemitting, salvaged, or reused.

Salvaged and reused materials

Product is more than one year old at the time of use.

If another product (including but not limited to adhesives, sealants, paints, and coatings) is
applied to the inherently nonemitting material and has a separate manufacturer and cost, to the
end user, from the original material, the applied product may be documented as a separate
product and meet the low-emitting criteria applicable to the applied product, even if applied off-
site.

If another product is applied to the inherently nonemitting/salvaged/reused material and does

not have a separate manufacturer and cost, to the end user, the result is considered a new

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 259
finished product that no longer qualifies as an inherently nonemitting material and is subject to
the VOC emissions evaluation criteria.

FORMALDEHYDE EMISSIONS EVALUATION

Product has a qualifying third-party certification from a California Air Resources Board (CARB)
approved/Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) recognized third-party certifier, valid at the
time of product purchase, that demonstrates the product is one of the following:

• Certified as ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde product under EPA’s Toxic Substances

Control Act, Formaldehyde Emission Standards for Composite Wood Products (TSCA,
Title VI) (EPA TSCA Title VI), or the CARB Airborne Toxic Control Measure (ATCM).
• Certified as no-added-formaldehyde resins (NAF) product under EPA TSCA Title VI or
CARB ATCM.
• Wood structural panels manufactured according to PS 1-09 or PS 2-10 (or one of the
standards considered by CARB to be equivalent to PS 1 or PS 2) and labeled bond
classification exposure 1 or exterior.
• Structural wood product manufactured according to ASTM D 5456 (for structural
composite lumber), ANSI A190.1 (for glued laminated timber), ASTM D 5055 (for I-
joists), ANSI PRG 320 (for cross-laminated timber), or PS 20-15 (for finger-jointed
lumber).

OR

Product is inherently nonemitting, salvaged, or reused.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Installing low-emitting products can significantly reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants
in buildings. Coupled with adequate ventilation and filtration, specifying, and installing low-
emitting materials is an important strategy toward improving indoor air quality.

This credit is awarded to projects with permanently installed products that meet established low-
emitting criteria. Points are earned by bundling or combining products from two or more of the
eight available categories: interior paint and coatings, interior adhesives and sealants, flooring,
walls, ceilings, insulation, furniture, and composite wood. Projects targeting two or four product
categories must achieve 90% or more of the required thresholds. Projects targeting six or eight
product categories must achieve 80% or more of the required thresholds.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 260
Identifying and Specifying Low-emitting Products
The easiest way to find products with a volatile organic compounds (VOC) emissions evaluation
may be to search third-party certification program databases from the qualified third-party
certifiers or programs listed on the CDPH website 77.

Other sources for finding compliant products include online aggregated product databases
including Ecomedes 78, the Sustainable Minds Transparency Catalog 79, Building Ease 80, and UL
SPOT 81.

Save certificates for the specified products, ensuring that the specified products and the
certificates match. Make note of any certificates expected to expire before the time of purchase.
Certification periods that begin after the product's date of purchase do not demonstrate the
compliance of the installed product. Track progress toward credit achievement using the LEED
materials calculator.

There are international third-party programs and low-emitting third-party standards that can be
used for this credit. See the Low-emitting Materials resource document on USGBC’s website.

Calculating Product Category Achievement

Project teams can decide how many product categories to attempt to earn points. To achieve a
point, the project must demonstrate they meet or exceed the threshold for each product
category. This can be based on cost, surface area, volume, or number of units, depending upon
the measurement methods available for each product category. Project teams can choose
different measurement types to measure progress toward achievement, as long as the
measurement method is consistent in each product category. For example, a project could use
“surface area” to demonstrate achievement of the Flooring category, “number of units” for the
Furniture category, and “volume” for the Adhesives and Sealants category.

Project teams are advised to set project-achievable category goals and research, specify, and
track low- or non-emitting products in those categories according to the low-emitting criteria
appropriate for the products. A targeted approach focusing on specific products, or product
categories, is likely to be more manageable and successful than amassing documentation for all
products in every category and determining attempted categories post-construction.

77
“Home page”, California Department of Public Health, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.cdph.ca.gov/.
78
“Home page”, Ecomedes, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.ecomedes.com/.
79
“Sustainable Minds Transparency Catalog”, Sustainable Minds, accessed March 31, 2025, https://transparencycatalog.com/
80
“Home page”, accessed March 31, 2025, Building Ease, https://builtworlds.com/companies/building-ease/
81
“Home page”, UL Spot, accessed March 31, 2025, https://spot.ul.com/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 261
Additionally, aiming for 100% compliance within a category, when possible, may simplify the
process by eliminating the need to track individual units.

This credit will be documented by product category using the LEED materials calculator. Note
that this calculator is combined with the MRc4: Building Product Selection & Procurement
calculator. Teams are encouraged to combine submittal reviews and product vetting with the
criteria found in both credits to maximize credit achievement and harmonize product selection,
specification, and documentation processes.

Except for the overall product exclusions stated in the requirements, all permanently installed,
nonstructural products–within and inclusive of the project’s air barrier membrane—are to be
included in the calculation for the attempted categories. These products are expected to impact
indoor air quality and are able to be tested in alignment with the low-emitting criteria. Products
installed in parking garages and basements are to be included, as these spaces are occupied
by people, even if intermittently.

Product categories which have no applicable products installed (i.e., those outside the project
scope of work) are not eligible to attempt the category.

Paints and coatings

This category applies to products covered in CSI Masterformat 09 90 00 Painting and Coating.
Exterior painting, staining, and finish can be excluded. Exterior paint cannot be excluded from
the calculation if used indoors. Aerosol products are included. Coatings also includes sealers,
which are products applied to either block materials from penetrating into or leaching out of a
substrate; to prevent subsequent coatings from being absorbed by the substrate; or to prevent
harm to subsequent coatings by materials in the substrate (SCAQMD Rule 1113 82).

VOCs in paints and coatings may be ingredients that are included to enhance product
performance and shelf life, added by the contractor, or byproducts of the paint drying process.
Water-based acrylic latex paints generally have lower VOCs than solvent-based paints. Lime
and mineral silicate paints are most likely to be compliant with VOC limits. Paints that are
advertised as antimicrobial, recycled, specialty paints (chalk, dry-erase, magnetic), and paints
containing alkylphenol ethoxylates (APE) or PFAS may have compliant emissions evaluations,
but introduce additional human and/or environmental hazards not addressed by this credit that
the project team may wish to consider.

82
“Rule 1113: Architechtural Coatings”, South Coast AQMD, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.aqmd.gov/home/rules-
compliance/compliance/vocs/architectural-coatings.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 262
Adhesives and sealants
Common adhesives and sealants used in construction are defined in SCAQMD Rule 1168 83. An
adhesive is any substance used to bond one surface to another surface by attachment. A
sealant is any material with adhesive properties that is designed to fill, seal, waterproof, or
weatherproof gaps or joints between two surfaces. Note that sealers are different types of
products and are to be categorized as coatings. Aerosol products are also included in this
product category for LEED calculation purposes. 84

Flooring
In most buildings, the flooring category represents a significant source of indoor emissions due
to the large amount of surface area covered in relation to the project. Consider reusing existing
floors, where possible. When reuse is not an available option, solid wood floors, ceramic tiles,
cork floors (especially pre-finished without a PVC/vinyl layer), linoleum sheet, and tile are likely
to have compliant VOC emissions evaluations, as are many carpet and vinyl flooring products.
Make efforts to evaluate products holistically, including, for instance, the presence of
contaminants or additives like lead in recycled content products, additives included in sealants,
and those used for the cleaning of flooring materials. Other concerns can relate to the project
team’s environmental priorities, such as the lack of recovery and circularity options for vinyl
products at end of life, or potential toxic emissions released during a product’s production.
These additional multi-attribute considerations may not be addressed by product emissions
criteria but are considered in the aligned MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement.

Walls
In many buildings, the walls category represents a significant source of indoor emissions from
products due to the large surface area. For instance, gypsum wallboard and doors often
comprise the majority of surface area in this category. Look for compliant gypsum wallboards
especially those made with natural gypsum or post-consumer recycled content. As it relates to
the MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion, consider how your project can
separate unpainted gypsum wallboard cut-offs for manufacturer take-back and recycling.

Ceilings
Like the walls category, the ceilings category is likely to be strongly influenced by surface area.
See the walls category for notes on gypsum wallboard. Acoustical ceiling systems are also a
popular material option and are likely to have compliant VOC emissions evaluation. Be sure to
also include ceiling suspension grids/components, noting that powder-coated metal components
are most likely to be compliant.

83
“Rule 1168 – Adhesive and Sealant Applications”, South Coast AQMD, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.aqmd.gov/home/rules-compliance/compliance/vocs/adhesive-and-sealants.
84
“Controlling Pollutants and Sources: Indoor Air Quality Design Tools for Schools”, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
accessed March 31, 2025, , https://www.epa.gov/iaq-schools/controlling-pollutants-and-sources-indoor-air-quality-design-tools-
schools#WallsandCeilingMaterials.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 263
Insulation
Insulation products with compliant testing typically include both natural and synthetic products,
which include:

• Expanded cork
• Blown-in wood fiber
• Cellulose
• Fiberglass
• Mineral wool
• Hemp or wood fiber batts and boards
• Unfaced fiberglass batts
• Formaldehyde-free mineral wool batts and boards

Plastics and foam insulation products can also meet the emission criteria. Even if products meet
the emissions evaluation criteria, they may still include problematic ingredients like
formaldehyde and fire retardants. Consider these when selecting products and seek synergies
for product optimization with the MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement.

Furniture
The furniture category includes both systems furniture and ancillary furniture. Typically, the
ability to find compliant furniture will be more available from systems furniture manufacturers, as
opposed to freestanding or custom furniture. A convenient way to find products with a furniture
emissions evaluation is to search product databases that list qualified third-party-verified
programs and reports. See the Low-Emitting Materials resource document on USGBC’s
website.

The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association (BIFMA) writes standards
for furniture safety, ergonomics, and sustainability. Qualifying furniture products in LEED will
meet the ANSI/BIFMA M7.1-2011 (R2021) Standard Test Method for Determining VOC
Emissions from Office Furniture Systems, Components, and Seating 85. In addition, products
must comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2024e Furniture Sustainability Standard, Section 7.6.2 86.
Laboratories that conduct the tests must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 87 for the test
methods they use.

85
“ANSI/BIFMA M7.1-2011 (R2021)”, BIFMA, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.bifma.org/page/StandardsShortDesc.
86
“ANSI/BIFMA e3-2024e”, BIFMA, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.bifma.org/page/e3-sustainability.
87
“ISO/IEC 17025”, International Organization for Standardization (ISO), accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.iso.org/ISO-IEC-
17025-testing-and-calibration-laboratories.html.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 264
Composite wood
The composite wood product category includes all particleboard, medium density fiberboard
(both medium density and thin), hardwood plywood with veneer, composite or combination core,
and wood structural panels or structural wood products. Products in this category must meet the
Formaldehyde Emissions Evaluation requirements in the rating system.

Formaldehyde emissions evaluation

The composite wood category typically includes products that adhere to classifications and
standards defined by leading industry organizations and frameworks, such as the CARB
standards, which ensure low formaldehyde emissions and compliance with stringent air quality
requirements. CARB maintains a list of composite wood mills that have been approved by third-
party certifiers 88, and this list can be used to help find and specify compliant composite wood
products. Certificates demonstrating a product is certified as NAF or ULEF for products must be
from a CARB-Approved Third-Party Certifier 89 The certification period must cover the date of
purchase.

Note that this credit does not refer to the minimum requirements of the CARB 93120 ATCM 90 or
EPA TSCA Title VI 91. It uses the more stringent requirements for ULEF resins or NAF resins as
defined in the CARB ATCM. These criteria are some of the strongest available for formaldehyde
emissions from composite wood. Ensure the certificate confirms this threshold is met.

The CARB composite wood definition includes wood structural panels, structural composite
lumber, glued laminated timber, I-joists, cross-laminated timber, and finger-jointed lumber.
These products are subject to other standards. APA – The Engineered Wood Association
website 92 can be used to source compliant products.

Goods containing composite wood components, such as doors with a composite wood core, do
not belong in the Composite Wood category. They are subject to the more comprehensive
emissions evaluations of other categories.

88
“CARB composite wood mills”, California Air Resources Board, March 19, 2025, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://ww2.arb.ca.gov/resources/documents/certified-mills-list-january-2-2025.
89
“CARB-Approved Third Party Certifiers Executive Orders”, California Air Resources Board, updated February 13, 2025, accessed
March 31, 2025, https://ww2.arb.ca.gov/resources/documents/carb-approved-third-party-certifiers-executive-orders.
90
“CARB 93120 ATCM”, California Air Resources Board, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://ww2.arb.ca.gov/resources/documents/airborne-toxic-control-measures.
91
“EPA TSCA Title vi”, U.S. EPA, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.epa.gov/formaldehyde/formaldehyde-emission-standards-
composite-wood-products
92
“Home page”, The Engineered Wood Association, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.apawood.org.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 265
VOC Emissions Evaluation Criteria
CDPH Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions
from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, v.1.2-2017 is also known as the emission
testing method for California Specification 01350 93, which is widely recognized as a leadership
standard for its stringent scientific criteria and detailed specificity. It uses the chronic reference
exposure levels established by the California Office of Environmental Health Hazard
Assessment 94, which include some of the most stringent criteria in use, although they do not
account for health condition other than cancer.

Compliant products can come from qualified third-party product certifications or from a qualified
independent laboratory. See USGBC resource for list of qualifying third-party certifications.

Qualifying independent laboratory reports may also demonstrate VOC emissions evaluation;
however, because they are not third-party-verified, the project team must confirm all criteria are
reported on the report, including:

• A declaration that the product has been tested according to CDPH Standard Method
v1.2-2017 and complies with the VOC limits in Table 4-1 of the method
• The total VOC results at 14 days measured as specified in CDPH Standard Method
v1.2-2017
• The test date (less than three years from date of purchase)
• The name of the laboratory that performed the evaluation and documentation (such as
accreditation number or certificate with scope of accreditation) demonstrating the
accreditation under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test method
• The modeling scenario used (must be a private office unless the product is installed in a
classroom)
• For wet-applied products, the amount of product applied in mass per surface area
(during testing)

Inherently Nonemitting Criteria

Inherently nonemitting products are building materials that, owing to their composition or use in
construction, do not emit VOCs and therefore do not require an emissions evaluation. Products
that are inherently nonemitting include stone, ceramic, powder-coated metals, plated or
anodized metal, and unfinished or untreated solid wood. For the purposes of this credit,
untreated and unfinished solid wood (not engineered wood) can also be considered nonemitting

93
“CDPH Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
Environmental Chambers”, California Department of Public Health, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.cdph.ca.gov/programs/ccdphp/deodc/ehlb/iaq/cdph%20document%20library/cdph-
iaq_standardmethod_v1_2_2017_ada.pdf.
94
“Home page”, California Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment, accessed March 31, 2025, https://oehha.ca.gov.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 266
even though such materials will likely emit some amount of formaldehyde naturally. Ceramic
and powder-coated metals meet the criteria for being inherently nonemitting when their
manufacturing processes result in chemically stable and inert surfaces that do not release
VOCs into the environment after production. These materials are compliant without any VOC
emissions testing if they do not include additives, surface coatings, binders, or sealants as such
products would emit VOCs.

If a product applied to the inherently nonemitting material has a separate manufacturer and cost
to the end user from the original material, the applied product may be documented as a
separate product subject to the applicable low-emitting criteria, even if applied off-site.

If a product applied to the inherently non-emitting material does not have a separate
manufacturer and cost to the end user, the result is considered a new finished product that no
longer qualifies as an inherently nonemitting material and is subject to the applicable low-
emitting criteria.

Salvaged or Reused Materials Criteria

Products that are salvaged and reused, and more than one year old, will automatically comply
with the VOC emission evaluation and do not require emissions evaluations. For salvaged or
reused composite wood products, project teams must account for any off-site applied finishes or
treatments in the composite wood category. These must comply with the VOC emissions
evaluation criteria to ensure comprehensive assessment of the product’s total environmental
impact.

Some salvaged or reused materials will have products applied to them (such as sealants or
finishes).

• If a product is applied to the salvaged or reused material and has a separate

manufacturer and cost to the end user from the original material, the applied product
may be documented as a separate product subject to the applicable low-emitting criteria,
even if applied off-site.
• If a product is applied to the salvaged or reused material but does not have a separate
manufacturer and cost to the end user, the result is considered a new finished product
that no longer qualifies as a salvaged or reused material and is subject to the applicable
low-emitting criteria.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 267
DOCUMENTATION
Project types Options Paths Documentation
All All All Provide documentation for every product in
the calculator that meets Low-emitting
Materials criteria.
Complete the USGBC Material calculator

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ANSI/BIFMA Standard M7.1 (bifma.org/page/StandardsShortDesc)
• ASTM D5456, 5055
(cdn.standards.iteh.ai/samples/16839/5f4e0f1026274373b51a35284b829e7b/ASTM-D5456-01.pdf)
• CARB ATCM 93120 (arb.ca.gov/resources/documents/airborne-toxic-control-measures)
• CDPH Standard Method v1.2 (cdph.ca.gov/Programs/cls/dehl/ehl/Pages/AQS/VOCs)
• EPA TSCA Title VI (epa.gov/formaldehyde/formaldehyde-emission-standards-composite-wood-
products)
• SCAQMD Rule 113 (aqmd.gov/home/rules-compliance/compliance/vocs/architectural-coatings/tos)
• SCAQMD Rule 1168 (aqmd.gov/docs/default-source/rule-book/reg-xi/rule-1168.pdf)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 268
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

BUILDING PRODUCT SELECTION

AND PROCUREMENT
MRc4
1–10 points

INTENT
To encourage the use of products and materials that have sustainability information available
and that have environmentally, economically, and socially preferable impacts in alignment with
industry momentum. To reward project teams for selecting products from manufacturers who
have disclosed sustainability information about their products and optimized their products
across multiple criteria areas.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–10
Product Categories 1–10

Select nonstructural building products that demonstrate achievement in one or more of five
criteria areas:

• Climate health
• Human health
• Ecosystem health
• Social health and equity
• Circular economy

Products that achieve two or more criteria areas are considered multi-attribute. Products that
achieve higher levels of achievement and/or across additional criteria areas will be given a
higher value in credit calculations.

Achievement is demonstrated through eligible compliant manufacturer product documentation,

which includes third-party product certifications, ecolabels, declarations, and standards. A single
product document can demonstrate multiple benefits and/or achievement levels, or the product
can earn multi-attribute criteria through a combination of separate eligible product documents.

There are three achievement levels for products:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 269
 • Level 1: A product in this level achieves a first step toward sustainability for a criteria
area. Widespread achievement of these practices drives market transformation toward
sustainability outcomes within the criteria area. Products scored at this level earn a 1x
multiplier.
• Level 2: This level represents a leadership position in the marketplace for a given
sustainability attribute. Products at this level are optimized and demonstrate a level of
sustainability that peers aspire to achieve. Products scored at this level earn a 2x
multiplier.
• Level 3: Products that earn this level are elite and represent the forefront of
sustainability. Products scored at this level earn a 3x multiplier.

This credit rewards the selection of eligible interior and enclosure materials from the following
product categories:

• Paints and coatings

• Adhesives and sealants
• Flooring
• Walls
• Ceilings
• Insulation
• Furniture
• Composite wood
• Plumbing fixtures

Eligible products meet the achievement levels and are scored as 1, 2, or 3. These scores are
added across criteria areas to sum to a maximum score of five per product. This cumulative
score is called the product “multi-attribute score”.

Each individual product’s value (cost, area, volume, or unit) is adjusted based on its multi-
attribute score:

Product value × multi-attribute score = Adjusted product value for LEED

To determine total compliant product value per category, follow Equation 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 270
Equation 1. Calculate the multi-attribute adjusted value of a product category
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚-𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐵𝐵 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚-𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ×
� �+� �+
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐶𝐶 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚-𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐷𝐷 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚-𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ×
� �+� �
= 100 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐶𝐶 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐷𝐷 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑜𝑜𝑓𝑓 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)

Any product category adjusted value for LEED that exceeds 100% earns 1 point. Any product
category adjusted value for LEED that exceeds 200% earns two points. Points are awarded for
achievement of whole product categories, up to a maximum of 10 points.

NOTE: Please see the resources section of the credit library for additional details on this credit.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit incentivizes projects to prioritize more environmentally responsible materials and
choose products with multiple eco-friendly attributes. It emphasizes interior materials, such as
paints, coatings, flooring and walls, and considers their impact on the overall environmental
performance of the project.

In this credit, products are evaluated based on how they perform according to five criteria areas:
climate health, human health, ecosystem health, social health and equity, and circular economy.
Within each criteria area, there are three achievement levels that products can meet. Evaluation
will be based on how products demonstrate achievement in each of the criteria areas with
respect to the three achievement levels. A product that reaches achievement levels in multiple
criteria areas is considered a multi-attribute product and will earn a higher value within this
credit.

Selecting Building Products

The goal is to recognize products that are optimized across multiple attributes, including
promoting human and environmental health, supporting regenerative sourcing practices, and
fostering a circular economy. These criteria areas are meant to align with the impact areas in
the Mindful Materials Common Materials Framework (CMF) and the AIA Architecture & Design
(A&D) Materials Pledge.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 271
The AIA A&D Materials Pledge 95 provides a framework to encourage the use of building
materials that demonstrate sustainability throughout their life cycle, including aspects like green
chemistry, responsible sourcing, and end-of-life management. The Mindful Materials CMF 96
standardizes product evaluations, emphasizing environmental and health impacts. AIA has also
introduced reporting requirements, while the CMF is expanding its focus to include data
integration and related advancements. Both initiatives aim to enhance transparency and
optimization in building materials, functioning independently of specific certifications by
providing a structured framework that allows various standards to align with key impact areas.
The five criteria areas help connect different ecolabels, offering a consistent and holistic
approach to material evaluation, where certifications are scored based on disclosure,
verification, and optimization, among other criteria.

Product categories
To achieve a point, the project must demonstrate they meet or exceed the threshold for each
product category. This can be based on cost, surface area, volume, or number of units,
depending upon the measurement methods available for each product category. Project teams
can choose different measurement types to measure progress toward achievement, as long as
the measurement method is consistent in each product category. For example, a project could
use “surface area” to demonstrate achievement of the Flooring category, “number of units” for
the furniture category, and “volume” for the Adhesives and Sealants category.

This credit will be documented by product category using the LEED materials calculator. Note
that this calculator is combined with the MRc3: Low Emitting Materials calculator. Teams are
encouraged to combine submittal reviews and product vetting with the criteria found in both
credits to maximize credit achievement and harmonize product selection, specification, and
documentation processes.

Product multipliers
Multipliers are awarded for products that earn any level of achievement in one or more criteria
areas. A product does not have to be multi-attribute (meet achievement levels in multiple criteria
areas) to have a multiplier. Products that achieve a first step toward sustainability for a criteria
area are categorized as Level 1 and will receive a 1x multiplier. Products in Level 2 represent a
leadership position in the marketplace for a given sustainability attribute and will receive a 2x
multiplier. Products in Level 3 are elite and represent the forefront of sustainability and will
receive a 3x multiplier. These scores are added across criteria areas to add up to a maximum
score of 5 per product. This value is called the multi-attribute score (MAS) for the product.

95
“Materials Pledge”, AIA, accessed March 31, 2025, aia.org/design-excellence/climate-action/zero-carbon/materials-pledge.
96
“Mindful MATERIALS CMF Reference Guide”, Mindful MATERIALS, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.mindfulmaterials.com/cmf-reference-guide.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 272
Multi-attribute scoring of products
Product documentation provided by manufacturers will be eligible for reward in this credit. The
documentation must meet the USGBC-approved list of eligible product documentation.
Individual products selected for compliance with MRc4: Building Product Selection and
Procurement credit may have more than one eligible product documentation. Multiple document
scores can be together for a combined MAS for that product, but only the highest value in each
criteria area will be awarded. Double counting is not allowed.

Multi-attribute adjusted value

Each eligible product earns an MAS based on its level of achievement in each criteria area. The
MAS is multiplied by the product's value to find each product's adjusted product value for LEED.
In a single product category, each eligible product's adjusted value is added together and
divided by the total unadjusted value of all products in the product category. This value is the
product category adjusted value for LEED. This value is how to determine credit achievement.
Any product category adjusted value for LEED that exceeds 100% earns one point. Any product
category adjusted value for LEED that exceeds 200% earns 2 points. Points are awarded for
achievement of whole product categories, up to a maximum of 10 points.

Equation 1. Calculating product category adjusted value

𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐵𝐵 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ×
� �+� �+
= 100 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑑𝑑𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)

Number of product categories

There are a total of nine product categories to consider, which include: paints and coatings,
adhesives and sealants, flooring, walls, ceilings, insulation, furniture, composite wood, and
plumbing fixtures.

Projects can earn points based on the number of categories in which they select eligible
materials that meet the required criteria. Nonstructural products that do not clearly align with
one of the product categories listed below may still be eligible to be included for assessment.
This credit is designed to offer flexibility in evaluating different product types that fall outside the
nine listed categories. This tiered point system incentivizes broader and deeper integration of
sustainable materials across multiple categories, encouraging projects to enhance their overall
environmental performance by incorporating products that support health, sustainability, and
reduced environmental impact. Table 1 lists the product categories and some examples of
products found within the categories.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 273
Table 1. Product categories and example of products
Product Description and example of products
categories
Paints and coatings Paints and coatings are materials applied to surfaces for protection and
decoration. Coatings are generally chosen for their enhanced protective
properties and functional capabilities, whereas paints are chosen for their
aesthetic appeal.

Examples of products:
• Primers
• Sealers
• Topcoats
• Specialized dyes
• Specialized sealers
• Specialized hardeners
• Specialized toppings for concrete floors
• Plasters
Adhesives and Adhesives and sealants are substances used to bond two materials together
sealants and are widely used in construction, manufacturing, and various other
industries. The main difference is that adhesives are focused on creating
strong bonds between surfaces, while sealants are designed to fill gaps and
prevent the infiltration or leakage of fluids, gases, or other substances.

Examples of products:
• Wood bonding adhesive
• Tile bonding adhesive
• Carpet bonding adhesive
• Sealants for joints and gaps in walls, floors, and ceilings
• Specialty adhesives for flooring
• Specialty adhesives for panel
• Sealants for HVAC system
Flooring Flooring refers to the materials used to cover the ground surface of a building
or structure to provide a functional walking surface for building users. The
flooring product category encompasses a wide range of materials, including
both hard and soft surface finishes.

Examples of products:
• Carpet
• Ceramic tile
• Vinyl flooring
• Rubber flooring
• Engineered wood flooring
• Solid wood flooring
• Stone flooring
• Terrazzo flooring
• Laminates flooring
• Raised flooring systems
• Wall base
• Transition strips
• Stair nosing
• Entryway systems
• Area rugs

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 274
 Product Description and example of products
categories
• Wood and composite wood subflooring
• Underlayment
• Other types of floor coverings
Walls Wall products are designed to provide crucial functions within a building and
refer to materials and finishes used to provide structural support, insulation,
and protection within a building. It also helps regulate indoor temperatures and
maintain comfort levels by reducing heat transfer between the indoor and
outdoor environments. Walls serve as barriers for protection against sound,
fire, and moisture.

Examples of products:
• Wall coverings
• Wall paneling
• Wall tile
• Surface wall structures (e.g., gypsum wall board or plaster)
• Cubicle wall
• Curtain wall
• Partition walls
• Trim
• Interior and exterior doors
• Wall frames
• Interior and exterior windows
• Window treatments
Ceilings Ceiling products are materials and systems used to construct, finish, or
enhance the ceilings of a building. Ceilings play a key role in acoustics,
lighting, insulation, and the overall functionality of a space.

Examples of products:
• Ceiling panels
• Ceiling tile
• Surface ceiling structures (e.g., gypsum or plaster)
• Suspended or drop ceiling systems (e.g., grid systems, canopies and
clouds)
• Glazed skylights
Insulation Insulation is any type of material that provides a barrier within the walls,
ceilings, and floors of a home and helps regulate temperature and noise. 97 It
plays an important role in heat transfer and maintaining indoor temperatures in
buildings by providing thermal resistance.

Examples of products:
• Thermal and acoustic boards
• Batts insulation
• Rolls insulation
• Blanket insulation
• Sound attention fire blankets
• Foamed-in place insulation
• Loose-fill insulation
• Blown insulation
• Sprayed insulation

97
“Powering today, Transforming tomorrow”, U.S. Department of Energy, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.energy.gov/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 275
 Product Description and example of products
categories
Furniture Furniture refers to movable objects that support various human activities, such
as seating, eating, sleeping, and storing items. Furniture is both functional and
decorative, playing a significant role in the design, and use of interior spaces. It
can be made from a variety of materials, including wood, metal, plastic, glass,
and fabric, and comes in many styles, shapes, and sizes to suit different needs
and tastes.

Examples of products:
• Seating
• Desks
• Tables
• Filing/storage
• Freestanding cabinetry
• Systems furniture
• Partitions
• Bathroom partitions
• Shelving
• Lockers
• Specialty and custom fixtures
• Furniture furnishing
Composite Wood Composite wood is engineered wood products that are made by combining
wood fibers, particles, or veneers with adhesives or resins to create a material
that is often used in place of solid wood.

Examples of products:
• Particleboard
• Medium density fiberboard
• Hardwood plywood with veneer
• Composite or combination core
• Wood structural panels or structural wood products
Plumbing Fixtures A plumbing fixture is connected to the plumbing system and is designed to
deliver and drain water.

Examples of products:
• Water closets
• Urinals
• Lavatory and kitchen faucets
• Showerheads

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Product All Complete the USGBC Material Calculator.
Categories Provide links or upload compliant documents.
Confirmation that all products were installed, and that
all relevant products in the category were included in
calculations.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 276
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Cradle to Cradle (c2ccertified.org/the-standard/version-4-1)
• Declare (declare.living-future.org)
• Green Circle (greencirclecertified.com/product-certifications)
• FSC (us.fsc.org/en-us/certification)
• HPDC Open Standard (hpd-collaborative.org/hpd-open-standard-all-versions)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 277
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION

WASTE DIVERSION
MRc5
1–4 points

INTENT
To reduce construction and demolition (C&D) waste disposed of in landfills and incineration
facilities and to decrease pollution to the environment. To reduce the environmental impacts and
embodied carbon of manufacturing new materials and products. To delay the need for new
landfill facilities that are often located in frontline communities. To create green jobs and
materials markets for building construction services.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–4
Construction and Demolition Materials Management Plan
AND
Diversion 1–4

Comply with the following requirements:

Construction and Demolition Materials Management Plan

Develop and implement a C&D materials management plan and achieve points through
diversion and recycling.

AND

Diversion (1–4 points)

Follow the materials management plan and provide a final waste management report detailing
all waste generated, including disposal and diversion rates for the project. Calculations can be
by weight or volume but must be consistent throughout. Points are awarded according to Table
1.

Divert C&D waste materials by employing strategies including off-site salvage, source-
separation for single-material recycling, mixed C&D recycling, and industry/manufacturer take-
back programs.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 278
Source-separated materials are considered 100% diverted for credit calculation purposes.
These include:

• Recovered materials sent to a single-material recycler.

• Recovered materials sent for off-site salvage/reuse.
• Materials sent to a qualifying manufacturer or industry take-back program.
• Salvaged materials are valued at twice the diversion rate (200%) of other diverted
materials for credit calculation purposes. Salvaged materials include recovered materials
sent off-site for reuse.
NOTE: Materials reused on-site contribute to MRc1: Interior Materials Reuse.
• Mixed C&D materials sent to a processing facility for recovery must take the facility
average recycling rate. Recycling rates not verified by a third party must assume a
maximum of 35% recovery rate.
• Materials destined for alternative daily cover or incineration/energy recovery are
considered waste (0% diverted).
• Exclude hazardous waste from calculations. Exclude on-site reuse from credit
calculations (include in MRc1: Interior Materials Reuse credit).
• Exclude excavated soil and land-clearing debris from calculations.

Table 1. Points for C&D diversion

Meet any criteria up to a total of 4 points:
Pathway Thresholds Points
Path 1 Divert at least 35% of the total construction and demolition materials. At 1
least 10% of diverted materials must be salvaged or source-separated and
sent to a single-material recycler(s).

Path 2 Divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition materials. At 2
least 20% of diverted materials must be salvaged or source-separated and
sent to a single-material recycler(s).
Path 3 Divert at least 65% of the total construction and demolition materials. At 3
least 30% of diverted materials must be salvaged or source-separated and
sent to a single-material recycler(s)

Path 4 Salvage or source-separate and recycle these targeted materials: clean 1

gypsum, carpet, ceilings, and furniture. Targeted materials diversion must
exceed 10% of the total construction and demolition materials.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit encourages projects to plan and make design changes that reduce waste during
construction. It rewards behavior change that leads to increased quality of recycling and a
higher potential for materials to be recovered during construction.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 279
Construction and Demolition Materials Management Plan
Creating the construction and demolition material management plan early in the design phase
allows sufficient time for planning and coordination, identifying effective strategies, and
establishing contractual agreements to maximize waste prevention and diversion. It also
educates project teams, construction site workers, and waste haulers on the importance of
following the plan for diverting materials from landfills and incinerators successfully. The salvage
assessment featured in MRc4: Building and Materials Reuse is also useful to identify materials
that can be diverted off-site to reuse markets. A well-structured plan can minimize costs and
maximize returns by lowering disposal costs, recovering value from scrap materials, and
identifying materials for reuse.

General contractors are required to develop a customized C&D material management plan for
the deconstruction/demolition and construction phases, and it is recommended that this begins
in the project design phase prior to construction. The plan must include a summary of materials
targeted for diversion from landfills or incineration, and identify recycling haulers, recycling
facilities, data collection, and reporting procedures. Teams must indicate in the plan whether the
selected recycling facilities that process mixed C&D materials have third-party verification of
their recycling rates. Recycling rates not verified by a third party must assume a maximum of
35% diversion rate. The 35% cap serves as a baseline assumption for mixed-material facilities
without verification, reflecting an approximate average recycling rate for facilities in the U.S. If
the project team utilizes a recycling facility for which recycling rates have been independently
certified by an approved third-party process, such as the Recycling Certification Institute (RCI),
then the project team can use the verified recycling rate. This third-party verification of recycling
rates provides assurance that diversion rates are accurate and that materials are actually being
diverted from the landfill. 98

The plan must also include strategies targeted to reduce the total amount of waste generated
during construction, renovation, or demolition activities.

Diversion
WASTE TRACKING
Teams are required to develop a method for tracking the amount of all waste and recyclable
materials generated during demolition activities. Web-based tools can provide contractors with
an easy, step-by-step process for electronically tracking and submitting waste management and
recycling plans. Electronic tracking can also save time and money by identifying materials that
can be recycled, locating the nearest recycling facilities, following recycling progress in real

98
“Recycling Facility Certification Program”, RCI – Recycling Certification Institute, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.recyclingcertification.org/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 280
time, gathering comprehensive statistics, and creating reports regarding waste generation and
recycling for projects. Waste tracking systems can also identify opportunities for recycling, off-
site reuse, and salvage. Examples of waste tracking software include Green Halo 99, Waste
Management’s Diversion and Recycling Tracking Tool (DART) 100, and SmartWaste. 101

DIVERSION RATE
Project teams are required to calculate total waste generated and diverted to determine the
C&D waste diversion rate. Contractors are recommended to keep all tickets/paperwork in a safe
location (if not online) and track the diversion rate periodically (e.g., monthly or bimonthly) so
that adjustments can be made to meet diversion goals. Teams must ensure that calculations for
all materials are done by weight. Many waste management facilities use scales to weigh loads
of materials as they enter and exit the site. However, not all facilities have scales available. In
such cases, a volume-based calculation is used instead. When a facility does not have scales,
use a volume-to-weight conversion factor if volume is provided. If local conversion rates are not
available, projects may use national averages such as those found in Table 1.

Table 1. Default volume to weight conversion factors for common C&D waste
Construction and demolition (C&D) materials
Asphalt Paving (with or without rebar) 1 cubic yard = 773 lbs
Concrete (with or without rebar) 1 cubic yard = 860 lbs
Gypsum Board 1 cubic yard = 467 lbs
Wood 1 cubic yard = 169-268 lbs
Metal 1 cubic yard = 143-225 lbs
Roofing 1 cubic yard = 731-860 lbs.
Mixed C&D (Bulk) 1 cubic yard = 484 lbs
Aggregate (rock) 1 cubic yard = 999 lbs
Cardboard (flat) 1 cubic yard = 106 lbs
Cardboard (baled) 1 cubic yard = 700-1100 lbs
SOURCE: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Volume-to-Weight Conversion Factors, April 2016 102

Excluding Alternative Daily Cover (ADC)

All materials that are recycled, salvaged, reused, or donated are included in the project’s
diversion rate. However, projects must exclude certain materials from the diversion total while
still accounting for them in the total C&D waste calculations. Specifically, alternative daily cover
cannot be counted as diverted waste because it is considered a disposal method rather than a
true form of recycling, as the material is used for landfill operations rather than repurposed into

99
“Green Halo Systems”, Green Halo Systems, Inc., (2025), accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.greenhalosystems.com.
100
“Waste Management Diversion and Recycling Tracking Tool”, Waste Management®, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.wm.com/documents/pdfs-for-services-section/001983_DARTSales%20Sheet%20(9-14-11).pdf
101
“Home page”, Smartwaste, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.smartwasteusa.com.
102
“Volume-to-Weight conversion factors”, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, (2016), accessed March 31, 2025,https://www.
epa.gov/sites/default/files/2016-04/documents/volume_to_weight_conversion_factors_memorandum_04192016_508fnl.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 281
new products. To obtain alternative daily cover (ADC) values from a mixed recycling or certified
facility, request detailed documentation of material processing and their average ADC rates per
month. If they do not have the ADC rates monthly, then quarterly, semi-annual, or annual rates
are acceptable.

Excluding Hazardous Waste, Land-clearing Debris, Soil, and Landscaping

Materials
Hazardous waste, land-clearing debris, soil, and landscaping materials must be excluded from
diversion totals. Soil is excluded because clean soil is rarely landfilled due to its high cost and
other suitable uses, which could skew results, while contaminated soil is typically classified as
hazardous and managed under strict regulations, often requiring specialized disposal. Similarly,
land-clearing debris, such as rocks and trees, is generally not landfilled due to its weight and is
commonly diverted. Hazardous waste must follow regulatory guidelines for safe handling,
disposal in lined landfills, or destruction to prevent environmental harm. This includes proper
identification, labeling, and containment of hazardous materials, as well as transportation by
certified handlers to facilities equipped to manage such waste.

Equation 1. Diversion rate

𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑣𝑣𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = × 100
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

SOURCE-SEPARATED MATERIAL
Project teams must identify materials that will be diverted from landfill and incineration facilities.
Common C&D waste materials include: concrete, metals, brick, wood, and cardboard.
Depending on the project’s scope of work, additional sources may include carpet, ceilings,
gypsum board, and furniture.

The project must account for source separation or salvage as a percentage of the total diversion
in the achievement thresholds in credit Paths 1-3. This represents a percentage of the overall
diversion amount for the project and is not in addition to the overall diversion rate.

Teams are recommended to target source separation where each homogeneous material is
collected and sent to a specific recycling facility (or is sent for reuse). Source separated
materials in this way are not mixed with other materials, thereby significantly reducing the
contamination in recycling streams and leading to higher diversion rates overall for those
recovered materials. Source separation involves segregating recyclable materials from mixed
waste at the point of generation. This practice involves sorting materials such as metals, wood,
and gypsum directly at the construction or demolition site before they are commingled in a
central recycling area or bin. Contractors should consider setting up dedicated areas on

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 282
construction sites and clearly label and monitor bins for each source separated material to
ensure proper collection.

In this credit, teams are rewarded for prioritizing the salvage and/or source separation of
targeted materials: clean gypsum, carpet, ceilings, and furniture. These materials have
significant environmental impacts which make their diversion particularly important for reducing
overall environmental harm. They also have known solutions for reuse and recycling, though
participation rates tend to be low due to logistical constraints. For this reason, the direct
recycling or salvaging of these targeted materials are worth an additional point in Path 4 of this
credit and teams are encouraged to find recovery solutions for these materials.

SALVAGING MATERIALS
Successful salvaging begins with careful planning and requires a thorough audit of the existing
materials and structures to identify which materials can be reclaimed. It is recommended to
conduct an early salvage assessment during building design to determine which tools and
methods will be most valuable and effective for removal and preservation.

Projects that salvage materials off-site must send materials from the job to legitimate off-site
salvage and reuse vendors or markets. Destinations must be locations that either directly reuse
the materials or place them into a marketplace for distribution, sale, or reuse. Materials must not
be stockpiled without the intention of being cycled back into use. Stockpile locations are
acceptable only if they actively work to move materials through reuse cycles and provide
documentation detailing what actions will be taken if the materials remain unused for an
extended period. Even with best intentions, some salvaged materials do not find a home in a
new project for various reasons and ultimately get recycled or disposed. This entropy of
salvaged materials is acceptable so long as the majority of materials sent for salvage are
intended to remain in circulation.

Mixed C&D Materials

Mixed C&D materials or commingled waste is recyclable materials mixed in a single container
that is sorted and processed at an off-site recycling facility.

Projects are required to obtain diversion rates from each commingled or mixed waste
processing facility utilized. Facilities must operate legally and be regulated by state and local
authorities. However, it is important to note that these authorities may not oversee diversion
rates or the reporting of such rates, hence the need for certifications like Recycling Certification
or equivalent (as determined by USGBC) to ensure accurate tracking and reporting of diversion
rates. Project teams are encouraged to use facilities verified by a third party to achieve higher

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 283
diversion rates. Facilities whose recycling rates are not third-party-verified can only claim a
maximum diversion rate of 35%.

CERTIFIED RECYCLING FACILITIES

Projects must utilize a recycling facility that processes and recycles commingled (mixed)
construction and demolition waste materials that have received independent third-party
certification of their recycling rates. Qualified third-party organizations who certify facility
average recycling rates include these MPRs:

• The certification organization follows guidelines for environmental claims and third-party
oversight, including ISO/IEC 17065 103 and relevant portions of the ISO 14000 104 family of
standards.
• The certification organization is an independent third party who continuously monitors
“certified” facilities to ensure that they are operating legally and meeting the MPRs for
facility certification and recycling rates.
• Certification organizations shall certify to a protocol that was developed on a consensus
basis for recycling facility diversion rates that is not in a draft or pilot program.
• The methodology for calculating facility recycling rates must be:
o Developed with construction and demolition recycling industry stakeholders and be
specific to the construction and demolition recycling industry.
o Must include a methodology that is applicable across broad regions (i.e. nationally).
o A published and publicly available standard.
• Data submitted by the facilities to the certification organization in support of the recycling
rate is audited. The audit includes, at a minimum:
o The evaluation of recyclable sales records
o Verification of facility sales into commodity markets
o An assessment of downstream materials and how these materials are managed after
they leave the site
o Monitoring off-site movement of materials, AND
o A review of the facility’s customers’ weight tags information
• Facilities submit data to the certification organization that supports the recycling rate,
such as a mass balance recycling rate (tons in/tons out) for a 12-month period, OR
quarterly sorts completed and verified by an independent third-party entity.
• Breakdown of materials (by type and by weight), including analysis of supporting data
relating to amounts (in tons) and types of materials received and processed at the
facility.

103
“ISO/IEC 17065, Edition 1”, International Organization for Standardization, (2012), accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.iso.org/standard/46568.html.
104
“ISO 14000 family”, International Organization for Standardization, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.iso.org/standards/popular/iso-14000-family.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 284
 • At a minimum, the third-party certifying organization conducts an on-site visit of the
facility for the first-year certification, with subsequent site visits occurring at least once
every two years, unless additional visits are deemed necessary by the certification
organization. The site visit will examine:
o How materials enter, are measured, deposited, processed/sorted, and exit the
facility.
o Conduct interviews with key personnel and discuss how materials are managed after
they leave the site.
o Confirm equipment types and capacity.
o Observe and verify load/materials sorting and accuracy.
o Verify use and accuracy of scales including calibration frequency.
• Diversion rates shall adhere to these requirements:
o Measurements must be based on weight (not volume), using scales.
o Diversion rates must be available on a website and viewable by the public.
o Methodology for calculating diversion and recycling rates must be publicly available
and applicable to national or country-level accounting standards for construction and
demolition waste recycling facilities.
• Facility recycling data submitted to certification program will be analyzed for recycling
rates using a mass balance formula or quarterly sorts completed and verified by an
independent third-party entity.
• Final recycling rate will include overall facility diversion rates with and without
ADC/Beneficial Reuse and will include separate recycling rates by material type as well
as combined average including wood derived fuel/bio-fuel separate from other waste to
energy or incineration end markets.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 285
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Construction and All Provide the Construction and Demolition Materials
Demolition Management Plan.
Materials
Management Plan
Diversion Provide the C&D Waste Diversion calculator.

Summary of waste tickets and confirmation that the

numbers reported correspond to all the tickets for the
project.
Confirmation that ADC is excluded from diverted waste
calculations (but is included in total construction and
demolition waste generated calculations).
Upload documentation with the facility average diversion
rate of any mixed C&D materials sent to a processing
facility. For those projects sending mixed C&D materials
to a processing facility that has third-party verified
recycling rates, include proof of the third-party recycling
rate and facility certification through an approved
program.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• CORR Protocol and Certification of Real Rates: A Method for the Verification of Reuse and
Recycling Rates of Building Materials Reuse and Recycling Facilities, Recycling Certification
Institute (recyclingcertification.org/wp-content/uploads/2013/02/CORR-Protocol-CRR-
1.9.pdf)
• Volume-to-weight Conversion Factors for Solid Waste, U.S. EPA (epa.gov/smm/volume-
weight-conversion-factors-solid-waste)
• Recycling Certification Institute (RCI) (recyclingcertification.org)
• TRUE diversion criteria (true.gbci.org/true-diversion-data-additional-guidance)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 286
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (EQ)
OVERVIEW
Buildings are more than shelters. They offer stable environments with the power to enable
human activities, foster heath, and cultivate safety and comfort. Through the Indoor
Environmental Quality (EQ) credit category, LEED v5 offers a framework to create places where
more people can thrive. The rating system refines well-established practices for air quality,
thermal comfort, daylight and views, and acoustics, and incorporates holistic design
considerations such as accessibility, adaptability, and responsiveness. Using these strategies,
project teams can develop interiors that welcome and care for all occupants more effectively,
adapt to changing conditions, and drive long-term value.

Decarbonization
Decarbonization is integral for creating a more stable and predictable climate, as well as lasting
social and economic value. The reduction in fossil fuel use from energy efficiency and
renewable energy measures has the co-benefit of improved air quality, especially in base
buildings located close to sources like power plants and highways. Through an IDP and
collaborative planning, project teams can create interior spaces that are energy- and resource-
efficient and human-centric.

Quality of life
Human centric design is interwoven throughout EQ to foster diverse environments that enhance
occupant well-being, improve health outcomes, and create more memorable, delightful spaces.
LEED v5 builds on established approaches and also advances new, innovative pathways to
address a broader range of human experiences and bolster occupants’ quality of life.

Good indoor air quality (IAQ) is a cornerstone of the EQ credit category. LEED v5 offers best
practices for responding and adapting to regular or episodic indoor and outdoor air pollution, to
reduce exposures and protect the health of occupants. Key methods to achieve that goal
include improved filtration (EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality), designing management modes for
wildfire smoke or respiratory diseases (EQc4: Resilient Spaces), and testing and monitoring air
quality (EQc5: Air Quality Testing and Monitoring).

EQ credits provide additional options to support the well-being of workers and users of the
space, including older adults and children, caregivers, and people with disabilities. For example,
EQc3: Accessibility and Inclusion encourages careful design with best practices for
physiological and neurological inclusivity, while EQp1: Construction Management outlines
comprehensive construction management practices to reduce construction workers’ exposure to

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 287
harmful pollutants and extreme heat. Through these and other strategies, occupants benefit
from better health and cognitive outcomes, and increased levels of comfort and satisfaction.

Together, EQ credits and prerequisites help indoor spaces remain conducive to health and well-
being even during adverse conditions.

Ecosystem conservation and restoration

Finally, the EQ category emphasizes the importance of dynamic spaces that foster emotional
connections between people and their environments. With credit strategies that enhance access
to high-quality daylight and views, as well as biophilic design, EQ credits incentivize ecological
placemaking. Aligning building systems with natural environmental patterns — for example,
through lighting or thermal patterns — can contribute to a positive occupant experience while
also improving building efficiency (EQc2: Occupant Experience).

EQ prerequisites and credits empower project owners and occupants to create interior spaces
where occupants can experience a sense of belonging and stewardship toward their built
environment, community, and natural world.

CROSS-CUTTING ISSUES
Floor area calculations and floor plans
For many of the credits in the EQ category, compliance is based on the percentage of floor area
that meets the credit requirements. In general, floor areas and space categorization should be
consistent across EQ credits. Any excluded spaces or discrepancies in floor area values should
be explained and highlighted in the documentation. See Space Categorization for additional
information on which floor area should be included in which credits.

Space categorization
The EQ category focuses on the interaction between the occupants of the building and the
indoor spaces in which they spend their time. For this reason, it is important to identify which
spaces are used by the occupants, including any visitors (transients) and what activities they
perform in each space. Depending on the space categorization, the credit requirements may or
may not apply (Table 1).

OCCUPIED VERSUS UNOCCUPIED SPACE

All spaces in a building must be categorized as either occupied or unoccupied. Occupied
spaces are enclosed areas intended for human activities. Unoccupied spaces are places
intended primarily for other purposes; they are occupied only occasionally and for short
periods of time–in other words, they are inactive areas. Examples of spaces that are
typically unoccupied include the following:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 288
 o Mechanical and electrical rooms
o Egress stairway or dedicated emergency exit corridor
o Closets in a residence (but a walk-in closet is occupied)
o Data center floor area, including a raised floor area
o Inactive storage area in a warehouse or distribution center

For areas with equipment retrieval, the space is unoccupied only if the retrieval is occasional.

Regularly versus nonregularly occupied spaces

Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied, based
on the duration of the occupancy. Regularly occupied spaces are enclosed areas where people
normally spend time, defined as more than one hour of continuous occupancy per person per
day, on average; the occupants may be seated or standing as they work, study, or perform
other activities. For spaces that are not used daily, the classification should be based on the
time a typical occupant spends in the space when it is in use. For example, a computer
workstation may be largely vacant throughout the month, but when it is occupied, a worker
spends one to five hours there. It would then be considered regularly occupied because that
length of time is sufficient to affect the person’s well-being, and they would have an expectation
of thermal comfort and control over the environment.

Occupied spaces that do not meet the definition of regularly occupied are nonregularly
occupied. That is, these are areas that people pass through or use an average of less than one
hour per person per day.

Examples of regularly occupied spaces include the following:

• Airplane hangar
• Auditorium
• Auto service bay
• Bank teller station
• Conference room
• Correctional facility cell or day room
• Data center network operations center
• Data center security operations center
• Dorm room
• Exhibition hall
• Facilities staff office
• Facilities staff workstation
• Food service facility dining area

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 289
 • Food service facility kitchen area
• Gymnasium
• Hospital autopsy and morgue
• Hospital critical-care area
• Hospital dialysis and infusion area
• Hospital exam room
• Hospital operating room
• Hospital patient room
• Hospital recovery area
• Hospital staff room
• Hospital surgical suite
• Hospital waiting room
• Hospital diagnostic and treatment area
• Hospital laboratory
• Hospital nursing station
• Hospital solarium
• Hospital waiting room
• Hotel front desk
• Hotel guest room
• Hotel housekeeping area
• Hotel lobby
• Information desk
• Meeting room
• Natatorium
• Open-office workstation
• Private office
• Reception desk
• Residential bedroom
• Residential dining room
• Residential kitchen
• Residential living room
• Residential office, den, workroom
• Retail merchandise area and associated circulation
• Retail sales transaction area
• School classroom
• School media center
• School student activity room
• School study hall

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 290
 • Shipping and receiving office
• Study carrel
• Warehouse materials-handling area

Examples of nonregularly occupied spaces include the following:

• Break room
• Circulation space
• Copy room
• Corridor
• Fire station apparatus bay
• Hospital linen area
• Hospital medical record area
• Hospital patient room bathroom
• Hospital short-term charting space
• Hospital prep and cleanup area in surgical suite
• Interrogation room
• Lobby (except hotel lobby)*
• Locker room
• Residential bathroom
• Residential laundry area
• Residential walk-in closet
• Restroom
• Retail fitting area
• Retail stock room
• Shooting range
• Stairway
*Hotel lobbies are considered regularly occupied because people often congregate, work on laptops, and spend more time there
than they do in an office building lobby.

Table 1. Space types in EQ credits

Space Category Prerequisite or credit
Occupied space Fundamental Air Quality
Enhanced Air Quality
Occupant Experience
Air Quality Testing and Monitoring
Regularly occupied space Occupant Experience
Enhanced Air Quality
Resilient Spaces
Air Quality Testing and Monitoring
Quiet space Occupant Experience
Classroom and core learning spaces Occupant Experience

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 291
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Prerequisite and Restoration

CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
EQp1
REQUIRED

INTENT
To promote the well-being of construction workers and building occupants by minimizing
environmental quality problems associated with construction and renovation.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Construction Management

Develop and implement construction management practices for the construction and
preoccupancy phases of the building. The practices must address all of the following:

• No smoking: Prohibit smoking during construction except in designated smoking areas

located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the building. Install signage that prohibits
smoking during construction.
• Extreme heat protection: Implement measures that protect construction workers from
extreme heat.
• HVAC protection: Keep contaminants out of the HVAC system. Do not run permanently
installed equipment, if possible, or maintain proper filtration if it is used. Replace all air
filtration media after completion of construction and before occupancy. Confirm that
testing and balance work is completed with new filtration.
• Source control: Keep sources of contaminants out of the building and have a plan to
eliminate any that are introduced.
o Store carpets, acoustical ceiling panels, fabric wall coverings, insulation, upholstery
and furnishings, and other absorptive materials in a designated area protected from
moisture damage.
• Pathway interruption: Prevent circulation of contaminated air and when cutting
concrete or wood, sanding drywall, installing VOC-emitting materials, or performing other
activities that affect indoor air quality in other workspaces.
o Isolate areas of work to prevent contamination of other spaces, whether they are
finished or not. Seal doorways, windows, or tent off areas as needed using
temporary barriers.
o Use walk-off mats at entryways to reduce introduced dirt and pollutants.
o Use dust guards and collectors on saws and other tools.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 292
 • Housekeeping: Maintain a clean jobsite. Use vacuum cleaners with high-efficiency
particulate filters and use sweeping compounds or wetting agents for dust control when
sweeping.
• Scheduling: Sequence construction activities to reduce air quality problems. For
renovation projects, coordinate construction activities to minimize or eliminate disruption
of operations in occupied areas.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Using established best practices during construction can protect construction workers from poor
air quality and extreme heat.

The prerequisite requires projects to develop and implement construction management

practices for the buildings’ construction and preoccupancy phases. The required practices are
primarily adapted from the SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction,
2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3. 105 The extreme heat requirement is
adapted from OSHA prevention guidance for preventing heat-related illness. 106

The practices must address all the following criteria:

No smoking
Prohibiting smoking during construction supports a healthier and safer work environment.
Smoking is a fire hazard. It creates odors and elevated levels of airborne contaminants that are
associated with respiratory, cardiovascular, and other health problems. 107 Although cigarette
smoking has declined among U.S. workers overall, its prevalence remains high among
construction workers. 108 Prohibiting smoking is also beneficial for preserving the integrity and
longevity of building materials that can absorb smoke, such as insulation and drywall.

Projects must prohibit smoking on the entire jobsite during the construction phase except in
designated outdoor smoking areas. This applies to conventional cigarettes (cigarettes, cigars,
pipes), cannabis (medical or recreational), and electronic smoking devices (e-cigarettes).

105
“SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction”, SMACNA, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.store.smacna.org/iaq-guidelines-for-occupied-buildings-under-construction.
106
“Heat Prevention”, OSHA, accessed Feb 3 2025, https://www.osha.gov/heat-exposure/prevention.
107
Öberg, Mattias et al., “Worldwide burden of disease from exposure to second-hand smoke: a retrospective analysis of data from
192 countries”, The Lancet, Volume 377, Issue 9760 (2011): 139–146.
108
Syamlal, G., King, B. A., & Mazurek, J. M. “Tobacco product use among workers in the construction industry United States,
2014‐2016”. American Journal of Industrial Medicine, 61(11) (2018): 939–951, https://www.doi.org/10.1002/ajim.22907.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 293
Projects may elect to provide an outdoor designated smoking area on-site. An outdoor smoking
area can be a covered pavilion with safe disposal bins for cigarettes. The area must be at least
25 feet (7.5 meters) away from the building.

TEMPORARY SIGNAGE
Projects must communicate the no-smoking policy with temporary signage that is
displayed until construction completion. The exact design and content of the signs is up
to the project team and can be tailored to the project location and circumstances,
including accommodation of safety sign guidelines.

Protection from extreme heat

Construction workers exposed to hot environments are at risk for heat-related illnesses and
injuries. 109 Construction management practices must address actions that employers and
workers can take to prevent heat-related illnesses, which include heat stroke, exhaustion,
cramps, and fainting.

Preventive measures include providing cool, shaded, or air-conditioned areas for rest,
implementing required rest breaks and scheduling labor-intensive activities in cooler parts of the
day. Scheduling must accommodate reduced workdays for workers who are new to working in
warm environment (or returning to work) and during seasonal changes or abrupt weather
changes. It is highly recommended to provide workers with proper attire, like light-colored,
breathable clothing.

Train workers on extreme heat measures to increase awareness and likelihood of successful
implementation. Refer to IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment and IPp2: Human Impact
Assessment findings to ensure the training and preventive measures are guided by a thorough
understanding of the social context of the local community and workforce.

HVAC protection
Construction activities release contaminants that may unintentionally enter the building’s HVAC
system. Safeguard against this by avoiding use of HVAC systems during construction or, when
use of the system is necessary, by ensuring the equipment has proper filtration during use.

Replace all HVAC filters prior to occupancy and after all construction activities are complete.
Additionally, complete all tests and balance efforts after installing the new filters.

109
“Heat stress and workers”, Heat Stress, July 11, 2024, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.cdc.gov/niosh/heat-
stress/about/index.html#:~:text=Workers%20who%20are%20exposed%20to,heat%20storage%20within%20the%20body.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 294
Source control
Building materials that are exposed to the environmental conditions during construction can be
soiled or degraded prior to installation. Proper storage and material handling can ensure they
are protected from contaminants, dirt, debris, and moisture during the construction process.

If there is adequate storage capacity on-site, consider keeping materials in a separate,

ventilated, or conditioned building or storage area. Keep materials away from heavy traffic areas
to limit exposure to dirt, debris, and dust. Absorptive materials like carpet, ceiling panels, wall
coverings, and insulation can trap moisture, leading to mold and mildew growth. Cover or raise
these materials off the floor.

Pathway interruption
Certain construction activities, such as cutting, sawing, sanding, and painting, can result in
emissions of airborne contaminants into the interior space. Their migration to adjacent spaces
can result in inadvertent exposure to contaminated air, dust, debris, and odors. Proper hazard
identification and appropriate control measures are necessary to safeguard health.

Control measures include the use of personal protective equipment and the use of temporary
barriers to isolate emissions and prevent their spread into adjacent spaces. Examples of
isolation techniques include sealing doors and windows, tenting areas with high levels of
activity, or using dust guards or collectors on power tools. Additionally, when installing
manufactured countertops, implement dust control measures and use personal protective
equipment when sawing or sanding. 110

For entryways and indoor pathways between construction areas and other interior spaces, use
walk-off mats to minimize migration of dirt and pollutants into clean areas.

Housekeeping
Regular and thorough housekeeping can help control or eliminate workplace hazards. 111

SWEEPING
Sweep finished and hard surfaces using sweeping compounds or wetting agents, which
can be oil-based, gritted, or gritless, to help control dust.

110
“Worker Exposure to Silica during Countertop Manufacturing, Finishing and Installation”, OSHA NIOSH Hazard Alert (Number
2015-106) accessed March 31, 2025, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), https://www.osha.gov/sites/default/files/publications/OSHA3768.pdf.
111
“Workplace Housekeeping”, Canadian Centre for Occupational Health and Safety, accessed February 10 2024,
https://www.ccohs.ca/oshanswers/hsprograms/housekeeping.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 295
 VACUUMS
Use vacuums with high-efficiency filters to trap fine particles that would otherwise
escape through the vacuum’s exhaust for a cleaner jobsite with better air quality.

Scheduling
Construction activities can be sequenced to minimize exposure and resulting adverse impacts
for workers not directly involved in the construction activity.

Schedule construction activities that generate significant dust or emissions at different times or
places. For example, schedule drywall finishing and carpet installation for different days or
different sections of the building.

Whenever possible, install absorptive-finish materials after wet-applied materials have fully
cured. For example, install carpet and ceiling tile after paints and stains are completely dry.

In currently occupied buildings, consider relocating occupants of the space before disruptive
activities are conducted in those areas, to reduce their exposure to air and noise pollution.
Consider communicating the construction activity schedule with workers and occupants (if the
building is operational). This may minimize foot traffic and encourage avoidance of the area, as
necessary and feasible.

Schedule high-intensity activities during cool hours of the day and plan for work/rest periods and
other scheduling modifications in line with the extreme heat protections.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All LEED v5 Construction Management Implementation
Checklist.
LEED v5 Construction Management Implementation
Checklist Affirmation at completion of construction.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA), IAQ
Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA
008–2008 (Chapter 3) (store.smacna.org/iaq-guidelines-for-occupied-buildings-under-
construction)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 296
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Prerequisite and Restoration

FUNDAMENTAL AIR QUALITY

EQp2
REQUIRED

INTENT
To design for above-average indoor air quality (IAQ) to support occupant health and well-being.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Investigate Regional and Local Air Quality
AND
Ventilation and Filtration Design
AND
Entryway System Designs

Comply with the following requirements:

Investigate Regional and Local Air Quality

Investigate outdoor air quality in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022, Sections 4.1–
4.3.

AND

Ventilation and Filtration Design

Meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022, Sections 5 and 6. Use the ventilation
rate procedure, the IAQ procedure, the natural ventilation procedure, or a combination thereof.
Comply with the following additional provisions:

Filtration
Each central HVAC system within the project’s scope of work that supplies outdoor air and/or
recirculated air to regularly occupied spaces must meet one of the following:

• Minimum efficiency reporting value of 13, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard

52.2-2017; OR
• Equivalent filtration media class of ePM1 50%, as defined by ISO 16890-2016,
“Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation — Determination of the Filtration
Performance.”

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 297
 • In-room air-cleaning systems.
o Use systems tested for effectiveness and safety per ASHRAE Standard 241-2023,
Section 7.4 and Normative Appendix A. If treating for particles and gases, use
systems tested for effectiveness per ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Addendum N. If treating
for infectious aerosols, use systems tested for effectiveness per ASHRAE Standard
241-2023, Section 7.

Outdoor air measurement

Provide outdoor airflow measurement devices for all mechanical ventilation systems in the
project scope of work with outdoor air intake flow greater than 1,000 cfm (472 L/s).

Healthcare
• For healthcare spaces, meet the requirements of Sections 6–10 of ASHRAE Standard
170-2021 as applicable.

AND

Entryway System Designs

Install permanent entryway systems to capture dirt and particulates entering the building at
primary exterior entrances within the project scope of work. There is no length requirement for
entryway systems.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires the project team to research regional and local air quality and provide
ventilation systems and design elements that effectively support air quality within the building.
Healthcare and residential projects have additional considerations.

Investigate Regional and Local Air Quality

IAQ is significantly influenced by outdoor air quality, which can be highly localized, varying over
time, season, and throughout the project site.

To understand outdoor air quality for the project, regional air quality and local air quality must be
investigated, considering seasonal variations. ASHRAE 62.1 112 provides a template for
documenting this investigation. In many regions, spring months have higher pollen levels from
flowering plants and trees. Summer months in some dry, hot regions have higher levels of
PM2.5 due to wildfires and ozone from photochemical smog. Air quality for the project’s location

112
“ASHRAE 62.1”, ASHRAE, accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standards-62-1-62-
2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 298
will likely change over time, due to climate change. For example, the periods with higher pollen
levels and wildfires may increase or intensify. For this reason, information collected during the
IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment should be included in this investigation.

REGIONAL AIR QUALITY

Regional air quality is partially determined by reviewing compliance with national ambient air
quality standards. In the U.S., air quality monitoring data is available to determine the region’s
status relative to acceptable levels for six regional outdoor air quality pollutants (particulate
matter, carbon monoxide, ozone, nitrogen dioxide, lead, sulfur dioxide).

LOCAL AIR QUALITY

Local air quality is typically determined through observations by walking around the project site
and reviewing the neighborhood context. Examples of items to survey include facilities on-site
and on adjacent properties, description of sources of vehicle exhaust on-site and adjacent
properties, and identification of potential contaminant sources on the site and from adjoining
properties. Most of this information will be gathered in the IPp2: Human Impact Assessment.

The results of the outdoor air quality investigation inform the design of critical elements of the
mechanical system, including the air intake locations on the building, the filtration levels used, or
the use of air-cleaning devices. The investigation also helps determine exhaust and equipment
locations to minimize impacts to neighboring buildings or building occupants.

Ventilation and Filtration

ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022 is the referenced ventilation standard for most commercial
buildings. The Standard establishes minimum ventilation requirements and other measures for
IAQ that is acceptable to human occupants and that minimizes adverse health effects.

The standard involves designing for IAQ using one of three available procedures: the ventilation
rate procedure (VRP), indoor air quality procedure (IAQP), or the natural ventilation procedure
(NVP). Any combination of options may be used for compliance with this prerequisite.

IAQP VERIFICATION
If the IAQP is used to comply with this prerequisite, an extra verification step after building
completion is required that involves air quality testing and conducting a subjective occupant
evaluation. These verification steps are outlined in ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Section 7.3 IAQP
Verification.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 299
FILTRATION
This prerequisite has additional filtration requirements beyond those in ASHRAE 62.1. MERV 13
filtration (and ePM1 50%) is becoming standard practice, and most HVAC systems can be
designed to easily accommodate this level of filtration. The filtration requirements apply to all
central HVAC systems that supply outdoor air, recirculated air, or outdoor air and recirculated
air to regularly occupied spaces. Projects that use base building ventilation systems will need to
confirm that those systems comply.

MERV 13 filtration is not required for systems that supply air to warehouses or other areas
addressed in the ASHRAE exemption for outdoor air treatment

Exemption to 6.1.4
Systems supplying air for enclosed parking garages, warehouses, storage
rooms, janitor’s closets, trash rooms, recycling areas, and
shipping/receiving/distribution areas are exempt.

An alternative approach that allows in-room air cleaning systems to be used offers flexibility in
meeting this prerequisite requirement for situations where design constraints make the central
system-level filtration requirement infeasible or impractical.

AIR CLEANING SYSTEMS

Air cleaning systems may be used in the design to meet the prerequisite requirements. Before
selecting the air cleaning system, ensure the manufacturer has a safety testing report and
manufacturer certification that the product is safe. Verified effectiveness values also provided by
the manufacturer must be used in the design calculations as applicable.

• Safety. All air cleaning systems require safety testing according to ASHRAE Standard
241-2023, Section 7.4 and Normative Appendix A. This standard has the most up-to-
date language to assess safety, which includes addressing chemical emissions and
some potential byproducts, ultraviolet radiation, combustion byproducts, and noise
generated during operation. Testing is conducted in a specialized test chamber with
specific environmental controls. 113
• Effectiveness for particle filtration efficiency or gaseous removal efficiency. For
systems that treat particles and gases, use only systems that have a verified
effectiveness determined according to ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022, Addendum N.
• Effectiveness for infectious aerosols. For systems being selected to treat infectious
aerosols and meet the minimum equivalent clean airflow rates outlined in ASHRAE

113
“Control of Infectious Aerosols”, ASHRAE, (2023), accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.ashrae.org/file%20library/technical%20resources/standards%20and%20guidelines/standards%20addenda/241_2023_a
_20241021.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 300
 241-2023, Section 5.1 for compliance with the Resilient Spaces credit Option 2 —
Management Mode for Respiratory Diseases treat infectious aerosols, use only systems
that have a verified effectiveness according to ASHRAE Standard 241-2023, Section 7.

OUTDOOR AIR MEASUREMENT

With proper outdoor airflow monitoring, facility managers can identify ventilation issues and
correct problems before they impact IAQ. This credit requires airflow monitoring for larger
systems within the project scope of work (more than 1,000 cfm (472 L/s) of outside air). Airflow
monitoring is encouraged for smaller systems but not required.

Specific alarm and system control capabilities are not addressed in this prerequisite and may be
designed to suit the project’s specific needs.

Healthcare Projects and Spaces

• Healthcare projects must comply with ASHRAE Standard 170-2021 for ventilation design
and filtration requirements. ASHRAE 170, Table 7-1 specifies the minimum outdoor air
changes per hour (ACH) and minimum total ACH for each healthcare space type. Both
requirements must be met. For space types not covered in Standard 170, use ASHRAE
Standard 62.1-2022.

Entryway Systems
Permanent entryway systems prevent dirt and particulates from entering the building. The
entryway system requirement for this prerequisite is intentionally broad to accommodate more
project situations and to ensure feasibility as a prerequisite requirement.

Acceptable entryway systems include permanently installed grates, grilles, slotted systems that
allow for cleaning underneath, or rollout mats.

Entryway systems are required at all primary exterior entrances within the LEED project scope
of work.

PRIMARY VS. NONPRIMARY ENTRANCES

Primary exterior entrances are the main designated entry points to the building. These
entrances typically have the most visibility and accessibility. Design elements, like
canopies or biophilic elements, often attract entry.

Nonprimary entrances are less visible and often have limited access or are used less
frequently. A nonprimary entrance includes service access points or lift lobbies, side or

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 301
 back doors, garage/parking level entries, emergency exits, connections between
concourses, and atrium entries.

While the prerequisite only requires entryway systems at primary exterior entrances
within the LEED project scope of work, projects may benefit from installing entryway
systems at all exterior entrances of the building.

ENTRYWAY SYSTEM LENGTH AND DESIGN

There are no length requirements for the entryway systems, but it is highly
recommended to utilize the best practice length of at least 10 feet (3 m.) in the primary
direction of travel, which allows for approximately two full steps per shoe from an
average person.

Design the entryway system to accommodate and withstand specific climate conditions.
Areas with high precipitation, for example, may need more absorbent mats made with
mold- and mildew-resistant materials. If using rollout mats, consider selecting ones that
have a solid backing. A nonporous backing captures dirt and moisture and helps prevent
contaminants from collecting underneath the mat.

Regular cleaning and maintenance will extend the integrity of the entryway system.
Projects are encouraged to provide routine care for these systems, which is typically
weekly.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Results of regional and local air quality investigation, at
minimum, date and time of observations, a description of the
site, observed odors or irritants, and conclusions regarding
acceptability of the outdoor air quality.
Indication of whether the building is in an area where the
national guideline is exceeded (outdoor air treatment is required
per ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Section 6.1.4).
Calculation documents for mechanical VRP, NVP and IAQP.
Air cleaning systems (if used): supporting documentation for
safety and effectiveness.
IAQ Procedure: Air Quality Test Plan and Occupant Survey
Methodology
IAQP: Completed air quality testing report including time, date,
testing methods complying with credit requirements, results and
limits of the tested contaminants in all locations, and lab
accreditation scope for VOCs.
IAQ Procedure: Subjective Occupant Evaluation Results.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 302
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Floor plans or photos of entryway systems.
Design documents confirming filter grade and implementation.
Control diagrams showing outdoor air measurement devices
(where required).
Confirmation the outdoor air measurement devices measures
airflow rates.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE standard 62.1-2022 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standards-62-1-62-
2)
• ASHRAE standard 62.2-2022 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standards-62-1-62-
2)
• ASHRAE standard 170-2021 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/standards-and-
guidelines/standards-addenda/ansi-ashrae-ashe-standard-170-2017-ventilation-of-health-
care-facilities)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 303
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Prerequisite and Restoration

NO SMOKING
EQp3
REQUIRED

INTENT
To minimize exposure to tobacco smoke, smoke from tobacco substitutes or cannabis, and
vehicle emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors N/A
Option 1. Locations With Smoking Prohibitions
OR
Option 2. Projects Located in Buildings Where Smoking Is Not Prohibited
by Law

Option 1. Buildings with Full Smoking Prohibitions

Locate the project in a building in which smoking inside the building is prohibited by law or by
the landlord, and the no-smoking policy is communicated to all building occupants according to
the law or with permanently installed signage.

Prohibit smoking outside the project, except in designated smoking areas located at least 25
feet (7.5 meters), or the maximum extent allowable by local codes, from all exterior entries,
outdoor air intakes, and operable windows to the project.

OR

Option 2. Buildings with Partial Smoking Prohibitions

Prohibit smoking in the project spaces.

Smoking must also be prohibited in all common areas used by the project occupants and any
areas of the building served by the same HVAC system as the project. Ensure that smoke
cannot migrate by either mechanical or natural ventilation into the project spaces.

Communicate the no-smoking policy to occupants of the project. Have in place provisions for
enforcement or no-smoking signage.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 304
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires locating the project in a building with smoking restrictions and
prohibiting smoking inside the project spaces and near building openings.

Smoke-free policies effectively reduce tobacco use, protect people from secondhand smoke
exposure, prevent tobacco-related illnesses and deaths, and help more people successfully quit
smoking.

Smoking is prohibited for conventional cigarettes (cigarettes, cigars, pipes), cannabis (medical
or recreational), and electronic smoking devices (e-cigarettes). The intent is to keep the air
inside the building free from pollutants and contaminants associated with smoking.

Exclusions
This prerequisite is not intended to prohibit or deter indigenous or other cultural
ceremonial practices (e.g., smudging) which may include the combustion of
tobacco and other ceremonial materials. LEED projects that accommodate
cultural ceremonial practices may still pursue this prerequisite.

Option 1. Locations with Smoking Prohibitions

INDOOR SMOKING
Smoking must be strictly prohibited inside the building at all times. Evidence of this prohibition
can be obtained via a policy from the owner, facility manager, or smoke-free indoor air law.

OUTDOOR SMOKING
Smoking must be prohibited on the project site except in areas specifically designated for
smoking. No smoking is permitted within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of all building openings, such as
doors, windows, and ventilation intakes, to minimize the likelihood of smoke entering the
building. Exterior spaces used by any tenants in the building must be no-smoking. For example,
if the LEED project occupies second-floor space in a building with multiple tenants, smoking is
not allowed within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of any opening for the entire building.

Emergency exits do not qualify as building openings if the doors are alarmed, as alarmed doors
will rarely be opened. Emergency exits without alarms qualify as building openings.

Smoking is not allowed in programmable spaces (e.g., outdoor cigar lounges or casino areas,
courtyards, outdoor cafes or sidewalk seating, or space used for business purposes).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 305
A designated smoking area is a specific outdoor location where smoking is permitted. This can
be an unenclosed pavilion with safe disposal bins for cigarettes. Business cannot be conducted
in this area, but design strategies to make people feel comfortable, such as covered seating, are
encouraged.

NO-SMOKING SIGNAGE
The project determines the placement and design of signage, allowing for flexibility to address
site-specific considerations and to accommodate existing signage that may already be in place.

When communicating a no-smoking policy, use signage that includes illustrations, photographs,
or clear and concise wording. Consider using explicit language such as “No smoking allowed
within xx feet” or “Smoking is allowed in designated smoking areas only.” Signs should clearly
indicate the designated smoking areas.

Option 2. Projects Located in Buildings Where Smoking is not Prohibited by

Law
This option is available for projects located in areas without no- smoking laws to accommodate
situations where the project owner has limited control to prohibit smoking activities in another
tenant’s spaces or in cases where the project owner is unable to acquire necessary
documentation to confirm compliance with Option 1. Prohibiting indoor smoking is the only way
to fully eliminate the health risks associated with smoking. When possible, Commercial Interior
projects should work with the building owner to develop policies compliant with Option 1.

INDOOR SMOKING
Smoking must be strictly prohibited inside the project spaces at all times. Evidence of this
prohibition can be obtained via a policy from the owner or facility manager or smokefree indoor
air law.

The building must also have in place a policy to prohibit smoking in all common areas such as
lobbies, corridors, and other communal spaces and any areas of the building served by the
same HVAC system as the project. Teams should consider implementing ventilation barriers or
pressurization techniques to prevent smoke migrations between spaces. Projects should ensure
proper air-sealing to prevent smoke migration through natural ventilation paths.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 306
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Both All Confirmation of project scope (the project includes/does not
include any exterior entries, outdoor air intakes within 25 ft.
(7.5 m.) of an occupant-accessible area (such as roof,
sidewalk, balcony), operable windows, designated smoking
areas, a dedicated HVAC system; the project is/is not located
in a building that prohibits smoking inside the whole building
by landlord and/or law).
Option 1. All If applicable, documents identifying the location of building
Buildings entries, alarmed emergency exits, outdoor air intakes,
with Full operable windows, designated smoking areas, signage
Smoking communicating the indoor and outdoor smoking and vehicle
Prohibitio idling prohibitions to occupants, signage key/schedule.
ns Excerpt of project’s no-smoking policy or indication of
smokefree indoor air law.
If not documented by law excerpt, evidence that the base
building indoor no-smoking policy is communicated to all
building occupants with permanently installed signage (for
example, photographs with date/time/location stamp and a
key plan documenting all smoking prohibition signage installed
by landlord).
Documents identifying the location of building entries, alarmed
emergency exits, outdoor air intakes, operable windows,
designated smoking areas, signage communicating the indoor
and outdoor smoking prohibitions to occupants, signage
key/schedule.
Option 2. All Excerpt of project’s no-smoking policy or indication of
Projects smokefree indoor air law.
With Evidence that smoking is prohibited in all common areas used
Partial by the project occupants (for example, photographs with
Smoking date/time/location stamp documenting signage posted by the
Prohibitio landlord in all common areas used by the project occupants).
ns Evidence that ETS cannot migrate by natural ventilation into
the project spaces.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 307
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED AIR QUALITY

EQc1
1–2 points

INTENT
To design for increased indoor air quality (IAQ) to better protect the health of building
occupants.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–2
Option 1. Increased Ventilation 2
OR
Option 2. Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Design 1
OR
Option 3. Verification of Ventilation and Filtration 1

Design the project to exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Section 6. If using the
ventilation rate procedure to comply with EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality, use Option 1 or
Option 2; if using the indoor air quality procedure (IAQP), use Option 2.

Option 1. Increased Ventilation (2 points)

Increase breathing zone outdoor air ventilation rates by at least 15% above the minimum rates
(for 1 point, or 30% for 2 points) as determined in EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality.

Increased outdoor air rates should be provided to 95% of all regularly occupied spaces.

OR

Option 2. Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Design (1 point)

In addition to the design compounds and design limits outlined in ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Tables 6-
5 and 6-6, design and verify enhanced IAQ using the lower design limits listed below in Table 1.

Table 1. Additional design limits for enhanced IAQ design

Design compound or PM2.5 Enhanced IAQP design limit*

PM2.5 10 ug/m3
Formaldehyde 20 µg/m³
Ozone 10 ppb

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 308
OR

Option 3. Verification of Ventilation and Filtration (1 point)

For spaces receiving mechanical ventilation from base building systems, measure the total
quantity of outdoor air delivered to the project and verify the results are within 10% of the rates
reported in EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality, and outlined in the current facilities requirements
and operations and maintenance plan. Measurements shall quantify the amount of outdoor air
for each base building air-handling unit serving the project, and account for worst-case
conditions.

NOTE: This path is only applicable for tenant improvements to a previously occupied space and
is not applicable for initial build-out.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit incentivizes designing systems that continuously provide enhanced air quality during
building occupancy. For measures that provide enhanced air quality only in specific
circumstances, refer to EQc4: Resilient Spaces for more guidance.

Both options in this credit utilize measures described in ASHRAE Guideline 42-2023, Enhanced
IAQ in Commercial and Institutional Buildings 114, with the goal of providing enhanced IAQ.
Projects are encouraged to address additional measures from ASHRAE Guideline 42 beyond
those included in this credit.

NOTE: If the VRP is being used for EQp2 Fundamental Air Quality, it is expected Option 1 for
this credit will be used. However, it is not required. Review both options and choose the one that
most aligns with your project goals for enhanced air quality.

Option 1. Increased Ventilation

Providing additional outdoor airflow, above the minimum requirements for ventilation and
building pressurization, can further dilute and reduce indoor air pollutants. Research has shown
increased ventilation may improve cognitive performance and associated productivity and
income, reduce absenteeism in commercial offices115, and improve sleep quality in residential
applications. 116

114
“ASHRAE Guideline 42-2023, Enhanced IAQ in Commercial and Industrial Buildings”, ASHRAE, accessed March 31, 2025,
https://webstore.ansi.org/standards/ashrae/ashraeguideline422023?srsltid=AfmBOopTadTVeaxVchSAjaJzniAV9cO8JOiwPzY3gJ-
KpThsXYn_SxOQ.
115
Licina, D., Wargocki, P. et al. “The future of IEQ in green building certifications”, (2021), Buildings and Cities, 2(1), pp. 907–927,
DOI: https://doi.org/10.5334/bc.148.
116
Wargocki, P., Akimoto, M. et al. “Ventilation and sleep quality”, AIVC, (2023), accessed March 31, 2025,
https://www.aivc.org/resource/ventilation-and-sleep-quality.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 309
INCREASED VENTILATION THRESHOLDS
Projects must demonstrate a 15% increase in outdoor airflow rates over the minimum
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022. Most large HVAC systems can accommodate a
15% increase with minimal impacts to the design and to energy consumption. An alternative
threshold of 30% is available through exemplary performance.

REGULARLY OCCUPIED SPACES REQUIREMENT

At least 95% of all regularly occupied spaces must have increased ventilation. This provides
flexibility for projects that cannot meet the higher thresholds in every space.

DETERMINING THE INCREASED VENTILATION REQUIREMENT

The following VRP calculations determine the increased ventilation requirement:

• Single-zone or 100% outdoor air system. Multiply the calculated minimum outdoor air
flow for the system (Vot) by 1.15.
• Multiple-zone recirculating system. Multiply the uncorrected outdoor air flow for the
system (Vou) by 1.15. Multiply the breathing zone outdoor airflow for the critical zone (Vbz
for critical zone) by 1.15. Calculate the new system ventilation efficiency (Ev) using the
updated values for Vou and the critical zone Vbz and recalculate the required outdoor air
intake flow for the system (Vot) using these values.

Option 2. Enhanced IAQ Design

The option requires using more stringent design limits for ozone, formaldehyde and PM2.5 to
achieve enhanced levels of IAQ beyond EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality. This credit uses LEED-
specific design targets, selected by the LEED indoor EQ technical advisory group, with the
following basis:

OZONE
A design target of 10 ppb was selected as referenced in the Environmental Health Committee
(EHC) Emerging Issue Report 117. This number reflects the thinking that ozone indoors is harmful
and the lower the concentration, the better. Studies indicate that any “safe” threshold would
exist at very low concentrations.

117
“Emerging issue: Ozone and indoor air chemistry”, ASHRAE, (2011), accessed March 31, 2025,
https://ashrae.org/file%20library/communities/committees/standing%20committees/environmental%20health%20committee%20(ehc
)/ehc_emerging_issue-ozoneandindoorairchemistry.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 310
FORMALDEHYDE
A design target of 20 µg/m³ (16 ppb) was selected based on the NIOSH recommended airborne
exposure limit (REL) and FEMA goal for emergency housing 118. Formaldehyde is a carcinogen
that can irritate the skin and eyes. Long-term exposure has been associated with increased
allergic sensitivity and asthma. Many building products contain formaldehyde as addressed in
the MRc Low-Emitting Materials.

PM2.5
A design target of 10 ug/m3 was selected based on the WHO global air quality guidelines,
PM2.5 interim target 4. 119 This number reflects the thinking that adverse effects from PM2.5 can
occur at low concentrations approaching zero, so PM2.5 should be maintained as low as
reasonably achievable in interior spaces.

If air cleaning systems are used to achieve the enhanced IAQ design targets, refer to the
guidance on air cleaning devices in EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality.

Option 3. Verification of Ventilation and Filtration

When planning a new build-out in an existing building, it is critical to understand the base
building systems and their capability to provide ventilation for the planned occupancy. Option 3
requires the project team to measure and verify the total quantity of outdoor air delivered to the
tenant space from the existing base building HVAC systems.

MEASUREMENT AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

Measurements from calibrated airflow measuring stations or an approved test, adjust, and
balance report from the contractor may be used.

Measure the outdoor airflow to the project from each base building air-handling unit that serves
spaces within the LEED project scope. Acceptable measurements may come from calibrated
airflow measuring stations or contractor test, adjust, and balancing reports. Take measurements
under worst-case operating conditions.

Confirm that the results for each air handling unit are within 10% of the minimum outdoor airflow
value determined for EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality.

This path is only available to projects that renovate previously occupied spaces.

118
“Formaldehyde”, Chemical Insights, accessed March 31, 2025, https://chemicalinsights.org/wp-
content/uploads/FactSheet_Formaldehyde.pdf.
119
“WHO global air quality guidelines. Particulate matter (PM2.5 and PM10), ozone, nitrogen dioxide, sulfer dioxide”, Geneva:
World Health Organization, (2021), https://iris.who.int/bitstream/handle/10665/345329/9789240034228-eng.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 311
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Alll Calculations documented under the fundamental air
Increased quality prerequisite.
Ventilation
Option 2. Documentation provided under the fundamental air
Enhanced IAQ quality prerequisite.
Design
Option 3. Method or protocol used to measure the amount of
Verification of outdoor air delivered by each ventilation system and
Ventilation measured outdoor rates.
and Filtration

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE standard 62.1-2022 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standards-62-1-62-
2)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 312
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

OCCUPANT EXPERIENCE
EQc2
1–7 points

INTENT
To move beyond neutral or sufficient spaces toward human-centered design that supports
customization, enjoyment, and emotional connections between people and the building, thus
increasing the likelihood of consistent satisfaction and ongoing stewardship.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–7
Option 1. Biophilic Environment 1–4
Path 1. Integrated Biophilic Design 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Quality Views 2–3
AND/OR
Option 2. Adaptable Environment 1–2
AND/OR
Option 3. Thermal Environment 1
AND/OR
Option 4. Sound Environment 1–2
Path 1. Mapping Acoustical Expectations for Indoor and Outdoor Spaces 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Acoustic Criteria for Indoor and Outdoor Spaces 1
AND/OR
Option 5. Lighting Environment 1–6
Path 1. Solar Glare 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Quality Electric Lighting 1
AND/OR
Path 3. Proximity to Windows for Daylight Access 1
AND/OR
Path 4. Daylight Simulation 1–4

Option 1. Biophilic Environment (1–4 points)

PATH 1. INTEGRATED BIOPHILIC DESIGN (1 POINT)
Integrate biophilic design that demonstrates each of the following five principles adapted from
The Practice of Biophilic Design by Kellert and Calabrese 120:

120
Kellert, S. and Calabrese, E. The Practice of Biophilic Design, (2015), https://www.biophilic-design.com.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 313
 • Biophilic design requires repeated and sustained engagement with nature.
• Biophilic design focuses on human adaptations to the natural world that, over
evolutionary time, have advanced people’s health, fitness, and well-being.
• Biophilic design encourages an emotional attachment to the building and building
location.
• Biophilic design promotes positive interactions between people and nature that
encourage an expanded sense of relationship and responsibility for the human and
natural communities.
• Biophilic design encourages mutual reinforcing, interconnected, and integrated
architectural solutions.

AND/OR

PATH 2. QUALITY VIEWS (2–3 POINTS)

Provide occupants in the building with a view to the outdoor natural or urban environment for
75% (for 2 points, 90% for 3 points) of all regularly occupied floor area. Auditoriums, conference
rooms dedicated to video conferencing, and gymnasiums may be excluded. Views into interior
atria may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area.

• Views must be through glass with a visible light transmittance above 40%. If the glazing
has frits, patterns, or tints, the view must be preserved. Neutral gray, bronze, and blue-
green tints are acceptable.
• Views must include at least one of the following.
o Nature, urban landmarks, or art; OR
o Objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing.
• Occupants must have direct access to the view and be within three times the head
height of the glazing.

AND/OR

Option 2. Adaptable Environment (1–2 points)

Allow occupants choice and flexibility, and/or the capability to adapt the space to meet their
individual needs. Provide variability and/or optionality for thermal, sound, and lighting
environments that invite occupants to either alter their experience and/or move between
sensory zones. Include at least one accessible quiet space that allows occupants to retreat from
high levels of sensory stimulation.

Projects must also demonstrate at least one of the additional strategies below for 1 point or
three for 2 points:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 314
Additional strategies
• Provide socializing, meeting, dining, eating, and/or working areas where occupants can
sit outside the main action and have permanent architectural features at their backs,
creating a comfortable, semiprotected space that overlooks the larger area (prospect).
• Provide alternative paths that enable travel around the perimeter of the space, so that
people are not required to travel across a large open space.
• Provide choice in furniture configuration and a variety of seating to accommodate a wide
range of body types, including seating with back rests and without arm rests.
• Provide height variety for permanently installed fixtures, like counters and sinks, and/or
height-adjustable tables and desks, where appropriate.
• Provide the ability for all occupants to easily access outdoor or transitional space located
within 2,000 feet (600 meters) of a building entrance or access point.

AND/OR

Option 3. Thermal Environment (1 point)

• Design indoor occupied spaces to meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55-2023,
“Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy” with errata. Investigate thermal
conditions in and around the project and explain how the design considers the following:

• Thermal conditions that align and adjust with changing seasons

• Overcooling during nontemperate seasons
o Design solutions for newly arrived occupants or occupants transitioning between
different thermal environments to adjust to the space while maintaining an
appropriately warm environment for those already in the building.
o Design solutions for long-term occupants in transition spaces to customize their
working area.
• Support for occupants carrying out different tasks requiring varying levels of movement
o Cooling solutions for those completing high-movement tasks

AND/OR

Option 4. Sound Environment (1–2 points)

PATH 1. MAPPING ACOUSTICAL EXPECTATIONS FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR
SPACES (1 POINT)
Determine the desired sound environment early in the design process by mapping the
acoustical expectations for each primary indoor and outdoor space, specific to the use of the
space and occupant needs. Categories to consider include noise exposure, acoustical comfort
and noise sensitivity, acoustical privacy, communication, and soundscape.

These are example classifications for:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 315
 o Noise exposure zones: high risk, medium risk, low risk, or no risk.
o Acoustical comfort: loud zone, quiet zone, mixed zone, circulation, sensitive, and
no specific expectations.
o Acoustical privacy: high speech security, confidential speech privacy, normal
speech privacy, marginal speech privacy, or no privacy.
o Communication zones: excellent, good, marginal, and none or no specific
expectations.
o Soundscape management: preserve, improve, restore, mitigate, specialized (e.g.,
wellness, therapeutic, or agency in equity), or no specific expectations.

Define acoustic criteria and potential design strategies and solutions to meet the acoustical
expectations for each space. Categories to consider include internally generated background
noise, externally intrusive background noise, electronically generated masking sound, outdoor
acoustical environment, airborne sound reverberation, sound insulation, vibration insulation, and
impact noise.

OR

PATH 2. ACOUSTIC CRITERIA FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR SPACES (2 POINTS)

Through calculations, modeling, and/or measurements, demonstrate that the mapping exercise
completed in Path 1 informed design strategies and solutions to meet acoustic criteria for at
least 75% of the occupied spaces and all classrooms and other core learning spaces.

AND/OR

Option 5. Lighting Environment (1–6 points)

PATH 1. SOLAR GLARE (1 POINT)
Provide manual or automatic (with manual override) glare-control devices in all regularly
occupied spaces that will receive direct or reflected sun penetration. Spaces designed
intentionally for direct sunlight may be excluded.

AND/OR

PATH 2. QUALITY ELECTRIC LIGHTING (1 POINT)

Comply with the following requirements for regularly occupied spaces:

Electric light glare control

Each luminaire shall meet one of the following requirements:

• Have calculated luminance of less than 6,000 candela per square meter (cd/sq. m.)
between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 316
 • Achieve a unified glare rating (UGR) of 19 or lower using the UGR tabular method for
each space.
• Achieve a UGR rating of 19 or lower using software modeling calculations of the
designed lighting. (Modeling must be performed as outlined in the NEMA White Paper
on Unified Glare Rating 121.)

Color rendering
Use luminaires that have a color rendering index of at least 90, or that meet the color rendering
requirements in Table 1, in accordance with Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) TM-30-20.

Table 1. Color rendering requirements using TM-30-20

Measure Requirement
Fidelity index Rf 78 or higher
Gamut index Rg 95 or higher
Red Local Chroma Shift Rcs,h1 -1% to 15%

AND/OR

PATH 3. PROXIMITY TO WINDOWS FOR DAYLIGHT ACCESS (1 POINT)

Design the interior layout to provide at least 30% of the regularly occupied area to be within a
20-foot (6 meters) horizontal distance of envelope glazing. The glazing must have a visible light
transmittance above 40%. Regularly occupied areas with visual obstructions (incapable of
providing a view to envelope glazing) should be excluded from the compliant area.

OR

PATH 4. DAYLIGHT SIMULATION (1–4 POINTS)

Perform a daylight simulation analysis for the project to understand and optimize access to
daylight and visual comfort. Use the calculation protocols in IES LM-83-23 with the following
clarifications:

• Calculate spatial daylight autonomy300/50% (sDA300/50%) and annual sunlight

exposure1000,250 (ASE1000,250) as defined in IES LM-83-23 for each regularly occupied
space in the project. sDA150/50% may be used for areas without visual tasks with design
targets of 225 lux.
• For any regularly occupied spaces with ASEnet(1000,250h) greater than 20%, identify how the
space is designed to address glare.
• Calculate the average sDA300/50% or sDA150/50% for the total regularly occupied floor area.
Do not exclude spaces based on ASE. Points are awarded based on this calculation,
according to Table 2.

121
“NEMA White Paper on Unified Glare Rating”, NEMA, (2021), accessed March 21, 2025,
https://www.nema.org/standards/view/white-paper-on-unified-glare-rating-(ugr)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 317
Table 2. Points for daylight simulation
Average sDA300/50% or sDA150/50% value Points
≥ 40% 1
≥ 55% 2
≥ 65% 3
≥ 75% 4

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit promotes spaces that are designed to enhance the occupant experience through
multisensory experiences, connections with nature and natural systems, spatial variability and
opportunities for personalization, as well as a broader view of thermal, sound, and lighting
design. Though there are multiple options to achieve the credit — and strategies — will (and
should) look significantly different between projects. All approaches should aid in catalyzing
enjoyment and memorability of the space, in turn, increasing the likelihood of sustained
satisfaction and ongoing stewardship of the building. 122

Option 1. Biophilic Environment

PATH 1. INDOOR BIOPHILIC DESIGN
Biophilic design is based on the ethical imperative to promote human and environmental health
and well-being by reconnecting people to nature and to each other within the built environment.
Incorporating nature, both directly or indirectly, can offer significant benefits to physical, mental,
and social health. 123 Biophilic design can also be a tool to improve how we connect with others
to enhance a sense of community. 124 Effective biophilic design considers cultural, geographical,
and ecological contexts. Refer to IPp2: Human Impact Assessment findings for relevant
contextualization.

Strategies must contribute to an integrated experience and should not exist in an individual or
fragmented manner. As such, there is no minimum threshold for the number of required biophilic
design strategies. Instead, projects must demonstrate compliance with each of the five
principles adapted from The Practice of Biophilic Design. 125

122
DeKay, M., & Brager, G. (2023), Experience Design Schemas: Diagrams for Bioclimatic, Energy, and Resiliency Architecture,
Routledge.
123
Catherine O. Ryan, William D. Browning, & Dakota B. Walker (2023), The economics of biophilia: Why designing with nature in
mind makes financial sense, Second edition. New York: Terrapin Bright Green, LLC.,
https://www.terrapinbrightgreen.com/report/eob-2.
124
Heath, O., Jackson, V., & Goode, E. (2019), Creating Positive Spaces by Designing for Community, Interface, Well-being
https://www.interface.com/content/dam/interfaceinc/interface/publications/brochures-collateral/emea/design-guides/community-
design-guide/DesignGuide_community_emea_EN.pdf.
125
Kellert, Stephen R. and Calbrese, Elizabeth F., 2015, The Practice of Biophilic Design, https://www.biophilic-design.com/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 318
 • Biophilic design requires repeated and sustained engagement with nature.
Projects must incorporate nature or natural patterns or systems, throughout multiple
facets of the building.
• Biophilic design focuses on human adaptations to the natural world that over
evolutionary time have advanced people’s health, fitness, and well-being.
Complying with this principle requires creating spaces that support fundamental needs of
both human and natural communities, including access to daylight and fresh air,
connections to nature through views and materials, opportunities for movement and
sensory engagement, spaces for both social interaction and quiet refuge, and integration
with local ecosystems and natural patterns.
• Biophilic design encourages an emotional attachment to particular settings and
places. Projects must understand, embrace, and celebrate the specific ecology, culture,
climate, and/or region of a project so that it is culturally and ecologically responsive and
unique.
• Biophilic design promotes positive interactions between people and nature that
encourage an expanded sense of relationship and responsibility for the human
and natural communities. Complying with this principle requires design that elicits a
positive emotional response, increasing the likelihood of ongoing enjoyment, belonging,
and, ultimately, stewardship, of fellow occupants and of the building.
• Biophilic design encourages mutual reinforcing, interconnected, and integrated
architectural solutions. Projects must apply an ecosystem approach to the design
process, where the solution is greater than the sum of its parts, and nature and natural
systems or processes are holistically integrated directly and indirectly throughout the
project.

Any biophilic design framework may be used to demonstrate compliance. Other widely
respected frameworks include the 14 Patterns of Biophilic Design by Terrapin Bright Green 126
and the Biophilic Design Framework developed by Judith Heerwagen and Gordon H. Orians.

Table 3. Frameworks and strategies for biophilic design

Frameworks Strategy Category Specific Strategy
14 Patterns of Nature in the space Visual connection with nature
Biophilic Design Non-visual connection with nature
(Terrapin Bright Non-rhythmic sensory stimuli
Green) Thermal and airflow variability
Presence of water
Dynamic and diffuse light
Connection with natural systems

126
14 Patterns of Biophilic Designs, Terrapin Bright Green, https://www.terrapinbrightgreen.com/reports/14-patterns/

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 319
 Frameworks Strategy Category Specific Strategy
Natural analogues Biomorphic forms & patterns
Material connection with nature
Complexity and order
Nature of the space Prospect
Refuge
Mystery
Risk/Peril
The Practice of Direct experience of nature Light
Biophilic Design Air
(Kellert & Water
Calebrese) Plants
Animals
Weather
Natural landscapes and ecosystems
Fire
Indirect experience of nature Images of nature
Natural materials
Natural colors
Simulating natural lght and air
Naturalistic shapes and forms
Evoking nature
Information richness
Age, change, and the patina of time
Natural geometries
Biomimicry
Experience of space and place Prospect and refuge
Organized complexity
Integration of parts to wholes
Transitional spaces
Mobility and wayfinding
Cultural and ecological attachment to place
Biophilic Design Prospect Unobstructed views
Framework Visual access to the horizon
(Heerwagen & Elevated positions
Orians) Refuge Concealed or protected spaces
Shelter from environmental conditions
Secluded seating areas
Mystery Curving paths
Partial views into other spaces
Elements that entice exploration
Complexity Diverse textures and patterns

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 320
 Frameworks Strategy Category Specific Strategy
Richness in visual detail
Layered views
Coherence Logical organization of space
Clear pathways
Consistent design elements
Change and variability Seasonal changes
Natural lighting variations
Presence of water
Risk/Peril Elements that evoke thrill or excitement
Overlooks or balconies
Stepping stones or bridges
Security and safety Easily accessible escape routes
Clear lines of sight
Sturdy construction

PATH 2. QUALITY VIEWS

Light, shadow, color, and patterns can create engaging spaces that enhance occupant well-
being. 127 Visual connections to the outdoors, particularly through windows offering natural views,
provide documented psychological and emotional benefits. 128 These benefits extend across
building types and sectors, from improved patient recovery in healthcare settings to increased
productivity in offices to better learning outcomes in schools. 129 Views and daylight are essential
components of healthy human habitats; however, this doesn’t require excessive glazing.
Strategic window placement and thoughtful interior layouts can maximize outdoor connections
while maintaining building performance.

Findings from IPp2: Human Impact Assessment, related to the project’s physical context, must
be considered. Identify exterior site elements that meet the view quality requirements of this
credit: nature, urban landmarks, arts, or objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of
the glazing.

Occupants must have direct access to the view and be within three times the head height of the
glazing. For example, if the top of a window is eight feet (2.5 m) high, occupants must be
positioned no more than 24 feet (8 × 3) away from that window. Account for any permanent
interior obstructions in the calculations. For example, identify interior features that may block the
view to the window, such as structural columns. Vertical columns smaller than one foot (0.3

127
Heschong, L. Visual Delight in Architecture: Daylight, Vision, and View, (2021), Routledge.
128
Kellert, S. & Calabrese, E., The Practice of Biophilic Design, (2015), https://www.biophilic-design.com.
129
Catherine O. Ryan, William D. Browning, & Dakota B. Walker, “The economics of biophilia: Why designing with nature in mind
makes financial sense”, Second edition, (2023), New York: Terrapin Bright Green, LLC.,
https://www.terrapinbrightgreen.com/report/eob-2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 321
meters) wide and horizontal features smaller than 1 feet (0.3 meters) high typically do not block
views. Analysis must consider occupant positions throughout all regularly occupied area to
confirm that quality views are present for at least 75% of the total area.

Exterior views through glazing, or vision glazing, must be clear and undistorted. Projects are
encouraged to utilize bird-friendly or glazing with elements visible only to birds, to maintain clear
views. While some patterns are permitted if they maintain visibility, avoid frits, fibers, patterned
glazing, or added tints that distort color balance or obstruct the views. Neutral gray, bronze, and
blue-green tints typically do not distort the color balance.

Gymnasiums and Auditoriums

• Gymnasiums and auditoriums may be excluded from the quality views requirements.

Option 2. Adaptable Environment

Optionality or flexibility
Adaptable environments empower occupants to control and customize their surroundings,
fostering a greater sense of comfort and belonging. This can take two forms: by providing
occupants the ability to move between spaces with different sensory characteristics and to
adjust conditions of the space itself. While adaptable spaces have the potential to benefit all
occupants, sensory customization opportunities are particularly important for neurodivergent
individuals–approximately 15–20% of the population–who may experience heightened
sensitivities to environmental factors or stimuli like noise, light, and textures. 130 131

Rating system requirements are flexible to encourage highly specific design strategies. Projects
must demonstrate optionality between zones or flexibility through personal comfort options for
categories outlined in Table 4.

Table 4. Optionality or flexibility strategies

Category Examples
Thermal Environment Personal control systems, warm or cool enclaves, radiant heating or cooling,
transitional spaces that act as buffer zones between indoor and outdoor areas,
or spaces with varying sun and shade exposure.
Sound Environment Combining active, high-sensory collaboration zones with quieter areas
featuring sound masking, white noise, nature sounds, or acoustic alcoves for
focused work, which aligns with the requirements under Option 4 sound
environment.

130
HOK, Designing a neurodiverse workplace, (2019), Downloaded from https://www.hok.com/ideas/publications/hok-designing-a-
neurodiverse-workplace/. Accessed October 26, 2021.
131
Doyle N.”Neurodiversity at work: A biopsychosocial model and the impact on working adults”, Br Med Bull; (2020), https://doi:
10.1093/bmb/ldaa021,

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 322
 Lighting Environment Combination of task lighting, dimmable lighting systems, circadian lighting that
mimics natural daylight cycles in intensity and color temperature, zoned
lighting controls, natural light zones, or gradual transition lighting designed to
change in intensity to help eyes adjust.

Project-specific strategies that do not fit within the three categories but meet the intent of Option
2 to create diverse sensory spaces, may be submitted for compliance. This may include spatial
character, degree of stimulation, or other strategies to enable people to manage their own
sensory needs. 132

Quiet zones
Quiet zones are required for all projects pursuing this option. Quiet zones are crucial for
neurologically inclusive spaces because many neurodivergent individuals, including people with
autism, experience hypersensitivity, or sensory processing differences that make them more
sensitive to environmental stimuli, particularly sound. For these individuals, everyday sounds
that some individuals might easily filter out — like HVAC systems, conversations, or equipment
noise — can trigger sensory overload, leading to increased stress, decreased focus, and
difficulty communicating effectively. 133 Quiet zones must be accessible to all occupants and
comfortable for extended use. Restrooms are not applicable for compliance.

Adaptability strategies
There is a menu of adaptability strategies intended to increase the number of people who can
not only successfully utilize the space but enjoy it. Findings from IPp2: Human Impact
Assessment must be used to better understand unique occupant needs to inform strategy
selection. An alternative strategy may be acceptable in place of the provided strategies if it
meets this intent.

Option 3. Thermal Environment

More closely aligning indoor conditions with outdoor environments by adjusting temperature
setpoints to correspond with exterior conditions can positively impact thermal comfort, as
research indicates that occupants’ thermal comfort preferences and expectations vary
seasonally in relation to climate conditions. 134,135 Designing in connection with natural patterns

132
HOK, Designing a neurodiverse workplace, (2019), Downloaded from https://www.hok.com/ideas/publications/hok-designing-a-
neurodiverse-workplace, Accessed October 26, 2021.
133
Gonçalves, A.M., Monteiro, P. Autism Spectrum Disorder and auditory sensory alterations: a systematic review on the integrity
of cognitive and neuronal functions related to auditory processing, J Neural Transm 130, 325–408 (2023),
https://www.doi.org/10.1007/s00702-023-02595-9.
134
Lyu Yue, Chen Zhongqing, Seasonal thermal comfort and adaptive behaviours for the occupants of residential buildings:
Shaoxing as a case study, Energy and Buildings, Volume 292, 2023, 113165, ISSN 0378-7788,
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2023.113165, https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S037877882300395X.
135
Munonye, C, (2020) The Influence of Seasonal Variation of Thermal Variables on Comfort Temperature
in Schools in a Warm and Humid Climate, Open Access Library Journal, 7: e6753. https://doi.org/10.4236/oalib.1106753.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 323
can increase occupant comfort and result in more efficient buildings by reducing reliance on air
conditioning and heating.

To prevent thermal discomfort and wasted energy, projects must carefully manage cooling
systems to avoid overcooling spaces during warmer seasons. Project designs must consider
seasonal temperature changes, potential overcooling during non-temperate months, and the
needs of occupants performing tasks with high metabolic rates. ASHRAE Standard 55-2023
outlines methods to determine acceptable thermal conditions in mechanically conditioned
spaces and in occupant-controlled naturally conditioned spaces, considering occupants’
anticipated metabolic rate (activity level) and clothing, as well as environmental variables such
as temperature and air speed. Projects must comply with ASHRAE Standard 55–2023 using the
applicable method. To address the risk of overcooling in nontemperate/warm seasons, teams
must refer to ASHRAE 55-2023, Informative Appendix E (Sections 8.1 and 8.2).

To avoid discomfort or physiological stress for people transitioning between thermal

environments, specifically occupants entering from the outdoors, create zones with intermediate
temperatures to allow gradual acclimatization and consider utilizing air movement as a cooling
strategy. Transition spaces include spaces at the indoor/outdoor boundary (e.g., lobby
entrance). Projects must also account for long-term occupants of these areas, including, but not
limited to, receptionists or security guards, etc. Provide adaptability options, such as local air
speed reduction, to allow long-term occupants to customize their microclimates (these design
strategies may also contribute to Option 2. Adaptable Environment).

Provide thermal comfort support for occupants carrying out tasks requiring varying levels of
movement. This must include considerations for occupants completing metabolically demanding
tasks.

Option 4. Sound Environment

PATH 1. MAPPING ACOUSTICAL EXPECTATIONS FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR
SPACES
Mapping involves establishing acoustical expectations for the project spaces and identifying
design targets that increase the likelihood of achieving those expectations. Performing this
mapping early in the design process minimizes the potential of locating incompatible spaces
adjacent to each other.

The mapping exercise must include documenting acoustical expectations based on intended
space function and related occupant needs. Standardized classifications for typical acoustical
expectations may be used for this mapping exercise (see Table 5). Teams may refer to the
USGBC worksheet to help guide this mapping process.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 324
Table 5. Mapping acoustical expectations
Noise exposure Acoustical Acoustical Communication Soundscape
zones comfort privacy zones management
High risk, Loud zone, High speech Excellent, Preserve,
Medium risk, Quiet zone, security, Good, Improve,
Low risk, Mixed zone, Confidential Marginal, Restore,
No risk. Circulation, speech privacy, None, Mitigate,
Sensitive, Normal speech No specific Specialized (e.g.,
No specific privacy, expectations Wellness,
expectations. Marginal speech Therapeutic,
privacy, Agency in
No privacy equity),
No Specific
Expectations.

For each primary indoor and outdoor space, the mapping exercise is continued to identify
acoustic criteria and subsequent design strategies or solutions that, if implemented in the
design, increase likelihood of the project to meet the desired expectations. Example acoustic
criteria and design targets are listed in Table 6.

Table 6. Common acoustic criteria

Acoustic criteria category Example design or performance target
Acoustic criteria Threshold reference
threshold
Internally generated background noise e.g., ANSI S12.60–2010
e.g., 35 dBA
Externally intrusive background noise
Electronically generated masking sound None N/A
Outdoor acoustical environment e.g. Daytime: 55 dBA, e.g. local code
Nighttime: 50 dBA
Airborne sound reverberation e.g. 0.7s e.g. AS/NZS 2107:2016
Sound insulation e.g. STC 45 e.g. FGI Guidelines
Vibration insulation e.g. IIC 50 e.g. WELL Beta Feature
Impact noise e.g. NISR Impact Noise
Management

PATH 2. ACOUSTIC CRITERIA FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR SPACES

This pathway builds off the mapping exercise in Path 1. It requires using generally accepted
engineering practices to demonstrate that the project design is likely to meet the acoustical
expectations outlined for the space. The acoustical consultant will select calculations, modeling
methods, or measurements as appropriate for the acoustic criterion. For example, if the acoustic
criterion is “internally generated background noise below 35 dBA,” the project might calculate
sound pressure levels or measure sound pressure levels in the completed space.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 325
The acoustic environment is particularly important to consider when designing classrooms and
other core learning spaces, because it can affect students’ learning and teachers’ health and
well-being. For this reason, to earn this path, all classroom or core learning spaces must comply
with the acoustic criteria defined in Path 1.

For other project types, more flexibility is provided for projects prioritizing better acoustics in
targeted environments. Seventy-five percent of the occupied spaces must comply with the
acoustic criteria defined in Path 1.

Option 5. Lighting Environment

PATH 1. SOLAR GLARE
When designing spaces with daylight, solar glare must be considered, which can significantly
disrupt visual comfort and impact thermal comfort. This means evaluating how natural light
might create uncomfortable reflections on digital screens and potentially interfere with tasks
requiring visual concentration.

Projects must provide glare-control devices for all transparent glazing in regularly occupied
spaces. The requirement applies to transparent glazing, so diffused and translucent glazing
systems do not require glare-control devices. All glare-control devices must be operable by the
building’s occupants to address unwanted glare and to allow for active participation between the
building and the building occupant. Automatic devices with user override and exterior shading
designs such as awnings, louvers, and shading screens are acceptable.

Glare-control devices are not required for spaces designed specifically for direct sunlight, such
as atriums, or solar collection areas, where direct sunlight is part of the design intent. In these
cases, teams must establish a clear rationale, articulate the benefits, and ensure alignment with
project goals. For example, the space may be intentionally designed to support Option 1.
Integrated Biophilic Design or Option 2. Adaptable Environments.

Table 7. Glare control devices

Acceptable glare-control devices Unacceptable glare-control devices
Interior window blinds Fixed fins
Interior shades Fixed louvers
Curtains Dark color glazing
Moveable exterior louvers Frit glazing treatment
Moveable screens Additional glazing treatments
Moveable awnings

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 326
PATH 2. QUALITY ELECTRIC LIGHTING
Properly focused lighting at the right level and quality enhances concentration and minimizes
distractions. Poorly lit spaces can cause headaches and eye discomfort, while well-illuminated
work environments can help reduce stress levels and improve the overall well-being of
employees. Electric lighting glare can significantly impact specific populations, such as aging
adults and neurodivergent individuals, by causing discomfort, visual strain, and even emotional
or cognitive disruptions. 136

Projects must meet both Electric Glare Control and Color Rendering requirements within all
regularly occupied spaces. Exceptions to the electric glare requirements include wall-wash
fixtures properly aimed at walls, as specified by manufacturer’s data, indirect uplighting fixtures,
provided there is no view down into these uplights from a regularly occupied space above, and
any other specific applications (i.e., adjustable fixtures). Exceptions to the color rendering
requirements include non-white-light sources used for decorative color effects that are in
addition to the general illumination.

Electric glare control can be documented based on individual luminaire specifications

(luminance) or for the space as a whole unified glare rating (UGR).

Luminance
Minimizing light fixture luminance helps reduce disability and discomfort glare. The threshold,
6,000 candela per square meter (cd/sq. m.) between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir, was
selected to align with WELL v2 Feature L04 — Electric Light Glare Control. 137 Luminance
information for the luminaire can be found in manufacturer specifications or on IES photometric
plan files.

Unified glare rating (UGR)

UGR is a measure of the discomfort produced by a lighting system along a psychometric scale
of discomfort. The value of 19 corresponds to “just acceptable glare.” The UGR approach
requires software modeling calculations of the designed lighting. Modeling must be performed
as outlined in the NEMA white paper on Unified Glare Rating 138.

Color rendering: color rendering index (CRI)

CRI is the most widely adopted method for evaluating color fidelity. The CRI requirement of 90
or above indicates that the light source closely mimics natural light, allowing colors to appear

136
Aryani, S., Kusumawanto, A., Suryabrata, J. & Wijaya, D. (2024, March), The correlation of lighting and mood in the workplace:
digital image-based research,
https://www.researchgate.net/publication/378820577_The_correlation_of_lighting_and_mood_in_the_workplace_digital_image-
based_research.
137
WELL Standard v2, https://www.v2.wellcertified.com/en/wellv2/light/feature/4.
138
NEMA White Pater on Unified Glare, https://www.nema.org/standards/view/white-paper-on-unified-glare-rating-(ugr)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 327
vibrant and true to their actual hue. This is especially important in environments where color
differentiation is critical, such as in medical facilities, retail spaces, or galleries. CRI information
for the luminaire can be found in manufacturer specifications. The luminaire must have a CRI of
at least 90.

Color rendering: TM-30-20

TM-30 is a newer method developed by the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) 139 for
measuring color fidelity. The luminaire requirements for this credit are based on the Priority
Level 1 criteria for the Preference design intent recommendation in TM-30-20 Annex E (see
Table 5). This threshold was selected to align with WELL v2 Feature L08 – Electric Light
Quality. 140

Table 8. Color rendering requirements for TM-30 method

Measure Requirement
Fidelity index Rf 78 or higher
Gamut index Rg 95 or higher
Red Local Chroma Shift Rcs,h1 -1% to 15%

PATH 3. PROXIMITY TO WINDOWS FOR DAYLIGHT ACCESS

This path involves designing the building floorplates and interior layout to have regularly
occupied areas located in close proximity — within 20 feet (six meters) — of envelope glazing:
for example, windows, curtain walls, or other transparent elements in the building façade.

The 30% threshold serves as a baseline or entry-level standard that aligns with WELL v2
Precondition L01 — Light Exposure, encouraging projects to incorporate daylight access into
the design. 141 Projects aiming for more extensive daylighting strategies should explore Path 4.
Daylight Simulation.

PATH 4. DAYLIGHT SIMULATION

Daylight is dynamic and highly dependent on local climate and site conditions with daily and
seasonal variations. These dynamic qualities can be explored during the design process using
daylight simulation tools and daylight performance metrics standardized by the daylight design
community. Incorporating simulation early in the design phase supports the optimization of
building form, window placement, façade elements, and interior configurations to achieve the
best possible balance of natural light.

139
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES), TM-30-20, http://www.ies.org
140
WELL Standard v2, https://www.v2.wellcertified.com/en/wellv2/light/feature/8.
141
WELL Standard v2. (n.d.). Retrieved from https://v2.wellcertified.com/en/wellv2/light/feature/1

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 328
Occurrences of direct sunlight can be minimized with thoughtful design, but daylight glare and
reflections will likely still be needed and desired by occupants for certain parts of the day or
year. For this reason, it is highly recommended to also pursue Option 5. Path 1. Solar Glare.

This path uses a tiered point system with four thresholds of increasing stringency based on
spatial Daylight Autonomy (sDA) calculations, indicating how much of a space receives
sufficient daylight throughout the year. According to research conducted under the Illuminating
Engineering Society’s LM-83 standard, spaces with sDA values of 75% or higher provide
“preferred” levels of daylight, while spaces with sDA values between 55% and 75% achieve
“nominally acceptable” daylight levels. The credit’s highest point threshold aligns with this
research by requiring the preferred sDA level of 75% or greater.

Building model
The model must be sufficiently detailed and complete to ensure accurate predictions of daylight
performance. A simulation checklist must be used to support high-quality modeling practices.
Checklist details are outlined in LM-83 142, section 4. Details include but are not limited to:

• Exterior details, such as neighboring buildings/obstructions, trees, and ground plane.

• The orientation of the building, in relation to true north, is as designed.
• The geometry of the space being accurately modeled (wall thicknesses, angled ceilings,
walls, fenestration surfaces, interior partitions and furniture, etc.).
• Blinds, window groupings, and glazing properties.
• Interior surface reflectance/material properties.
• Local climate data (TMY weather data files).

Daylight performance metrics

There are two daylight performance metrics that must be calculated: sDA and annual sunlight
exposure (ASE). Both metrics are outlined in the IES standard LM 83-23: Approved Method:
IES sDA and ASE.

sDA assess the prevalence of daylight over the course of a year. Calculate sDA for each
regularly occupied space and calculate an average sDA across the total regularly occupied floor
area. Include all regularly occupied spaces, regardless of the ASE results. This approach
intentionally differs from the calculation procedure outlined in the LM-83 standard to
accommodate the wide range of project types and locations that pursue LEED — for LEED
associate points to daylit areas, despite the glare risk. Some designers find it confusing to
exclude overlit areas from daylight calculations. Use sDA300/50%. for all spaces except areas
without visual tasks (see below).

142
IES Standard LM-83, https://store.ies.org/product/approved-method-ies-spatial-daylight-autonomy-sda-and-annual-sunlight-
exposure-ase/?v=0b3b97fa6688

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 329
Regularly occupied areas without visual tasks
Some spaces in the indoor environment are used for less critical visual tasks like walking
through spaces or performing activities that are not visually demanding. Adequate daylight in
these spaces is considered to be 150 lux in LM-83. These spaces may be identified by
reviewing IES horizontal ambient illuminance design targets for spaces with illuminance targets
of 225 lux or less. For these spaces, calculate sDA using sDA150/50% as an alternative to the
standard sDA300/50%.

ASE assesses the risk of visual discomfort from too much sunlight in the space. There are two
variations of ASE introduced in the 2023 version of the LM-83 standard. ASEnet is used for this
LEED credit to encourage LEED projects to utilize automated glare control if desired. Calculate
ASEnet1000,250 for each regularly occupied space. ASE is only calculated on a room-by-room
basis.

Regularly occupied spaces with ASEnet(1000,250h) greater than 20%

Based on IES’s experience to date and analysis of the study data, an ASEnet of 20% or higher is
a level of concern. For spaces where ASEnet exceeds 20%, projects must work with the designer
to consider architectural methods to reduce the risk of sunlight penetration or consider the use
of an automated daylight management system in as many window areas as necessary to
guarantee that it can avoid excessive occurrence of direct sunlight within the space.

Auditoriums
• Auditoriums may be excluded from the daylight requirements.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Path 1. Report/narrative identifying, classifying, and explaining
Biophilic Integrated each of five biophilic design principles incorporated into
Environment Biophilic the project, using the LEED v5 Indoor Biophilic Design
Design Template.
Evidence of the project's indoor biophilic design features
(for example, any one of the following: contract
documents, photographs, renderings, architectural mood
board).
Path 2. Percentage of regularly occupied area with access to
Quality views (%).
Views LEED v5 Quality Views calculator or a quality view
simulation report.
Architectural drawings that demonstrate direct access to
the view and qualifying distance from glazing or a quality
view simulation report and report checklist.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 330
 Option 2. All Report/narrative identifying, classifying, and explaining
Adaptable each variability and/or optionality strategy for thermal,
Environment sound, and lighting environments.
Optional evidence of variability and/or optionality strategy
for thermal, sound, and lighting environments (for
example, contract documents, photographs, product
information from the manufacturer).
Identification of one or more accessible quiet spaces.
Identification of the additional adaptability strategy in the
project (prospect areas, furniture, permanently installed
fixtures, outdoor transitional space).
Prospect Evidence of the project's prospect spaces and alternative
Areas paths of travel (for example, contract documents,
photographs, narrative).
Furniture Evidence of the project's furniture configuration choices
and variety of seating (for example, contract documents,
photographs, product information from manufacturer).
Permanently Evidence of the height variety for permanently installed
Installed fixtures (for example, contract documents, photographs,
Fixtures product information from manufacturer).
Outdoor Evidence of occupant access to outdoor or transitional
Transitional space and opportunities for interaction with nature (for
Space example, floor and site plans, contract documents,
photographs, narrative).
Option 3. Design documentation per ASHRAE 55-2023.
Thermal
Identify transition spaces and spaces with occupants
Environment
carrying out different activities and provide design
documents that show solutions for these spaces to
address various thermal comfort requirements.
Option 4. Path 1. LEED v5 Acoustics Mapping Template
Sound Mapping
Environment Acoustical
Potential design strategies and solutions the project
Expectations could use to meet the Acoustical Expectations for
for Indoor each space.
Option 4. Path 2. Calculations, modeling, and/or measurements to
Sound Acoustic demonstrate how the strategies and solutions contribute to
Environment Criteria for accomplishment of the Acoustic Criteria identified in the
Indoor and LEED v5 Acoustics Mapping Template.
Outdoor
Spaces
Option 5. Path 1. Contract documents highlighting provision of glare-control
Lighting Solar Glare devices in all qualifying regularly occupied spaces.
Environment Floor plans highlighting regularly occupied spaces.
Path 2. Lighting specifications with luminance values.
Quality
Documentation demonstrating required UGR using UGR
Electric
Tabula Method or software modeling calculations of the
Lighting
designed lighting.
Lighting specifications with color rendering information.
Path 3. LEED v5 Daylight Calculator a quality view simulation
Proximity to report.
Windows for Evidence of proximity to envelope glazing (for example,
floor plans and sections, showing furniture (at least within

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 331
 Daylight scope), identifying all space types and whether they are
Access regularly or nonregularly occupied, indicating the
horizontal distance from regularly occupied areas to the
envelope glazing).
Evidence of the visible light transmittance for each
regularly occupied space (for example, contract
documents).
Path 4. Average sDA value for all regularly occupied floor area
Daylight (%).
Simulation Daylight simulation report and model simulation checklist.
Evidence of the simulation inputs including model
simulation checklist.
Explain which regularly occupied spaces have an ASEnet
(1000,250h) greater than 20%. Address how was the
space is designed to address glare.
Explain which areas used sDA150/50% in the simulation
and the tasks that take place there, justifying that design
targets of only 225 lux are needed.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• 14 Patterns of Biophilic Design by Terrapin Bright Green
(terrapinbrightgreen.com/reports/14-patterns)
• ASHRAE 55 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standard-55-thermal-environmental-
conditions-for-human-occupancy)
• Biophilic Design Framework developed by Judith Heerwagen and Gordon H. Orians
(usgbc.org/resources/biophilic-design-theory-science-and-practice-bringing-buildings-life)
• Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) TM-30-20 (ies.org)
• LM-83 (store.ies.org/product/approved-method-ies-spatial-daylight-autonomy-sda-and-
annual-sunlight-exposure-ase/?v=0b3b97fa6688)
• The Practice of Biophilic Design by Kellert and Calabrese (biophilic-design.com)
• WELL v2 (v2.wellcertified.com/en/wellv2/overview)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 332
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

ACCESSIBILITY AND INCLUSION

EQc3
1–2 points

INTENT
To support the diverse needs of occupants and increase widespread usability of the building to
foster an individual and collective sense of belonging.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–2
Accessibility and Inclusion Strategies 1–2

Comply with Local Accessibility Codes

Support access for those with physical disabilities by locating in a building that meets all locally
applicable accessibility codes identified in the IPp2: Human Impact Assessment.

If there is no locally applicable code, the base building must include the following strategies:

• Accessible routes or regularly used exterior building entrances must have ramps to
accommodate elevation changes.
• All doors meant for human passage from the main exterior building entrance to the
project entrance have a minimum clear width of 32 inches (0.86 meters).
• Reception desks, security counters, and service counters within the project boundary all
have a front-approach, wheelchair-accessible section.

AND

Include at least 5 (1 point) or 10 (2 points) of the following accessibility and inclusion strategies
that go beyond the locally applicable accessibility code and are most relevant to the project:

Accessibility for Physical Diversity

• Provide wave-to-open or vertical hand/foot-press door operators at all regularly used
building entrances.
• Design meeting spaces to accommodate mobility devices for at least 10% of occupants.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 333
 • Incorporate accessible and inclusive equipment and activities in fitness facilities. Ensure
an open and accessible route to and around the equipment.
• Where nonaccessible routes are provided (e.g., stairs), provide an alternate accessible
route that starts and terminates at the same location.

Accessibility for Safety and Aging

• Provide nonslip flooring.
• Fix area rugs to the floor below and provide transition strips at all edges.
• Provide a visual indication or a railing at all full-height glazing, except in private
residences.
• Provide audible and visual alerts for emergency alerts.
• Provide closed risers (visually and physically) in all stairs.
• Use visual contrast between walls and floors, walls and doors, and walls and casework.
• Provide visual, tactile, contrasting, or photoluminescent warnings at floor level changes.

Accessibility for Social Health

• Provide lactation rooms or pods.
• Provide at least one fully accessible, all-gender, single-user restroom OR one multiuser,
all-gender restroom on each floor of the building.
• Include at least one adult changing station or table in a designated, accessible restroom
or family restroom, or in one men’s and one women’s restroom.
• Provide signage in all languages spoken by more than 5% of the local population.
• Support neurodivergent users by achieving EQc: Occupant Experience, Option 1,
Biophilic Environments, Path 1, Integrated Biophilic Design.

Accessibility for Navigation

• Provide wayfinding signage that clearly indicates exits, entrances, and major functions in
the project.
• Provide nontext diagrams and symbols on signage.
• Provide Braille, visual and auditory cues, and/or continuous linear indicators on paths of
travel.
• Use pattern and color blocking to identify key access spaces.
• Provide haptic/tactile maps for wayfinding.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 334
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit encourages design that embraces the principles of accessibility and Inclusive
Design, considering physical, sensory, and cognitive needs of occupants. 143 The goal is to go
beyond basic accessibility measures to create environments that not only accommodate
individuals with disabilities but also consider how all people interact, socialize, and move
through spaces.

Comply with Local Accessibility Codes

All projects must ensure accessibility at a foundational level by demonstrating that the base
building is in compliance with all relevant local accessibility codes identified in IPp2: Human
Impact Assessment. If the project is located in a region with no accessibility code, the base
building must demonstrate three foundational physical accessibility elements: ramps for
accessible routes and entrances, clear width for human passage (from the main exterior
entrance to the project entrance), and front-approach, wheelchair-accessible section. In these
cases, including fully accessible restrooms on all floors within the project boundary is highly
encouraged.

Ramps for accessible routes and entrances

Ramps are required in and around buildings to provide accessibility for individuals with mobility
impairments, as mandated by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 144. Unlike solutions that
require separate or specialized accommodations, integrated ramps allow people with mobility
disabilities, as well as people with strollers, to use the same paths as other occupants,
promoting dignity and inclusion through shared building circulation. Ramps must be present at
primary entrances with steps to ensure at least one accessible entry point. Inside the base
building, ramps are required where level changes exceeding 0.5 inches (12.7millimeters) occur
within the path from the main building entrance to the project entrance, if elevators or lifts are
not available. Emergency exits within the project boundary must also include ramps or
accessible egress routes to support safe evacuation. All ramps must comply with ADA design
standards, including proper slope, width, landings, handrails, and slip-resistant surfaces,
ensuring they are safe and functional for all users.

Clear width for human passage

From the main exterior entrance to the project entrance, projects must provide a minimum clear
width of 32 inches (0.815 meters) at all doorways meant for human passage and 36 inches
(0.915 meters) for circulation paths, with passing spaces of 60 inches (1.525 meters) provided
at least every 200 ft. (61 meters) along any path less than 60 inches (1.525 meters) wide.

143
Zallio, M. & Clarkson, P, (2021, December), Inclusion, diversity, equity and accessibility in the built environment: A study of
architectural design practice,https://www. sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0360132321007496.
144
Americans with Disabilities Act (AD), https://www.ada.gov/

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 335
Teams are strongly encouraged to consider a minimum clear doorway width of 36 inches (0.91
meters) for enhanced accessibility for all occupants.

Front-approach wheelchair-accessible section

For all transaction surfaces within the project boundary, including reception desks and service
counters, a front-approach, wheelchair-accessible section is required to promote height
inclusivity and ensure individuals using wheelchairs can access and navigate spaces safely,
efficiently, and with dignity.

Projects must demonstrate that the accessible portions of counters are no higher than 36 in.
(0.914 meters) above the floor and at least 36 in. (0.914 meters) wide.

Accessibility and inclusion strategies

Accessibility and inclusion strategies are organized into four categories: physical diversity,
safety and aging, social health, and navigation. These strategies were selected based on
research showing they provide the most significant benefits to the largest number of people,
beyond what is most commonly required by local accessibility codes, including ADA.

Projects must include at least five (1 point) or 10 (2 points) of the following strategies. Findings
from IPp2: Human Impact Assessment must be used to understand unique occupant needs to
inform strategy selection. Do not select strategies that are present in the existing local code,
unless the team demonstrates increased stringency.

If fewer than five strategies are relevant to the project due to project type variations, teams may
submit up to two alternative inclusive design strategies that meet the intent of credit, for
compliance.

Table 1. Accessibility for physical diversity strategies

Accessibility for physical diversity Examples, specifications, and explanation
Wave-to-open or vertical hand/foot No-touch door activation devices accommodate a wide
press door operators at all regularly range of users, including those with mobility impairments,
used building entrances. people carrying objects or children, and individuals with
temporary injuries. Door activation devices at the entrance
of the project may also be submitted for compliance.
Meeting spaces to accommodate Accommodations include, but are not limited to, clear floor
mobility devices for at least 10% of spaces and pathways of travel without obstruction. Users
occupants. must be able to park mobility devices next to or within the
seating area to avoid exclusion.
Accessible and inclusive equipment Projects with fitness equipment and activities must be
and activities in fitness facilities. designed to accommodate a range of physical abilities.
AND This includes providing an inclusive range of strength and
Open and accessible route to and stretching training equipment.
around the equipment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 336
 Accessibility for physical diversity Examples, specifications, and explanation
A minimum clearance of 36 inches (0.915 meters) is the
appropriate threshold for accessible routes between
exercise equipment, as this aligns with ADA requirements
for accessible paths and allows adequate space for
wheelchair users to navigate between equipment.
Alternate accessible route that starts Directness and proximity of the accessible route are
and terminates at the same location for essential to maintain a similar level of convenience to the
nonaccessible routes. nonaccessible route. The alternative accessible route must
be in the same general area as the circulation paths.

As per International Code Council (ICC), the maximum

allowable difference between the start and end points of an
accessible route and its nonaccessible counterpart is 200
feet (61 meters) in most indoor facilities, though it’s
recommended to minimize this distance for those with
mobility challenges—ideally to 100 feet (30 meters). 145

Table 2. Accessibility for safety and aging

Accessibility for safety and aging Examples and explanations
Nonslip flooring Acceptable nonslip flooring includes, but is not limited to,
textured tiles, rubber flooring, and epoxy-coated flooring
providing slip resistance.
Fix area rugs to floor below and provide Solutions include nonslip backing, double-side carpet tape,
transition strips over high traffic areas. and rug gripper to keep the rug in place. Transition strips to
smooth the connection between two different types of
flooring materials are required in high traffic areas.
Provide visual indication or railings at Providing visual indicators, such as markers or patterns,
all full height glazing, except in private will make it more noticeable for all users, including those
residences. with vision impairments. Adding railings at full-height glass
also helps provide a physical barrier for people to easily
detect and use for support, though not required.
Provide audible and visual alerts for Providing emergency alerts ensures that all users,
emergency alerts. including those with hearing or visual impairments, can
respond to emergencies. This includes, but is not limited to,
loud unique alarm sounds, voice announcements, flashing
strobe lights, or LED beacons.
Provide closed risers (visually and Closed risers eliminate gaps; reduce the risk of tripping or
physically) on all stairs. falling, particularly for small children or pets; and make
stairs more secure. In addition, closed risers also offer
privacy and reassurance through a more solid visual
structure.
Use visual contrast between walls and Incorporating distinct visual contrast between different
floors, walls and doors, and walls and architectural elements improves navigation and wayfinding,
casework. particularly for individuals with visual impairments. Projects
must use contrasting colors, textures, and/or material for
walls, floors, doors, casework (i.e., drawers and cabinet
doors), or other permanently installed features.
Provide visual, tactile, contrasting, or Incorporate bold color contrasts or reflective strips to mark
photoluminescent warnings at floor transitions, use textured materials such as ribbed or
level changes. grooved strips to provide tactile cues, and apply varied

145
International Code Council, (2017), 2017 ICC A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities,
https://www.codes.iccsafe.org/content/icca117-12017P4/chapter-4-accessible-routes.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 337
 Accessibility for safety and aging Examples and explanations
surface finishes to create both visual and tactile
distinctions. Photoluminescent markings are recommended
to be applied to ensure visibility in low-light conditions,
particularly in staircases or emergency exit areas.
Provide lactation rooms or lactation Dedicated lactation rooms, or breastfeeding support rooms,
pods. support higher rates of breastfeeding, improved work
performance, and physical and emotional well-being. 146 It
is recommended that these rooms include features such as
an electrical outlet, seating, and a table, along with access
to a sink and refrigerator either within the room or on the
same floor to better accommodate pumping and
breastfeeding needs.
Provide at least one fully accessible, Providing all-gender restrooms creates a more inclusive
all-gender single-use restroom OR one and welcoming environment for people who may prefer
multi-use all-gender restroom on each gender-neutral options. 147
floor of the building.
At least one adult changing station or Locate the changing station in a family or accessible
table in a designated, accessible restroom that complies with ADA guidelines for door width,
restroom or family restroom, or in each turning space (60 inches or 1.52 meters diameter), and
men’s and women’s restroom. clear floor area (30 x 48 inches or 0.76 x 1.22 meters). Use
a height-adjustable adult changing table with a weight
capacity of at least 350 lbs. (160 kg.) to accommodate
diverse user needs. Ensure the table is at least 72 inches
(1.83 meters) long and 30 inches (0.76 meters) wide for
adequate space.
Provide signage in all languages Ensure services and information are accessible to diverse
spoken by more than 5% of the local communities. Provide additional signage for people with
population. limited English proficiency (LEP) when they constitute 5%
of the population or 1,000 individuals, whichever is smaller.
Achieve at least one point under EQc2: Biophilic design is particularly valuable for neurodivergent
Occupant Experience, Option 1. populations, approximately 15–20% of the global
Biophilic Environments, Path 1. population. 148 Achieve at least 1 point under EQc2:
Integrated Biophilic Design Occupant Experience, Option 1. Biophilic Environments,
Path 1. Integrated Biophilic Design.

Table 3. Accessibility for navigation

Accessibility for navigation Examples and explanations
Provide wayfinding signage that clearly Signage should be clear, concise, and easy to understand,
indicates exits, entrances, and major using both text and universally recognized symbols to
functions in the project. accommodate individuals with varying levels of literacy.
Provide nontext diagrams and symbols Diagrams and symbols can convey instructions or warnings
on signage. more quickly than text alone, making it easier for people
with varying levels of literacy or visual impairments to
understand. Provide alternative signage where applicable.

146
De Souza, C. B., Venancio, S. I., & da Silva, R. P. G. V. C. (2021), Breastfeeding Support Rooms and Their Contribution to
Sustainable Development Goals: A Qualitative Study, Frontiers in public health, 9, 732061,
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2021.732061.
147
Harwood-Jones, M., Martin, K. & Airton, L. (2021, August), Research and Recommendations on Gender-Inclusive Washrooms
and Changerooms, https://www.queensu.ca/hreo/sites/hreowww/files/uploaded_files/Washroom%20Report%20-%20Digital.pdf.
148
Doyle, N. (2020, October 14), Neurodiversity at work: a biopsychosocial model and the impact on working adults,
https://www.pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32996572/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 338
 Accessibility for navigation Examples and explanations
Provide Braille, visual and auditory Braille, along with visual and auditory cues or continuous
cues, and/or continuous linear linear indicators, enhances safety and usability for
indicators on paths of travel. everyone, including those with vision impairments.
Use pattern and color blocking to Utilizing contrasting colors and unique patterns helps
identify key access spaces. differentiate important spaces such as entrances, exits,
and pathways, making them more recognizable and easier
to navigate, particularly for the visually impaired. Provide
visual contrast where applicable.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Options/ Documentation
types Paths
All All Comply with Confirmation of whether there is a locally applicable
Local accessibility code for the project.
Accessibility If the project has not met all locally applicable accessibility
Codes codes: contract documents highlighting the appropriate
ramps, door widths, and front-approach, wheelchair-
accessible counter sections.
Accessibility Project Strategies (check, from the standard list in
and Inclusion Requirements, which strategies have been implemented).
Strategies
Narrative identifying locations in documents where project
strategies are documented (file name, page number, at
minimum).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• American Disabilities Act (ADA) (ada.gov/law-and-regs/design-standards)
• ANSI A117.1 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/ICCA117.12017P7)
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) (www.osha.gov/laws-regs)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 339
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

RESILIENT SPACES
EQc4
1–3 points

INTENT
To support design features that increase the capacity for occupants to adapt to changing
climate conditions and be protected from events that may compromise the quality of the indoor
environment and, subsequently, occupant health and well-being.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–3
Option 1. Management Mode for Episodic Outdoor Ambient Conditions 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Management Mode for Respiratory Diseases 1
AND/OR
Option 3. Design for Occupant Thermal Safety During Power Outages 1–2
Path 1. Consider Extreme Heat 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Consider Extreme Cold 1
AND/OR
Option 4. Operable Windows 1–2

Comply with any of the following options for up to 2 points.

Option 1. Management Mode for Episodic Outdoor Ambient Conditions (1

point)
Design systems with the capability to operate an episodic outdoor event management mode as
described in ASHRAE Guideline 44. The mode should address varying outdoor conditions or
events that could negatively influence indoor air quality, such as wildfire smoke. Include the
management mode in the design and commissioning documents. Verify proper implementation
of the mode during commissioning.

AND/OR

Option 2. Management Mode for Respiratory Diseases (1 point)

Design occupied spaces with the capability to operate an infection risk management mode that
provides the minimum equivalent clean airflow rates outlined in ASHRAE 241-2023, Section 5.1.
Include the management mode in the design and commissioning documents as outlined in

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 340
ASHRAE 241-2023, Section B10.2 “Design Documentation.” Verify proper implementation of
the mode during commissioning.

AND/OR

Option 3. Design for Occupant Thermal Safety During Power Outages (1–2
points)
PATH 1. CONSIDER EXTREME HEAT (1 POINT)
Demonstrate through thermal modeling that a building will passively maintain thermally
habitable conditions during a power outage that lasts two days during peak summertime
conditions of a typical meteorological year. Designate specific thermal safety zones where
habitable conditions will be maintained during a power outage.

AND/OR

PATH 2. CONSIDER EXTREME COLD (1 POINT)

Demonstrate through thermal modeling or Passive House certification that a building will
passively maintain thermally habitable conditions during a power outage that lasts two days
during peak wintertime conditions of a typical meteorological year. Designate specific thermal
safety zones where habitable conditions will be maintained during a power outage.

AND/OR

Option 4. Operable Windows (1–2 points)

Design 50% (for 1 point) or 75% (for 2 points) of the regularly occupied spaces to have operable
windows with the capability to provide access to outdoor air during heat waves or localized
power outages. The windows must meet the opening size and location requirements of
ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Section 6.4.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Incorporating resilient design solutions into our buildings increases the adaptive capacity of our
communities, strengthening their capacity to respond to climate change and natural disasters.

This credit addresses a building’s ability to remain functional, maintain the quality of the indoor
environment, and protect occupant health and well-being during major, episodic, disruptive
events such as extreme weather conditions, wildfires, pandemics, or power outages. Although
this credit addresses the design of events separately, teams are encouraged to consider and
design for the possibility of multiple events occurring at the same time, such as a wildfire and
extreme heat event.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 341
Leveraging information from IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment and IPp2: Human Impact
Assessment, select two strategies for up to two points. Teams can select any two options or
paths, even those not identified as a high priority under IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment.

Building Readiness Plans may be developed and communicated to facilitate operating in

specialized modes only when necessary, and to educate building occupants on the transition
from normal operations to management mode for the duration of the condition or event.

Option 1. Management Mode for Episodic Outdoor Ambient Conditions

Episodic outdoor ambient conditions can range from incidents such as the release of toxic
chemicals outside a building to the widespread presence of wildfire smoke. Having an episodic
outdoor event management mode facilitates the protection of building occupants from these and
other outdoor pollution events.

System design for event management mode

ASHRAE Guideline 44, Protecting Building Occupants from Smoke During Wildfire and
Prescribed Burn Events 149, specifies enhanced modes of operation to preserve IAQ during
periods of heightened outdoor air pollution.

Refer to ASHRAE Guideline 44 to design HVAC systems capable of operating in a smoke-ready

mode or other “event management mode.” Teams can leverage guidance from Standard 44 to
design and apply similar modes of operation for any events that impact outdoor air quality
including increases in nearby construction activity or chemical gas releases.

Commissioning requirements
ASHRAE Guideline 44 prescribes testing HVAC systems in “smoke ready” conditions. Include
the requisite sequences of operation in design documents and ensure that event management
mode is included in the commissioning scope of work to verify that all equipment responds as
intended.

Option 2. Management Mode for Respiratory Diseases

Following the COVID-19 pandemic, industry experts developed strategies to reduce airborne
infectious disease transmission in buildings, for the protection of public health and to facilitate
keeping buildings operational during periods of heightened risk. One resulting standard,
ASHRAE Standard 241-2023, Control of Infectious Aerosols, specifies an infection risk

149
ASHRAE Guideline 44, Protecting Building Occupants from Smoke During Wildfire and Prescribed Burn Events,
https://www.ashrae.org/about/news/2024/ashrae-releases-new-guidance-to-mitigate-the-impact-of-smoke-on-indoor-air-quality

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 342
management mode with ventilation and filtration strategies for reducing occupant exposure to
airborne pathogens that cause significant personal and economic damage each year.

Projects pursuing this option must design occupied spaces with the capability to operate in an
Infection Risk Management Mode. This mode provides minimum equivalent clean airflow rates,
calculated as the equivalent clean airflow rate per person multiplied by the anticipated number
of people in a particular space. The building owner and facility manager must determine when to
apply this mode of operation.

Commissioning requirements
Include the requisite sequences of operation in design documents and ensure that Infection
Risk Management Mode is included in the commissioning scope of work to verify that all
equipment responds as intended.

Option 3. Design for Occupant Thermal Safety During Power Outages

During power outages, when backup power is unavailable, mechanical cooling, heating, and
ventilation become inaccessible. Designing spaces to sustain thermal habitability passively or
through manual occupant controls allows the building to remain livable until power is restored.

Projects that pursue Option 3 have two paths to consider: One for extreme cold and one for
extreme heat. Based on the project's location, teams should determine which option, or both,
are appropriate.

Thermal safety zones

Designate thermal safety zones where thermal habitability can be maintained during a loss of
power. Analyze conditions on the assumption that building occupants will congregate in the
safety zones during an outage. This may increase the expected occupant density above normal
assumptions for the space. Include enough thermal safety zones so the occupant density does
not exceed one person per 20 square feet (1.9 square meters).

Example
An office building has 400 employees. If 20,000 square feet (1,858 square
meters) of space is identified as being thermally safe, teams must analyze the
space assuming 400 people will be in that 20,000 square feet (1,858 square
meters) area.

A 20,000 square feet (1,858 square meters) zone can accommodate up to 1,000
people. Therefore, the project would meet the sizing requirements.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 343
Thermal habitability
Define habitable conditions as applicable to the project type. Thermally safe conditions may
differ from a healthcare facility to a typical office building. For example, the heat stress index for
an office building will be different than a nursing home. Consider the project type and the
population when performing the initial analysis. Thermal habitability is not thermal comfort, and
will therefore be different than the comfort zone prescribed in ASHRAE Standard 55.

Natural ventilation
Thermal safety zones must have access to natural ventilation. This is achievable through
operable windows, doors, operable panels, or louvers.

Thermal models
Thermal models analyze heat transfer within a building, accounting for climate, insulation,
glazing specifications, solar gains, envelope leakage rates, and ventilation. Use computer
simulation software to perform the thermal modeling for each path, based on project-specific
inputs. Consider using modeling tools that are approved for Passive House compliance.

The analysis uses a two-day period. This was selected as an entry-level duration for LEED
projects for design purposes. A four-day period has been used previously in the LEED v4 pilot
credit Passive Survivability and Back-up Power During Disruptions. A time frame of 72 hours (3
days) is often used for general emergency preparedness planning (such as disaster-ready kits).
Extreme heat or cold periods can last longer than two days; for example, according to the U.S.
EPA using heat wave tracking data by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
(NOAA), the average heat wave in major U.S. urban areas has been about four days long. 150

PATH 1. CONSIDER EXTREME HEAT

Demonstrate with a thermal model that the building will passively maintain habitable conditions
for at least two days during a power outage in hot, summer months. The two-day period must
represent the peak summertime conditions of a typical meteorological year (TMY).

AND/OR

PATH 2. CONSIDER EXTREME COLD

Demonstrate with a thermal model or through Passive House certification that the building will
passively maintain habitable conditions for at least two days during a power outage in cold,
winter months. The two-day period must represent the peak wintertime conditions of a TMY.

150
EPA, Climate Change Indicators, https://www.epa.gov/climate-indicators/climate-change-indicators-heat-waves#ref6.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 344
Option 4. Operable Windows
During a power outage, ventilation may rely on operable windows, doors, or other openings to
maintain airflow. Operable windows can also be utilized for thermal comfort depending on
outside weather conditions and may minimize reliance on building systems and support
adaptability for future changes in building use.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Management All Design documents confirming management
Mode for Episodic mode design and sequence of options.
Outdoor Ambient Final Commissioning Report, confirming that
Conditions management mode was tested during
commissioning.
Option 2. Management All Design documents confirming management
Mode for Respiratory mode design and sequence of options.
Diseases Final Commissioning Report, confirming that
management mode was tested during
commissioning.
Option 3. Design for Path 1 and Thermal model report and results and identify
Occupant Thermal Safety Path 2 thermal safety zones.
During Power Outages
Option 4. Operable All ASHRAE Standard 62.1 calculations for
Windows opening areas and distances for all regularly
occupied spaces.
Percentage of spaces with operable windows.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE Guideline 44 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/guideline-44-2024-
protecting-building-occupants-from-smoke-during-wildfire-and-prescribed-burn-
events?product_id=2923808)
• ASHRAE 241-2023 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-241-
2023?product_id=2567398)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 345
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

AIR QUALITY TESTING AND MONITORING

EQc5
1–4 points

INTENT
To support better management of IAQ and identify opportunities for health-based approaches to
building operations.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–4
Option 1. Preoccupancy Air Testing 1–2
Path 1. Particulate Matter and Inorganic Gases 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Volatile Organic Compounds 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Continuous Indoor Air Monitoring 1

Option 1. Preoccupancy Air Testing (1–2 points)

After construction ends and before occupancy, but under ventilation conditions typical for
occupancy, conduct baseline IAQ testing. Retail projects may conduct the testing within 14 days
of occupancy. The number of measurements should be specified according to Table 1 and
taken in respective locations of the building.

Table 1. Number of measurements required for preoccupancy air testing

Total occupied floor area, sq. ft (sq. m.) Number of measurements

≤ 5,000 (500) 1

> 5,000 (500) and ≤ 15,000 (1,500) 2

> 15,000 (1,500) and ≤ 25,000 (2,500) 3

4 plus one additional measurement per

> 25,000 (2,500) and ≤ 200,000 (20,000) each 25,000 sq. ft. (2,500 sq. m.) above
25,000 sq. ft.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 346
 Total occupied floor area, sq. ft (sq. m.) Number of measurements

10 plus one additional measurement per

> 200,000 (20,000) each 50,000 sq. ft. (4,600 sq. m.) above
200,000 sq. ft.

PATH 1. PARTICULATE MATTER AND INORGANIC GASES (1 POINT)

Test for the particulate matter (PM) and inorganic gases listed in Table 2, using an allowed test
method, and demonstrate that the contaminants do not exceed the concentration limits listed in
the table. Measure for a four-hour period, calculating peak concentration for carbon monoxide
and average concentration for ozone, PM2.5, and PM10.

Table 2. Limits for particulate matter and inorganic gases

Contaminant Concentration limit Allowed test methods Direct reading

(CAS#) (µg/m3) (laboratory-based) instrument minimum
specifications
Carbon 9 ppm; no more than 2 ISO 4224 Direct calibrated
monoxide (CO) ppm above outdoor EPA Compendium Method electrochemical
levels IP-3 instrument with
GB/T 18883-2002 for accuracy of +/– 3% of
projects in China reading and resolution
of 0.1 ppm

NDIR CO sensors with

accuracy of 1% of 10
ppm full scale and
display resolution of
less than 0.1 ppm

Particulates (for ISO class 8 or lower per n/a Accuracy (+/–): Greater
projects in ISO 14644-1:2015 of 5 μg/m3 or 20% of
attainment reading
areas) OR meet IP-10A Resolution (+/–): 5
μg/m3
PM10: 50 μg/m3

PM2.5: 12 μg/m3
Particulates (for ISO class 8 or lower per n/a Accuracy (+/–): Greater
projects in ISO 14644-1:2015 of 5 μg/m3 or 20% of
nonattainment reading
areas) OR meet IP-10A Resolution (+/–): 5
μg/m3
PM10: 50 μg/m3

PM2.5: 35 μg/m3
Ozone 0.07 ppm ISO 13964 Monitoring device with
ASTM D5149-02 accuracy greater of 5

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 347
 Contaminant Concentration limit Allowed test methods Direct reading
(CAS#) (µg/m3) (laboratory-based) instrument minimum
specifications
OR EPA-designated methods ppb or 20% of reading
for ozone and resolution (5 min
0.01 ppm for projects average data) +/– 5 ppb
pursuing EQc: Enhanced
Air Quality, Option 1,
Path 2

AND/OR

PATH 2. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (1 POINT)

• Perform a screening test for total volatile organic compounds (TVOC). Use ISO 16000-6,
EPA TO-17, or EPA TO-15 to collect and analyze the air sample. Calculate the TVOC
value per EN 16516:2017; California Department of Public Health Standard Method v1.2
2017, Section 3.9.4; or an alternative calculation method, as long as the full method
description is included in the test report.
o If the TVOC levels exceed 500 µg/m3, investigate for potential issues by comparing
the individual VOC levels from the GC/MS results to associated cognizant authority
health-based limits. Correct any identified issues and retest if necessary.
• Test for the individual VOCs listed in Table 3 using an allowed test method and
demonstrate that the contaminants do not exceed the concentration limits listed in the
table. Laboratories that conduct the tests must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for
the test methods they use.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 348
Table 3. Volatile organic compound limits

Contaminant (CAS#) Concentration limit Allowed test methods

(µg/m3)

Formaldehyde 50-00-0 20 µg/m3 (16 ppb) ISO 16000-3, 4;

EPA TO-11a;
EPA comp. IP-6A;
Acetaldehyde 75-07-0 140 µg/m3 ASTM D5197-16
Benzene 71-43-2 3 µg/m3 ISO 16000-6;
EPA IP-1;
Hexane (n-) 110-54-3 7,000 µg/m3 EPA TO-17;
EPA TO-15;
Naphthalene 91-20-3 9 µg/m3
ISO 16017-1, 2;
Phenol 108-95-2 200 µg/m3 ASTM D6196-15

Styrene 100-42-5 900 µg/m3

Tetrachloroethylene 127-18-4 35 µg/m3

Toluene 108-88-3 300 µg/m3
Vinyl acetate 108-05-4 200 µg/m3

Dichlorobenzene (1,4-) 106-46-7 800 µg/m3

Xylenes—total 108-38-3, 95-47-
700 µg/m3
6, and 106-42-3

AND/OR

Option 2. Continuous Indoor Air Monitoring (1 point)

Provide indoor air monitors for all of the following parameters:

• Carbon dioxide (CO2)

• Particulate matter (PM2.5)
• Total volatile organic compounds (TVOC)
• Temperature
• Relative humidity

Monitors must be building grade or better and located between 3 and 6 feet (1–2 meters) above
the floor.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit helps the project gain a better understanding of their indoor air.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 349
The pre-occupancy testing provides this insight prior to building use to prevent occupant
exposure to unsatisfactory air. Continuous indoor air monitoring provides this understanding
throughout operations, to track contaminant levels over time and to proactively identify any
issues and faults.

Teams may utilize both options for a total of two points and may find it beneficial to perform air
testing prior to occupancy at the same time as setting up the continuous monitoring systems.

Option 1. Pre-occupancy Air Testing

Construction activities and building materials can introduce contaminants that may negatively
affect a building’s IAQ. Testing after construction incentivizes the contractors to follow
construction management practices in accordance with EQp1: Construction Management and
follow low-emitting material specifications. It also verifies that the indoor environment is
acceptable for human occupancy and ensures that ventilation systems are effectively
maintaining adequate IAQ.

Number of measurements
The number of measurement points required is outlined in Table 1 of the rating system. The
table provides a consistent number of measurements per floor area (square feet or square
meters) to help with planning for testing and the associated costs.

The floor area in Table 1 reflects the total occupied floor area for the project, including all
regularly and nonregularly-occupied areas. For example, corridors are nonregularly-occupied
and must be included in the total area for this calculation. Unoccupied areas, such as
mechanical and electrical rooms, are excluded.

Projects may choose to test take more measurements beyond the minimum if desired.
Exceeding the minimum number of measurements does not earn additional points but will
provide a more comprehensive assessment of the IAQ.

Measurement locations
Measurement locations must be selected to best represent the project occupancy and
function(s). Use the following criteria to determine representative locations for the project:

• Regularly occupied spaces. Prioritize regularly occupied spaces. Non-regularly-

occupied spaces must be included in the total area for determining the occupied floor
area, but need not be tested.
• Multiple space types. If more than one measurement is necessary per Table 1., test
multiple space types. For example, in an office building, test open office spaces, but also

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 350
 consider closed offices, conference rooms, quiet space, and other occupied space
types. In a school building, test classroom space, but also consider the auditorium,
administrative offices, student assembly areas and lab spaces.
• Different ventilation systems. If the project has multiple ventilation systems, identify a
measurement location in areas served by each ventilation system, up to the required
number of measurement points.
• Multiple floors. For projects with multiple floors, select locations on different floors.
• Spaces where the highest concentrations of contaminants are likely to occur. This
could be due to the construction or fit-out of the space, or a lower ventilation rate. For
example, private offices may have a higher concentration of contaminants compared to
open offices, due to a higher density of furniture and finish materials in an enclosed
space.

Failed testing
If a test fails, take corrective action (e.g., clean and flush out the space) and retest. All test
locations must meet the concentration limits in Table 2 for Path 1 compliance and/or Table 3 for
Path 2 compliance.

Timing for air quality testing

Air quality measurements must be conducted after construction is complete and before
occupancy. For the purposes of this credit, construction is complete once all furniture and
finishes are installed, construction punch-list items that would generate VOCs or other
contaminants are complete, and testing and balancing of the HVAC system has been
conducted.

Testing must be done under normal operating ventilation conditions. If there are unoccupied
setbacks in the ventilation system, test during normal occupied hours to achieve the typical
ventilation conditions.

All testing and retesting must be completed before occupancy.

Retail projects
Retail projects may perform testing within 14 days of occupancy. This is to accommodate the
unique compressed construction timeline for typical retail projects.

PATH 1. PARTICULATE MATTER AND INORGANIC GASES

Each location must be tested for all contaminants in Table 2 of the Rating System.

Table 2 outlines the approved test methods for each contaminant. Teams can use laboratory-
based testing or take measurements using direct-reading instruments. If using direct readings,

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 351
all instruments must meet the minimum specifications of Table 2. Alternative methods may be
used for Path 1 contaminants if the project team documents that the accuracy and resolution
specifications in Table 2 are met.

PATH 2. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS

A screening test for TVOC and test for each individual VOC in Table 3 must be performed at
each measurement location.

Because VOC testing and analysis is complex, it must be performed using specific methods by
a laboratory that is accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 151 for the test method used.

TVOC screening is intended to serve as a general indicator of the VOC levels in the building
and is used to capture situations where investigation of individual VOCs beyond those targeted
via Table 3. of the rating system may be needed. While projects are not required to meet a
specific TVOC threshold, they are required to report TVOC results. If the TVOC concentration
exceeds 500 ug/m3, the team must work with the laboratory to compare the individual VOC
levels from the GC/MS results to associated cognizant health-based limits and perform
corrective actions as necessary.

Option 2. Continuous Indoor Air Monitoring

During occupancy, airborne contaminants can enter a building from the outdoors or be
introduced by indoor sources and activities such as cleaning, cooking, use of candles, 3D
printers, or improperly vented heating appliances. Permanently installed continuous indoor air
monitors enable the identification of potential issues and timely corrective actions to assure
systems designed to maintain IAQ in the building continue to work as intended through the
project’s operational phase.

Number of monitors
A successful monitoring strategy must consider the data collection purpose and dedicated
resources for ongoing data management. Fewer well-managed monitors are usually more
beneficial than numerous neglected monitors. Include at least one monitor per 25,000 feet
(2,500 square meters) of total occupied floor area. This density is a good entry point for getting
started with IAQ monitoring. Additional monitors can be added as desired up to the best-practice
density of one monitor per 5,000 square feet (500 square meters) of total occupied floor area.

151
ISO/IEC 17025, https://www.iso.org/ISO-IEC-17025-testing-and-calibration-laboratories.html

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 352
Monitor locations
Monitors must be placed to best represent the project occupancy and function(s). This will vary
depending on the purpose of the monitoring. Use the following criteria to determine
representative locations for the project:

• Multiple space types. Consider including monitors in multiple space types. For
example, in an office building, monitor the open office spaces, but also consider closed
offices, conference rooms, quiet spaces, and other occupied space types. In a school
building, monitor classroom spaces, but also consider the auditorium, administrative
offices, student assembly areas and lab spaces.
• Different ventilation systems. If the project has multiple ventilation systems, consider
placing monitors in areas served by each ventilation system.
• Multiple floors. For projects with multiple floors, consider placing monitors on different
floors.
• Spaces where the highest concentrations of contaminants are likely to occur. This
could be due to the construction or fit-out of the space, a lower ventilation rate or air
filtration level, the presence of combustion or operable windows, or occupant activities.
For example, cafeterias may have a higher concentration of contaminants compared to
classrooms, due to the presence of cooking.
• Spaces occupied by at-risk populations or spaces designated for cleaner air.
Consider placing monitors in areas where people who are more susceptible to poor IAQ
congregate. For example, this may include spaces with infants, children, pregnant
women, acute care facilities, and assisted living facilities.

If monitoring to support IAQ management during wildfires and prescribed burn events, review
ASHRAE Guideline 44, Section 5.5.1.2 for considerations for monitor placement.

Monitors must be permanently installed at a height corresponding to the breathing zone of a

typical occupant. In most situations, the breathing zone is 3–6 feet (0.9–1.8 meters) above
finished floor height, based on the location of an occupant’s head when seated or standing.
Alternative mounting heights based on the anticipated occupant position in a space may be
considered.

Where possible, place monitors at least 3 feet (0.9 meters) away from doors, windows, air
filters, air supply outlets, exhaust intakes, stoves, printers, and other potential airborne
contaminant sources or sinks. In areas where this is not possible, locate monitors closer to air
returns than air diffusers.

Monitors located in ducts do not meet the requirements.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 353
Monitor specifications
Select indoor air monitoring devices that measure carbon dioxide (CO2), fine particulate matter
(PM2.5), TVOC, temperature, and relative humidity. Monitors must meet the building grade
requirements of RESET Grade B 152 or UL 2095 Grade B.

Hourly reporting
Monitors must report hourly (or higher frequency including 15-minute data for CO2) data to a
remote location that logs pollutant levels over time.

A digital display, or integration with the BMS, is not required to achieve the credit.

Table 1. RESET Grade B monitor specifications

RESET Grade B CO2 PM2.5 TVOC Temperature Relative
monitor humidity
specifications
Data loss 10%
Operating range 0-40 ℃ (32-104 °F)
for Temperature
Operating range 10-80 % RH non-condensing
for Relative
Humidity
Data Output 5 min
Interval
Sampling type Active airflow
Sensor Output 5 ppm 1 μg/m3 4.4 ppb 0.1 ℃ 1 % RH
Resolution
Measuring Range 400-5000 0-500 μg/m3 65-870 ppb 0-40 ℃ 10-80 %
ppm RH
Accuracy* 400–2000 0 - 150 : ±5 65–260 ppb : ±1 ℃ ±8% RH
ppm : ±50 && 15% ±8.7 && 15%
&& 3% 150 - 500 : 260 - 870 :
2000 - 5000 : ±5 && 20% ±8.7 && 20%
±50 && 5%
Performance Required Required Required Required Required
Check and Re-
calibration
*Example for interpreting the accuracy requirement: If a reference monitor is reading 900 ppm, a Grade B monitor’s reading must
read within 50 + (0.03 x 900) = ±77. The Grade B monitor’s reading must be between 823 and 977 ppm

152
RESET Indoor Air Quality Monitors, https://www.reset.build/directory/monitors/type/indoor.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 354
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Path 1 and Completed air quality testing report, including time,
Pre- Path 2 date, testing methods complying with credit
occupancy requirements, results and limits of the tested
air testing contaminants in all locations, and lab accreditation
scope for Path 2 VOCs if applicable.
Evidence of testing locations.

Document confirming substantial completion of

construction, highlighting the date. The intent is to
confirm that construction was complete prior to the
time/date of the air quality testing.
Option 2. All Evidence of monitoring locations and description of
Continuous monitoring approach.
Indoor Air Specifications of building grade air monitors.
Monitoring

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ISO 4224 (iso.org/standard/32229.html)
• EPA Compendium Method IP-3, GB/T 18883-2002
(nepis.epa.gov/Exe/ZyPURL.cgi?Dockey=30003ULE.txt)
• ISO 13964 (iso.org/standard/23528.html)
• ASTM D5149-02 (astm.org/d5149-24.html)
• EPA designated methods for Ozone (epa.gov/system/files/documents/2024-12/amtic-list-
december-2024_final.pdf)
• ISO IEC 17025 (iso.org/ISO-IEC-17025-testing-and-calibration-laboratories.html)
• CDPH Standard Method v1.2-2017
(cdph.ca.gov/Programs/cls/dehl/ehl/Pages/AQS/VOCs.aspx)
• Reset Air Accredited Monitors (reset.build/directory/monitors)
• UL 2905 (shopulstandards.com/ProductDetail.aspx?productId=ULE2905_2_S_20230110)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 355
PROJECT PRIORITIES (PR)
OVERVIEW
The historical Innovation credit category has evolved in LEED v5 to become the Project
Priorities (PR) credit category. The goal is greater flexibility for projects to address their unique
context and priorities, including typology, culture, location, areas of innovation, and individual
performance objectives. Credits can be added to the library as they are developed, enabling an
adaptive and agile response to rapidly evolving industry knowledge, developing technologies,
and emerging innovative solutions. In addition, projects are empowered to pursue
improvements that are most meaningful to their specific goals and circumstances.

For example, the evolution of the building industry over the last 15 years has fostered a need for
more sector-specific sustainability metrics. Additionally, greater adoption of reporting has
prompted real estate organizations to establish targets in areas including decarbonization,
occupant health, and biodiversity. The PR credit category aims to provide recognition for
projects pursuing these goals outside of the established credits in LEED v5.

New metrics and strategies can be continually applied to LEED without waiting for the next
version to debut, allows for a more nimble and dynamic development of credits and compliance
paths in between releases of new rating system versions.

By embracing flexibility and encouraging continuous innovation, the PR credit category ensures
that LEED remains a dynamic tool for advancing sustainability. It empowers project teams to
align their efforts with evolving best practices, sector-specific goals, and emerging global
challenges, ensuring that buildings remain resilient, forward-thinking, and impactful over time.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 356
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Project Priorities Credit and Restoration

PROJECT PRIORITIES
PRc1
1–9 points

INTENT
To promote the achievement of credits that address geographically sensitive or adaptation-
specific environmental, social equity, and public health priorities. To encourage projects to think
creatively to test and accelerate new sustainable building practices and strategies.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1–9
Regional Priority
Project-Type Credits
Exemplary Performance 1–9
Pilot Credits
Innovation Strategies

Achieve any combination of the following for a maximum of 9 points:

Regional priority
Achieve a regional priority credit from USGBC’s Project Priority Library. These credits have
been identified by USGBC as having additional regional importance for the project’s region.

Project-type credits
Achieve a project-type credit from USGBC’s Project Priority Library. These credits have been
identified by USGBC as addressing unique needs for the given adaptation or building
application.

Exemplary performance
Achieve an exemplary performance credit from USGBC’s Project Priority Library. These credits
have been identified by USGBC as going above and beyond an existing LEED v5 prerequisite
or credit in the LEED v5 priority areas of scale, decarbonization, resilience, health, equity,
and/or ecosystems.

Pilot credits
Achieve a pilot credit from USGBC’s Project Priority Library.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 357
Innovative Strategies
Achieve significant, measurable, environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in
the LEED green building rating system.

Identify all of the following:

• The intent of the proposed innovation strategy

• Proposed requirements for compliance
• Proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance
• The design approach or strategies used to meet the requirements

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Teams earn recognition for implementing innovative measures addressing distinct focus areas
in their projects through the Project Priorities credit. This credit offers multiple pathways for
projects to address their respective priorities and go beyond the requirements listed in other
LEED credits. This flexibility enables teams to effectively address the distinct needs of their
projects, fostering innovation and adaptability. Each project can chart its path forward based on
its own goals. 153

Projects prioritize efforts based on their unique contexts. Teams can choose the best credits for
addressing their project’s goals and targets. Some projects may concentrate most of their effort
toward a single priority area, including priorities specific to that project type or to exemplary
performance. Other projects might choose to address different priority areas more uniformly.
For example, an office building in a coastal city prone to hurricanes and flooding might prioritize
enhancing resilience to regional climate challenges with applicable credit pathways focused on
flood mitigation, building safety, and reinforced construction materials and design. Similarly, an
urban mixed-use development comprising residential and commercial spaces might have a
variety of sustainable priorities to address, such as incorporating renewable energy efficiency,
providing indoor environmental quality to building tenants, and promoting methods for active or
cleaner forms of transportation.

To achieve the maximum nine points available, project teams should incorporate as many
credits under each pathway as they prefer, using any combination of project type credits,
exemplary performance credits, regional priorities, innovation strategies, and pilot credit
pathways.

153
Green buildings. (n.d.). PNNL. https://www.pnnl.gov/explainer-articles/green-buildings

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 358
Project type
Achieve a project-type credit from the USGBC’s Project Priority Library. USGBC has identified
these credits as addressing unique needs for the given adaptation or building application.

Example strategies: Project type

A data center project might focus on project-type credits specific to data centers
that address energy efficiency, advanced cooling technologies, and renewable
energy integration.

Exemplary performance
Achieve exemplary performance requirements of an existing LEED v5 credit eligible for
exemplary performance, as specified in USGBC’s Project Priority Library. Exemplary
performance earns points by exceeding the credit requirements or achieving the next
incremental percentage threshold for the credit.

Regional priority
Identify the environmental and/or social equity and/or public health priorities for the project’s
location and achieve LEED credits that address those regional priorities. Regional Priority
credits address geographically specific environmental and/or social priorities for the project’s
region.

Innovation strategies
Achieve innovation credits from the USGBC’s Project Priority Library. Alternatively, achieve
innovation credits by adopting new strategies not addressed in the LEED rating system that
demonstrate reduced environmental impacts, increased decarbonization, and improved social
impacts. Projects will need to submit documentation that identifies the intent of the proposed
innovation credit, proposed requirements for compliance, proposed submittals to demonstrate
compliance, and the design approach or strategies used to meet the requirements.

Pilot credits
Achieve pilot credits from the USGBC’s Project Priority Library. USGBC has identified these
credits to explore new aspects of sustainable design, building, and construction and potentially
include in future additions of the LEED rating system.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 359
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options/ Required for Documentation
types Paths upload
All Project type Description Project type narrative.
Documentation Project type submittals.
Exemplary N/A Exemplary performance credit and threshold are
performance documented in the credit pursuing an EP point.
Regional Description Narrative describing regional priorities.
priority
Innovation Description Narrative describing the innovation, including details.
strategies
Documentation Any documentation, including calculations, submittals,
case studies, etc. that supports the innovation
strategy.
Pilot credit Registration Upload confirmation that the project is registered for a
pilot credit.
Survey Complete and upload the pilot credit survey.
Submittals Complete and upload all pilot credit submittals.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 360
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Project Priorities Credit and Restoration

LEED AP
PRc2
1 point

INTENT
To encourage team integration required by a LEED AP and to streamline the application and certification
process.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Commercial Interiors 1
LEED AP 1

At least 1 principal participant of the project team must be a LEED AP with a specialty
appropriate for the project.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit rewards projects that include a LEED AP with an active credential on the project
team at the time of certification review.

A key design team member must have a LEED AP with LEED AP ID+C: Commercial Interiors
specialty. While all LEED AP credentials provide an understanding of the green building
community and certification requirements, team members with the LEED AP ID+C specialty
have extensive knowledge and experience with the prerequisites and credits for a Commercial
Interiors project.

LEED APs without specialty do not qualify for this credit.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 361
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options/ Required for Documentation
types Paths upload
All All (open-ended inputs) Full name of LEED AP with specialty.
(open-ended inputs) Specialty credential of the LEED AP.

(open-ended inputs) GBCI Credential Number.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 362
APPENDIX I: LEED PLATINUM REQUIREMENTS
EAc1: Electrification
Do not install new on-site combustion equipment in the project scope of work.

EAc2: Enhanced Energy Efficiency

Seven points are required.

EAc3: Renewable Energy

100% of tenant annual site energy consumption is from any combination of Tier 1, Tier 2, and
Tier 3 renewable energy.

MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon

10% reduction in embodied carbon.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 363
ISBN # 979-8-99251 10-1-7 usgbc.org